Home

2003 Catalog - Spec Sheets

1. 2 9 go 5 5 e g y yndu Ji yg gt 6NO 5 Jadunp o el gt go Je z ndu d oa wt a Vc AvC 6NO 8NO nt go P yrk vo amt Ave eo rest al a tr wo 7 d 3 y ndul ted S S d z 1 t N3 A pav st EU 92 Las S jndu E 7 gast odv viva EI a 25 rd 9 yndu i g ao 9 a varavv va 5 ar d go a 4 3nduj yE m 145 82d S3H st ES y 739894 1va go i E 735809 N3 9 yndu vi yin 22 5 Na se gt g1ndino ac 14 6 Indul Sid ki I w gt st T YOLINOW N3 ge f 01 ghee 795 Na 735 091 5 qas 0 938 T es E 2 an go Lys x ramo vaavviva LL ndul D Vv 5 a 2 5 a era T 3 2 529 gt viva lt got Rs o M ZL Ndu viag A i 1 Aves AOL oly dyno Block Diagrams iD e N x 2 2 e 2 5 S z 5 232 3382 835 332 83 832 839 832 823 885 885 28
2. 24V AUX 1 L 9 9 7 GAIN lt ux ANALOG SUPPLY AUX 1 4 z N AUX 1 lt a R Ga ce 5 DIGITAL L SUPPLY INA gt lt INTERNAL MONITOR L 9 A GAIN MONA lt PILOT AUX 2 AUX2 R 1 A BCLK 2 CHANNEL L DIGITAL Di I ee AUDIO PILOTA DIN MONB 4 SPI BOARD PILOT B CONTROL AUX L GAIN AUX 3 N b AUX3 L RES INB AUX 4 L Cam GAIN AUX 4 AUX4 R OF cea NRS90228 Block Diagram 1 ELECTRONIC ce 1 PROGRAMMABLE LIUM U24 FUSE 4 27 1 ANALOG mg SUPPLY 12v DPC 4000 um tv DIGITAL INA i i SUPPLY 24V RS 485 RX485 AUDIO lt TX485 LO m INTERNAL MONITOR d PILOT E 2 PILOTA BCLK 2 CHANNEL DIGITAL WCLK AUDIO DIN dnd MON JP1 250 3 m SPI PILOT B MIC LINE Mic t T RES i 1 rh m vj E NRS 90233 GUN 1 COMPRESSOR LIMITER NRS90234 Block Diagram 1 COMP Block Diagrams U24 Lo 12V gt R3
3. 355 5 sid 0 5 P o m 0 5 B 5 3 T q 5 B i ji 4 5 g D O0 43 6 328 75 2 5 10 7 GARANTIE Das Werk leistet Garantie f r alle nachweisbaren Mate rial und Fertigungsfehler f r die Dauer von 36 Monaten ab Verkauf Garantieleistungen werden nur dann aner kannt wenn g ltige d h vollst ndig ausgef llte Garan tieunterlagen vorliegen Von der Garantie ausgenommen sind alle Sch den die durch falsche oder unsachgem Be Bedienung verur sacht werden Bei Fremdeingriffen oder eigenm chtigen Anderungen erlischt jeder Garantie anspruch WARRANTY The manufacturer s warranty covers all substantial de fects in materials and workmanship for a period of 36 months from the date of purchase Liability claims are accepted solely when a valid cor rectly and completely filled out Warranty Registration form is presented by the original owner of the product The warranty does not cover damage that results from improper or inadequate treatment or maintenance In case of alteration or unauthorized repairs the warranty is automatically terminated J GmbH Hirschberger Ring 45 94315 Straubing Telefon 09421 706 0 Telefax 09421 706 265 Anderungen vorbehalten Subject to change without prior notice Printed in Germany 16 07 2001 358 62
4. 21 Trigger 22 Examples trigger adjustments 22 SEQUENCE p piso bn bine ud e pedis 23 General nce dI Ua b xam een eds 23 Sequence Presets 1 23 Operation menu lt 23 Load ehe 23 23 Stop trigger 23 23 Title Ma 24 DAVE hace ear HR MR Oe er ud rr EP I 24 Sequence 24 List of available step functions in a sequence 25 SH ern hri LP ees 26 General c soU EE ed cce ere a RP eR E 26 Operation menu settings 26 Gonlrast m 26 Backlight MC 26 Headphones ede ber ed ed 26 Mu 26 Password dr t 26 OUIDUIS certos etn e e etd t Moe ee ferta na 26 Bypass xu 34 es Lee SU et ner res 26 SUM GAIN ase uoa eters dA REN dg P 27 Init DMM 4650 20 aa Lu eed de EA E 27 Format Flash icit e
5. Command parameter Function Nop no operation End ending the running sequence Out X Y set Output Y 1 4 of the I O module X A D is set to 1 contact closed X Y clr Output Y 1 4 of the 1 0 module X A D is set to 0 contact open X Y inv Output Y 1 4 of the I O module X A D is inverted Start Axx ends a currently running audio signal immediately and starts the alarm preset xx Gxx ends a currently running audio signal immediately and starts the gong preset xx Mxx ends a currently running audio signal immediately and starts the message xx Ann ends a currently running audio signal immediately and starts the announcement Break ends a currently running audio signal immediately Finish requests the end of the running audio signal Gong alarm fade out messages and announcements are finished recording is stopped DMM xx dB controls of the DMM 4650 audio signal is set to xx dB 0 dB default Sum xx dB control of the input output XLR connection is set to xx dB Bypass set analog bypass relay direct connection XLR input output closed clr analog bypass relay no relay connection XLR input output inv inverted analog bypass relay Audio prl switches the started DMM audio signals to pre listen outputs Pre Listen only sum switches the started DMM audio signals to pre listen and sum outputs default Record Mxx ends a currently running audio signal immediat
6. WALL JUNCTION BOXES RJ 45 RJ 45 VAS Ing 8 PIN7 CN3 7 PEAKER NI 603 79 4 PIN c 6 RED IN p um HITE P4 e DATA al fe f BLACK 3ROWN 5 1 i m lt DATA L ing L LCN3 4 N 2v LI LI CN L IN2 CN9 1 GND Us T CN92 o 24V INT CN3 1 REY RE M m 89021 NF REL 1 geria RED 4 100V s BLACK oos 10 RE MUST BE SEPERA ROM NTRAL WIRE OPTION FOR VARIOUS POWER OUTPUT figure 5 43 circuit diagram for the monitor loudspeaker extension kit NRS 90209 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 47 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Connecting A PTT Microphone Connecting an external PTT microphone to the EXT socket is possible using a special purpose cable not supplied and in accordance to the diagram on this page Therefore it is necessary to change the input sensitivity to microphone level as described below by closing the two soldering bridges A and B The PTT function of the corresponding paging station has to be configured during system configuration via the PROANNOUNCE Designer software Connecting External Audio Signal Sources Connecting CD Players tape decks etc to the EXT Socket is possible using a special purpose cable not supplied and in accordance to the diagram on this page The input sensitivity is factory pre set to a level of 0 dBu The corresponding paging console has to be con
7. Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger S 36 ManMorse 95 off Step Command Parameter Ship alarm Manual Morse key ic Out Aset Description Turns the sound reinforcement system s power on 2 Wt relay A1 and waits for acknowledgment input A1 system 3 Out B4 clr ready When the system is ready the output B4 music program 4 Out B2 set off is opened and B2 B3 mandatory reception E D is being 5 Out B3 set closed Closing the signaling contact alarm signal running 6 Out set switches the audio controls to the alarm signal s priority A T Sum off continuous tone 800 Hz A33 starts when a current is present 8 DMM 5dB at the control input D4 and stops after releasing the key The 9 wt In D4 High sequence runs continuously until itis stopped by a sequence with 10 Start A 33 a higher priority e g S 20 The control of settings and relay 1 wt In D4 Low contacts is taken over by the stop sequence After the stop 19 Break sequence ends the DMM 4650 returns to stand by mode 13 Jump 09 14 End Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger S 37 Telefon 95 off Step Command Parameter Telephone bell 1 Out A1 set Description Turns the sound reinforcemnet system s power on 2 wt In A1 High relay A1 and waits for acknowledgment in
8. 4 Connections 4 1 Connecting the DPM 4000 System Manager DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 7 Use one of the TO PAGING MANAGER sockets not both simultaneously for connecting the DTI 2000 to the DPM 4000 The DTI 2000 needs to be connected to a paging console input DPC IN RJ 45 socket of the DPM 4000 using the supplied 3 5m long interface cable RJ 12 to RJ 45 The following diagrams show the pin assignment of sockets and cables The LED labelled DATA is located next to the sockets This LED lights during active data transmission between DTI 2000 and DPM 4000 System Manager providing indication of a correct connection TO PAGING MANAGER TO PAGING MANAGER 54321 A 00000 mW DATA AUDIO TO DPM AUDIO TO DPM DATA AUDIO FROM DPM AUDIO FROM DPM AUDIO TO DPM DATA A DIO TO DPM AUDIO FROM DPM AUDIO FROM DPM TO PAGING MANAGER connector s pin assignment RJ 12 RJ 45 Interface cable RJ 12 RJ 45 4 2 Connecting Phone Lines or a Telephone set Two phone connectors are located on the rear panel of the DTI 2000 Connect the PHONE LINE socket with the telephone wall outlet The LOOP THRU socket provides a connection facility for an optional telephone set NOTE The LOOP THRU signal is disconnected whenever the DTI 2000 picks up a phone call via the PHONE LINE socket 4 3 Power Supply Insert the supplied power supply unit s round plug into the POWER SUPPLY socke
9. oosen these screws Slightly lift the cover plate at the rear and remove it Now you are able to change the DIP switch settings For installing the cover plate back in place first position the case top in the guidance slots of the case bottom and slide it in as far to the front until it rests in place Put the screws back in place and tighten them Do not forget to tighten the previously loosened screws The following picture shows the positions of DIP switches 5202 and 5203 Internal DIP switch S202 Internal DIP switch S203 DIP switch 202 allows setting the ring count which controls the number of rings before the DTI 2000 automatically picks up and establishes a connection To change the ring count use the switches 1 2 The DTI 2000 is factory pre set to accept an incoming call after one ring SW1 amp SW2 OFF SW1 Sw2 RING COUNT OFF OFF 1 ON OFF 2 OFF ON 4 ON ON 8 Switches 3 8 are not used and should be left in their OFF position The setting of DIP switch S203 determines the timeout of a connection 1 e before the DTI 2000 automatically hangs up This ensures that phone line and PA system are not blocked any longer DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 6 than the specified maximum connection timeout setting allows If the caller does not enter any new selection during the connection timeout the DTI 2000 automatically finishes the momentary
10. D NOMINAL 3dB kS 1 Nominal output voltage AC supply 100 V 70 V 50 V 20V Nominal output voltage battery supply 9 156 V 40 V 16V at 24 V DC Nominal load impedance 100 ohms 50 25 4 ohms Noise A weighted 56 dBu THD lt 1 Frequency response 60 Hz to 20 kHz istortion limited response PA 60 Hz to 5 kHz Crosstalk 80dB at 1 kHz MONITOR output characteristics Electronically balanced MONITOR nominal output voltage 2 8 2 dBu MONITOR nominal load impedance 600 ohms MONITOR frequency response 60 Hz to 20 kHz Operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C Dimensions W x H x D 19 483 mm x 3HU 132 mm x 345 mm Installation depth without external 340 mm connectors Installation depth incl external 400 mm connectors max Weight 22 5 kg Color Anthracite ElectroVoice Architecture amp Engineering accomplish these operation mode changes The output channels must be driven through on board Specifications transformers The amplifier shall be the Dynacord ProAnnounce The remote control amplifier unit shall provide the DPA4411 or DPA4410 following remote monitoring functions e Setting input levels on channels 1 4 e Reading level values of the audio level Available Accessories controls e Setting level offsets via virtual controllers Model _ Cat No Description e Mute function
11. pitch of the sound in Hz min 40Hz max 9999Hz duration for which the sound is heard in sec min 00 015 max 99 995 duration of the pause in sec min 00 015 max 99 995 duty cycle of the square wave in percent min 1 max 50 number of repetitions of the sound min 1x max 9999 0000 corresponds to infinite repetition Values in parenthesis example ship2 A31 f f 800 Hz on time 45 sec 15 sec repeat 2x repeat endless Announcement General Using the announcement function provides the possibility to assign incoming audio signals from the recording inputs Mic line Rec Inp directly to the sum output Especially in stand alone applications this option is particularly useful since it will possibly save one microphone amplifier Starting the function is either performed in the DMM 4650 s operation menu or remotely controlled via a control line For external operation a sequence is provided as factory preset S32 page 42 which is easily adapted according to individual requirements Operation menu announcement Confirming the menu selection announcement with the soft key ok select new input level and the Soft keys yes no are displayed Adjusting the electronic input level control is performed here After recording a short test signal the control s new setting is automatically stored and stays This
12. 34 FACTORY PRESETS lie er ea ae Der 36 Factory presets defaults 36 List of trigger signals 2 4 ren er ea 36 List of factory preset 5 37 List of factory preset gong signals 45 List of factory preset alarm 5 46 APPENDIX e og etude reg ix Ee dca 47 Troubleshooting nisc eee kk AR Ae 47 FAQ s soe spies ciate REOCERGIN OSEE MEN RUE UR 4 48 Examples for alarm texts 50 Block diagram vp e t a la REPE 51 Dimensions ence IE ta e det ROI LAC soi e ord 52 Sp cifications esu DIE 53 ER ERRARE ee 54 Installation instructions The appliance has to be protected against drip or splash water direct sunlight high ambient temperature or direct influence of heat sources high humidity heavy dust deposits extreme vibrations In case the appliance is transported directly from a cold environment to a warm location dampness can precipitate on the inner parts Operating the device is only admissible after waiting for approximately one hour until the aparatus has gained the ambient temperature Should objects or liquids get into the enclosure disconn
13. 5V BLOCK DIAGRAM DCS 409 24V RESET p EN P S p ENSP a p DATA DATA Sy 5 60 7 OUTPUT cow PROAINIROUNGE System tB amp 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 4 5 DCS 412 LOGIC INPUT MODULE The module is to be mounted on the rear of PA system rack shelves or inside of suitable distribution boxes It is for the connection of control lines pushbuttons switches and sensors to be able to evaluate their individual status ON OFF within the PROANNOUNCE system Features e 12 inputs with 2 binding posts each e Polarity of each input is freely acceptable e Each input be used as floating input by disconnecting wire bridges e 2 binding posts provide the voltage source for supplying pushbuttons contacts and sensors e 2 connectors for cascading up to 5 modules e 2 binding posts for the connection of an external supply voltage source Installation Note Mounting the module and establishing the connections are solely admissible when performed in accordance to VDE 0100 and EN 60065 regulations DCS 412 logic input module printed board assemblies need to be grounded at their fixing points e g using a metal bolt Specifications Description Operating voltage Operating current all inputs open DCS 412 logic input module 24 V DC 10 30 2 6 mA 8 2 mA Operating curren
14. 35 14 Specifications For DPA 4411 Accessories 36 14 1 NRS 90206 Pilot Tone Surveillance 36 14 2 NRS 90207 Ground Fault Surveillance 36 14 3 NRS 90208 Input Transformer 36 14 4 NRS 90227 Monitor Output Transformer 36 15 Block Diagrams nr etie re wv eee AE erect Yd 55 15 1 DPA 4411 Power Amplifier 55 15 2 NRS 90206 Pilot Tone Surveillance 56 15 3 NRS 90207 Ground Fault Surveillance 57 22 1 Utilization The amplifier DPA 4411 has been specially designed to ensure durable performance and reliable operation of sound reinforcement systems with several independent loudspeaker lines The DPA 4411 is best suited for call and message transmission installations alert systems and for general music applications in industrial enterprises offices multi function halls and sport arenas schools churches hotels hospitals super markets cruise ships and similar applications 2 Installation Notes When installing or mounting the amplifier it is important to make sure that unhindered air flow from the air inlets on the front to the air outlets on the rear of the appliance is guaranteed see paragraph 10 To maintain EMV disturbance free operation the use of shielded cable
15. 4 2 4 3 3 DIREGT OUTPUT donrn nire gt 23 22 a ala 4 2 4 4 1 4 3 4 4 1 5 4 3 4 4 2 External 1 4 3 5 INITIAL 5 1 5 1 Power On 5 1 5 2 level Settings 44 4 na Dinkel 5 1 5 2 1 Level Adjustment for MIC LINE Inputs 5 1 5 2 2 Level Adjustment for AUX 5 2 6 SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE DRM 4000 6 1 6 1 Using Ducking 6 2 6 2 Limiter Operation 6 2 6 3 Cascading Several Units via MIX IN and SEND 6 2 6 4 Using The Unit Together With The DPM 4000 6 3 7 SOFTWARE EDITOR DRM 4000 7 1 7 1 System Requirements 7 1 7 2 Installation Notes 7 1 7 3 PC DRM 4000 7 1 7 4 Software lt 7 2 4 1 Gen ral i recuerde a e ws bas 7 2 7 4 2 Menus and the
16. MM figure 2 LF cable for coupling two amplifiers DPA 41xx POWER OUTPUT The power output is balanced and off ground potential The output is factory configured for the connection of 100V loudspeaker systems Connection has to be performed by inserting the supplied 5 pole plug into the power output Socket 17 Switching the output voltage to 70V 50V or to low impedance operation 4 ohms is possible using the plug in bridge B411 on the printed board assembly 84187 DPA 4120 respectively 84175 DPA 4140 see also POWER OUTPUT OVERRIDE BYPASS SINGLE CALL COMMON 100n CIRCUIT 1 TO CHASSIS SWITCH 100k figure 3 connection of the power output POWER OUTPUT for 100V 70V or 50V loudspeaker systems If the distance between the amplifier and the loudspeakers exceeds 50 m it is recommended to operate the speaker systems using 100V matching transformers to reduce line attenuation This additionally offers a simple way of distributing the output power capacity In this way it is possible to connect a maximum of as many loudspeaker Systems as it takes until the total power consumption of the entire speaker network equals the power output capacity 29 of 200W connection impedance 50 ohms with the DPA 4120 respectively 400W connection impedance 25 ohms with the DPA 4140 Connection is performed using the 100V output 17 see also figure 3 In a few special cases it is also possible to operate the loudspeak
17. 50 V output 25 Ohm 1000 nF 20 V output 4 Ohm 6250 nF noise voltage A weighted 56 dBu THD at PA NOMINAL lt 196 amplification frequency response 60 Hz 20 kHz 35 distortion limited response PA NOMINAL 1 96 crosstalk between two channels MONITOR output characteristics nominal output voltage nominal load impedance amplification frequency response environmental temperature technical regulations This appliance is in accordance to the following regulations dimensions W x H x D installation depth without external connectors installation depth incl external connectors weight color Extension kits for the DPA 4411 NRS 90206 pilot tone surveillance for four amplifiers NRS 90207 ground fault surveillance for four outputs NRS 90208 input transformer per single input NRS 90227 monitor output transformer 14 Specifications For DPA 4411 Accessories 14 1 NRS 90206 pilot tone surveillance for four amplifiers pilot frequency fault recognition threshold fault message output 14 2 NRS 90207 ground fault surveillance for four outputs input fault message output voltage strength fault recognition threshold 14 3 NRS 90208 input transformer per single input transmission range input impedance idling ratio primary winding resistance secondary winding resistance 14 4 NRS 90227 monitor output transformer transmission range nominal load impedance idl
18. iere E Gu etg 8 Control functions 8 Sequence functions 9 OPERATION OF THE DMM 4650 10 Generallis VAN Gi De utendo ste Us 10 Stand by mode 44 ate a d s x rtt 10 Password user password 10 Password entry operation 10 Priority TUlictlOs ret deci Rae pr eer E De FOOL RUE aes 10 Menu str cture oso PARI Eee er Ead Ue d mes 11 Operation menu diagram 11 MESSAGE Regi DEESSET CC AE ee Ve eee e ah 12 Generali ere ute uU EUN iu Do ect 12 Message number preset e 12 Operation menu message 12 Softkey edt u nenne we eR RORIS 13 ut CREE 5 13 Priority e eine ern eT any des 13 m 13 Release eee s eee ute ee ie ee esi es 13 Fre amp sp ce ns EC exe E RESET MS 13 NO 13 GHECKSUM A co tea redet QUE 13 Delete a ATP Me RU Id a 13 Level adjustment record 14 Remote recording iil cb n RR Os ahs aa EUR PESE 14 Audio quality rec
19. BH 9416 t ra LE wm om OR 25 pen 1409 Utm ct xd MM poon co co M My TO POLER 50 i C tot Te Gals Le Cote ica Y em RM 4 5 82 unser S 2 5 3E gren 9 Os oo 437 figure 8 printed board assembly 84187 in the DPA 4120 showing the NRS 90224 pilot tone amp ground fault surveillance and the bridges B411 and S405 S406 for switching the output voltage inserted 37 NRS 90 224 POUER OUTPUT E RELAY a 2 a 4 ans YEL B4040 8 E 1 E Su T 09484 BLU RED B 94C E E I R451 g ER L ve n f O 9311 8418 8419 8417 1 B42 Bt2B LE 4 S o amp zi B paa RO OW DOC mm ner EE mnd ili mime HOES Wits 3 HERES ini DN mop on wc s Wr SB S29 itus tee 96 235492159 CONTR DISPLAY ao TO 58226 Ni al figure 9 printed board assembly 84175 in the DPA 4140 showing the NRS 90224 pilot tone amp ground fault surveillance and the bridges B411 and S405 S406 for switching the output voltage inserted Checking the pilot tone surveillance function When the NRS 90224 is installed and the power amplif
20. CURRENT Isos F05 T F008 5 T MINUS MAINS OUTPUT 8502 Z30U 50Hz ria LOW VOLTAGE 24 OUTPUT max i Sori CURRENT p CONTROL LZ rJ 014 207 MODE Ha CONTROL 141 da4l MINUS CONTROLLER H vl T g EE ar toe oo to ec E ES TENDENATUBE TEMPERATURE Li all E ONIROE CONTROL ERIS m 88017 BATTERY CHARGER 85254 1222 l 1 BATTERY CONTROL pow ee ee 2 L MONITORING rA 8 HHH 0 1 Bitte COLLECTIVE uu 714 HUE V A METER 87139 BATTERY CONTROL 87131 paren CONTROL i 2 4 BATTERY CONTROL connection The battery drawers are equipped with a exhaustive discharge protection which is controlled by the monitoring module in the charging device DEM 313 The monitoring circuit checks whether the battery s discharge voltage has been reached when the batteries are discharged If the battery voltage is less than 19 5 V measured at the battery poles the consumers are disconnected from the battery and the battery is thus reliably protected from exhaustive discharge Note Ifthe 15 pole plug connector BATTERY CONTROL has not been correctly connected with the charging device or if the battery voltage is lower than the discharge voltage the battery outputs are not live The connection of the
21. The DCS 400 is a 19 base unit with a height of 2 HU It can host a control module as well as several relay modules logic input modules and analog I O modules that are connected via internal backplane e 10 slots for the insertion of DCS modules DCS 401R CONTROL MODULE The module represents the interface for relay boards logic boards analog level I O boards a monitor module and rotary encoders It is inserted into slot 1 the slot all the way on the left on the rear of the DCS 400 rack frame It is controlled from the DPM 4000 via RS 485 remote interface Maximally 12 relay modules DCS 408R DCS 409R DCS 408 DCS 409 5 logic input modules DCS 412R DCS 412 2 analog pcs 4o1n modules DCS 416R DCS 416 2 rotary encoders and 1 monitor module DCS 420 can be connected to a single DCS 401R control module e Two RJ 45 sockets for connecting the DPM 4000 and cascading several DCS 401R or DCS 401 modules Galvanic isolated RS 485 port Connector for 2 rotary encoders Connector for DCS 420 monitor module Monitoring via watchdog circuitry Service functions and testing software for all connected modules e 6 binary switches for setting addresses and selecting service functions e 1 pen tip pushbutton test start e 3LED s red yellow green for test mode and status e maximum amount of 8 modules DCS 401R or DCS 401 can be cascaded Specificat
22. q amp 200200009 2 0 6 2 e 14 16 17 18 19 20 23 24 2 2 Rear Panel 14 24 V power supply These two 6 3mm flat connectors are utilized to supply the DRM 4000 with an operating voltage of 24 V DC Whenever incorporating the DRM 4000 in an intercom system using the system s already existing supply voltage of 24 V is recommended For stand alone operation use the optionally available mains adapter NRS 90257 Make sure to mind the correct polarity 24V Ground when connecting the power supply 15 REMOTE INTERFACE port This port allows retrofitting an optional serial interface RS 232 or RS 485 For further detail please refer to chapter 9 3 How To Install Extensions 16 CONTROL IN These control inputs provide access to eight programmable internal states including signal routing ducking control priority function level settings mute etc Connecting it to ground activates a control input The configuration is factory pre set for using the DRM 4000 in a multitude of applications Utilizing a serial interface optionally available allows configuring the functions of the eight control inputs via PC software according to your personal needs These setting can be saved in the DRM 4000 For details on the pin assignment and an example of how connection is established please refer to chapter 4 4 1 17 External VCA control These control contacts allow the connection of two external potenti
23. Block diagrams citet ea a o eee eo teet iade ee Co Rotae tbe aga 14 1 Power amplifiers DPA 4120 DPA 4140 14 2 NRS 90225 general input 7 14 3 NRS 90222 remote module 2 0 0 0 ee sese sr e etse reser at 69 14 4 NRS 90224 pilot tone and ground fault 70 15 Martahly RUPEE eal nc NOH DERI qu eee 72 1 Utilization The amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 are specially designed for the power consistent and reliable operation of PA systems The DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 are intended to be used in company intercom alarm and background music transmission installations offices and commercial areas congregation and sport centers schools churches hotels hospitals shopping malls and super markets cruise ships and other similar applications 2 Installation When installing the amplifiers it is important to assure that for ventilation reasons the front to rear air circulation is guaranteed for details on 19 case or 19 shelf installation please refer to paragraph 9 To maintain EMC it is necessary that all input output and control lines except for the power cords are shielded Within metal housings or closed rack shelf systems unshielded output and control cabling is allowable Shielding is accomplished by connect
24. YEL B4040 8 E 1 E Su T 09484 BLU RED B 94C E E I R451 g ER L ve n f O 9311 8418 8419 8417 1 B42 Bt2B LE 4 S o amp zi B paa RO OW DOC mm ner EE mnd ili mime HOES Wits 3 HERES ini DN mop on wc s Wr SB S29 itus tee 96 235492159 CONTR DISPLAY ao TO 58226 Ni al figure 9 printed board assembly 84175 in the DPA 4140 showing the NRS 90224 pilot tone amp ground fault surveillance and the bridges B411 and S405 S406 for switching the output voltage inserted Checking the pilot tone surveillance function When the NRS 90224 is installed and the power amplifier is switched on the green READY indicator 7 has to light The testing and reset button TEST 3 serves as a function control for the pilot tone surveillance With the TEST button being engaged the 19 kHz generator is inactive The green READY indicator is off and the READY fault message relay drops Approximately 3 seconds after releasing the TEST button the indicator has to light again This method can also be used to check system configurations with average switching 38 Checking the ground fault surveillance function When the NRS 90224 is installed and the power amplifier is switched on the green READY indicator 7 h
25. 4000 121784 MADE iN GERMANY 81 bee eedem KO US VCA DIRECT OUT LR104684 1 CONTACT 8 CONTACT 7 1 CONTACT 6 1 CONTACT 5 1 CONTACT 4 1 CONTACT 3 1 CONTACT 2 CONTACT 1 As shipped the configurations of the eight control inputs have been factory pre programmed for using the DRM 4000 in a multitude of applications For further detail please refer to chapter 8 and to the additional information sheet DRM 4000 FACTORY CONFIGURATION Employing the optionally available interface boards NRS 90256 for RS 485 or NRS 90258 for RS 232 together with the DRM 4000 Editor software lets you freely configure and store the 8 control inputs according to your personal requirements accessible parameters are routing ducking control muting and VCA Additionally assigning individual priorities to each contact is possible This allows you to establish security relevant settings using the Priority Override function e g routing for alert announcements For an exact description of all possibilities and programming examples please refer to chapter 7 4 Software Description 4 4 2 External VCA Control The two VCA control inputs 17 that are carried out as Phoenix type terminals on the rear panel of the appliance allow accomplishing voltage controlled volume setting of the two output cha
26. The freely programmable CONTROL INPUTS allow switching to other configurations Therefore the corresponding CONTROL INPUT needs to be connected to ground The eight CONTROL INPUTS are factory pre set to the empirically most frequently used configurations In most cases using the configu rations described in the additionally supplied leaflet DRM 4000 FACTORY CONFIGURATION will provide a solution for most common applications For individually programming BASIC CONFIGURATION and CONTROL INPUTS please refer to chapters 6 4 and 7 8 1 CONFIGURING THE DRM 4000 Legend to the table on the DRM 4000 FACTORY CONFIGURATION leaflet BASIC CONFIGURATION CONTACT 1 8 PRIORITY Routing Mute VCA Priority Override Ducking Off Mono A Mono B Dual Stereo No Change No Mute Mute On No Change Enable Disable Ducking Active Auto Ducking No Change The BASIC CONFIGURATION is active when no CONTROL INPUT is connected to ground The BASIC CONFIGURATION always has the lowest priority The DRM 4000 s active configuration accords to the CONTROL INPUT which is connected to ground as long as no other CONTROL INPUT with a higher priority setting is connected to ground Each CONTROL INPUT has an assigned PRIORITY between 1 and 8 PRIORITY 0 the lowest priority level relates to the BASIC CONFIGURATION The CONTROL INPUT with the highest priority setting is the active one PRIORITY 8 represents the h
27. 1 ee 2 4 OUTA f NRS 90227 Hs ANALOG T SUPPLY lo id N l ll 12 N DIGITAL 8V TA SUPPLY dri gt 1 JPLA INTERNAL aj LN aea MONITOR z pois k MUTEA e a 2 CHANNEL D DIGITAL BEU AUDIO WCLK e n DOUT gt R5 za 5 OUTB T 1 ll Lat 6d8 dB Sel 4 BOARD 8 Ra 1j 74 CONTROL JP1 B m LI 55 bores 6dB C MON B res _ T BOARD ID NRS90218 Block Diagram 1 IN1 024 4 a ib IN2 ei 95 DIGITAL 1 SUPPLY IN3 INA INPUT REGISTER INS 6 IN8 Sr common CLOCK OUT2 OUT3 00914 OUTPUT REGISTER OUTS OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 NRS90219 Block Diagram 1 ElectroVoice 12000 Portland Av South Burnsville MN 55337 Phone 952 887 4051 Fax 952 887 0043 www electrovoice com Telex Communications Inc 11 2002 Part Number 38109 xxx Rev A DATA BUS D8 015 CONTROL SPI USA and Canada Only For customer orders contact Customer Service at 800 392 3497 Fax 800 955 6831 DYNACORD PRO ANNOUNCE S Y S T E amp E Key Features e Digital 4x 4 audio mixing matrix with level controls in all inputs and outputs e Parametric 3 band equalizer for all 4 inputs e Delay processor for all 4 outp
28. the emergency battery O and must be shared by F009 7 56 pg B9 Boos the output pins 5 F010 7 010 e O B10 10 010 24U OUTPUT 011 7 5 BO mH B11 1 6 0111 012 7 5 12 1 12 B012 F013 7 5413 1 B013 G FQ 3 814 11 B14 014 lt gt 1N4002 1N4002 1 8021 88177 n DEM 207 89017 ROO ol e F015 21 r B15 1 B15 CHARGE CURRENT i 16 016 amp Fr Bie mm CHARGE CURRENT LM35DZ 016 x en a 017 1 UR 2 el 9 B002 B001 017 4 Em LVR a Q B022 B017 5 gt u amm TEMP ES B017 6 u _ oO a TE P amp NOTE 2 FOI5 15A 016 15 DEM 317A 822011 E 7 54 j gj Ea 002 003 a Bo20 lt 24 OUTPUT 344121 Es B008 c gt F009 7 B9 1 BS Boos Lll Ac 1N4002 1N4002 amp BIO B010 E B 11 11 B11 Boll 0 24U OUTPUT o F02 7 9 812 1 B12 0121 M o BI3 1 2 e FOl 7 5Agi4 j B14 B014 2 al al m 5 a EE ye ne Are a i S S uc SS
29. 4012 i G 12 POWER SUPPLY amp MANAGER X e y ARMING HA OA A anh da 4544 oYMACORD D jiiiiiiiii e DPP 4012 22204522222 un 7 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 1213 14 15 16 covered mains switch mains LED indicator off when the mains switch is not engaged battery LED indicator off when the mains switch is not engaged mains input connector mains fuse input connector mains output connector mains fuse output connector ground lift switch DC output via flat connector 24 V 4 A DPP4004 or 24 V 12 A DPP4012 direct GROUND remote control connector for pin assignment refer to diagram 1 battery fuse input negative pole battery fuse input positive pole battery flat connector input negative pole battery flat connector input 24 VDC DC output via flat connector 24 V 4 A DPP4004 or 24 V 12 A DPP4012 switched DC output via flat connector negative pole DC output via flat connector for the PROMATRIX SYSTEM persistent power supply ventilation louvres airflow in ventilation louvres airflow out DYNACORD PROMATRIX SYSTEM 1 Utilization The switch mode power supply rack units DPP4004 4012 are meant for the incorporation into 19 rack shelf systems and serve to supply PA system installa
30. 8 3 NRS 90208 input transformer for the floating balanced 8 4 NRS 90227 output transformer for the floating balanced monitor output 8 5 NRS 90224 pilot tone and ground fault 8 5 1 Pilot tone survelllamnce uice ite etti Hp lb 8 5 2 Ground fault surveillance anna iii 19 case and 19 rack shelf system Ground lift switch CIRCUIT LTO CHASSIS 5 Power amplifier specifications 12 1 DPA 4120 power amplifier 200 12 2 4140 power amplifier 400 WW iiec ibo treo tette Extension Specifications cete etg Tre stb 13 1 NRS 90225 general input 13 2 5 90222 remote 9 13 3 NRS 90208 input transformer for floating balanced 13 4 NRS 90227 output transformer for floating balanced monitor 13 5 NRS 90224 pilot tone and ground fault
31. 1 switch pushbutton complete with label field and cover 1 connection cord 4 pole SWITCH to PUSHBUTTON figure 5 38 optional pushbutton switch Please make sure to solder the cables after the switch has been installed Otherwise it is virtually impossible to slide the counter nut over the body of the switch Adjust the switch and tighten it using the supplied milled nut Connect the cables and the resistor according to the circuit diagram on this page Please mind the sequence in which you connect the flat wire cables The two outside wires 1 rt and 4 gr need to be soldered to the contacts of the lamp The two inner wires 2 gr and 3 gr need to be soldered to contacts 1 and 2 of the switch Polarity of either pair of wires is not critical Afterwards you have to connect the 4 pole female plug to the corresponding OPTION 1 or OPTION 2 terminal strip on the basic printed board assembly Re attach the bottom plate Software configuration with the PROANNOUNCE Designer figure 5 39 circuit diagram pushbutton switch 5 44 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Optional Key lock Switch NRS 90231 The paging consoles employ two empty slots for the incorporation of optional alarm keys or key locked switches also refer to chapter 5 2 3 Control Panel DPC 4550 For retrofitting an additional key lock switch you should only use the NRS 90231 extension kit Bri
32. IMPORTANT SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS 1 Security regulations as stated in the EN 60065 VDE 0860 IEC 65 and the CSA E65 94 have to be obeyed when servicing the appliance 2 Use of a mains separator transformer is mandatory during maintenance while the appliance is opened needs to be operated and is connected to the mains 3 Switch off the power before retrofitting any extensions changing the mains voltage or the output voltage 4 The minimum distance between parts carrying mains voltage and any accessible metal piece metal enclosure respectively between the mains poles has to be 3 mm and needs to be minded at all times The minimum distance between parts carrying mains voltage and any switches or breakers that are not connected to the mains secondary parts has to be 6 mm and needs to be minded at all times 5 Replacing special components that are marked in the circuit diagram using the security symbol Note is only permissible when using original parts 6 Altering the circuitry without prior consent or advice is not legitimate 7 Any work security regulations that are applicable at the location where the appliance is being serviced have to be strictly obeyed This applies also to any regulations about the work place itself 8 All instructions concerning the handling of MOS circuits have to be observed NOTE N SAFETY COMPONENT HAS TO BE REPLACED WITH ORIGINAL PART ONLY DYNACORD PROMATRIX SYSTEM DYNACORD
33. When using the DCS 420 PROANNOUNCE MONITOR MANAGER easy programming and operating is available See also chapter 5 4 7 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 3 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 3 9 Macros Macro is defined as the combination of several commands functions and their parameters in an internal consecutive sequence For example a gong signal with specific volume and priority settings has to be transmitted in different calling zones while simultaneously activating a control output In that case the macro consists of the functions gong and control with the parameters gong type volume setting priority number calling zone numbers and the type and id number of the control output It is possible to initiate a macro via the special function keys on the paging consoles or to trigger it via control input It is also possible to combine a macro with the internal clock or calendar The PROANNOUNCE system provides a number of pre programmed macros where only individual parameters still have to be entered Additionally it is possible to combine several macros in a sequence Using pre defined macros and sequences lets you create new user specified and application related macros which basically are capable of managing any control function imaginable A total of up to 250 user macros can be programmed 3 10 Interfaces Besides its control inputs and control outputs the PROANNOUNCE system provides additional interface ports The connec
34. List of available gong parameters Type four stroke three stroke attack release start 2 bar2 attack2 release2 start 3 bar3 attack3 release3 start 4 bar4 attack4 release4 first gong stroke A highest sound B C to D deepest sound attack rate from 00ms hard to 99ms soft fading sound from XXL long several seconds XL L M S XS XXS short approx 1sec start delay of the second gong stroke in seconds min 00 0s max 99 9s second gong stroke A highest sound B C to D deepest sound attack rate from 00ms hard to 99ms soft fading sound from XXL long several seconds XL L M S XS XXS short approx 1sec start delay between second and third gong stroke in seconds min 00 05 max 99 95 third gong stroke A highest sound B C to D deepest sound attack rate from 00ms hard to 99ms soft fading sound from XXL long several seconds XL L M S XS XXS short approx 1sec start delay between third and fourth gong stroke in seconds min 00 0s max 99 9s fourth gong stroke A highest sound B C to D deepest sound attack rate from 00ms hard to 99ms soft fading sound from XXL long several seconds XL L M S XS XXS short approx 1sec Type two stroke one stroke attack release start 2 bar2 attack2 release2 repetition rep del first gong stroke A highest sound B C to D deepest sound attack rate from 00ms
35. PORT A PORT B relay contact relay contact relay contact relay contact relay contact relay contact relay contact relay contact DIN alarm text sequence stalic relay contact INP At a 24V release EX AZ ne general stop pulse ot alarm text pulse DIN alarm static 4 tone gong pulse pre gong static alarm signal running pre gong running mandatory relay E fault O O 19 e INP B4 A 24V 0 4 0 4 O O 9 5 a sytem on OUT A2 alarm text running OUT A4 4 gong running OUT B2 OUT B3 mandatory relay D OUT B4 program off I t OUT B1 INP B2 el eo INP B3 OUT INP A4 OUT A1 Qee DIN alarm pulse 24V t 10 1 m o o I G e O Ga G 14 oe oe INPUTS All input signals must be applied longer than 200 msec in order to be securely recognized Modifying this default is possible in the menu Trigger A1 Release signal Input for re confirmation signal whether the unit power amplifiers is ready A2 General Stop Input impulse interrupts all currently running sequences Alarm text Input impulse for playback alarm message MOO A4 DIN alarm Input impulse for infinite DIN alarm siren 1200 Hz 500 Hz B1 DIN alarm Key pressed
36. PROMATRIX System Indications The following table provides an overview of the most important LED indications LED Status Description selection LED area or group not selected not for DPC 4106 ae green area or group selected special function activated direct call activated ALL LED collective call not selected not for DPC 4106 E green collective call pre selected direct collective call activated BUSY LED system not busy clear for call lights green during own message green slowly blinking low priority paging station launches a call in selected areas interruption on cost of the momentary microphone terminal is possible green vastly blinking system is busy with a higher priority transmission message gong alarm interruption is not possible already launched call is interrupted by events with higher priority setting GONG LED no gong signal started s green gong signal in progress manually started or pre programmed pre gong signal green blinking gong signal in progress ignited from another source or time controlled system is OFF stand by mode lights green system is ON and ready for operation initialization PROGRAM LED OFF paging station is in message mode green vastly blinking paging station is in setup mode TEXT LED green blinking text message in progress launched from another source or time controlled alarm signal not launched lights red alarm signal has been launch
37. WARNING REDUCE THE RISK OF FRE OR ELECTRIC SHOOK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLANCE TO RAIN OR MOSTURE oS AVIS iisQu CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR EEE MEME 713 LN E D C 40R0UNDED NO USER BBFNICRABLE PARTS MAIOS REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED Peg s i cms 8 ES pce 1 15 12 1 DC INPUT 24 V 9 ROUTING switch for INPUT 1 4 2 POWER ON switch 10 Device address label field 3 AC MAINS INPUT connector 11 ADDRESS selector switch 4 Mains fuse 12 POWER OUTPUT 5 VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch 13 Device output configuration label field 6 REMOTE CONTROL connectors 14 Airoutlets 7 STATUS indicator 15 CIRCUIT GROUND TO CHASSIS GROUND SWITCH 8 INPUT connectors 1 4 e USA and Canada Only For customer orders contact FleclroVoice Customer Service at 800 362 5407 Fax 80096 8837 12000 Portland Av South Burnsville MN 55337 Phone 952 887 4051 Fax 952 887 0043 www electrovoice com Telex Communications Inc 11 2002 Part Number 38109 xxx Rev A DYNACOHD DPC4000 Series PRO ANNOUNCE Microprocessor Controlled Paging Stations Y E amp E Key Features All functions are processor controlled e Configuration data stored in non volatile flash memory Condenser microphone including pre amplifier and compressor limiter Programmable key assi
38. Customer Service at 800 392 3497 Fax 800 955 6831 12000 Portland Av South Burnsville MN 55337 Phone 952 887 4051 Fax 952 887 0043 www electrovoice com Telex Communications Inc 11 2002 Part Number 38109 xxx Rev A DYNACORD PRO ANNOUNCE S Y S T E amp E Key Features Self monitoring with fault message output e Password protection over several levels e RS 232 interface for data backup and servicing purposes e Integrated service and maintenance program software e Expandable flash memory e Direct digital recording and reproduction of at least 100 different sound and speech signals e Maximum recording time up to 16 minutes e Maximum bandwidth is 16 kHz e 15 acoustical alarm signals and 6 different gong signals General Description The DMM 4650 is a signal processor capable of audio recording and playback as well as audio signal generation such as alarms The main application is for PA racks but stand alone applications are possible as well The audio signals can consist of alarm gong messages and also random combinations These programs were created by Dynacord and stored as presets The audio quality of the messages can be selected depending on memory extension and different user requirements With maximum memory extension a total recording time of 16 minutes is possible Password protection is provided The operation is easy like cassette recorders or CD players A computer int
39. DPC 4510 8 function keys 10 selection keys alarm key DPC 4520 8 function keys 20 selection keys alarm key DPC 4530 8 function keys 30 selection keys alarm key DPC 4550 8 function keys 50 selection keys alarm key DPC 4350 paging console extension with 50 selection keys All paging consoles include the following common features e all functions are processor controlled e configuration data is stored in non volatile FLASH RAM e condenser microphone with pre amplifier and compressor limiter circuitry e freely programmable key assignment e easy key labeling through label strips and MS WORD templates e analog circuitry surveillance via integrated pilot tone generator e processor surveillance via watchdog function e line surveillance via pilot tone and polling functions e covered alarm key not with DPC 4106 e additional alarm keys or key locked switches can be optionally retrofitted e connection of an external PTT microphone or audio source e piezo buzzer for acoustical alerts e optional loudspeaker can be retrofitted setup mode allows direct parameter setting at the paging station e two line LC display All paging consoles are processor controlled and extensive monitoring functions are provided The watchdog function monitors the processor system while a switchable pilot tone generator monitors the audio section Additionally the internal supply voltage is constantly measured When it falls below a critical t
40. controlled paging stations stereo line level input Sources and balanced mic line level input sources Block Diagram The unit shall also be able to be expanded through the use of an expansion accessory The unit shall be the Dynacord ProAnnounce DPM4000 Available Accessories Model Cat No Description NRS90215 121665 Input module 2 DPC NRS90216 121666 Input module mc line aux NRS90217 121667 Input module 2 mic line NRS90228 121680 Input module 2 aux NRS90234 121736 Input module mic line DPC NRS90218 121668 Output module XLR line NRS90205 121648 Message Memory module NRS90227 121679 Output transformer NRS90208 121641 Input transformer Ordering Information Model Cat No Description DPM4000 121795 4x4 Digital Matrix CPU AUDIO MATRIX 4x4 INPUT FILTERS OUTPUT DELAYS CHIME ALARM B AUX1 SIGNAL GENERATOR INA MESSAGE RECORDER LINE OUTA B AUX2 SYSTEM TIMER SLOT2 SATENDAR SLOT 4 MS UT CONTROL SUPERVISION RIS POWER MANAGEMENT B INB MIC LINE LINE OUTB m INA Pag Console LINE OUTA SLOT 1 SLOT 3 NRS 90215 NRS 90218 m IN B Pag Console LINE OUT B Eleclrol oice 12000 Portland Av South Burnsville MN 55337 Phone 952 887 4051 Fax 952 887 0043 www electrovoice com Telex Communications Inc 11 2002 Part Number 38109 xxx Rev A B DC INPUT 24V OPTION PORT RS 232 PC INTERFACE INTERFACE 24V i DC
41. latched stores the start command and tries to initiate the selected sequence continuously until its launch has been successful A new triggering of this input is stored only after completion of the sequence All16 control inputs are separately stored and the sequences are launched in the succession of their priorities 5 The sequence which is supposed to be started with this control line can be selected with the cursor keys 6 Pressing the soft key set stores the above mentioned settings and actives them immediately 21 Trigger recognition The level of the control inputs are periodically monitored by the processor The sampling time Ts sample rate is typically Ts typ 30 msec The maximum monitor interval can be set to Ts max 100 msec Thus shorter impulses spikes or quick AC voltages are recognized inaccurate or with a delay undersampling The bi polar control inputs evaluate both half waves of AC voltages Examples for trigger settings Slart Slop Ts sample delay Ts typ 30 msec Ts min 0 msec Ts max 100 msec If the control input is ON for at least 0 6 seconds Ts max and no other sequence with a higher priority is currently running the sequence 23 is started once The end of the starting impulse is arbitrary L 00 1s ste S21 Sequence 21 is initiated when the control input is without power for at least 0 2 seconds and no other sequence with a higher priority is currently running Since the control
42. 100 3 figure block diagram input channel A INPUT ROUTING DUAL STEREO A m HHL PARALLEL MONO Power Outputs A amp B CHANNEL fi 813426071 354 701 UO3YSBMES 1 6 100 L 1 mesO meo OO oO otic Oo 7 m ise 4 Se OO OOOO 2 ass OJ O OJFO2 oT cies 0 et 1 zr 1 18k 1260 8 eto d 4 Level Control dB scaled rotary controls for adjusting the power amplifier s overall ampli fication This control should be positioned between the 0 dB and the 6 dB marks to prevent distortion in source devices The labeling indicates the actual attenuation applied to the internal specified factor of amplification Input Routing If the switch is set to parallel mono the input connectors CHANNEL A and CHANNEL B are electrically linked for direct parallel operation With only a single audio signal source connected both channels are driven while their volume levels are still individually controlled via the level controls A and B If the switch is set to its dual stereo position channels A and B are separately amplified two channel or stereo
43. 2 483 x 88 x 337 mm 340 mm 410 mm incl connectors 6 4 kg NRS 90208 input transformer for 1 monitor input order no 121 641 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 7 5 8 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 1 5 2 Channel Paging Station Module NRS 90215 This 2 channel audio input module is meant for the DPM PCI connection of DPC 4000 Series paging consoles Each of the two input channels provide RJ 45 sockets allowing the connection of up to 4 paging stations plus paging station extensions per input The microphone terminals DPC 4000 IN are interconnected via 6 conductor parallel cables The L module can be installed in slot 1 and slot 2 Next to the electronically balanced audio input each input connector provides a serial RS 485 interface port and the power supply connection for the paging stations see also pin assignment of the RJ 45 connector The paging stations power supply employs electronic DPC 4000 IN programmable fuse through which the maximum output L current can be matched to meet actual system accommodations This prevents the entire installation from malfunction in case of short circuit occurring in a single paging station only T T Input channels can be switched separately onto the monitor bus and you can monitor the audio signal via headphones or loudspeaker either which is connected to the monitor output Automatic pilot tone surveillance of the entire input stage is inte
44. 7 2 7 4 3 Basic 7 3 7 4 4 7 5 7 4 5 Online Control 5 7 6 8 CONFIGURING THE DRM 4000 8 1 9 INTERNAL SETTINGS EXTENSIONS 9 1 9 1 Internal Configuration 9 1 Lo C t Filte enn I i ee aS 9 2 9 12 DIREC TOUTPUTS i as a ame ER KAA 9 2 9 1 3 AUX Sensitivity Selection 9 3 9 2 Limiter 5 9 3 9 3 How to install 5 5 9 4 9 3 1 How to install the Input Transformer NRS 90233 9 4 9 3 2 How to install the Output Transformer NRS 90227 9 5 9 3 3 How to install Interface Boards 9 6 10 SPEGIFIGATIONS ea leet RR DEA Bag 10 1 10 1 Specifications 10 1 10 2 User Configuration 10 2 10 9 Block Diagram aia ve i hs ee ee Hu 10 4 10 4 RS 232 Interface Programmer s 10 5 10 5 Dimensionsa oen rr RP EEG Mp E ere 10 7 10 5 Warranty ad era din Rn 10 8 INTRODUCTION 1 INTRODUCTION First of all
45. 8 INPUT connector 2 POWER ON switch 9 INPUT level 3 AC MAINS INPUT connector 10 POWER OUTPUT 4 Mains fuse 11 Device output configuration label field 5 VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch 12 Air outlets 6 REMOTE CONTROL connectors 13 CIRCUIT GROUND TO CHASSIS GROUND SWITCH 7 Signal pass thru ElechoVoice 12000 Portland Av South Burnsville MN 55337 Phone 952 887 4051 Fax 952 887 0043 www electrovoice com Telex Communications Inc 11 2002 Part Number 38109 xxx Rev A USA and Canada Only For customer orders contact Customer Service at 800 392 3497 Fax 800 955 6831 DYNACORD PRO ANNOUNCE S Y S E amp E Key Features e Configurable as a 2x200 2x100 amp 1x200 or 4x100 amplifier Operation with 70V loudspeaker networks or 4 8 ohms low impedance systems Outputs protected against idling short circuits over temp and load variations e Integrated Remote Module for control and monitoring DPA4411 only Routing switch for parallel operation of the amplifier s inputs e Integrated Standby Power Supply Remote Start function for mains and battery operation with inrush current limiter protection Power on noise attenuation e Status LED indicators e LED meters with CLIP indication e Active temperature controlled ventilation General Description The DPA4410 11 amplifiers have been specially designed to ensure durable performance and reliable operation of sound reinforcement systems with
46. A1 set Description Turns the sound reinforcement system on relay A1 2 wt In A1 High and waits for acknowledgment input A1 system ready When 3 Out B4 clr the system is ready the output B4 music program off is opened 4 Out B2 set and B2 B3 mandatory reception E D is closed After closing 5 Out B3 set the signaling contact A2 alarm text running the audio controls 6 Out A2 set are set to alarm text priority The alarm text MOO is given out 7 Sum off After the transmission of the message is completed the se 8 DMM 2dB quence is finished and the device returns to the stand by mode 9 Start M 00 i e all line and relay contact settings re enter the status prior to 10 wt Audio the start of the sequence 11 End Sequence Nummer 522 Title Priority Stopp trigger DIN Alrm 93 off Step Command Parameter 1 Out A1 set 2 wt In A1 High 3 Out B4 clr 4 Out B2 set 5 Out B3 set 6 Out set 7 off 8 DMM 5dB 9 Start A20 10 wt Audio 11 End Start continuous DIN alarm siren 1200 Hz 500 Hz per second Description Turns the sound reinforcement system on relay A1 and waits for acknowledgment input A1 system ready When the system is ready the output B4 music program off is opened and B2 B3 mandatory reception E D is closed After closing the signaling contact A3 alarm signal
47. B1 high 200 1 dyn S23 start DIN alarm high start low stop B2 high 200 1 dyn S24 start alarm text sequence high start low stop B3 high 200 1 dyn S25 4 tone gong pulse trigger B4 high 200 1 dyn S26 Pre gong 2 tone pulse trigger C1 high 200 1 dyn S27 start message MO1 pulse trigger C2 high 500 1 dyn S28 start message 02 pulse trigger C3 high 200 1 dyn S29 remote recording MO1 pulse trigger first pulse start second pulse stop C4 high gt 00 1 dyn S30 remote recording MO2 pulse trigger first pulse start second pulse stop D1 high 500 1 dyn S31 start DIN alarm with announcement key at D2 pulse trigger D2 Off announcement in S31 high announcement low alarm D3 high 200 1 dyn S32 start announcement DMM 4650 Mic high start low stop D4 high gt 00 1 dyn S36 Morse key 36 List of factory preset sequences S 20 Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger stop all 99 off Step Command Parameter 1 Break 2 End Stops all running sequences Description Stops all running sequences with low priorities all factory presets Upon completion tne DMM 4650 returns to the stand by mode Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger S21 Alarmtxt 97 off Step Command Parameter Start alarm text message 00 once 1
48. Contacts 9 fields as well show the actual active status of the DRM 4000 The mixer xl behaves as if a control input had been set via hardware As long as the _Contact 9 DRM 4000 s test mode is active actually setting control inputs via Contact 9 hardware does not show any effect When canceling the RS 232 con E nection between computer and DRM 4000 automatically cancels the Contact test mode after approximately 3seconds The DRM 4000 returns to normal operation mode Remotely controlling the DRM 4000 is independent of the fact whether View Status or Test has been activated or not as long as the RS 232 connection is active 7 6 CONFIGURING THE DRM 4000 8 CONFIGURING THE DRM 4000 The DRM 4000 s BASIC CONFIGURATION is active whenever no CONTROL INPUT is connected to ground The DRM 4000 s factory pre set BASIC CONFIGURATION is 8 in 2 mixer The following example shows the wiring for a typical 8 in 2 mixer application of the DRM 4000 f F1 oo TUNER Goal gt EH Re Ur i f i 24V NRS 90257 B RIGHT Too mee D E u
49. Control inputs Control outputs Dimensions Weight Retrofitting kits Port Cor D Memory extension Output transformer Input transformer Input bal Input unbal Line Input REC Input Mic INPUT Output Pre Output Phones Output Pre Output Phones Output bal Output unbal Pre Output Phones Input Output Mic Input Others Input Output Message Input Output Message AD DA converter DSP internal 35kHz Ein lt 5V Low Ein gt 10V High floating relay contacts 20kOhm 10kOhm 20kOhm 20kOhm 1 4kOhm 0 775V OdBu 3 2V 12dBu 3 2V 12dBu 3 8V 14dBu 9V 21dBu 9V 21dBu 136 Ohm 68 Ohm 220 Ohm 220 Ohm 20Hz 20kHz 3 0dB 20Hz 16kHz 18 3dB 20Hz 16kHz 0 3dB gt 108dB A weighted gt 90dB A weighted lt 0 03 at 1kHz lt 0 05 at 1kHz 16 bit linear 24 bit 1A at 24VDC 483 X 43 6 X 225 W x H x D 19in 1HU 4kg NRS 90204 4 control inputs and outputs NRS 90205 message memory extension NRS 90210 NRS 90211 WARRANTY The factory grants warranty covering all verifiable material and manufacturing faults for a period of 36 months from the original date of purchase on Warranty claims will only be upheld if valid i e fully completed warranty forms are submitted This warranty shall not cover damage caused by incorrect or improper operation Any claim to warranty shall become null and void in the event of modifications to the equipment b
50. MIC LINE 1 or 2 is connected through while the signals of all other channels e g background music are attenuated 10 Control MASTER A B These volume controls of the two main outputs Master A and B allow matching the output level of the DRM 4000 to the input level of consecutive equipment e g power amps or the DPM 4000 In this way they are used to set the overall volume Generally setting the controls to their center position 0 dB will provide good results If a different output level is needed amplifying the signal by 6 dB clockwise margin or attenuating the signal by any amount counterclockwise margin is possible 11 LED chain Meters A B The two 5 segment LED chains indicate the actual audio signal level at the MASTER outputs A and B steps of 10 dB within an indication range of 40 dB the indicators signal the individual levels at the outputs OUT A and OUT B in dBu To prevent the occurrence of distortion set the output levels of the DRM 4000 So that at the highest signal peaks the top LED s of the chains are not lit 20 dBu 12 POWER switch Use this switch to switch the power of the DRM4000 on or off 13 ON LED The ON LED lights when the DRM4000 s power is switched on 2 2 CONTROLS AND CONNECTIONS 15 21 22 26 i BYNAGORD DRM 4000 OO 2
51. OUTPUTS E E T 5 1 POWER OUTPUT ised Lm 5 2 POWER OUTPUT for 100V 70V or 50V loudspeaker 5 3 SINGLE CALL and obligatory reception relays OVERRIDE 5 5 4 POWER OUTPUT for low impedance loudspeaker 5 5 MONITOR er Rab nn Nie 5 6 REMOTE CONTROL connector only NRS 90225 nee ee ehe 6 1 STANDBY indiCaltor iic oi em ta Peel hrsg anne ns DURER e LEER A ESO ung 6 2 READY IRndICalOrz ue uen a fret tete Foto 6 3 PROTEGT indiCalOt nu s tert over E eene th ce hh er Ed aa ER E a e a Dev ER ewe 6 4 GROUND FAU TNA A O nn emn 6 5 Aussteuerungskontrolle und Switching the output voltage cece ee Enlianced application field E HER ease desta DARE 8 1 General input module NRS 90225 8 2 Remote module NAS 90222 2 2 rue ete an det Lon
52. Pmains VA apparent power Umains lmains Pmains W true power battery operation 138 20 118 298 100 198 415 200 215 Pout W output power P W leakage power 24 V DC 10 30 stand by idling normal operation 10 dB standard conditions initial current inrush battery Pi W input power Ug Ig Pout W output power P W leakage power features of the input nominal input level nominal input impedance features of the power output nominal output capacity during mains operation nominal load impedance frequency response distortion at 1 KHz and nominal output power interfering voltage A features of the monitor output nominal output voltage nominal load impedance 43 com A 131 electronically balanced 775 mV 0 dBu gt 10 k ohms balanced floating 200 W according to IEC 268 3 50 ohms 100V 25 ohms 70 V 12 5 ohms 50 V or 4 ohms 28 V 60 Hz 20 kHz lt 196 lt 1 2 mV 56 dBu electronically balanced 2 V 8 2 dBu 600 ohms ambient temperature range dimensions W x H x D depth with without connections weight without extensions finish 12 2 DPA 4140 power amplifier 400 W power supply mains operation mains frequency security class 45 92 40 483 x 132 x 345 mm max 400 mm max 340 mm 13 2 kg anthracite 115 V 230 V AC 10 50 60 Hz idling normal operation 10 dB alarm 3 dB stand
53. Selects Zone 2 3 or 03 SELECTION Zone5 0 Selects Zone 5 fe o ram emer 9 or 09 SELECTION Group2 O Selects group 2 SELECTION Group5 O Selects group 5 SELECTION ALL groups 0 Selects all zones groups quc c qo cu ucc es EMPTY 0 JO 7 hu idu ue du eec 1 EMPTY 0 0 X jNofumcin Group 3 Text 2 Starts text No 2 in group 3 with priority 4 Asa Ze 1 TEXT All groups Text 3 Starts text No 3 in all zones with priority 7 DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 12 TALK All groups Starts an announcement in all zones with S 9 ug MACRO Triggers macro 15 MACRO 6 0 Triggers macro No 16 I FEE 99 CLEAR o O Clears the actual zone group selection 40 40 01 5613 which have been launched from the DTI 2000 o que zone s with priority 3 Setting the DTI 2000 s password codes is possible in the general paging console dialog The two access levels have individual passwords The default password settings are 111 3 digit for user level 1 and 2222 4 digit for expert level 2 Access level 1 only allows zone group selection and making announcements through the use of the asterisk key while the expert level 2 provides access to all functions announcements text message playback macros stop etc Password protect
54. The soft keys are used to shift between the upper and the lower character case while spc inserts a blank character After pressing the EXIT key previous menu level the question store yes no appears on the display Acknowledging this question lets you save your new settings in a user preset Priority Confirming Priority with the soft key ok the priority number of the selected gong preset gets displayed Using the cursor keys the priority number can be set starting from 00 up to the user priority A higher priority protects against unauthorized alteration of this preset by users with lower priority level All factory presets are provided with a priority of 00 because they cannot be overwritten anyway This offers any user the possibility to use them as prototype sequences After pressing the EXIT key one menu level down the question store yes no appears on the display Acknowledging this question lets you save your new settings in a user preset Save Confirming save with the soft key ok the currently selected gong number gets displayed Using the cursor keys the desired gong number can be entered Storing a preset has to be confirmed with the soft key yes With save all modifications in the above mentioned menu items are saved into the selected user preset Thus individually saving the parameters is not necessary since they remain in memory until another gong is being loaded
55. The DPM 4000 s most important characteristics are listed below 4 audio inputs universally configurable connection of up to 16 paging consoles 4 audio outputs Digital 4 x 4 audio mixing matrix with volume controls in all inputs and outputs Parametric 3 band equalizer for all 4 inputs Delay processor for all 4 outputs Multi chime gong signal Alarm generator Signal generator and evaluation used for pilot tone surveillance Voice message recording and playback optional Floating control inputs with freely definable functions Floating control outputs for general control purposes with freely definable functions Linking of internal and external control inputs and outputs System clock with DCF 77 receiver for radio controlled operation optional Monitor output to control slave clocks via pole change impulse Monitoring facility for all inputs and outputs as well as DPA 4000 Series power amplifiers and other external audio sources Integrated monitoring amplifier with loudspeaker respectively headphones connector RS 485 remote interface for DPA 4000 Series power amplifiers and the DCS 400 control system RS 232 interface for PC connection Optional RS 485 interface for network based operation of several DPM 4000 Electronically programmable fuses for all power supply outputs READY relay for remote indication of malfunctions Power management of the entire PROANNOUNCE system optional Surveillance and protocol of all internal and external
56. and metering instrument Configuration and operation is accomplished through the DPM 4000 central unit 2 2 5 DPP 4000 Power Supply Units Especially designed for it the DPP 4000 Series power supply units optimally match the PROANNOUNCE system guaranteeing trouble free installation and operation The power supplies are stand alone units which offers the possibility to utilize them to feed other equipment with 24 V supply voltage as long as all valid specifications and applicable instructions for the installation are being observed 24 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS 2 3 Operation Location The appliances are exclusively meant for the installation in 19 rack shelf systems while the modules can also be installed in an appropriate wall junction box When installing the system the safety regulations that are mentioned in chapter 2 1 have to be observed It is particularly important that the following environmental conditions are provided ambient temperature at the installation site which also includes inside the rack shelf system is not to exceed 40 C If necessary the rack shelf system has to be supplied with forced ventilation or air conditioning Heat sources like power amplifiers etc especially when they are mounted underneath the appliance can increase the ambient temperature to an exceeding degree although the average temperature within the rack shelf system may stay below
57. ot r3 C T081NOO FL wounvnd PILON Ave 10 4 SPECIFICATIONS 10 4 RS 232 Interface Programmer s Instructions Controlling the DRM 4000 from a media control desk or from an intercom system is possible via the serial RS 232 interface NRS 90258 121 790 using simple ASCII commands The serial RS 232 interface is set to a baud rate of 19200 with 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity Xon Xoff protocol The string DRM4000 command mode entered is outputted after switching the power on and upon initialization The ASCII commands are organized in a tree structure and are separated from each other by slashes Single commands can be entered using uppercase or lowercase letters Always leave a space between ASCII commands and values or control words respectively Reading out parameters is initiated by entering an interrogation mark A command line needs to be terminated with a Carriage Return Line Feed CRLF command In the following please find the descriptions of appropriate commands to be used in a variety of applications 10 4 1 Switching Contacts Via Software The factory pre set configuration of the DRM 4000 refer to the supplied leaflet DRM 4000 FACTORY CONFIGURATION can be used for most applications Next to manually switching contacts on the hardware itself switching contacts via the following software commands is possible as well In case the DRM 4000 FACTORY CONFIGURATION do
58. provide password protection It shall provide acknowledgement signals and control via DTMF tones It shall automatically hang up after a call is completed The interface shall be configurable for various telephone systems The unit shall be the DTI 2000 telephone interface Block Diagram 5201 5203 SEIZE DROP ADDRESS TIMEOUT 1 Telephone Hybrid amp DTMF Encoder Decoder Meter A 1 gt AUDIO AUDIO Dimension Drawings 7 99v 8 19V 203 un 208 1 73V 44 up Y Xie cleo crew 19 00v 482 6 uu A 2 IvotaAAEd 7 15 5 182 geo 2 H e USA and Canada Only For customer orders contact ElectroVoice Customer Service at 800 392 3497 Fax 800 955 6831 12000 Portland Av South Burnsville MN 55337 Phone 952 887 4051 Fax 952 887 0043 www electrovoice com Telex Communications Inc 11 2002 Part Number 38109 xxx Rev A lt gt DYNACORD PRO M ATIRIRX SYSTEM ELA MODULE SYSTEM OWNER S MANUAL DEM 316 Batterie MODULE 24 V 38 Ah DEM 317 Batterie MODULE 24 V 65 Ah DYNACORD DEM 317 Features of the battery modules 19 drawer type chassis with 3 HU 4 HU and 2x4 HU Rated voltage 24 V Energy storage completely maintenance f
59. ro Meno B Priory Duende osx eese T MASTER MASTER Label Lebel Hal mm Mute No Mire 1 Ho Mure Duck Duck E auto Ducking 2 suc Ducking 5 7 3 SOFTWARE EDITOR DRM 4000 Name and Comment Name and Comment Name Comment Here one can provide each contact and the basic configuration with a name and with a comment MIC LINE inputs MIC LINE 1 Trainer 1 Label provides the possibility to assign individual names to corresponding the MIC LINE inputs Routing allows assigning the microphone Line level input signal to output A Mono A Ense El output B Mono B both outputs Dual and none of the outputs Off Priority Override the first two microphone Line level inputs offer the possibility for automatically controlled attenuation of the input channels that are assigned to the identical output ducking control i e the input signal of the first two input channels controls the output level of the other channels Enabling or disabling the function is possible Note Ducking and Priority Override settings can be made on the front panel of the DRM 4000 For further detail please refer to the corresponding chapter of this owner s manual Aux inputs AUXI CD Player 1 A Label provides the possibility to assign individual names to the corresponding Aux i
60. slot 2 The input levels of the four AUX inputs can be independently adjusted in a range between 10 dBu and 12 dBu via internal trim potentiometers Input channels can be switched separately to the monitor bus and you can listen to the signal via headphones or loudspeaker either which being connected to the monitor output Automatic pilot tone surveillance of the entire input stage is integrated as well figure 5 19 2 channel AUX input module Specifications description DPM AUX 2 channel AUX input module NRS 90228 connections 8 x RCA type connectors audio inputs 4 x AUX unbalanced internally summed nominal input level 10 12 dBu 250 mV 3 V max input level 12 dBu 3V input impedance 10 ko frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB SIN ratio gt 100 dB A weighted distortion 0 01 96 A D conversion 18 bit linear Sigma Delta power consumption 1 4W operational temperature range 5 40 dimensions W x H xD 37 5 x 81 x 252 mm weight 150 g PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 17 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Block Diagram ANALOG SUPPLY DIGITAL SUPPLY aH INTERNAL MONITOR PILOT MCLK BCLK 2 CHANNEL DIGITAL WCLK AUDIO a4 gt BOARD CONTROL figure 5 20 block diagram 2 channel AUX input module Internal Se
61. thermal overload warnings on the mains transformer or power output stages Monitoring of the functioning of the power output stages via pilot tone signal e Ground fault detection for loudspeaker lines DPA4120 40 Remote Control Power Amplifiers DYNACORD 10 159 DYNACORD 4120 S a 4 2 Technical Specifications Nominal output power with mains supply 1x200 or 1x400 W Input characteristics Electronically balanced Nominal input level 775 mV 0 dBu 10 k ohms Power output characteristics Balanced floating Nominal output voltage AC supply 100V 70V 50V 20V Nominal output voltage battery supply 79V 56V 40V116V at 24 V DC Nominal load impedance 100 ohms 50 25 4 ohms Noise A weighted 56 dBu THD lt 1 Frequency response 60 Hz to 20 kHz Distortion limited response PA 60 Hz to 5 kHz NOMINAL 3dB kS 1 Crosstalk 80dB at 1 kHz MONITOR output characteristics Electronically balanced MONITOR nominal output voltage 2V 8 2 dBu MONITOR nominal load impedance 600 ohms MONITOR frequency response 60 Hz to 20 kHz Operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C Dimensions W x H x D 19 483 mm x 3HU 132 mm x 345 mm Installation depth without external 340 mm connectors Installation depth incl external 400 mm
62. 0 6dBu figure 5 27 2 channel LINE output module PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 23 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Pin Assignment Of XLRM Type Connectors The LINE output XLR connectors pin assignment is as follows pin 1 screen Pin 2 positive conductor pin 3 negative conductor In unbalanced configuration the pins 3 and 1 screen have to be bridged inside the connected plug T m BALANCED SHIELD LINE LEVEL LINE OUT 0 6 dBu UNBALANCED LINE LEVEL figure 5 28 pin assignment of the OUT XLR connectors Block diagram ANALOG 69 SUPPLY 85 90227 7 Lieux DIGITAL SUPPLY R2 1 INTERNAL dn MONITOR I I MCLK 2 CHANNEL BCLK DIGITAL AUDIO WCLK BOARD 1 Ra CONTROL DOUT R5 1 23 Ec e T NRS 90227 2 1 ra 1 figure 5 29 block diagram of the 2 channel LINE output module Setting Output Levels Via Jumpers Each of the two outputs output level can be set to 0 dB or 6 dB using the jumpers JP1 and JP2 Please make sure to set both jumpers of an output channel A B to the desired position When shipped the output levels for both output channels are factory pre set to 0 dB all jumpers are close
63. 00 1496 5x A29 AbndnShp 00 Burst 800 12 00 1 50 1496 endless A30 Schiffi 00 Burst 800 1 50 1 50 14 14x A31 Schiff2 00 Burst 800 4 50 1 50 14 2x A32 Schiff3 00 Burst 800 1 50 1 50 14 2x Alarmnumber Title Priority Type Frequency inHz time in sec Ratio A25 BZB Entw 00 tone 420 60 00 14 A33 800Hertz 00 tone 800 endless 14 46 APPENDIX Troubleshooting In stand by mode the DMM 4650 runs a number of test routines in order to detect device faults at an early stage Errors are indicated by the flashing of the green POWER LED With fatal errors or when errors start to appear more often the blinking of the LED gets faster and the fault relay drops At the same time the audio input is connected directly to the output via the bypass relay The menu self test provides a listing of error numbers and occurence of the following messages No Error Name Function test 1 Reset Power On counter no message displayed 2 Software faulty micro processor interrupt 3 Modul ID changing number and activity of control ports A D during power on 4 15V tests internal supply voltage 15V 5 Bypass function of audio bypass relay hardware and software 6 Fault function of fault relay hardware and software T User mem data error of passwords and their priorities 8 Trig mem data error in trigger settings 9 Seq
64. 1 1 5 63 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS DCS 416 c 3 oo Co DCS 416 co oo C co Maximally 2 DCS 416 modules can be cascaded Using the insertion bridge CN8 CN9 select the connection of the supply voltage CN7 CN10 160 Dimensions of the DCS 416 module Size in mm Module height 25 mm The distance between the soldered surface and an electrical conductive mounting base has to be at least 5 mm Mounting insulators 942 max 2 7 5 100 Board select DATA ADC DATA AD DA RES PCB SEL DAT PCB SEL EN MONITOR EN MONITOR EN PCB SEL EN PCB SEL DAT PCB SEL RES PCB SEL DATA AD DA Jumper I CN8 CN9 I uu ud DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 4 7 DCS 420 PROANNOUNCE MONITOR MANAGER This monitor module 2 HU is for mounting in PA system rack shelves It is used for acoustically and optically monitoring power amplifier outputs monitoring as well as for pre listening to DPM 4000 input signals in a PROANNOUNCE system installation The DCS 401 controller controls the DCS 420 DYNACORD DCS420 PROMATRIX MONITOR MANAGER Features e Loudspeaker 1W 6 3 mm stereo phone type headphones jack e 3 digit 7 segment display for source selection and volume set
65. 100 V speaker networks of optionally 70 V 50 V or 4 ohms for low impedance operation optional input modules standard operation INPUT MODULE with level control electronically balanced input and MONITOR output with optional transformer or REMOTE MODULE for controlling and monitoring the PROMATRIX system electronic level controls electronically balanced input and MONITOR output with optional transformer integrated stand by power supply mains POWER ON OFF switch ground lift switch remotely controllable mains and battery operation with initial current inrush limiter power on switching noise suppression status LED indicators for operation READY STANDBY thermal overload PROTECT and occurrence of GROUND FAULT conditions at the power output fault message according to the IEC 849 standard TEST button to switch between system and average operation respectively a RESET button to restart after the occurrence of ground fault conditions LED level meter instrument with a display range of 13 dB to 0 dB and CLIP integrated relays for single call and obligatory reception active temperature controlled ventilation pilot tone and ground fault surveillance module according to the DIN VDE 0800 standard optional 23 24 Indicators controls and connections 12 DYNACORD DPA 4140 l 400 WATTS POWER AMPLIFIER PRD MATRIX _ C3 c T EM Lee e
66. 13431 WeIs S XIMIVINOMd Jexiuxpey 4 He 10 i 53 SNOLIVHaLTV T san vxnv DN Tum Io 2 L es 6 1 Ha 1 K KKK 1 a y Y d v m 22206 SUN 9 M3I3N 73437 Y gM31SVWN TWNOIS YDA Wad Sino f ni t A 4 vj 1S0d 38d INE Andino 19349 u xav 13437 IH O1 ganas e I 4 n J T Lt K Kl Kl Kj KANN y 4 vu vv Lro YALIN 13431 oO I Pa T V s31SVW Kr von vino 1 mas y i Wad NI XIW 13431 vanas c3 lt lt ca NI XIN v xnv 9 Lan OIN Ho ca Y 1001038 4 1809 38 AnQ aid Afidiro 193410 YOA gt e 1 1 310N NAA ek c oy 1 4901 56206 SUN NO of gt i tp YA i X x H 1 1 1 Y 3NUVOIN FAON s tees E v yond Ave 1 OQ gt sos 3ND OIW oq PN Sp oc qvd wes 7 pow V3d n AOV 4 AOL gt 10 n id AnO aid AMI Andino Pli A v e gt A Ls P S di eee pos 4 W31SAS HN LN 13491 IH O1 1noQi 6208 SUN 2 2 L inoxa i i N L OIN H n yond Fil SR CN NOS I 1 md IN 1 p Bes J t va v 21 apoE I 7 QnOHS3 HL NNSIS En TOULNOO 3OV4H3INE wad Sos SLOWSY 1 NIMONG
67. 2 x RCA type unbalanced Remote control via external contacts 8 freely configurable control inputs for ducking MIC LINE 1 and 2 Preset switching routing volume switching mute Optional serial RS 232 interface for PC or media control Direct control of all routing possibilities output level control configuration and storing of presets and the preset switching INTRODUCTION Optional serial RS 485 interface for connecting the DPM 4000 control of all routing possibilities ducking control preset switching via macros output level control configuration and storing of presets via Designer software e 24V power supply optional mains adapter for 90 240 V AC mains supply Power on delay relay switching to prevent audible power on off switching noise e Enclosure 19 1HU This owner s manual contains lots of valuable information about the DRM 4000 So please keep it at a safe place for further reference 1 2 Unpacking and Warranty Carefully open the packaging and take out the DRM 4000 Next to this owner s manual the appliance is shipped together with three Phoenix type connectors and the warranty card Please make sure that the warranty card has been completed Only with a fully completed warranty certificate any possible warranty claims can be granted The appliance comes with a 36 months warranty which is valid starting with the date when you had received the device from your dealer Please keep the warranty certif
68. 40 C The installation site should not suffer from increased dust and moisture The radiation of direct sunlight or other heat sources should be avoided During operation rear connectors have to be covered since they partly conduct voltages that could endanger your life Ventilation louvres are not to be covered by any other installed gear Therefore it is reasonable to install a 1 HU ventilation blind above the correspondent appliance The installation site should not be subject to vibration 24 Excluded From Warranty Damages malfunction or obstruction of certain performance features resulting from the following causes are excluded from the warranty improper or erroneous maintenance by the customer changes or alterations without written consent operation outside of the environmental conditions specified for this product operation outside of electrical specifications improper installation damage during transportation because of improper packaging by the customer Repair replacing used batteries altering and retrofitting extensions is only admissible if EVI Audio GmbH or one of its authorized service centers or maintenance technicians carry out these tasks PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 2 5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 3 System Description This chapter provides an overview of the general configuration of the PROANNOUNCE system and its most important functions The following block diagram shows
69. 6 can be reset by pressing the TEST button 3 or by sending the corresponding command via the serial port of the PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 see PROMATRIX handbook see paragraph 9 2 7 5 Meter Instruments And CLIP Indicators The green LED indicator 13 dB and 0 dB 1 as well as the red LED indicator CLIP 2 allow the precise monitoring of output levels providing the possibility to securely prevent distortion and clipping that could lead to damaging the connected loudspeaker systems When during program peaks the red CLIP LED 2 lights briefly the maximum distortion free output is gained Whenever the CLIP LED 2 lights continuously the amplifier is driven into overdrive and the input level should be reduced Overload or short circuit at the output is the cause for the green LED indicator 1 to beout or only briefly lit while at the same time the red CLIP LED 2 blinks In that case please check the impedance of the connected load Caution N During normal operation the red CLIP LED 2 should hardly light and if than only very briefly 7 6 STATUS Indicator The yellow STATUS LED 14 that is located on the rear of the appliance lights briefly during normal operation when the DPM 4000 addresses a query to the amplifier For further information please refer to the PROMATRIX handbook 8 Switching The Output Voltage refer to qualified service personnel only The DPA 4411 offers output voltages of either 20 V 50 V
70. 6 1 1 DCS 400 When configuring and initially operating the DCS 400 system please proceed as follows 1 Cabling Use the supplied flat wire cable for connecting the relay modules DCS 408 DCS 409 in the desired order to the control module DCS 401 Mixed installation of relay modules is possible numbering the relays is type specific and has to be performed according to their sequence example FEE Module Line i No Control relay No DCS 408 DCS 408 6 10 7 3 pos a08 s Dos s ees Use the supplied flat wire cable for connecting the logic input module DCS 412 to the control module DCS 401 Numbering the logic inputs has to be performed according to their sequence example mus Module Logic input No Use the supplied flat wire cable for connecting the analog input output modules DCS 416 to the control module DCS 401 Numbering the analog inputs and outputs has to be performed according to their sequence example Zr Module Analog P No Analog output No Connect the control module DCS 401 via RJ 45 cable to the REMOTE CONTROL socket the DPM 4000 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 6 1 6 2 APPENDIX 2 Voltage Supply Insert bridges serve to select the voltage supply connector of different modules Please refer to the corresponding description of individual modules or to their block diagrams CAUTION The maximum current handl
71. 70 V or 100 V The output voltage factory preset to 100 V Switching the output voltage to 20 V 50 V or 70 V should only be carried out by qualified DYNACORD service personnel Caution Unplug the mains cord and disconnect batteries before opening the appliance for opening the appliance please remove the 9 screws on the top of the appliance that lock the cover plate the four output transformers 356762 are located on the left hand side of the appliance They are numbered 1 2 3 and 4 starting from the rear cover plate of the appliance for changing the output voltage see diagram 6 you have to unsolder the orange wire attached to the transformer s soldering tab 19 100 V and solder it instead to the required soldering tab 70 V 50 V or 20 V closing the appliance use the 9 screws M3 x 6 DIN 7500 to reattach the cover plate 5802 5801 vatiag Zu re en para pen 20V SWITCH 5802 SWITCH 8801 OUTPUT VOLTAGE s s es 2 s e s 9 L 20V diagram 7 Output configuration settings of the diagram 6 Switching the output voltage at the ics nn 22 amplifiers rear view output transformers 356762 28 After changing the output voltage use a waterproof marker pen to note the correct newly set value on the label field OUTPUT VOLTAGE 20 on the rear o
72. A 20A with NRS 90 144 Table Fuse values of the battery outputs for connection of power amplifiers Table shows the maximum currents which can be drawn from the batteries These must not be exceeded This gives the maximum number of power amplifiers which can be powered by the batteries Battery max max number of power amplifiers type inA DEM 287 DEM 288 DEM 289 DEM 316 100 17 9 5 DEM 317 150 25 13 7 Table II Maximum currents and number of power amplifiers The number of power amplifiers which can be directly connected to the battery drawers can be lower than the values specified in Table Il see number of outputs section 8 specifications The values specified in the Table only refer to the connection of one amplifier type to one battery type As long as the maximum current drawn is observed however various types of amplifier can be supplied by one type of battery Circuit diagram of the battery connection to the charging device A DEM 313 BATTERY CHARGER n pen 316 317 1 EMERGENCY BATTERY E F501 F503 016 4001 B501 B504 18016 INPUT pi l 240 output l 25 l CHARGE l zw Loap x
73. DIN 72581 3 85268 printed board assembly battery fuse 24V DC flat fuse DIN 72581 3 85268 39 503 F502 6521 LL NE n HOW I R518 Lt 4 BROUND LIFT an ssai zes TO_MAINS INP Ke mie E a 1 8325 8524 R549 8542 On m Raat 502 an nsa RGL NA WE 8 0507 0510 Or OF PGNDi 350 R528 I figure 10 printed board assembly 85270 in the DPA 4120 showing the DC fuses F502 and F503 40 F 508 F 502 F503 C524 55 5 nd 0504 m T asa 0416 6 0507 E Os N On im as R507 0511 figure 11 printed board assembly 85268 in the DPA 4140 showing the DC fuses F502 and F503 41 F 601 F 602 1 AC MAINS INPUT Asa 86243 IE Q 8682 figure 12 printed board assemblies 86243 DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 showing the AC fuses F601 and F602 Caution Before opening the appliance make sure to disconnect the mains and or battery power source Replacing the fuses F502 and F503 only to be carried out by the experienced service technician The battery fuses F502 and F503 are located on the power supply PCBs 85270 DPA 4120 and 85268 DPA 4140 behind the AMP battery connectors see also figure 10 and or figure 11 To replace these fuses you have to remove the cover plate of the appliance and afterwards the power supply input PCB 86243 which is mounted to the rear panel of the appliance Theref
74. NRS 90231 18 mm Transformer balanced NRS 90232 aa Pushbutton switch NRS 90230 Selectable 218 mm PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 43 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 2 13 Optionally Available Accessories Optional Alarm Key NRS 90230 The paging stations employ two empty slots for retrofitting optional alarm keys or key lock switches also refer to chapter 5 2 3 Control Panel DPC 4550 For installing an additional alarm key you should only use the NRS 90230 extension kit Brief description Supplied with the NRS 90230 optional pushbutton or switch for retrofitting DPC 4xxx type paging stations to work as idling current controlled opener The pushbutton switch function can be configured on the hardware 1 resistor 10 k ohms 1 lamp 6 volts 1 selable cover installation instructions 1 Disconnect the paging console from the power supply Detach the bottom plate 6 to 8 screws depending on the paging console model Prepare the installation site for the insertion e Use a sharp pinpoint tool thick needle pointed rat tailed file knife etc to carefully pierce the pre punched holes through from the enclosure s outside to the inside e Configure the switch to operate as switch or pushbutton e CAUTION Install the switch so that the gap for changing the switch s operation points towards the TALK key This allows for easy changing its function even after it has been inserted
75. OQ ES useranno SEE OPERATING MANUAL 57 D CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGANST RISK OF FIRE WARNING TOREDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE 24V ON REPLACE WITH SAME TYPE AND VALUE FUSE INDICATED ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS OV OFF ATTENTION REMPLACER PAR UN FUSIBLE DE MEME APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTUR COMME AVIS RISQUE DE ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR DYNACORD DPA 4260 275 MADE In GERMANY AUDIO TRANSFORMER OUTPUTS A B BRIDGED 100v TOV 25v EOM IC BEN BRIDGED MODE 49 BRIDGED m OUTPUT WIRING MUST BE CLASS 1 NO USER SERVIGEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUA IFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL AE PIN 1 SHIELD PIN2 PIN 3 b Inputs INPUT CHANNEL A amp B With an input sensitivity of 775 mV 0 dBu and an input impedance of 20 k ohms the electronically balanced inputs INPUT CHANNEL A amp B are meant for the connection of control amplifiers audio controllers mixing consoles etc Peripheral pieces of audio equipment are either connected via the XLR type input connectors or using the parallel linked binding posts For the latter option you can utilize the supplied screw plugs Thus carrying the audio signals through to feed additional power amplifiers can be conveni ently achieved without the need for special split
76. OdBu socket is provided on the rear panel 4 Multi function Display Back lit LC display 2 lines with 16 characters each The display lights up by pressing any key The display is dimmed whenever the EXIT key gets pressed or no key is pressed for at all within a short while 5 SOFT KEY Depending on the selected operation mode the soft keys are used in various ways The according function is indicated on the display 6 CURSOR CURSOR keys to control the cursor on the display and for modifying data Keys for TITLE skip back REWIND PLAY STOP REC FAST FORWARD TITLE skip forward 8 EXIT Key for exiting the edit mode in order to prevent un authorized operation Each pressing of the key switches back one menu stage 9 POWER The LED lights whenever the DMM 4650 is ready for operation In case the LED BLINKS you should contact a DYNACORD service center REAR PANEL DYNACORD DMM 4650 55 wie wee 1 13 REMOTE Je eu Je B 2 gu PORTD ae PREOUT RECHNP mund INPUT 10 11 12 13 10 24 V DC power supply 2 flat pin plugs 1 4 6 3 mm for connection to emer gency power supply battery or other external power sources Please mind the correct polarity 11 REMOTE The 9 pole D SUB connector Remote Control RS 232 is a serial computer interface for data transfer and service functions PORT A
77. Pilot tone ON OFF optionally available Messages e Output level all channels e Pilot tone detection all channels e Ground fault detection all channels e Thermal overload amplifier mains transformer Configuration Measured values of current and voltage at the power outputs Extension kits PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 53 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 4 DCS 400 Control System 5 4 1 Characteristics DCS 400 Series modules increase the PROANNOUNCE system s control functionality in miscellaneous ways These printed board assemblies in the Europe standard format are usually inserted at the rear of a PA system rack shelf or installed in suitable distribution boxes The DCS 400 system consists of five different modules and additional extensions e DCS 401 control module for controlling relays logic inputs analog inputs and outputs and rotary encoders e DCS 408 relay module with 5 line relays for 100 V systems e DCS 409 relay module with 5 NF or control relays e DCS 412 logic input module with 12 floating bi polar inputs that are linked via opto couplers e DCS 416 analog I O module offering 8 inputs and 8 outputs for 0 V DC to 10 V DC e DCS 420 monitor module with 7 segment display meter instrument and monitor loudspeaker e NRS 90240 rotary encoder A PROANNOUNCE installation allows integrating a maximum of up to 8 DCS 401 control modules A single control module can host up to 12 relay boards of the types DC
78. Rot DCS 408 9 DCS 412 DCS 416 Size mm N Module height 25 mm Encoder Chain Ghain Ghain The distance between the soldered surface and an electrical conductive mounting base has to be at least mm Maximally 8 DCS 401 modules be cascaded Use jumpers CN3 and 5 to select the supply a voltage source connector CN1 CN2 or S MES ee S1 sets the address for each DCS 401 The modules are initialized by pressing the pushbutton S2 DPM4000 or DCS401 CN2 gt EEPROM DPM4000 or DCS401 CN1 DCS416 CN9 DCS401 Address 51 DCS412 CN8 DCS408 9 gt CN7 LED1 LED2 2 x Rotary Encoder CN12 sl A 24V AR gt BLOCKDIAGRAM DCS 401 CN4 24V 4 D Jumper CN3 CNS 5 56 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 4 3 DCS 408 RELAY MODULE 100 V The module is to be mounted on the rear of a PA system rack shelf or inside of a suitable distribution box It is primarily used for switching 100 V loudspeaker lines The relays can also be used for collective calls obligatory reception as E relays and D relays or for general control purposes Features e Five 100 V line relays 2 switc
79. Value NO CHANGE OFF MONO A MONO B DUAL STEREO Write access sets the routing of AUX 1 via remote mind priorities Read access reads the routing of AUX 1 which has been set via remote EDIT REMOTE AUX4 value ROUTING for AUX2 AUX4 see AUX1 EDIT REMOTE OUT_A MUTE value e g EDIT REMOTE OUT_A MUTE OFF EDIT REMOTE OUT_A MUTE Value NO CHANGE ON OFF Write access sets the status output relay in the MASTER A output via remote mind priorities Read access reads the actual status EDIT REMOTE OUT_A DUCK value e g EDIT REMOTE OUT_A DUCK ON EDIT REMOTE OUT_A DUCK Value NO CHANGE ON OFF Write access sets the status of the ducking control in the MASTER A output via remote mind priorities Read access reads the actual status EDIT REMOTE OUT_A LEVEL value e g EDIT REMOTE OUT_A LEVEL 10 EDIT REMOTE OUT_A LEVEL Value NO_CHANGE 90 0 Write access sets the VCA of the MASTER A output via remote to the desired value mind priorities Read access reads the actual status EDIT REMOTE OUT BJ OUT B settings see OUT A EDIT ACTUAL e g EDIT ACTUAL MIC_LINE1 ROUTING Reads the actual states of the DRM 4000 like routing etc Only read access is recommended 10 6 SPECIFICATIONS 10 5 Dimensions
80. a sequence with a higher priority e g S 20 The control of 11 Start A31 settings and relay contacts is taken over by the stop sequence 12 wt Audio After the stop sequence ends the DMM 4650 returns to stand by 13 Jump 09 mode 14 End Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger S35 fireship 95 off Step Command Parameter Ship alarm Fire 1 A1 set Description Turns the sound reinforcement system s power on 2 wt In A1 High relay A1 and waits for acknowledgment input A1 system 3 Out B4 clr ready When the system is ready the output B4 music program 4 Out B2 set off is opened and B2 B3 mandatory reception E D is closed 5 Out B3 set Closing the signaling contact alarm signal running swit 6 Out A3 set ches the audio controls to the alarm signal s priority The signal 7 Sum off sequence is defined as follows 1 package 1 5 sec 800 Hz tone 8 DMM 5dB with 1 5 sec break A32 followed by a 4 5 sec tone with 1 5 sec 9 Start A32 break A31 The sequence runs continuously until it is stopped 10 wi Audio by a sequence with a higher priority e g S 20 The control of Pi san A21 settings and relay contacts is taken over by the stop sequence When the stop sequence ends the DMM 4650 returns to stand 12 wt Audio by mode 13 Jump 09 14 End 43
81. a single or several selection keys assigns the outputted program background music to selected areas and groups The corresponding LED s are lit Program transmission has always the lowest priority 1 The level of the audio signal is determined during the PC configuration procedure The assignment stays memorized until the selection keys are pressed again Pressing the CANCEL key erases the entire assignment pattern Subsequently pressing the PROGRAM key or any other function key cancels the program assign mode It is also automatically canceled after approximately 15 seconds In single program configuration the music reproduction in all areas of the installation needs to be attenuated for the time of an announcement In double program configuration it is possible to transmit the background music program into rooms that are not part of an actual announcement selection If every line incorporates its own LF output and separate power amplifier it is possible to freely mix announcements and background programs Special Functions Generally it is possible to assign a function to each selection key This allows to utilize a paging station to control the lighting door openers blinds etc even controlling volume settings is possible through the use of the UP DOWN keys How to program and assign special functions is explained in detail in PROMATRIX user manual When factory shipped there are no special functions assigned DPC 4000 Revision 1 1 27
82. alarm Storing a preset has to be confirmed with the soft key yes With save all modifications in the above mentioned menu items are saved into the selected user preset Thus individually saving the parameters is not necessary since they remain in memory until another gong is being loaded List of available alarm parameters Type Uni sweep frequency1 pitch at sound start in Hz min 40Hz max 9999Hz is swept until frequency2 is reached frequency2 pitch at sound stop in Hz min 40Hz max 9999 2 time duration of the sweep Freq1 to Freq2 in seconds min 0 015 max 99 995 ratio duty cycle of the square wave in percent min 1 max 5096 repeat number of repetitions of the sweep 1 gt Freq2 min 1x max 9999x 0000 corresponds to infinite repetition Values in parenthesis example DIN alarm A20 f Uni sweep f 1200 ee f 2 500 Hz gt time 100 sec repeat 2x reset endless Type Bi sweep frequency1 pitch at sound start in Hz min 40Hz max 9999 Hz is swept until frequency2 is reached frequency2 reverse frequency of the sound in Hz min 40Hz max 9999Hz is swept until frequency1 is reached time sweep duration from freg1 to inversion point in sec min 0 01s max 99 99s The duration of the sweep freq1 gt inversion point gt freg1 is symmetrical ratio duty cycle of the square wave in percent min 1 max 5096 repeat numbe
83. alarm sequence cancels a gong control sequence Not the control line of an input but the priority number of the triggered sequence determines its priority With equal priorities the sequence that had been started first remains valid The selected user level states the priority for the operation on the appliance User level 1 priority no 33 user level 2 priority no 66 and user level 3 priority no 99 Modifying the default for lower user levels is performed within the menu System setup priority The setting of the user priority controls whether an operator gets interrupted by an important sequences sequence priority Users are able to modify messages gongs and alarms and save them as user presets Depending on the actual user level the programs are automatically provided with the corresponding user priority numbers see above They are maintained for the case that the original preset s priority is lower In this way it is guaranteed that user 1 cannot modify the presets of user 2 In order to allow access for other users the priority allocation can be modified downwards lower priority by the respective user before storing a preset menu message gt priority gong gt priority alarm gt priority If recording a message via remote recording the priority number of the recording sequence is transferred to the message Einstellung System Setup Helligkeit Backlight 1 Priorit t Priority 2 Ausg nge
84. amplifier 400 WW iiec ibo treo tette Extension Specifications cete etg Tre stb 13 1 NRS 90225 general input 13 2 5 90222 remote 9 13 3 NRS 90208 input transformer for floating balanced 13 4 NRS 90227 output transformer for floating balanced monitor 13 5 NRS 90224 pilot tone and ground fault Block diagrams citet ea a o eee eo teet iade ee Co Rotae tbe aga 14 1 Power amplifiers DPA 4120 DPA 4140 14 2 NRS 90225 general input 7 14 3 NRS 90222 remote module 2 0 0 0 ee sese sr e etse reser at 69 14 4 NRS 90224 pilot tone and ground fault 70 15 Martahly RUPEE eal nc NOH DERI qu eee 72 1 Utilization The amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 are specially designed for the power consistent and reliable operation of PA systems The DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 are intended to be used in company intercom alarm and background music transmission installations offices and commercial areas congregation and
85. and can be operated using the transport keys as follows Note This mode only allows playback via the PRE listen Phone outputs lt q Title skip backwards selects the previous actually recorded message During playback the selected message starts playing immediately lt q Rewind skips back one message during playback fast rewind enables the user to listen to a specific part several times gt Play Stop starts or stops the playback of the selected message Recording is stopped by pressing the stop key e Recording pressing this key once switches the selected message into recording stand by In case a previously recorded message exists the question delete is displayed and leaving you the choice to record a new message with Y2 Yes or cancel the command with W No If you choose delete the record key has to be pressed again after completion ofthe procedure If this message is not supposed to be deleted you have to select an empty location The items Recording type and Recording level are explained later The display now shows record Mxx and pause with a bargraph indicating the current signal level Pressing the record key again starts the recording and play time replaces pause Pressing the Stop Play key terminates the recording gt gt Fast forward skips to the next message forwarding during playback enables the user to listen to parts of a longer message gt gt Title skip forward sele
86. announcement and releases the PA system Afterwards the telephone connection is disconnected as well Switches 1 4 are used to set the maximum timeout for a connection as indicated in the following table SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 TIMEOUT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF CAUTION ON OFF OFF OFF 20 sec OFF ON OFF OFF 30sec The DTI 2000 is factory pre set to a ON ON OFF OFF 45 sec maximum connection timeout of 1 5 OE eee minutes SW1 OFF SW2 ON SW3 ON OFF ON OFF 75 sec OFF ON ON OFF 1 5 min ON ON ON OFF 2 min ON SW4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 2 5 min ON OFF OFF ON 3 min Setting the switches 1 4 to their OFF OFF ON OFF ON 35min position specifies an infinite timeout i e the SCC OPE LO connection is not automatically OFF ON 5 min disconnected ON OFF ON ON 6 min j OFF ON ON ON 8 min ON ON ON ON 10 min Switches 5 8 are not in use and should be left in their OFF position 3 Rack installation There are two rack mounting options for the DTI 2000 Use the MCP 2 rack installation kit for installing a single DTI 2000 and the MCP 1 for installing two units next to each other in a rack system The following diagram shows both options MCP 1 MCP 2
87. are the Ports A B C D and their corresponding input numbers 1 2 3 4 2 The logic control level gets also selected using the cursor keys H high flowing current L low no current X H or L variable currents and selecting off switches the sequence start of the selected line off 3 Using the cursor keys sets a bounce time between 0 0 and 25 0 seconds The logic control level selected in point 2 has to be present stable at the control input at least for this time value so that the prerequisite for a sequence start is fulfilled 4 The cursor keys provide the possibility to choose of a selection of three distinct conditions for a sequence to be started A valid start attempt is initiated only if the conditions 2 and 3 are fulfilled The switch dyn dynamic tries to start the stated sequence and simultaneously deletes the start command currently running sequence with equal or higher priority prevents the sequence start command from being initiated The switch stc static tries to start the selected sequence as long as the conditions 2 and 3 deliver a true result This allows the periodic repetition of a sequence as long as the conditions are fulfilled e g a key is kept depressed In case a sequence with equal or higher priority is currently running the start of a new sequence is only possible after completion of the first sequence and if the trigger conditions at this moment are still fulfilled The switch lat
88. assemblies 86243 DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 showing the AC fuses F601 and F602 Caution Before opening the appliance make sure to disconnect the mains and or battery power source Replacing the fuses F502 and F503 only to be carried out by the experienced service technician The battery fuses F502 and F503 are located on the power supply PCBs 85270 DPA 4120 and 85268 DPA 4140 behind the AMP battery connectors see also figure 10 and or figure 11 To replace these fuses you have to remove the cover plate of the appliance and afterwards the power supply input PCB 86243 which is mounted to the rear panel of the appliance Therefore detach the yellow green cable from the ground connector on the appliance s rear panel Pressing the lock strap of the AMP connector together it can be removed without applying any force Now you have to remove the three screws marked A refer to the diagram of the appliance s rear panel on page 2 which allows you to twist the power supply input PCB 86243 up Make sure not to damage any wires or any other parts The fuses F502 and F503 are now accessible and can be removed To re install the power supply input PCB 86243 these steps have to be proceeded in the opposite order The yellow green cable has to be reconnected to the ground connector on the rear panel of the appliance By pulling the cable make sure that it sits snugly Then you can re attach the cover plate of the enclosure 42 Caution For security reaso
89. be used as a pre mixer for the DPM 4000 expanding the amount of available input channels DRM 4000 and DPM 4000 can be linked via an RS 485 remote interface Priority functions preset switching and routing are easy to configure and operate The DRM 4000 Mixer amp Router can also be used as stand alone unit for simple sound reinforcement tasks e g in a multimedia set up as well as for straightforward paging installations Typical applications include the use as a mixer for sound reinforcement systems in conference rooms multi purpose facilities clubs restaurants houses of worship etc DRM4000 8x2 Matrix Central System Mixer Router u 22 95 94 RO RARI RRR E SELLE Technical Specifications Supply Voltage 24 V DC 21 6 to 31 2 V DC Nom Power Consumption 24 V 700 mA Max Power Consumption 24 V 975 mA Audio Inputs 4 x MIC LINE 4 x AUX 1 X MIX IN MIC LINE Inputs XLR type connectors Nom Input Level MIC 60 to 10 dBu 0 8 mV to 245 mV LINE 30 to 20 dBu 25 mV to 7 75 V Max Input Level 11 dBu 2 75 V LINE 30 dBu 24 5 V Input Impedance MIC 3 6 k ohms LINE 10 k ohms Common Mode Rejection gt 50 dB Limiter Operating Range 10 dBu to 20 dBu MIC LINE 1 amp 2 AUX Inputs 2 x RCA type connectors each unbalanced Nom Input Level 6 dBu respectively 4 dBu 390 mV respectively 1 23 V Max I
90. consist of alarm gong messages and also random combinations The audio quality of the messages shall be selected depending on memory extension and different user requirements With maximum memory extension a total recording time shall be 16 minutes In order to ensure function reliability a self test and an audio data verification shall be installed The fault alarm shall take place via a dedicated output The utilize flash memory so as to be maintenance free Password protection shall be provided The operation shall be simple similar to cassette recorders or CD players A computer interface shall be provided Eleclrol oice 12000 Portland Av South Burnsville MN 55337 Phone 952 887 4051 Fax 952 887 0043 www electrovoice com Telex Communications Inc 11 2002 Part Number 38109 xxx Rev A allowing for saving and loading of unit configurations and message data Available Accessories Model Cat No Description NRS90204 121647 Extension module 4 x I O NRS90205 121648 Memory expansion module NRS90210 121650 Output transformer Ordering Information Model Cat No Description DMM4650 121675 Digital Message Manager USA and Canada Only For customer orders contact Customer Service at 800 392 3497 Fax 800 955 6831 DYNACORD PRO ANNOUNCE S Y S E amp E Key Features 200 or 400 watt output power is available 70v or 100v capability for constant voltage speaker lines e Full remote
91. extensions or modules For DPM 4000 Matrix Manager DPM Modules 2 Channel Paging Station Module NRS 90215 DPM PCI This 2 channel audio input module is meant for the connection of DPC 4000 Series paging consoles Each of the two input channels provide RJ 45 sockets allowing the connection of up to 4 paging stations plus paging station extensions per input The microphone terminals are interconnected via 6 conductor parallel cables The module can be installed in slot 1 and slot 2 Next to G the electronically balanced audio ar input each input connector provides a serial RS 485 interface port and the power supply connection for the paging stations see also pin assignment of the RJ 45 connector The paging stations power supply employs DPC 4000 IN DPC 4000 IN an electronic programmable fuse through which the maximum output current can be matched to meet actual system accommodations This prevents the entire installation from malfunction in case of short circuit occurring in a single paging station only Input channels can be switched separately onto the monitor bus and you can monitor the audio signal via headphones or loudspeaker either which is connected to the monitor output Automatic pilot tone surveillance of the entire input stage is integrated as well If necessary retrofitting the audio inputs with transformers is possible Specifications connection 2 x RJ 45 so
92. for DIN alarm on key released terminates the alarm B2 DIN alarm text Key pressed starts sequence DIN alarm 1 sec pause alarm text 1 sec pause DIN alarm etc key released terminates the sequence 4 tone gong Input impulse starts a 4 tone gong G20 B4 Pre gong Input static key pressed starts pre gong and enables announcement via DMM 4650 key released terminates the sequence OUTPUTS All outputs are floating relay contacts A1 System on Switches on the electro acoustics sound reinforcement system A2 Alarm text running Signaling contact for alarm text active Alarm signal running Signaling contact for alarm signal active A4 4 gong running Signaling contact for 4 tone gong active Bi Pre gong running Signaling contact for pre gong active B2 Mandatory relay E Switches the sound reinforcement system to mandatory reception E B3 Mandatory relay D Switches the sound reinforcement system to mandatory reception D B4 Program off Switches current music program off 31 Audio inputs and outputs The XLR inputs and outputs are electronically balanced and wired according to the IEC 268 standards If unbalanced XLR connection is desired PIN1 and have to be bridged using a jumper Specifications are to be found in the appendix on page 53 If balanced floating connection is necessary the extension kit NR 90211 has to be installed for the INPUT and NR 90210 for the OUTPU
93. for all input output and control lines except for mains supply and battery cords is mandatory When installed inside of metal housings or rack systems running unshielded output and control lines is possible Cable screens have to be connected to the enclosure or rack system ground potential The amplifier has to be protected against dropping or splashing water direct sunlight high environmental temperatures or direct radiation of heat sources high humidity and moisture dust shock or vibration It is not permissible to place containers filled with liquids e g vases ontop of the appliance When moving the amplifier from cold into warm environments condensation of its inner parts can sometimes occur If so the appliance can be operated again after gaining the environmental temperature approximately after one hour If a solid object has fallen or liquid has leaked into the device disconnect all connectors and get in contact with an authorized DYNACORD service center Do not operate the amplifier after such accidents When cleaning the amplifier s outside enclosure never use any cleaning sprays or detergents because of inflamability The use of those liquids will damage the appliance 3 Before Initial Operation 3 1 Mains Operation When operated on mains power use the included mains cord to connect the amplifier to a 230 V or 115 V 50 60 Hz wall outlet Connect the cable s other end to the appliance s 3 pole mach
94. functions optional PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS The following block diagram outlines the features once again It shows a DPM 4000 equipped with a 2 channel paging station module NRS 90215 a MIC LINE 2 AUX inputs module NRS 90216 two 2 channel LINE output modules NRS 90218 and an 8 I O control module NRS 90219 The ports of the interface block are standard Their functioning is explained in detail on the following pages The Optional port allows for retrofitting an additional serial port for the intercommunication between several DPM 4000s or connecting external devices entire installations IN A Pag Console SLOT 1 NRS 90215 IN B Pag Console AUX1 INA AUX2 SLOT 2 NRS 90216 IN B MIC LINE DC INPUT 1 24V RS 232 PC INTERFACE DCF 77 NP 1 NP2 figure 5 1 DPM 4000 block diagram DPM 4000 AUDIO MATRIX 4x4 INPUT FILTERS OUTPUT DELAYS CHIME ALARM SIGNAL GENERATOR MESSAGE RECORDER SYSTEM TIMER CALENDAR CONTROL SUPERVISION POWER MANAGEMENT INTERFACE SLOT 5 NRS 90219 LINE OUT A SLOT 3 NRS 90218 LINE OUT B LINE OUT A SLOT 4 NRS 90218 LINE OUT B OPTION PORT 24V READY REMOTE CONTROL MONITOR OUT SLAVE CLOCK OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 OUT 8 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 1 2 Front View DYNACORD DPM 4000 DIGITAL 4x4 MATRIX MANAGER f
95. hard to 99ms soft fading sound from XXL long several seconds XL L M S XS XXS short approx 1sec start delay of the second gong stroke in seconds min 00 0s max 99 9s second gong stroke A highest sound B C to D deepest sound attack rate from 00ms hard to 995 soft fading sound from XXL long several seconds XL L M S XS XXS short approx 1sec number of repetitions of the gong sequence min 1x max 9999x 0000 corresponds to infinite repetition time between two gong sequences in seconds min 00 15 max 99 95 Remarks regarding parameter setting Although the above mentioned parameters are extensively variable the gained results not always represent a good sound E g attacks for low frequency bar strokes are acoustically quite different from the gong A sound Since a maximum of 2 gong strokes can be simultaneously processed starting the third gong too early will abruptly end the first one and lead to unpleasant sound cut off knacks Effects like these resulting from extreme parameter settings are of physical reason and should be optimized by listening tests first ALARM General Alarms are audio signals that can be started within a sequence The alarms are square wave forms providing the possibility for various parameters to be adjusted For test purposes it is possible to start the alarms signals in the alarm editor menu using the PLAY STOP key They are present on
96. impedance MIC 3 6 LINE 10 KQ input balancing phantom power audio frequency response SIN ratio distortion A D conversion power consumption operational temperature range dimensions W x H x D weight extensions gt 30 dB 24V 20 mA switched via jumper 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB gt 95 dB A weighted 0 01 96 18 bit linear Sigma Delta 23W 5 40 C 37 5 x 81 x 252 mm 160g 173 g including NRS 90233 NRS 90233 input transformer for 1 MIC LINE input order No 121 682 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 11 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Pin Assignment Of XLRF Type Connectors The pin assignment of the MIC LINE input s XLRF type connector is as follows pin 1 screen pin 2 positive conductor pin 3 negative conductor In unbalanced configuration the pins 3 and 1 screen have to be bridged inside the connection plug SHIELD BALANCED UNBALANCED SOURCE SOURCE MIC LINE IN figure 5 12 pin assignment of the MIC LINE IN XLRF type connector Block diagram ANALOG 1 SUPPLY 5V DIGITAL n SUPPLY INTERNAL MONITOR PILOT MCLK BCLK 2 CHANNEL DIGITAL WCLK AUDIO DIN MIC UNE l NRS 90233 JP2 COMPRESSOR LIMITER figure 5 13 block diagram MIC LINE 2 AUX input module Internal Settings 1
97. in place using the two locking screws and reconnect the mains power supply s 5 8838 1502 RM 112 ED ad R34 m 82222b 2 CH LINE OUT 352178 C38 icto E 1 figure 5 30 output level jumpers retrofitting transformers location of parts NRS 90218 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 25 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 1 11 8 I O Control Module NRS 90219 This control module provides 8 floating control inputs and 7 floating logic level outputs 0 V 24 V An additional output provides pole change impulses for controlling slave system clocks Contact is established via 4 x RJ 45 Sockets providing 8 contacts each The module can be installed in slot 5 The slave clock output NU OUT 1 is short circuit proof up to approximately 40 slave clocks can be connected Please make sure to connect all slave clocks according to their correct polarity The control outputs OUT 2 8 are capable of switching voltages of either polarity and up to a maximum current of 1A The control inputs IN 1 8 are capable of handling vol
98. indicators 7 have to light Use the check and reset button TEST 3 to check the functioning of the pilot tone surveillance When holding the TEST button pressed the 19 kHz tone generator is switched off the READY indicators 7 go out and a fault message is being transmitted to the PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 see PROMATRIX hand book Approximately 3 seconds after releasing the TEST button the READY indicators 7 have to light again 9 2 NRS 90207 Ground Fault Surveillance The VDE regulation DIN VDE 0800 has to be obeyed when planning and operating 100 V sound reinforcement systems Especially 100 V alert systems have to be in accordance with all protection measures for class 3 appliances We recommend the use of the ground fault surveillance module NRS 90207 for floating speaker network installations offering surveillance of the network insulation Error registration A ground fault message signals that a damaged cable has been detected possibly resulting in an upcoming cable interruption or a wrongly connected cable possibly resulting in malfunctioning The information ground fault is memorized as long as the amplifier is powered on or a loaded battery is connected even for short term gt 5 s ground faults The fault message is transmitted to the PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 see PROMATRIX handbook The NRS 90207 extension comes as a plug in printed board assembly and consists of a monitoring circuit with error storage and
99. kW D input balancing gt 30 dB weight 1609 phantom power 24V 20 mA switched via jumper frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB S N ratio 95 dB A weighted distortion 0 01 96 A D conversion 18 bit linear Sigma Delta power consumption 2 3 W dimensions W x H x D 37 5 x 81 x 252 mm weight 160 g 2 Channel AUX Input Module NRS 90228 This 2 channel audio input module provides 8 RCA type connectors 4 x L R for connecting external audio sources such as CD players tape decks tuners DAT decks etc The module can be installed into slot 1 and slot 2 The input levels of the four AUX inputs can be independently adjusted in a range between 10 dBu and 12 dBu via internal trim potentiometers Input channels can be switched separately to the monitor bus and you can listen to the signal via headphones or loudspeaker either which being connected to the monitor output Automatic pilot tone surveillance of the entire input stage is integrated as well Specifications connections 8 x RCA type connectors inputs 4 x AUX unbalanced internally summed nominal input level 10 dBu 12 dBu 250 mV 3 V max input level 12 3 input impedance 10 kw frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB SIN ratio 100 dB A weighted MIC LINE Paging Station Module N
100. key launches the integrated alarm The key is lit during the transmission of an alarm signal The priority of the alarm can be set between 7 and 9 and therefore it has priority over any announcement or other event except for those that were ignited from the directing paging station priority 10 Pressing the STOP key or subsequently pressing the ALARM key cancels the alarm Selective Alarm When a paging station is equipped with a second ALARM key which provides the option for selective alarms it is possible to transmit alarm signals only into particular lines Equivalent to the procedure for making a selective call you first have to select the areas groups to which the alarm signal will be transmitted Afterwards you have to press the covered ALARM key to start a selective alarm The key is lit during the transmission of an alarm signal You can now already enter the lines for the following alarm Pressing the STOP key or subsequently pressing the ALARM key cancels the alarm When shipped there is no factory pre set selective alarm pre programmed Launching an alarm is not related to the originating paging station s priority Alarms can be launched from any microphone terminal at any time even when the system is in stand by mode A running alarm is optically and occasionally also acoustically indicated at each and every paging station Canceling Signals Pressing the STOP key cancels alarms gong signals and text message transmiss
101. language with the soft key ok using the cursor keys provides the possibility to choose between German and English The EXIT key switches to the prior menu level Backup Confirming Backup with the soft key ok displays Backup excl Msg and the soft key send The cursor keys are used to select Exclusive message device status gong preset alarm preset sequence 27 preset update equivalent to exclusive message message management or inclusive message equivalent to update audio data The soft key send starts the data output via the REMOTE RS232 connector This menu item is meant for data transfers into a computer This function can also be executed via command at the RS232 interface A precise description of the necessary control steps and data formats is to be found on the pages 33 35 The EXIT key switches to the prior menu level Restore Confirming Restore with the soft key ok the display shows Restore release This mode provides the possibility to restore preset data which previously had been saved using the Backup procedure via the REMOTE RS232 interface Since only user 3 has access to the Restore command unauthorized modification of the DMM 4650 via the remote interface and other sequences priority interrupting a Restore process in progress is impossible A precise description of the necessary control steps and data formats is to be found on the pa
102. loudspeaker lines each Therefore DPA Series power amplifiers are most suitable for company intercom alarm and background music transmission installations in offices and commercial areas congregation and sport centers schools houses of worship hotels hospitals shopping malls and super markets cruise ships and other similar applications Each power amplifier incorporates two high performance output transformers Next to 100 V 70 V and 25 V floating outputs the direct outputs provide the possibility to also drive loudspeaker systems with low impedance down to a minimum of 4 ohms Simultaneous operation of low impedance speaker systems and floating loudspeaker lines on a single output channel of the power amplifiers is possible as well The integrated 45 Hz LO cut filter with 18 dB oct slope protects the connected loudspeaker lines from unwanted ultra low frequencies Comparator circuitry constantly monitors the input and output signals of the power amplifiers and activates their internal limiters whenever non linear operation is encountered which reliably protects the connected loudspeaker systems against overload conditions and clipping saturation of the power supply transfor mers and overvoltage at the outputs The DPA Series power amplifiers transmission and sound qualities are absolutely superb The employed comprehensive dimensioned power supply units with low interfe rence toroidal transformers ensure that the stated nominal per
103. mains connector 10 and the mains selector switch 12 with individual screws and self securing nuts M3 reinstall the rear panel using 6 screws marked A tighten the heat sink using four screws marked B closing the appliance reconnect the cover plate using 9 screws M3 x 6 DIN 7500 5 MONITOR OUTPUT T4 INPUT 4 T3 INPUT 3 T2 INPUT Z 1 INPUT 1 diagram 10 Printed board assembly 81331 showing the position of the input transformers NRS 90208 9 4 Monitor Output Transformer NRS 90227 Offering A Floating Balanced MONITOR Output In case a floating MONITOR output is needed the monitor amplifier output is prepared for retrofitting an output transformer Herefore you will need the extension kit NRS 90227 Caution IN Unplug the mains cord and disconnect batteries before opening the appliance 9 4 1 To Install The NRS 90227 Proceed As Follows see diagram 10 for opening the appliance please remove the 9 screws on the top of the appliance that lock the cover plate de install the input printed board assembly 81331 following the description in the paragraph 9 3 1 disconnect the resistors R95 R96 R97 and R101 before installing the monitor output transformer mount the monitor output transformer on the printed board assembly 81331 in doing so polarity is of no importance since the transformer is balanced reinstall the input printed board assembly 81331 following the description in
104. matrix junctions for the integrated gong and alarm signal generators the vocal recording playback unit and the lock on of the pilot tone and its evaluation are incorporated All input signals and internally generated signals can be freely mixed inside the matrix and outputted through the 4 amplifier channels Routing speaker lines to these amplifier channels is achieved via the relay matrix which offers up to four separate audio buses simultaneously while the DPM 4000 takes over the management of all these signals according to their priority Next to connecting paging stations the audio inputs also serve for the connection of other audio sound sources like microphones mixers CD players cassette decks and DAT recorders tuners etc Several different input modules are available to optimally adjust and match signal levels and connections 3 3 Volume And Tone Controls Delays The PROANNOUNCE system provides individual volume controls for each input output and paging station Even the internal audio sources like gong alarm tone generators voice message playback and pilot tone generator employ individual level controls each Additionally it is possible to set an attenuation that unanimously affects the inputs This value determines the degree by which the input signal is attenuated during the reproduction of messages or other signals with a higher priority setting This allows to smoothly fade out and fade in background music during the tra
105. mode The loudspeaker cables are connected to the power amplifier through high performance binding posts with the necessary screw plugs being supplied For connection purposes it is possible to remove the 12 pole terminal plug Cables with a maximum diameter of 2 5 mm2 can be utilized To provide flexible connections all floating output voltages 25 V 70 V and 100 V ISOLATED OUTPUTS as well as the low impedance output DIRECT OUTPUTS of both channels are directly accessible X AUDIO TRANSFORMER OUTPUTS LOW IMPEDANCE A 100V BRIDGED 100V 1200W 8 B DUAL A 600W 40 MI DIES ISOLATED OUTPUTS figure power outputs of the DPA 4260 2 20 igure printed board assembly area zhannel A transformer retrofitting Power Outputs AUDIO TRANSFORMER OUTPUTS The two integrated output transformers convert the power amplifier s nominal output voltage to the commonly used loudspeaker line voltage standards 25 V 70 V and 100 V These voltages are simultaneously present at the correspondent floating outputs of the binding post strip The two power amplifier channels can be operated using any possible output voltage combination Simultaneous operation of low impedance loudspeaker systems and floating loudspeaker lines on a single power amplifier channel is possible as well Caution It is possible that d
106. music program off is being 4 Out B2 set opened and B2 B3 mandatory reception E D gets closed After 5 B3 set closing the signaling contact A4 gong runs the audio controls 6 Out 4 set are set to gong priority The gong signal is being output and 7 Sum off fades After the fade out the DMM 4650 returns to stand by 8 DMM 5dB mode 9 Start G20 10 wt Audio 11 End Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger S 26 Vorgong 87 B4 Low gt 00 15 stc Step Command Parameter Start Pre gong key B4 on end of announcement with key 1 Out B4 clr B4 off 2 Out B2 set Description The output B4 music program off is opened and in 3 Out B1 set succession B2 mandatory reception E is being closed After 4 Sum 3dB closing the signaling contact B1 pre gong runs the audio 5 DMM 5dB controls are setto audio input pre gong mix After 4 seconds the 6 Start G24 signaling contact B1 ready for announcement is being opened 7 Dly 004 0 s The audio controls remain unchanged until control input B4 8 wt Delay terminates the sequence Afterwards the DMM 4650 re enters 9 Out B1 clr the stand by mode 10 wt Audio 11 wt Stop 12 End Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger 527 Message1 80 off Stepp Command Parameter Start Message
107. need to be fed from a single power source Data inter exchange amongst modules has to be established via flat wire cabling CAUTION For safety reasons DCS 400 modules may only be installed in rack shelf systems or enclosures that are locked and may only be opened by means of a tool e g screw driver special key etc When installing modules make sure to follow all requirements of the EN60065 1993 regulation Obeying the regulations for interference emission EN55022 class B and interference stability EN50082 2 DCS 400 module printed board assemblies need to be grounded at their fixing points e g using a metal bolt 5 54 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 4 2 DCS 401 CONTROL MODULE The module is to be mounted on the rear of a PA system rack shelf or inside of a suitable distribution box It serves as an interface for the connection of relay boards logic input boards analog I O boards and rotary encoders The module is controlled via the RS 485 remote port of the DPM 4000 A single DCS 401 control module can host a maximum of 12 relay modules DCS 408 DCS 409 five logic input modules DCS 412 two analog input output modules DCS 416 and two rotary encoders Relay modules are connected to the CN7 connector using the supplied flat wire cable DCS 408 or DCS 409 boards can be installed in any order Logic input modules are connected to the CN8 connector while analog I O modu
108. not fit into your outlet consult an electrican for replacement of the obsolete outlet IMPORTANT SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To reduce the risk of electric shock do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the Operating Instructions unless you are qualified to do so Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel 1 Security regulations as stated in the EN 60065 VDE 0860 and the CSA E60065 00 have to be obeyed when servicing the appliance 2 Use of a mains separator transformer is mandatory during maintenance while the appliance is opened needs to be operated and is connected to the mains Switch off the power before retrofitting any extensions changing the mains voltage or the output voltage 4 The minimum distance between parts carrying mains voltage and any accessible metal piece metal enclosure respectively between the mains poles has to be 3 mm and needs to be minded at all times The minimum distance between parts carrying mains voltage and any switches or breakers that are not connected to the mains secondary parts has to be 6 mm and needs to be minded at all times 5 Replacing special components that are marked in the circuit diagram using the security symbol Note is only permissible when using original parts 6 Altering the circuitry without prior consent or advice is not legitimate 7 Any work security regulations that ar
109. number is being skipped wt Delay waits until the delay time is elapsed Audio waits until the last started audio signal is finished In X Y Z waits until the desired level Z or L is applied at input Y 1 4 of the I O module X A D Stop waits until the stop trigger condition of this sequence is fulfilled setting which is utilized if a command is not used 25 System setup General Basic functions are defined in the menu system setup Examples are behaviour during stand by language data backup etc The factory defaults are explained in the table on page 36 Modifications are automatically saved and remain in memory even without supply voltage Operation menu system setup Confirming the menu selection system setup with the soft key ok the following sub menus can be selected using the cursor keys Contrast Confirming contrast with the soft key ok the display shows LCD contrast and the soft key norm The display s contrast is adjusted in using the cursor keys while norm sets the value to 0 The EXIT key switches to the prior menu level Backlight Confirming backlight with the soft key ok the display shows L CD backlight and the soft key norm Using the cursor keys the display s backlight intensity can be set in a range of 0 96 to 10096 The EXIT key switches to the prior menu level Headphones Confirming headphones wi
110. observed The battery may only be connected to the charging apparatus without load i e all types of consumers must be disconnected and when the mains is switched OFF The battery must be charged directly after discharging The battery must not be left uncharged It becomes impossible to maintain a charge if the battery is left uncharged for any length of time Please ensure that the temperature inside the rack is always within the admissible temperature range specified in the data sheet 2 2 Battery module DEM 317 A and DEM 317 B The followin ints m rv The insulated screw terminals on the rear side of the battery module DEM 317 are directly connected to the battery poles and are live Before removing the insulating caps all the connections of the battery modules DEM 317A and DEM 317B are to be disconnected When connecting the cables the insulating caps on the battery poles should never be removed at the same time because this could cause a short After the cables have been connected they should be replaced immediately The cables between the battery modules DEM 317A and DEM 317B connect the pole with M with M and B with B When connecting the cables the lock washer is to be mounted between the cable lug and the nut to secure the screw 2 3 Fusing the inputs and outputs The batteries have individually fused outputs for the load connections Thus all plus and minus lines are protected aga
111. off or the current status is being displayed echo on oft the output of the received characters is switched on echo or off or the current status is being displayed linefeed on off the output of an empty line after command execution is switched on or off or the current status is being displayed prompt on off tlhe output of the character string DMM 4650 after command execution is switched on or off or the current status is being displayed Help function displays a listing of the commands Help Help function displays a listing of the commands Definitions nnnnn 300 in steps up to 38400 DD MM YY day month year XX preset number CCCCCCC data hh mm ss hours minutes seconds 34 Terminal programs The utilized terminal software has to be configured for data transfers send and receive with a word length set to 8 Bit and no data conversion Setting examples for the program Terminal coming together with Windows 3 Ix package Start the terminal software click the window configuration data transmission set the values for the configuration as described in the paragraph interface settings see above and confirm your settings with ok Select conversions no in window configuration terminal settings and conclude your settings with acknowledging the ok key Enter command backup do not hit the return key yet then select the menu transmission receive text file Activa
112. peak value Thus the installation of the connected loudspeaker groups has to in accordance to security standards and regulations as stated above Make sure to establish all connections before operating the system Connecting disconnecting cables during operation can cause malfunctioning or damage to the correspondent appliances PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS 2 2 Operation Instructions 2 2 1 Central Unit DPM 4000 According to its specified capabilities and specifications the DPM 4000 central unit can be used to control and monitor PA and paging systems in buildings but also to operate professional audio systems The DPM 4000 central unit is not an independent device For its operation at least the following is necessary 1 A power supply unit 24 V 4 A 24 V 12 A preferably of the DPP 4000 Series depending on the power consumption of the entire system 2 When the installation includes paging stations the desired amount of paging stations of the DPC 4000 Series max 16 required cables 3 When the unit s audio section is utilized power amplifiers preferably of the DPA 4000 Series including cabling loudspeaker systems including cabling 4 When the integrated real time clock is going to be synchronized to the DCF77 timesync signal anactive DCF77 antenna for reception NRS 90193 including cables This feature is only available in areas where DCF77 rec
113. per octave which cut off frequencies below 85 Hz The use of the Low Cut filters is especially recommendable for microphone applications effectively eliminating low frequency feedback and ambient sound as well as popping sounds which results in increased vocal intelligibility An additional side effect is that your power amplifier and loudspeaker systems do not have to handle unwanted low frequency signals cluttering your entire sound system The Low Cut filters in the MIC LINE input channels are enabled in the factory pre set state They can be disabled via internal jumpers when for instance connecting LINE level signal source MIC LINEChannel Jumpers 1 S1A 2 S1B 3 S1C 4 S1D The following diagram exemplarily shows the jumper settings of the MIC LINE 1 Low Cut filter LO CUT ON LO CUT ON O O lLo CUT OFF MIC 1 MIC LINE 1 MIC LINE 1 Lou Cut On Lou Cut Off 9 1 2 DIRECT OUTPUTS The DIRECT OUTPUTS of the eight input channels are factory pre set to POST e g the input signals are present at the DIRECT OUTPUTS after passing through the corresponding channel s control stage tone control volume setting If you would like to have the signals not being affected from the channel controls you may want to change the DIRECT OUTPUTS setting to PRE To do so refer to the diagram on page 9 1 overview jumpers and Cut amp Solder bridges for locating the corresponding jumper on the printed board as
114. represents an individual function which is assigned in a calling numbers table either in the Default Configuration or via user configuration Three or four digit numbers are used for entering passwords The asterisk and hash mark keys offer special functions e g as separator for clearing faulty entries Clear as talk button or to drop a connection 1 Telephone call to the DTI 2000 Simply dial the number of the telephone line to which the DTI 2000 is connected You are presented either with a ring signal when the line is not busy or otherwise with a busy signal when the line is already busy After the specified ring count refer to DIP switch S202 the DTI 2000 DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 9 accepts the call and establishes a connection First you will hear a short noise DTI 2000 line test followed by different tone signals which indicate that the DTI 2000 expects further entries 2 Password Entry The DTI 2000 answers an incoming phone call with different tone signals depending on its actual status When not password protected a single tone signal indicates that the DTI 2000 is ready to accept a function command via entering a one or two digit function number If protected b a password the appliance answers incoming calls with a two tone signal Entering the password for the desired access levelis necessary To enter access level 1 you have to enter a three digit password for entering access level 2 a four digit pass
115. running the audio controls are set to alarm text priority The alarm signal A20 is outputted and runs continuously until it is stopped by a sequence with a higher priority e g S20 The control of the settings and relay contacts is taken over by the stop sequence and upon completion the DMM 4650 returns to stand by mode 37 Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger S 23 DIN Alrm 95 B1 Low gt 00 1s stc Step Command Parameter Start DIN alarm key B1 ON Stop with key B1 OFF x Out A1 set Description Turns the sound reinforcement system on relay A1 2 wt In A1 High and waits for acknowledgment input A1 system ready When 3 Out B4 clr the system is ready the output B4 music program off is opened 4 Out B2 set and B2 B3 mandatory reception E D gets closed After closing 5 Out B3 set the signaling contact A3 alarm signal running the audio 6 Out A3 set controls are set to alarm text priority The output of the alarm 72 Sum off signal A20 is started This sequence is terminated when the 8 DMM 5dB input B1 is Low no current Upon completion the DMM 4650 9 Start A 20 returns to stand by mode 10 wt Stop 11 End Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger S24 Alrm Txt 91 B2 Low 00 1s st
116. several independent loudspeaker lines The units are best suited for paging and pre recorded message installations alert systems and for general music applications in industrial enterprises offices multi function halls sport arenas schools churches hotels hospitals super markets cruise ships and similar venues The DPA4410 11 amplifiers can either be operated on the AC mains or connected to an external 24 V battery power source Switching to battery operation is accomplished via an internal relay The DPA4411 provides the following remote monitoring functions when used within a ProAnnounce system Setting input levels on channels 1 4 Reading level values of the audio level controls Setting level offsets via virtual controllers Mute function via level controls Remote control power operation ON OFF Battery operation remote control ON OFF Monitoring and fault message transmission of thermal overload warnings on the mains transformer or power output stages Monitoring of the functioning of the power output stages 1 to 4 via pilot tone signal e Ground fault detection for loudspeaker lines DPA4410 11 400 watt 4 Channel Power Amplifier DYNACORD Oh PA Technical Specifications Nominal output power with mains supply 4x100W Input characteristics Electronically balanced Nominal input level 775 mV 0 dBu 10 k ohms Power output characteristics Balanced floating
117. shipped the jumper is factory pre set to its open position no phantom power Compressor Limiter The MIC LINE input channel embodies a compressor limiter circuit which can be incorporated into the signal path via jumper JP2 position COMP Normally the compressor limiter should be used to eliminate the risks of overdrive and clipping when directly connecting a microphone When shipped the jumper is pre set to its Linear position LIN PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 21 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Retrofitting Input Transformers Retrofitting two input transformers onto the module is possible for the case that galvanic separation of the audio signals is needed For the DPC 4000 input a NRS 90208 extension is needed which consists of an audio transformer and an insulation plate For the MIC LINE input a NRS 90233 extension is needed When retrofitting input transformers please proceed as follows 1 2 3 4 Disconnect the DPM 4000 from the mains power supply Loosen the two locking screws and carefully slide the module out of its slot Remove the two resistors of the corresponding input channel IN A R8 R9 IN B R3 R4 With the DPC 4000 input IN A you have to place the insulation plate between the transformer and the printed board assembly Then solder the transformer in position T2 with the MIC LINE input IN B you have to solder the transformer in position T1 Re insert the module i
118. should automate the daily sequences by external control keys sensors contacts and the corresponding unit settings This applies for gongs alarms messages and their combinations as well as for recordings of variable announcements This contributes to a considerable advantage in the ease of use since manually operating the appliance is not necessary anymore Often used functions of the DMM 4650 are directly implemented as factory presets and can be utilized without any additional programming effort By editing the default values and storing them into a user preset a customer optimized configuration is quickly developed Audio function The audio signals of the electro acoustic sound reinforcement system are looped via INPUT and OUTPUT to the power amplifier The SUM control can be programmed for this stand by position In case of failure a stand by relay takes over the connection When starting a sequence via control line the desired audio signal gets generated DMM SIGNAL and fed to the OUTPUT via the programmable DMM control The controls DMM SUM defined within the sequence determine whether the two audio signals are merged or the one gains priority over the other FRONT LINE MIC PRE LISTEN REAR ANNOUNCEMENT Y OUTPUT 1 SIGNAL i Gong 1 1 1 1 AUDIO DIAGRAM Message x Programmable Level The MIC LINE input is used for recording a message and can also be used for announcement purposes The headpho
119. single unit The RS 485 bus may not exceed a maximum length of 1 000m and must follow a line structure with stub cables being as short as possible When including more than 30 amplifiers both ends of the bus have to be terminated with 120 ohms resistors This bus is also used for monitor signal transmission Connect the amplifier s to an operation voltage source Perform a Netscan procedure via the PROANNOUNCE Designer software In normal operation the status LED s on the rear panel of the amplifiers have to light periodically depending on the number of participants on the bus communication with the DPM 4000 Within the communication window of the PROANNOUNCE Designer software checking which addresses are registered as participants is possible using the command AMP AVLBL Once a participant on the bus had been disconnected from the DPM 4000 for a short term e g because the RS 485 line had temporarily been disconnected it is included again in the query sequence after 10 sec 5 3 3 Remote Module for Single Channel Amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 NRS 90222 STATUS O 90222 This single channel input module provides DPA 4120 or DPA 4140 power amplifiers with remote functionality For detailed information on DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 power amplifiers please refer to the owner s manual 355768 The module allows connecting balanced XLR input and XLR thru lines as well as connection to the remote control bus o
120. skin or clothing rinse immediately with plenty of water If diluted sulphuric acid gets into the eyes consult a doctor immediately Always re charge a battery after discharging Never use batteries with different capacities different degree of discharge or a mixture of old and new batteries together The manufacturing dates should be within one month of each other Batteries should be stored at as low a temperature as possible If batteries are stored at normal temperatures additional charging is necessary once every six months 3 3 Storage and additional charging During storage the capacity is reduced due to self discharge The battery should be stored in a cool dry place If the average monthly temperature is between 20 and 30 one additional charging procedure is necessary every 8 months If the average monthly temperature is less than 20 C one additional charging procedure is necessary every 12 months If a stored battery is used one charging procedure should always be carried out before use 3 4 Transport If the battery is transported it should never be exposed to excessive jolting or knocks If a battery is connected to a device during transport it must be secured well and the current circuit must be interuppted 3 5 Battery service life Generally speaking the battery service life in standy parallel operation amounts to 3 5 years and approximately 260 cycles at 10096 discharge depth or more in cyc
121. stand by mode The states of the control outputs the audio relay bypass and the sum level setting during stand by operation are set in the operation menu System setup page 26 Password Password protection prevents the DMM 4650 from unauthorized operation Three distinct user levels are available which can be accessed by entering the respective password As factory defaults 1111 is programmed for Level 1 easy operation 2222 for Level 2 and 3333 for Level 3 installer Individual modification for each user is possible The menu tree diagram page 11 shows which access is assigned to the respective user level Password entry operation end Pressing any key on the DMM 4650 s front panel Password appears on the display Using the cursor keys you have to enter a 4 digit number and confirm it with the menu key ok After entering the correct 4 digit password the display shows the number of your user level Using the cursor keys you are able to select the desired menu The EXIT key cancels the operation and the appliance is protected against unauthorized use Priority function With the DMM 4650 provides the opportunity to set priorities from 0 to 99 where 99 represents the highest priority level Setting the priority level leads in different results d The priority of a sequence is defined by its free programmable priority setting menu sequence priority This determines whether e g a fire
122. strip on the basic printed board assembly 8 Re attach the bottom plate 9 Software configuration with the PROANNOUNCE Designer figure 5 40 circuit diagram key lock switch PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 45 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Input Output Transformer NRS 90232 If need is the paging consoles provide the possibility for with either an input transformer in case you would like to connect audio devices to the EXT socket or an output transformer For retrofitting transformers please only use the NRS 90232 extension kit Brief description optional Audiotransformer for alternative integration to serve as input or output transformer in DPC 4xxx Series paging consoles Supplied with the NRS 90232 1 transformer DCN 337387 1 cable binder with a length of 142mm CAUTION Using the device as an input transformer is only permissible for external devices CD Player cassette tape deck etc with an output level gt 775 mV The NRS 90232 extension cannot be used as a microphone input transformer Installation instructions 1 Disconnect the paging console from the power supply 2 Detach the bottom plate 6 to 8 screws depending on the paging station model 3 Installing the transformer on the output socket printed board assembly e When utilized as input transformer 9 I Prior to installing you have to disconnect the bridges that are marked with an X in the
123. switch being ion its ON position When the switch is set to OFF all outputs are without current and the MAINS 2 and BATTERY 3 LEDs are not lit With the mains switch being engaged the internal 24 V power supply is provided with mains voltage At the same time the mains output connector on the rear of the appliance gets mains supply max 1 A allowing the connection of external low level power consumers tape decks etc With the mains switch being engaged and when the appliance is correctly connected and the mains is present the MAINS LED will light Correspondingly the BATTERY LED is lit when a battery power source providing 24 V is correctly connected to the BATTERY IN connectors 12 and 13 and with the mains switch being engaged The output voltage of the internal power supply is present at the DIRECT OUT 9 connector With the DPP 4004 this connector s maximum power handling capacity is 4 A the DPP 4012 provides 12 A The output offers internal short circuit protection and it can be operated without load It also serves to use the appliance as plain power supply without battery supply and without remote control The output SWITCHED OUT 16 is meant for the connection of the DPM 4000 or other external devices that need non interrupted emergency power supply With the DPP 4004 this connector s maximum power handling capacity is 4 A the DPP 4012 provides 12 A The output offers internal short circuit protection and it ca
124. table showing the Cut amp Sol der bridge of AUX1 R and the two settings 4 and 6 dBu Input Channel Cut amp Solder Bridges AUX1 frontseitig L BR4E AUX1 r ckseitig L BR1E BR2E AUX2 L BR1F BR2F AUX3 L BR1G R BR2G AUX4 L BR1H R BR2H AUX1 R Sensitivity 9 2 Limiter Settings For adjusting the limiters in the input channels MIC LINE 1 and 2 please proceed as follows Open the DRM 4000 by following the description provided in the preamble to chapter 9 Locate the trimmers VR1D MIC LINE 1 and VR2D MIC LINE 2 on the left hand side of the main printed board assembly Adjust the limiter threshold according to your personal requirements Let the following points be to your guidance left margin 10 dBu center position 4dBu right margin 20 dBu Limiter deactivated Reattach the cover plate by following the description provided in the preamble to chapter 9 9 3 INTERNAL SETTINGS 9 3 HOW TO INSTALL EXTENSIONS 9 3 1 How to install the Input Transformer NRS 90233 EDP No 121 682 Contents NRS 90233 1 x Input Transformer DCN340955 Installation Instructions NRS 90233 1 Turn off the power of the DRM 4000 and open the cover plate as described before 2 For installation of the transformer you first have to remove the printed board assembly 80478 MAIN BOARD Start with removing the EQ board 82228 1 by loosening its three l
125. temperature sensor for the temperature tracking of the battery voltage takes place via contact 5 temp and contact 6 temp of the 15 pole plug connector BATTERY CONTROL to the charging device DEM 313 If the connection is faulty the temperature tracking does not work and the battery will not charged Also see the operating instructions for the charging device In the case of the battery module DEM 317 the temperature sensor is located in the module DEM 317A 2 5 Connection for battery charging Connection of the charging device to the battery takes place via the flat pin connector CHARGE CURRENT The plus pole of the charging device is to be connected to the plus pole of the battery and the minus pole of the charging device is to be connected to the minus pole of the battery Please also see the operating instructions of the charging devices 3 Notes for the user 3 1 Use of the battery is to be avoided in the following locations areas exposed to direct sunlight areas with excessive radioactivity infrared radiation or ultra violet radiation areas with organic solvent vapours dust salt or corrosive gases areas with abnormal vibration 3 2 Regulations for battery use Do not throw batteries into the fire Do not place batteries in the proximity of fires Do not short battery poles Do not tamper with or open batteries Ifthe battery has been damaged and diluted sulphuric acid comes into contact with
126. the DPA 4120 fuse socket 11 mains fuse 230V AC 5x20 mm IEC 127 2 3 fuse socket 11 mains fuse 115V AC 5x20 mm IEC 127 2 3 printed board assembly mains fuse 100V 250V 8 5xRM 5 08mm IEC 127 3 4 86243 printed board assembly battery fuse 24V DC flat fuse DIN 72581 3 85270 printed board assembly battery fuse 24V DC flat fuse DIN 72581 3 85270 11 2 Fuses in the DPA 4140 fuse socket 11 mains fuse 230V AC 5x20 mm IEC 127 2 3 fuse socket 11 mains fuse 115V AC 5x20 mm IEC 127 2 3 printed board assembly mains fuse 100V 250V 8 5xRM 5 08mm IEC 127 3 4 86243 printed board assembly battery fuse 24V DC flat fuse DIN 72581 3 85268 printed board assembly battery fuse 24V DC flat fuse DIN 72581 3 85268 39 503 F502 6521 LL NE n HOW I R518 Lt 4 BROUND LIFT an ssai zes TO_MAINS INP Ke mie E a 1 8325 8524 R549 8542 On m Raat 502 an nsa RGL NA WE 8 0507 0510 Or OF PGNDi 350 R528 I figure 10 printed board assembly 85270 in the DPA 4120 showing the DC fuses F502 and F503 40 F 508 F 502 F503 C524 55 5 nd 0504 m T asa 0416 6 0507 E Os N On im as R507 0511 figure 11 printed board assembly 85268 in the DPA 4140 showing the DC fuses F502 and F503 41 F 601 F 602 1 AC MAINS INPUT Asa 86243 IE Q 8682 figure 12 printed board
127. the chapter 5 2 13 Optionally Available Accessories 5 32 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 12 13 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Microphone After pressing the TALK button and after the BUSY LED lights making announcements in pre selected areas or groups is possible using the integrated gooseneck microphone The optimum distance from the microphone is approximately 20 to 35 cm The microphone pre amplifier embodies a limiter to control signal peaks and protect the system against overdrive The extension socket EXT allows connecting a second microphone with TALK button Assigning the function area group of the external microphone is performed during the configuration via PC Display Depending on the actual operational status of the system the LC display with 2 lines of 16 characters each shows information on time operation mode user notes setting up fault messages including precise device module specification etc 5 2 4 Connections 1 LAN socket This is the interface for connecting DPC 4000 Series paging stations to the PROANNOUNCE system The 8 pole RJ 45 connector provides power supply control interface RS 485 and audio connections The microphone terminal has to be connected to a corresponding RJ 45 wall outlet using the supplied connection cord 3 m The following figure shows the pin assignment of LAN socket and RJ 45 network cable Please also pay attention to chapter 5 2 14 Cable Lengths LAN RJ 45 AUDI
128. the loudspeaker systems For details on how to connect the outputs please refer to figure 3 for the connection of relays please refer to paragraph 5 6 respectively the PROMATRIX handbook 5 4 POWER OUTPUT for low impedance loudspeaker systems Switching the output to 4 ohms allows the connection of low impedance loudspeaker systems 4 16 ohms see also paragraph 7 and figure 3 Because of the occurring line attenuation the distance between amplifier and loudspeaker system should not exceed 50m Please make sure that the overall loudspeaker impedance does not decline a value of 4 ohms and that the stated power handling capacity of a single speaker system is not exceeded 5 5 MONITOR output The MONITOR output 16 on the NRS 90225 allows the connection of an additional power amplifier for monitoring purposes The low impedance output is electronically balanced which offers the possibility to achieve cable lengths of up to 200 m Connection is performed via the REMOTE CONTROL pin connector strip see also figure 4 For the remote control module NRS 90222 the MONITOR output is located on the REMOTE CONTROL connector 22 The PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 switches the signal to the according the monitor channel In case a floating output is required the monitor output is prepared for retrofitting an output transformer provided through the optional extension NRS 90227 please also refer to paragraph 8 4 Functioning changes in the models DPA 4120
129. the pre listen outputs Alarm Presets 20 freely programmable presets user presets are available from 00 to A19 The factory presets pre programmed on the preset numbers A20 A34 The corresponding functions are explained in the table on page 46 Erasing these presets is not possible In order to create your own alarm preset modifying an existing possibly similar alarm user or factory preset and storing it under a new number together with its new title and priority is the easiest way to accomplish this task Operation menu alarm Confirming the menu selection Alarm with the soft key ok lets you select the following sub menus using the cursor keys Load Confirming load with the soft key ok Axx Title and the soft keys yes no appear on the display Using the cursor keys lets you edit the alarm number xx while the corresponding name is displayed Y loads the selected alarm into memory while further editing is performed in the editor menu Editor The menu editor allows modification of audio frequencies envelopes duty factors and several other parameters see parameter listing Testing the alarm s sound properties is possible by starting the alarm sequence using the PLAY STOP key The sound is presented via the pre listen outputs Parameter modifications are audible after performing a restart The RECORD key stops the alarm After pressing the EXIT key previous menu level the ques
130. to be assigned exclusively a specific address can exist only once When applying operation voltage for the first time paging consoles start up in entry mode right away 5 38 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 2 Password does not apply to paging consoles without selection keys 3 or 4 digit passwords provide protection for paging consoles against unauthorized operation Password protection can be established in two levels The first level is the normal user level In case this level is password protected the paging station cannot be operated except for launching an alarm The second level is the setup level If this level is password protected the setup mode is not accessible while unlimited normal operation is possible Level 1 and 2 passwords are assigned and transferred to the individual paging stations during the PC configuration procedure As factory preset the level 1 password is set to 111 and the level 2 password is 2222 level 2 setup mode is password protected factory pre set To prevent a paging station from unwanted access you have to enter setup mode and select parameter 2 password Depending on which function of the paging console you want to protect by using the selection keys you have to enter either the 3 digit level 1 password or the 4 digit level 2 password Protection is now activated and operation 1st level and or programming 2nd level are not possible anymore The b
131. to the output 8 5 1 Pilot tone surveillance Integration of the extension NRS 90224 provides continuous self monitoring of the amplifier This gets accomplished in the way that an extremely low level 19 kHz pilot tone signal is introduced to the signal path following the input level control LEVEL After passing the amplifier stages the pilot tone signal is filtered out at the output and the result is evaluated If the measured signal declines the pilot tone s predetermined threshold at the output or is not present at all the READY indicator 7 dims and the READY fault message relay drops When using the INPUT MODULE NRS 90225 the fault message is output as collective fault message with the floating contact of the READY fault message relay via the REMOTE CONTROL connector 16 When using the REMOTE MODULE NRS 90222 error occurrence is monitored and output by the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 for further details please refer to the PROMATRIX handbook 8 5 2 Ground fault surveillance When installing and operating 100V loudspeaker networks compliance to the VDE regulation DIN VDE 0800 is mandatory Especially if 100V loudspeaker networks are included in alarm system applications all security standards have to be in accordance to the security class 3 standard 35 When off ground potential loudspeaker cable networks are employed we recommend insulation monitoring using the ground fault surveillance module NRS 90224 Error recognition An occur
132. up when the remote call is terminated this key is basically not needed during normal operation 3 DROP and SEIZE indicators The red DROP LED indicates that there are no live connections i e the DTI 2000 is on hook The green SEIZE LED indicates that the DTI 2000 established a connection to the calling party i e the DTI 2000 is off hook The DTI 2000 automatically connects to incoming phone calls Using the internal DIP switch 202 allows specifying the number of rings prior to accepting a call 4 TALK indicator The orange TALK LED lights whenever the DTI 2000 is in announcement mode i e when an announcement into a single or several zones of the PA system has been initiated via telephone connection 5 LEVEL control meter bars Audio signals that are transmitted from the DTI 2000 to the DPM 4000 System Manager can be monitored using the TO PAGING MANAGER meter bar Level adjustment is possible via the associated LEVEL control on the front panel using a small screwdriver The level setting range is between dB counter clockwise stop and dB clockwise stop Currently the TO TELEPHONE indicator and the associated level control are not used DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 3 DYNACORD DTI 2000 MADE IN U S A POWER SUPPLY 15V 12345678 GND V PHONO LOOP TO PAGING MANAGER LINE THRU 45V EN GND 15 6 10 TO PAGING MANAGER connectors female The two TO PAGING MANAGER c
133. wanted leave this input unused The control output pin 4 MAINS REMOTE ON on the REMOTE socket 10 carries ground potential when the output MODULES OUT 14 is switched on and with the mains supply being constantly present This output can be used to switch remotely controllable power amplifiers of the PROMATRIX and the DEM Series to mains supply The control output pin 5 BATTERY REMOTE ON on the REMOTE socket 10 carries ground potential when the output MODULES OUT 14 is switched on and with the mains supply being unstable This output can be used to switch remotely controllable power amplifiers of the PROMATRIX and the DEM Series to battery supply The control output pin 6 POWER FAIL OUT on the REMOTE socket 10 signals the loss of the mains supply main under voltage mains failure temperature overload with insufficient output voltage of the switch mode power supply An output voltage of 24 V indicates that the mains supply is present and stable The output s internal resistance is 1 kO It is meant for the connection of the DPM 4000 indicating mains failure conditions The control output pin 7 DELAY OUT on the REMOTE socket 10 is switched to 24 V with a delay of approximately 6 seconds after activating the output MODULES OUT This function can be used to signal that the installation is ready for operation after booting the system In installations incorporating DEM modules the output provides the release function Pr re
134. 00 Revision 1 1 PROMATRIX System PROMATRIX System System Overview The PROMATRIX system includes 5 different paging station models and one paging station extension of the DPC 4000 series All paging stations employ gooseneck microphones 6 or respectively 8 function keys and a covered alarm key An additional key as well as a key lock switch can be retrofitted All paging stations are available with 10 20 30 or 50 selection keys All models come with LC display 2 lines with 16 characters each The individual models are listed in the following table DPC 4106 6 function keys DPC 4510 8 function keys 10 selection keys alarm key DPC 4520 8 function keys 20 selection keys alarm key DPC 4530 8 function keys 30 selection keys alarm key DPC 4550 8 function keys 50 selection keys alarm key DPC 4350 paging station extension with 50 selection keys The paging stations employ the following common features e all functions are processor controlled non volatile configuration data FLASH memory e condenser microphone incl pre amplifier and compressor limiter e freely programmable key assignment easy labeling the keys via label strips and MS WORD templates e monitoring of the analog circuitry via integrated pilot tone oscillator e monitoring of the processor system via watchdog circuit e line monitoring via pilot tone and polling covered alarm key except at the DPC 4106 e prepared for retrofitting additi
135. 00 is connected to the mains During this procedure first the red DROP LED should light Afterwards the orange TALK LED blinks for approximately 3 seconds In case faulty operation is being recognized the processor system stops and the DROP and TALK LEDs light Otherwise the DROP LED is dimmed and only the red DROP LED lights as long as a telephone connection has not been established Pressing the SEIZE DROP button on the front panel manually establishes a connection pick up or drops a connection hang up When the button is used to take a call the green SEIZE LED should light and the red DROP LED should be dimmed Pressing the key once again drops the connection and the red LED lights while the green LED is dimmed The orange TALK LED lights when the DTI 2000 is in announcement mode i e when a telephone announcement in a single or several zones of the PA system has been activated Specifications Audio Output level Telephone Input Level S N Ratio Frequency Response Phone Line Connectors DPM 4000 Interface Power Supply Temperature Range during Operation Dimensions Weight Certifications DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 0 dBu 20dBu 30 dBu 6 dBu gt 60 dB 200 Hz 3 8 kHz 300 Hz 3 8 kHz 0 6 dB 2 x RJ 11 Line Loop Thru RJ 12 DB 9 sockets 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 0 50 208 x 44 x 203 mm Bx H x T 19 1 HU 2 0 kg CE UL FCC Design and specifications
136. 0478 pull it to the front of the appliance so that the connectors are free of the rear panel Now you are able to remove the printed board assembly 80478 so that it is accessible for installing the transformer 3 Remove the two resistors of the corresponding output channel OUT A R21R R22R OUT B R61R R62R 4 Using a suction pump clean the holes for installing the transformer 10 holes per transformer as well as the holes of the previously removed resistors from soldering tin 5 For OUT A insert the transformer into the prepared holes at position T1R for OUT B insert it at position T2R Make sure that the transformers pin marked as pin 1 fits into the hole on the printed board assembly which is also marked as hole 1 6 Solder the contacts of the corresponding transformer to the printed board assembly 10 soldering points per transformer 7 Reinsert all printed board assemblies and reattach the front panel following the opposite manner of their removal Make sure to fit all connectors and LED s into the according holes in the front and rear panel Tighten all locking screws Reinsert the interface board if you have previously removed it 8 Re install the cover plate as described above 9 5 INTERNAL SETTINGS 9 3 3 How to install Interface Boards RS 485 Interface NRS 90256 EDP No 121 785 RS 232 Interface NRS 90258 EDP No 121 790 Contents NRS 90256 1 x Notes leaflet NRS 90256 1 x Printed board assembly
137. 06R SHIELDING MODULE The module is meant for insertion on the rear of the DCS 400 rack frame providing shielding between DCS 408R and DCS 409R modules Specifications Dimensions W x x D 37 5 x 80 6 x 245 mm Weight 71 g DCS 406R DCS 407R CONTROL RELAY MODULE The module provides switching for audio signals line level or control outputs independent from the DCS 400 system ALF relays each with 2 SPDT Switching contacts Gold plated double contacts for improved contact Phoenix type connector for all contacts and coils 4 relay control LED s Configuring the audio distributor is possible through separating wire bridges Switchable monitor bus link DCS 408R 409R CONTROL RELAY MODULES These modules provide relay contact closures for use in Switching audio or other control functions The 408R is capable of switching of 70v or 100V speaker lines The 409R is capable of switching line level audio signals or control outputs The 408R can also be used to provide contact closures where higher voltages and or current may be involved e 5line relays each with 2 Switching contacts e Phoenix type connector for all DCS 409R contacts e 5relay control LED s e Configuring the signal distributor is possible through separating wire bridges e 12DCS relay modules can be cascaded Specifications Operating voltage 24V DC 10 30 Operating current relays off 5 2 mA to 7
138. 07 34 13 DPA 4411 Specifications Power supply on mains operation operation voltage 115 230 V AC 10 mains frequency range gt 60 Hz safety class Ue am Standby Oidling Normal operation 10 dB Alarm 3 dB Nominal conditions mains initial current inrush mains operation Umains V Imains A Pmains VA Pmains W Pout W Standby 0 Oidling 0 Normal operation 10 dB 40 Alarm 3 dB 200 Nominal conditions mains initial current inrush Pmains VA apparent power Umains Imains Pmains W true power Pout W output power Pv W leakage power Power supply on battery operation operation voltage 24 V DC 10 30 96 battery operation Standby Oidling Normal operation 10 dB Nominal conditions battery initial current inrush Pi W input power UB IB Pout W output power Pv W leakage power input characteristics electronically balanced nominal input level 775 mV 2 0 dBu 10 k ohms power output characteristics balanced floating nominal output power with mains supply 4 x 100 W according to IEC 268 3 nominal output voltage with mains supply 100V 70V 50V 20V with battery supply at 24 V DC 79V 56V 40V 16 V nominal load impedance 100 ohms 50 25 4 ohms minimal allowable output impedance 100 W output power 200 W output power 100 V output 100 Ohm 250 nF 50 V 50 V output 50 Ohm 500 nF 70 V output 50 Ohm 500 nF
139. 1 Block Diagrams COMP m 4 o 24v L GAIN 12V ANALOG E 1 SUPPLY AUX 1 AUX 1 UN R m u 5 DIGITAL SUPPLY NA AA INTERNAL MONITOR E Ca GAIN MONA PILOT AUX2 4 7 AUX2 R o MCLK BCLK 2 CHANNEL DIGITAL als 3 WCLK AUDIO PILOT A DIN MON 1 53 103 BOARD 2 n MG CONTROL o MIC LINE pM INB Lo RES 444 1 t 57 NRS 90233 JP1 LINE MIC 56 COMPRESSOR LIMITER NRS90216 Block Diagram 1 24V 1 3 JP1 C F 204 e o MIC LINE Ne GAIN A pnm ANALOG M n SUPPLY e o 42 h ree t DN lt 5 DIGITAL NRS 90233 ups COME 1 SUPPLY 4 PILOT m INTERNAL MONITOR MONA COMPRESSOR LIMITER MCLK BCLK 2 CHANNEL DIGITAL WCLK AUDIO PILOT A DIN 24V e MONB 2 2 23 93 SPI MIC LINE Me INB EA Ca RES ll 1 1 dd ET co LIN NRS 90233 JP4 a COMPRESSOR LIMITER NRS90217 Block Diagram 1 Block Diagrams
140. 1 us Description After closing the signaling contact C1 message Suiits runs the audio controls are set to prioritize this message After 3 Me the message is finished the DMM 4650 re enters the stand by 4 Start M01 mode 5 wt Audio 6 End 39 Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger S 28 Message2 80 off Step Command Parameter Start Message 2 1 C1 set Description Closing the signaling contact C1 message runs 2 Sum off Switches the audio controls to the priority of the message After 3 DMM 208 the message is finished the DMM 4650 returns to the stand by 4 Start M 02 mode 5 wt Audio 6 End Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger S 29 EasyRec1 80 C3 High gt 00 1s lat Step Command Parameter Starts the recording of Message 01 remote recording 1 Out C3 set starts by briefly pressing the input C3 button menu trigger 2 Record M01 stops by pressing the input C3 button again 3 Out C2 set Description Closing the signaling contact C3 remote recording 4 Dly 010 0 s runs starts erasing the message After successful erasing the 5 if Stop signaling contact C2 start recording is being closed The 6 Nop recording is terminated by switching the control input C3 current 7 if Stop input C3 on
141. 2 diagram on this page Ex pe The transformer has to be inserted at the E TB d position marked as T1 1 4a and 3 ENT fixed in place using the supplied cable 9 binder The yellow point on the transformer marks pin 1 WP figure 5 40 retrofitting input transformers e When utilized as output transformer Dj Prior to installing you have to remove the bridges that are marked with an X in the 5 diagram on this page 58 The transformer has to be inserted at the 2 e 6 position marked as T2 1 6 3 4 and fixed in sti Lit uu place using the supplied cable binder The sue yellow point on the transformer marks pin 1 figure 5 41 retrofitting output transformers 4 Re attach the bottom plate 5 46 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Optional Monitor Loudspeaker NRS 90209 Brief description Installing the extension kit NRS 90209 each DPC 4000 paging console excluding the DPC 4106 can be retrofitted with a monitor loudspeaker To prevent acoustic feedback between speaker and microphone the first is muted whenever the TALK key is pressed Also included is a 100V transformer that is installed inside of a wall outlet and is used for low impedance operation of the loudspeaker 1 prepared printed board assembly 89022 including 100V transformer and connection cords 1 bottom plate with prin
142. 20 21 22 23 A CIRCUIT 1 TO CHASSIS SWITCH B locking screws INPUT MODULE DC INPUT 24V battery IDENT ADDRESS switch REMOTE CONTROL connectors STATUS indicator locking screws power supply printed board Contents Perforinance Fealltes s ne bn peo Indicators controls and connectiohs ucc eto e a ah RECTE InstallatiOh sca EE riae A eor As E I EAE re Before the first Operation nn incite dev OE Ed ve E oce de eels 3 1 Mains peralion PEE 3 2 Battery operation 24V DO ne deer eue E A OUTPUTS E E T 5 1 POWER OUTPUT ised Lm 5 2 POWER OUTPUT for 100V 70V or 50V loudspeaker 5 3 SINGLE CALL and obligatory reception relays OVERRIDE 5 5 4 POWER OUTPUT for low impedance loudspeaker 5 5 MONITOR er Rab nn Nie 5 6 REMOTE CONTROL connector only NRS 90225 nee ee ehe 6 1 STANDBY indiCaltor iic oi em ta Peel hrsg anne ns DURER e LEER A ESO ung 6 2 READY IRndICalOrz ue uen a fret tete Foto 6 3 PROTEGT indiCalOt nu s tert over E ee
143. 34 overview of possible paging console functions Detailed information on the different functions is provided within the following chapters of this handbook 5 30 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 2 3 Control Panel Of The DPC 4550 DYNACORD DPC 4550 c amp song TEXT Es SPRECHEN figure 5 35 control panel of the DPC 4550 1 Selection Keys and LED s Depending on the individual paging station model 10 20 30 or 50 selection keys with corresponding LED s are provided The selection keys are used to pre select areas or groups for the reproduction of messages gong or alarm signals vocal messages or to assign programs pressed once ON subsequently pressed OFF The LED s indicate the momentary selection status also refer to the paragraph indications It is also possible to assign special functions or no function at all no function assigned to the selection keys Assigning functions is performed during the configuration procedure via PC When shipped these keys are factory pre set as area selection keys where key 1 area 1 key 2 area 2 key n area n 2 key and LED The ALL key allows the selection of all programmed areas at once for transmitting messages gong or alarm signals vocal messages or to assign programs One time pressing selects all areas The corresponding LED s and the ALL LED are lit Subsequ
144. 4 5 8 amp kg R2 EDITIO Ds ne ces gt R12 c 9 fat Rist 11 5 e 2 5 8 25 4 Se d C7 JP2 regeo 5 R40 R31 PHANTOM J MICH INE figure 5 18 retrofitting the input transformers internal settings location of parts NRS 90217 Retrofitting Input Transformers In case galvanic separation of the audio signals is necessary the module can be retrofitted with two input transformers This is accomplished by using an extension kit NRS 90233 per input channel When retrofitting input transformers please proceed as follows O e o m Disconnect the DPM 4000 from the mains power supply Loosen the two locking screws and carefully slide the module out of the slot Remove the two resistors of the correspondent input channel IN A R2 R3 IN B R10 R11 Solder the transformer for IN A in position T1 and for IN B in position T2 onto the printed board assembly Re insert the module into the slot and carefully push it into the DPM 4000 until it firmly locks in place Fix the module in place using the two locking screws and reconnect the power supply 5 16 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 1 8 2 Channel AUX Input Module NRS 90228 This 2 channel audio input module provides 8 RCA type connectors 4 x L R for connecting external audio sources such as CD players tape decks tuners DAT decks etc The module can be installed into slot 1 and
145. 5 26 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Pin Assignment Of RJ 45 Connectors The floating control inputs and outputs provide 2 adjacent contacts each The following diagram shows the assignment of RJ 45 contacts to inputs outputs OUT1 4 OUT5 8 1 1 4 1 5 8 OUT4 OUT8 4 8 OUT3 J OUT7 IN 3 IN 7 4 OUT2 OUT6 IN 2 IN 6 7 slave clocks OUT5 IN 1 IN 5 figure 5 32 pin assignment of the IN OUT connectors Block diagram DIGITAL SUPPLY INPUT DATA BUS REGISTER D8 D15 CONTROL BOARD CONTROL OUTPUT REGISTER figure 5 33 block diagram of the 8 I O control module PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 27 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 1 12 Flash Memory for Voice Recording Playback NRS 90205 Internal Message Recorder For using the internal message memory at least one voice message module NRS 90205 121648 needs to be installed in the DPM 4000 and the SW Message 121709 needs to be enabled Up to maximally 4 memory modules can be retrofitted The memory modules need to be formatted before the first use The Message Stacking Function is available together with the recorder Data number of internal texts messages 25 sampling frequency 48kHz sampling format 16 bit linear at a bandwidth of 20kHz 8 bit compressed at a bandw
146. 5 885 886 885 886 885 886 235 s o o o o Br K K K K Slo i 8d i 1 Pes SE a 8 gt E ra Ly 8 a pe 4 Ey 5 ERETI 1 A X C ox BLOCK DIAGRAM amp 2 X DCS 408 1 Lio OUTPUT ow 324V4 24V E ai a 52 ER se er 38 38 iz az 22 az 22 23 22 22 22 52 22 25 89 89 29 3 25 3 go 3 ap do 848 3 mc H a dab Br Ba A 16 es aj B Ar Ap 3 t l Er B Ar a tes Br Ba A EE B AF Aa est B T 4 a 5 co 8 a G 4 AA amp HERZ 1 i BLOCK DIAGRAM z DCS 409 DATA e a l q RESET 4 DATA OUTPUT p DATA M en15 n NPUT ow 24V a 24V KL USA and Canada Only For customer orders contact ElectroVoice
147. 7 le LED1 2x Rotary LED2 Encoder 2 B DC 24V4 LA po 5 4 gt 5V ud BLOCKDIAGRAM DCS 401 AV o 1 Jumper CN3 CN5 B ba d 1 Im 17 il 1 Ebo 1 FI 1 I I 1 Danas DATAS dc 1 H Lee 1 ew I dl iu 1 uns pu 1 E I hine 1 mus ee pog ene III m 5 i M 1 2 une Control Relay Module 11 La Block Diagrams CN J ax a zz CLA cues CURA nes ES A ones a RES A DATALA DATAS DATA namaa DATAS A DATA Extension Module DCS 405R BLOCK DIAGRAM ne DCS 408 409 to DCS 412 to DCS 416 420 to next DCS 400 Rack Frame eua UITHEHLBBBHLILBIGBHLBHBHLHIBILBLZA CULA eu cue A cue CULA RES A DATALA Datat DATA2 A DATA Datas DATA A Datas DATAS A DATA SEL DATA amp EL A en EmA EMA ENSA exe Ext A EN exe EN Backplane va Shielding Module DCS 406R BLOCK DIAGRAM Block Diagrams DCS416 Block Diagram
148. 7 Internet http www dynacord de DYNAC ORD Owner s Manual DTI 2000 DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE DYNACORD DTI 2000 DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE SEIZE DROP 15 12 9 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 45 12 9 6 3 0 43 46 49 12 DROP SEIZE TALK LEVEL PAGING MANAGER LEVEL TO TELEPHONE POWER DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 1 Contents Inhaltsverzeichnis Introduction This owner s manual covers the installation programming and operation of DYNACORD s DTI 2000 Digital Telephone Interface Since operating and programming the DTI 2000 is similar to the operation and programming of a paging console the DPM 4000 System handbook the DPC 4000 paging console owner s manual and the Help Files of the PC Designer software may also be useful information sources Characteristics The DTI 2000 is a micro processor controlled completely configurable telephone interface for DYNACORD PA systems and sound reinforcement systems The DTI 2000 is used for connecting the DPM 4000 System Manager to a telephone line or network to launch announcements from each telephone set over the loudspeaker network and to trigger signals pre recorded text messages and control functions macros of the DPM 4000 System Manager using a telephone set The DTI 2000 needs to be connected to an analogue phone line and is controlled via tone dial multi frequency dialling Using the supplied cable the telephone interface has to be connected to a pagi
149. 8 mA Operating current relays off at 24 V 5 5 mA Operating current all relays on 55 130 mA Operating current all relays on at 24 V 60 96 mA Operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C Dimensions W x H x D 37 5 x 80 6 x 245 mm Weight 225 g Relay Contacts Contacts DPDT Contact material AgNi 90 10 Contact load real 408R 2000 VA 409R 1A DCS 412R LOGIC INPUT MODULE The module provides inputs for control lines pushbuttons Switches and sensors allowing the evaluation of their individual status ON OFF in the DPM 4000 system e 12 inputs e Selectable polarity of each input e Floating inputs can be realized via the separation of wire bridges e Separate connections for power supplies of DCS 412R pushbuttons contacts and sensors e Phoenix type connector for all inputs e Maximally 5 DCS412R DCS412 modules can be cascaded T R 0 L 1 N P U T S 24V Specifications Operating voltage 24V DC 10 30 Operating current all inputs open 2 6 mA to 8 2 mA Operating current all inputs at 24V 60 mA to 83 mA Operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C Dimensions W x H x D 37 5 x 80 6 x 245 mm Weight 175 g Input Level Input voltage for off Low UiN x5 V Input voltage for on High Uin gt 10 V Input current at 24 V 4 8 mA Input voltage max UIN max 31 V Output source voltage 24V DC Output source current max 90 mA Specifications Operating v
150. 80475 including blind for the rear panel and connection cord 2 x Locking screws Contents NRS 90258 1 x Notes leaflet NRS 90258 1 x Printed board assembly 80479 including blind for the rear panel and connection cord 1x3 5 Disk with Software DRM 4000 Editor 2 x Locking screws Installation Instructions NRS 90256 NRS 90258 Turn off the power of the DRM 4000 and open the cover plate as described before Loosen the blind on the rear panel 2 screws on the rear Install the extension printed board assembly replacing the blind Tighten the two screws on the rear panel a A I Connect the printed board assembly to the connection board CN10 on the printed board 80478 MAIN BOARD using the supplied 20 pole connection cord 6 Reinstall the cover plate as described above and switch the power on Upon switching the power on the newly installed interface board is automatically recognized 9 6 SPECIFICATIONS 10 SPECIFICATIONS 10 1 Specifications Supply Voltage Nom Power Consumption 24 V Max Power Consumption 24 V Audio Inputs MIC LINE Inputs Nom Input Level MIC LINE Max Input Level MIC LINE Input Impedance MIC LINE Common Mode Rejection Limiter Operating Range AUX Inputs Nom Input Level Max Input Level Input Impedance MIX Input Nom Input Level Max Input Level Input Impedance Audio Outputs Master Output A B Nom Output Level Max Output Level Output Impedance N
151. A DUCKING MUTE 10 3 MIC LINE 1 MIC LINE 2 MIC LINE 3 MIC LINE 4 MIC LINE 1 MIC LINE 2 MIC LINE 3 MIC LINE 4 MIC LINE 1 MIC LINE 2 MIC LINE 3 MIC LINE 4 BLOCK DIAGRAM DRM 4000 DRM 4000 MIC LINE 1 MIC LINE 2 MIC LINE 3 MIC LINE 4 SPECIFICATIONS 10 3 Block diagram IWYN NOISIA3M anss 0007 WYA ZEZ SM 85206 SUN 2 ILON IAA TOSLNOO ONDIONG 3 S3 LIA 3OV RIHINI SBP SY 95206 SUN 2 ILON 619 85 Qu 110 do Sx 144 5 YIMOd 29206 SUN e ILON 3 x UAWHOISNVEL INALNO 22206 SUN 2 ILON Quo SEWSOASNYAL LNdNI 66206 SUN ILON SNOLLdO NVUDOVIANIOTT u 8012 Gosd 1s0d ANd Ln SAN 1002 10540 m T xn
152. A pre gong signal has the priority of the gong signal launching microphone terminal uht edem Background music always has the lowest priority level 5 2 10 DPC 4350 Paging Station Extension The DPC 4350 paging station extension provides selection keys only It is employed whenever a higher amount than 50 lines need to be accessed or when an installation s requirement of group and special function keys exceeds the existing amount of selection keys The DPC 4350 can be easily combined with any other paging station model The following list shows the amounts of maximally accessible lines for various combinations Combination Maximum amount of lines DPC 4106 DPC 4350 50 DPC 4510 DPC 4350 60 DPC 4520 DPC 4350 70 DPC 4530 DPC 4350 80 DPC 4550 DPC 4350 100 The extension unit is directly connected to the extension interface of the main paging station using the supplied 8 pole RJ 45 cable and plugging it into the EXT socket A single paging station then consists of two devices that report to a common address Therefore the central unit recognizes them as one single microphone terminal with an increased amount of selection keys Also from the viewpoint of the user the two devices act as only one paging station i e the selection keys of the main and the slave paging station provide equal access to their assigned areas groups and special functions During the configuration of the system using the PROANNOUNCE Designer software it is
153. ADY LED is OFF as well 3 LED POWER This LED lights as soon as a power source 24 V power supply or battery is connected to the DPM 4000 The LED does not light when the DPM 4000 s power supply is disconnected switched off or fails 4 LED FAULT This LED lights during a reset or when an internal watchdog error is being detected within the DPM 4000 It also indicates erroneous operation of external system components power amplifiers paging stations relay boards The LED is connected to the READY relay on the rear of the appliance which allows remote indication of system errors PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 3 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 1 3 Rear View hi ess We gear oem Tem AVIS RISQUE DE ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR BECA 5 DYNACORD 2161 dus DPM 4000 CAUTION SEE OPERATION MANUAL FOR MODULE iid SIGNAL INTERFACE FITTING AND CORRECT CABLES AND CONNECTION Ry 8 MADE IN GERMANY 1240 DC INPUT 2 GROUND 1 RS 232 REMOTE MONITOR OUT a B B B 3 27 READY 9 _ INP2 PC INTERFACE CONTROL 8OHMS 1 flo 173 7 NEA SZ exem 06 dBu IN gt e LU RICE 1 2 2 9e 5 4 figure 5 3 DPM 4000 r
154. ANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 57 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Dimensions of the DCS 408 module Size in mm Module height 20 mm The distance between the soldered surface and an electrical conductive mounting base has to be at least 5 mm Mounting insulators max 2 7 5 Maximally 12 DCS 408 DCS 409 modules can be a 4 2 oat cascaded Using the insertion bridge CN3 select the i connection of the supply voltage CN1 CN15 BLOCK DIAGRAM DCS 408 24V RESET EN P S BOO ll re ALLEE 5 58 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 44 DCS 409 CONTROL RELAY MODULE The module is for mounting on the rear of PA system rack shelves or inside of suitable distribution boxes It is utilized for switching audio signals at line level or for control outputs Features e 5 LF relays 2 switching contacts each binding post for each contact e Gold plated contacts e Additional ground potential binding posts for each relay s primary and secondary end e 5 relay control LED s e Configuration of the output distributor is performed through opening wire bridges e 2 connectors for cascading up to 12 modules e 2 binding posts for the connection of an external supply voltage sou
155. AUDIO t TX485 INTERNAL MONITOR PILOT F MCLK PILOT Al BCLK 2 CHANNEL DIGITAL WCLK AUDIO BOARD CONTROL DIN del COMPRESSOR LIMITER figure 5 25 block diagram MIC LINE paging station module Internal Settings 1 MIC LINE switching and sensitivity of the MIC LINE input The MIC LINE input s internal PAD switch S1 allows switching the channels sensitivity between microphone and line levels 30 dB The GAIN control on the module s front panel is provided to precisely adjust the input sensitivity range 40 dB In addition a MIC LINE jumper JP1 pins 5 6 is located on the printed board assembly which allows correctly configuring the input It is important to change the jumper accordingly open LINE closed MIC when changing the MIC LINE switch When shipped the switch S1 is pre set to LINE and the jumper JP1 to its open position GAIN setting MIC LINE setting MIC LINE jumper Input level Left margin MIC Closed 14 dBu LINE Open 16 dBu Center position MIC Closed 28 dBu LINE Open 2 dBu Right margin MIC Closed 54 dBu LINE Open 24 dBu Phantom power Closing the pins 1 2 and 3 4 of the jumper JP1 offers the possibility to engage 24 V phantom power for microphones that are connected directly When
156. AUX input sensitivity The input levels can be set in a range of 10 dBu to 12 dBu using trimmers VR2 AUX 1 and VR3 AUX 2 The trim potentiometers coarse scales are meant for your convenience helping you in adjusting the levels Potentiometer setting Input level 12 dBu a Left margin aa Center position Right margin 404840 2 MIC LINE switching and sensitivity setting for the LINE input The MIC LINE input s internal PAD switch S1 allows switching the channels sensitivity between microphone and line level 30 dB The GAIN control on the module s front panel is provided to precisely adjust the input sensitivity range 40 dB 5 12 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS In addition a MIC LINE jumper JP1 pins 5 6 is located on the printed board assembly which allows correctly configuring the input When changing the MIC LINE switch it is important to change the jumper correspondingly open LINE closed MIC When shipped the factory preset is switch S1 in the LINE position and jumper JP1 open GAIN setting MIC LINE setting MIC LINE jumper Input level Leftmargin MC Cosa _ iNE i6dBu Center position WC Cose 264 iNE Open 2d amp Rightmargin MC Coses 54dBu NE om 3 Phantom Power By closing the jumper JP1 pins 1 2 and pins 3 4 engage 24 V phantom power is possible for microphon
157. Afterwards tighten the four cover plate locking screws again 9 1 Internal Configuration Possibilities Several internal configurations of the DRM 4000 have to be carried out inside of the enclosure either by jumper setting or via Cut amp Solder bridges on the main PCB The following table provides an overview of the internal configuration possibilities and corresponding factory settings Funktion Settings Factory Settings Low Cut Filter MIC LINE 1 4 ON OFF ON DIRECT OUTPUTS Kan le 1 8 PRE POST POST AUX Empfindlichkeit AUX 1 4 6 4 dBu 4 dBu x a BRIG_BRIH ss ses LINE Sui Damm ELT lm a BR2F B sRUXi 4 Si SHORTED OPEN Ed ee o am BE En ae e S25 32 92H 804785 ded A er 2 8 28 P F M 22 aa Qr pu qu zd Vise I n E der Ps 5 1 ze 000 et F te teal 8 tt 9 1 INTERNAL SETTINGS 9 1 1 Low Cut Filter The four MIC LINE inputs provide switch able Low Cut filter 85 Hz 12 dB
158. Be sure to check the address and DIP switch settings The DTI 2000 has a Default Configuration which suits most standard applications Custom configuration of the DTI 2000 is possible using the PC Designer Software which is explained in detail in the chapter Configuring the DTI 2000 DTI 2000 Default Configuration DTI 2000 Parameters Default Configuration Remarks NAME DTI 2000 Default Name COMP OFF No meaning in the DTI 2000 BUZZER OFF No meaning in the DTI 2000 PRECHIME OFF No meaning in the DTI 2000 GERMAN OFF No meaning in the DTI 2000 DOSCHAR OFF No meaning in the DTI 2000 PTTPRIO INT No meaning in the DTI 2000 EXT 4350 No meaning in the DTI 2000 PASSW 111 2222 Level 1 Level 2 passwords GROUPO NONE ae fae No groups programmed GROUP20 NONE KEY1 SELECT 1 Call number table KEY2 SELECT 2 No 1 01 Zone 1 Es No 2 02 Zone2 KEY99 SELECT 99 No 99 Zone 99 KEY100 SELECT 100 No 0 00 Zone 100 KEY101 KEY107 DISABLED No meaning in the DTI 2000 KEY108 TALK 255 0 20 Talk in actual selection with priority 2 109 KEY112 DISABLED No meaning in the DTI 2000 The DTI 2000 decodes all DTMF dial tones as well as signal tones for the recognition of incoming phone calls pressed keys and determination whether a connection has been dropped or if the calling party hung up Each one or two digit number between 0 00 and 99
159. C 21 6 V 31 2 V power consumption 24 V min operation voltage 15V DC max power consump 15 V 120 mA 120 mA 120 mA 120 mA 135 mA 95 mA input extern Line default microphone 52 dBu amp B bridges closed LF output 6 dBu electronically balanced sealable alarm key with cover optional DPC 4350 extension Eu RJ 45 supplied connection cords E T MCN environmental environmental temperature 5 40 enclosure dimensions EM ae we 335x160x65 Fe x D x H in mm losk 8 x 200 mm ee EI gray white RAL 9002 micro structure accessories monitor loudspeaker BEE NRS 90209 NEL pushbutton switch NRS 90230 selectable 18 mm key lock switch NRS 90231 18 mm transformer balanced NRS 90232 Docs DPC 4000 Revision 1 1 31 lt gt DYNACORD PRO MATRIKX OWNER S MANUAL SS SS EP DPP 4004 DPP 4012 24V POWER SUPPLY RACK UNIT DYNACORD 4012 12A POWER SUPPLY amp MANAGER Performance Features 19 rack size with 2 HU primary sync switch mode power supply supports any 24 VDC modules in PA systems covered mains switch status indicator LEDs mains and battery smooth initial current inrush short circuit protected forced ventilation mains voltage 104 127 207 253 VAC internally switchable rernote output for the remote switching of power amplifiers remote output for the
160. CK d NOT OPEN product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons WARNING To REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TQ RAN OR MOISTURE The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is AVIS RISQUE CHOC ELECTRQUE PAS DJVRR intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with a damp cloth Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufactures instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus that produce heat Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped For US and CANADA only Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third pro
161. D All inputs and outputs are provided in 2 pole floating design and isolated from the DMM 4650 circuitry and adjacent lines Each input is realized as an AC opto coupler AC floa ting polarity Each output has a floating relay contact Each port connector DB 25 has 4 inputs 4 outputs and per port 24 V line and ground potential conductors By means of the 24 V DC voltage it is possible to connect external floating control keys as well as con tacts directly All inputs and outputs and their corresponding functions can be freely assigned or a factory preset can be recalled instead 14 1 12 PORTA 4 control inputs and 4 trigger outputs 1 fault output alarm on defect of the appliance 1 24V DC 90 mA power source 13 PORT B Control inputs trigger outputs and 24 V DC 14 PORTC Control inputs trigger outputs and 24 V DC optionally retrofitted 15 PORTD Control inputs trigger outputs and 24 V DC optionally retrofitted 16 PRE OUT RCA type socket pre listen 17 REC INP RCA type socket recording announcement 18 OUTPUT 3 pole XLR type connector audio output electronically balanced transformer can be retrofitted 19 INPUT 3 pole XLR type connector audio input electronically balanced transformer can be retrofitted Use of the DMM 4650 The DMM 4650 can be used in both incorporated in a rack shelf system or as stand alone unit The installer
162. DIO TRANSFORMER OUTPUTS B LOW IMPEDANCE A 100V BRIDGED 100V 1200W 8 Q 25V 70V 70V 25V B DUAL A 600W 49 x 10070 0 DIRECT OUTPUTS 0 70 100 ISOLATED OUTPUTS figure example configuration DPA 4260 with 100 V loudspeaker systems maximum load using 30 W 100 V and 60 W 100 V loudspeaker systems 21 Power Outputs Isolated Outputs 25 V The floating 25 V output is mainly used for driving low impedance loudspeaker systems 4 16 ohms Because of the effect of line attenuation the distance between power amplifier and loudspeaker systems should not exceed 50 meters It is further important that the total impedance of the entire loudspeaker network does not decline the nominal load impedance of the 25 V output For details on the nominal load impedance of the 25 V output please also refer to the specifications in the appendix AUDIO TRANSFORMER OUTPUTS LOW IMPEDANCE A 100V 100V BRIDGED 1200W 8 Q B DUAL A 600W Q9sSo99999999 P9 9999999999 10070 0 DIRECT OUTPUTS 70 100 ISOLATED OUTPUTS X 12 16 Q figure example configuration DPA 4260 with 8 ohms and 16 ohms loudspeaker systems at maximum load Power Outputs DIRECT OUTPUTS In addition t
163. DYNACORD PRO ANNOUNCE Y S E M General Description DCS 400 Series modules increase the ProAnnounce system s control capabilities in many ways The DCS system can be expanded at any time after installation for increased functionality The DCS control system consists of the following components DCS 400 main module chassis DCS 401R primary system control module DCS 405R extension module DCS 408R relay module DCS 409R relay module DCS 412R logic input module DCS 416R analog I O module DCS 420 monitor unit The ProAnnounce operating system defines the total amount of supported control inputs and outputs A ProAnnounce installation allows integrating a maximum of up to 8 DCS 401R control modules A single control module can host up to 12 relay boards of the types DCS 408R DCS 409R in any sequence In addition it is possible to connect up to 5 logic input modules 2 analog I O modules and 2 rotary encoders In total the ProAnnounce system can manage up to following amounts of different DCS cards 8 DCS 401R control modules 48 DCS 408 DCS 409 relay modules 10 DCS 412 logic input module 8 DCS 416 Analog I O module 1 DCS420 Monitor Unit Digital Control Expansion System DCS e 4 position Phoenix type connector for power supply e 2 LED s on the front indicating power e Internal backplane with system bus e Internal self resetting fuses DCS 400 19 RACK FRAME
164. E M Sei n General Description The DPM 4000 allows for audio connections and system expansion through the use of interface card modules There are three basic types of modules available for the DPM4000 They are e Audio Input Modules e Audio Output Modules e GPIO Control Modules Slots 1 and 2 located on the far right of the DPM 4000 as viewed from the rear are the DPM 4000 s audio input module slots providing two audio inputs per slot Each slot can be equipped with any suitable audio input module The DPM 4000 is shipped with no audio input modules installed Slots 3 and 4 located to the left of slots 1 and 2 are the DPM 4000 s audio output slots providing two audio outputs per slot Each slot can be equipped with a 2 channel audio output module The DPM 4000 is shipped with a 2 channel audio output module installed in slot 3 with slot 4 being left empty Slot 5 located to the left of slots 3 and 4 is a control slot which can be equipped with control modules for general control and query purposes Control modules provide different kinds of control inputs and outputs The DPM 4000 is shipped with one 8 channel I O control module installed In addition an extension slot allows retrofitting additional serial ports which can be used for the inter communication amongst DPM 4000 managers or to connect additional external devices For detailed information please refer to the owner s manuals of the individual
165. F77 READY u B 1 REMOTE CONTROL B INP2 MONITOR OUT INA SLAVE CLOCK OUT 1 E 2 OUT2 B INS OUT3 B N4 SLOT 5 OUT 4 INS NRS 90219 OUT 5 RING OUT 6 RINT OUT 7 B INS OUT 8 USA and Canada Only For customer orders contact Customer Service at 800 392 3497 Fax 800 955 6831 DYNACORD PRO ANNOUNCE S Y S T E amp E Key Features e 4 XLR MIC LINE input channels 4 stereo RCA type AUX input channels e 2 XLR audio outputs e Level and tone control Lo Hi in all input channels Input channels can be independently assigned to the output channels and controlled via contact closures Direct outputs for all MIC LINE and AUX channels Pre Post internally configurable e Priority control ducking function in the inputs MIC LINE 1 and 2 e Limiter in the inputs MIC LINE 1 and 2 with internally selectable threshold e Separate summing controls for both outputs VCA s in both output channels Remote control via 8 external contacts Optional RS 485 or RS 232 serial interface for connecting the DPM 4000 or a PC General Description The DRM 4000 is a rack mixer and or audio signal router offering eight audio inputs and two audio outputs The inputs are divided into 4 MIC LINE channels and four AUX channels Each input channel can be freely assigned to either one or both output channels offering mono two channel operation as well as stereo operation modes The DRM 4000 can
166. Flash bank and the soft key ok appear on the display A bank number can be selected using the cursor keys and ok together with the question sure are displayed in order to avoid inadvertent formatting Formatting deletes all the audio data of the selected memory chip Important message data that is stored in the unit should be saved in advance message edit play all or System setup back up After starting the procedure with the soft key ok the memory chip passes different tests Faulty blocks are marked and upon conclusion of the tests their number is indicated on the display This menu item is necessary for the installation of memory extensions NR 90205 into the DMM 4650 and updating the internal message management The sound memory bank 0 is firmly soldered at the circuit board Pos U135 Bank 1 is the retrofit pcb at position CN110 bank 2 CN111 and bank 3 CN112 After inserting the board and starting the format Flash procedure the newly installed message memory is accessable In case several extensions are installed it is necessary to individually format each one them Flash space Confirming Flash space with the soft key ok the number of available flash memory chips and the free space of the sound memory in appear in the display Software Confirming software with the soft key ok the display shoes Dynacord DMM 4650 and the actual software revision number Language Confirming
167. GS 9 INTERNAL SETTINGS EXTENSIONS CAUTION The following instructions for installing and setting extensions are meat for the qualified service technician only In case you are not qualified for carrying out the described tasks please contact your dealer for further assistance Do not perform any maintenance that is not explained in this owner s manual Otherwise you will risk injury through shock hazard Leave all servicing and maintenance to the experienced and qualified service technician To be able to make changes to internal settings or retrofit extension you have to open the DRM 4000 To do so please proceed as follows 1 Switch off the power of the DRM 4000 and disconnect the mains cord 2 Loosen the screws of the cover plate 2 frontal screws on the top plate 2 rear screws on the top plate and remove the cover by lifting the rear and pulling the entire plate off in the rear direction 3 When changing settings and or installing extensions painstakingly follow the provided instructions 4 Reattach the cover plate by fitting its front while slightly lifting the rear Now slide the cover plate to the front so that it slides approximately 7 mm under the front panel While lowering the cover plate s rear make sure that the frontal lug fixes the small upright indicators printed board assembly in place while the cover plate s rear notch fixes the small upright printed board assembly in the area of the MIC LINE inputs in place
168. I 2000 Turn the plug s locking ring in clockwise direction to establish a reliable connection Afterwards connect the supplied mains cord to the power supply unit before inserting the mains plug into a mains wall outlet DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 4 Se Up and Connections l 2 Unpacking The DTI 2000 package contains the following parts 1 DTI 2000 Digital Telephone Interface 1 power supply unit 100 240V AC 1 mains cord 1 interface cable for DPM 4000 connection RJ 12 to RJ 45 1 telephone cable RJ 11 to TAE 1 owner s manual Make sure that everything is complete and that nothing is damaged Otherwise immediately contact your dealer or the TELEX EVI Audio service department DIP switch settings The DTI 2000 provides a single DIP switch on the rear panel and two internal DIP switches Theses switches are meant for making specific basic settings which have to be made before operating the appliance for the first time Generally no changes need to be made during the later operation DIP switch for address and operation mode settings on the rear panel S201 A switch is OFF when it is set to its upper position Consequently the ON position is down OFF ON 12345678 The following table shows how to set addresses using the switches 1 4 SWI SW2 SW3 SW4 ADDRESS OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 CAUTION ON OFF OFF OFF 2 OFF ON OFF
169. ICE DESCRIPTIONS Pin Assignment Of DPC 4000 Connectors And The Extension Cord Connecting DPC 4000 paging stations to the DPC 4000 IN connector is established through the use of common RJ 45 extension cords where the conductors are twisted in pairs as follows pair 1 1 2 24 V GND pair 2 3 6 free pair 3 4 5 RS 485 pair 4 7 8 AUDIO AUDIO IN _ DPC 4000 IN RJ 45 exension cord 71 AUDIO RS 485 RS 485 GND 24v__ 2 24VIGND figure 5 8 pin assignment of the 4000 connectors RJ 45 extension cords The RS 485 bus may not exceed a maximum length of 1 000m mind the voltage drop for operation voltage and must follow a line structure short stub cables are permissible Twisted pair wiring is of special importance Using IY ST Y wiring is allowable 38400 Bd 9N1 Block Diagram ELECTRONIC PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG SUPPLY DPC 4000 DIGITAL INA SUPPLY 24V RS 485 RX485 AUDIO et TX485 NRS 90208 gt INTERNAL MONITOR PILOT MCLK PILOT A BCLK 2 CHANNEL DIGITAL WCLK AUDIO DIN PILOT B BOARD CONTROL DPC 4000 INB 24V RS 485 L AUDIO NRS 90208 figure 5 9 block diagram 2 channel paging station module PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 9 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Retrofitting Input Transformers In case galvanic separation of the audio signal is necessary the module is prepared for retrofitting two input transformers
170. ITCH 100k figure 3 connection of the power output POWER OUTPUT for 100V 70V or 50V loudspeaker systems If the distance between the amplifier and the loudspeakers exceeds 50 m it is recommended to operate the speaker systems using 100V matching transformers to reduce line attenuation This additionally offers a simple way of distributing the output power capacity In this way it is possible to connect a maximum of as many loudspeaker Systems as it takes until the total power consumption of the entire speaker network equals the power output capacity 29 of 200W connection impedance 50 ohms with the DPA 4120 respectively 400W connection impedance 25 ohms with the DPA 4140 Connection is performed using the 100V output 17 see also figure 3 In a few special cases it is also possible to operate the loudspeaker systems with 70V or 50V output voltage see also paragraph 7 Caution It is possible that during operation shock hazard output voltages can be present at the POWER OUTPUT connector gt 34V peak value Thus the connected loudspeaker groups have to be installed in accordance to applicable security standards and regulations see also paragraph 8 5 2 5 3 SINGLE CALL and obligatory reception relays OVERRIDE BYPASS Combined with the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 or other external controls it is also possible to transmit single or collective calls with obligatory reception i e bridging of possibly existing volume controls of
171. If the termination of the recording mode is not 8 Jump 14 recognized the maximum duration is limited to 10 sec Name and 9 if Delay priority of the message stay unaltered and the DMM 4650 returns 10 Jump 14 to the stand by mode 11 if Audio 12 End 13 Jump 07 14 Finish 15 Out C2 clr 16 Jump 11 40 Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger S 30 EasyRec2 80 C4 High gt 00 1s lat Step Command Parameter Starts the recording of Message 02 remote recording 1 Out C3 set starts by briefly pressing the input C4 button menu trigger 2 Record M02 stops by pressing the input C4 again 3 Out C2 set Description Closing the signaling contact remote recording 4 Dly 010 0 s runs starts erasing the message After successful erasing the 5 if Stop signal contact C2 start recording is being closed The recor 6 Nop ding is terminated by switching the control input C4 current input 7 if Stop C4 on If the termination of the recording mode is not recognized 8 Jump 14 the maximum duration is limited to 10 sec Name and priority of 9 if Delay the message stay unaltered and the DMM 4650 re enters the 10 Jump 14 stand by mode 11 if Audio 12 End 13 Jump 07 14 Finish 15 Out C2 clr 16 Jump 11 Seque
172. In this case the selection LED s indicate the areas groups the program is being transmitted into Keeping this key pressed and simultaneously pressing the STOP key selects the setup mode and the PROGRAM LED starts blinking Now you can alter preferences or make other changes as described in the chapter 5 2 7 Paging Station Configuration In Setup Mode When in setup mode this key is used to select the following parameter parameter selection ALARM key and Indicator Pressing the ALARM key starts an alarm signal that is transmitted into all areas The alarm indicator lights when launching an alarm Pressing the STOP key or subsequently pressing the ALARM key terminates the alarm signal What kind of alarm signal is being transmitted is defined during the configuration procedure of the PROANNOUNCE system Optional Key Slots These slots allow retrofitting an additional covered key and a key locked switch The front panel is already prepared for the installation of two 18 mm pushbuttons switches You only have to cut suitable holes into the front panel foil Internal fittings and cables are also already prepared The newly installed switches functions are assigned during the configuration procedure via PC e g second alarm pushbutton for transmitting an alarm signal into specific areas selective alarm or assigning the system ON OFF function to the key locked switch Detailed information and installation instructions are provided in
173. ND FAULT indicator 6 has to light The fault message is transmitted to the PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 see PROMATRIX handbook After releasing the external switch indication and message have to stay present Use the TEST button 3 to reset the ground fault surveillance function 9 3 NRS 90208 Input Transformer For Floating Balanced Inputs In case floating inputs are needed the inputs of the DPA 4411 are prepared for retrofitting input transformers a separate NRS 90208 extension kit is needed per input Note If a switch contact is located between the control amplifier output and the power amplifier input switch clicks might become audible during switching If this is the case incorporating input transformers can solve the problem Caution Unplug the mains cord and disconnect batteries before opening the appliance 9 3 1 Retrofitting The NRS 90208 On The Printed Board Assembly 81331 for opening the appliance please remove the 9 screws on the top of the appliance that lock the cover plate detach the rear panel by removing the screws marked A to D refer to the picture of the rear panel on page 21 remove the input printed board assembly 81331 see diagram 10 remove the 8 screws marked D that tighten the input sockets and detach the 6 flat cables CN1 to CN6 For removing the printed board assembly 81331 you have to unscrew the two screws on the side panel before installing the input transformer make sure to
174. No 121 682 Pin Assignment Of RJ 45 Socket And Extension Cord Connecting DPC 4000 paging stations to the DPC 4000 IN connector is performed using common RJ 45 extension cords where the conductors are twisted in pairs as follows pair 1 1 2 24 V GND pair 2 3 6 free pair 3 4 5 RS 485 pair 4 7 8 AUDIO AUDIO IN DPC 4000 IN RJ 45 extension cord AUDIO IN RS 485 AUDIO RS 485 p GND 24V 3 24VIGND figure 5 23 pin assignment of the DPC 4000 socket RJ 45 extension cord The RS 485 bus may not exceed a maximum length of 1 000m mind the voltage drop for operation voltage and must follow a line structure short stub cables are permissible Twisted pair wiring is of special importance Using IY ST Y wiring is allowable 38400 Bd 9N1 Pin Assignment Of XLRF Type Connectors The pin assignment of the MIC LINE input s XLRF type connector is as follows pin 1 screen pin 2 positive conductor pin 3 negative conductor In unbalanced configuration the pins 3 and 1 screen have to be bridged inside the connection plug SHIELD BALANCED UNBALANCED SOURCE SOURCE MIC LINE IN figure 5 24 pin assignment of the MIC LINE IN XLRF type connector 5 20 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Block Diagram ELECTRONIC PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG gt SUPPLY DPC 4000 T DIGITAL INA 1 SUPPLY 24V RS 485 i RX485
175. Note To ensure trouble free operation of the appliance the maximum permissible ambient temperature of 40 is not to be exceeded 10 Ground lift switch CIRCUIT L TO CHASSIS SWITCH The ground lift switch CIRCUIT 1 TO CHASSIS SWITCH 19 provides the possibility to separate the signal ground from the enclosure ground potential This is mainly meant to eliminate noise problems which are introduced through ground loops without jeopardizing the security In case several appliances within a single rack case or rack shelf are furnished with ground lift switches it is recommended to set all devices but one to ungrounded Set one appliance to grounded When set to ungrounded the impedance between signal ground and enclosure is 100 k ohms 100 nF It is needed to maintain EMV protection 11 Fuses 11 1 Fuses in the DPA 4120 fuse socket 11 mains fuse 230V AC 5x20 mm IEC 127 2 3 fuse socket 11 mains fuse 115V AC 5x20 mm IEC 127 2 3 printed board assembly mains fuse 100V 250V 8 5xRM 5 08mm IEC 127 3 4 86243 printed board assembly battery fuse 24V DC flat fuse DIN 72581 3 85270 printed board assembly battery fuse 24V DC flat fuse DIN 72581 3 85270 11 2 Fuses in the DPA 4140 fuse socket 11 mains fuse 230V AC 5x20 mm IEC 127 2 3 fuse socket 11 mains fuse 115V AC 5x20 mm IEC 127 2 3 printed board assembly mains fuse 100V 250V 8 5xRM 5 08mm IEC 127 3 4 86243 printed board assembly battery fuse 24V DC flat fuse
176. O OO0C 3 RS 485 COA X15 SPEAKER OO 14 AUDIO OUT 24V 24VIGND OOK 12 AUDIO OUT GND SPEAKER SPEAKER RS 485 RS 485 figure 5 36 LAN socket and RJ 45 network cable pin assignment EXT socket Mostly this socket is used for connecting a DPC4350 paging station extension Use the supplied network cable 0 5 m to connect the DPC4350 to the paging console s EXT socket In case no paging station extension is being connected utilizing the EXT socket for connecting a second microphone with TALK button or other external audio signal sources to the paging console is possible as well Detailed information is provided in chapter 5 2 13 Optionally Available Accessories EXT AUDIO IN 24V AUDIO IN GND SELECT SERIAL CLOCK DATA OUT DATA IN PTT figure 5 37 EXT socket pin assignment PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 33 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 2 5 Key Labeling Labeling the keys of paging consoles is done using label strips which can be slid in from the side The label strips for the 6 or 8 function keys are slid in from the right while the selection key strips for 10 20 30 or 50 selection keys are inserted from left Therefore you have to detach the correspondent side panel 2 screws and insert the labeled strip into the gap between the front panel and the front panel foil The most convenient way of printing the labels is to utilize the word processing software MS WORD A suitable MS WORD templa
177. OFF 3 Make sure never to connect two or more ON ON OFF OFF 4 appliances with identical address settings to DFE 5 the DPM 4000 System Manager since this ON OFF ON OFF 6 SER 2 OFF ON ON OFF 7 would inevitably result in data conflicts ON ON ON OFF 8 This also includes the address settings of the OFF OFF OFF ON 9 connected paging consoles ON OFF OFF ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON 11 ON ON OFF ON 12 OFF OFF ON ON 13 ON OFF ON ON 14 ON ON 15 ON ON ON ON 16 Switches 5 7 provide no function and should be left in their OFF position up Switch 8 serves for switching between normal operation and download mode Leave this switch SW8 in its OFF position up for normal operation Download mode is meant for updating the software and loading country specific settings by DYNACORD or one of its service centers Sws DTI 2000 MODE OFF Normal ON Download DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 5 2 2 Internal DIP switches S202 and 5203 To make any changes to the internal DIP switch settings you first have to remove the cover plate by loosening removing the screws on the rear panel as indicated in the diagram below Remove these screws DYNACORD Dri2000 JJ MADE IN U S A POWER SUPPLY o oo PHONO LOOP TO PAGING MANAGER LINE THRU Sm 12345678
178. OTE ON OUTPUT ON OFF function of the supply output for the modules MODULE OUT through the pulse contact to the negative potential Only functions when pin 11 carries an analogous supply voltage and when the internal jumper J502 is set to open can be used to remotely switch the PA system ON OFF The external power failure recognition only functions when the needed supply voltage is connected to pin 11 and when the internal jumper J 502 is in place It can also be used for controlling the PA installation whenever another phase fails In that case identical functions are carried out as if a failure in the mains supply of the DPP 40xx would occur Contact connected to ground is equivalent with an ext mains failure ON function of the supply output for the modules MODULE OUT through permanent contact to the negative potential Only functions when pin 10 carries an analogous supply voltage can be used to remotely switch the PA system via the PROMATRIX System ON OFF Negative potential for the inputs 1 and 2 in case the internal supply voltage is utilized for the remote control Control output for power amplifiers of the PROMATRIX SYSTEM without network operation and for power amplifiers of the DEM System signals the switching on command of the mains supply via contact to the ground potential 5 BATTERY REMOTE ON OUTPUT Control output for power amplifiers of the PROMATRIX SYSTEM 6 POWER FAIL OUT OUTPUT 7 DELAY OUTOUTPUT GND 24
179. Outputs 3 Summenpegel Sum Gain 3 it DMM 4650 it DMM 4650 3 Flash Platz flash space 1 Sprache Language 3 Restore Restore 3 Uhr Clock Passwort Hauptmenue Main Menue 1 Kontrast Contrast 1 Kopfh rer Phones 1 Passwort Password 1 Abschw cher Attenuator 3 format Flash format Flash 3 Software Software 1 Durchsage Announcement 1 Message Message 1 Play record edit 1 Titel title Priorit t priority 1 Play alle play all 3 freigeben release best tigen confirm 3 Checksumme checksum 3 l schen delete 1 Gong Gong laden load Editor edit Titel title Priorit t priority 1 sichern save 1 Easy use 2 Normal use 3 Special use Alarm laden load Editor edit Titel title Priorit t priority 1 sichern savel 1 User 1 User 1 2 User 1 2 3 Ausl ser Trigger laden load Priorit t priority 3 Stoppbedingung stop trigger 3 Schrittliste step list 2 Titel title sichern save 3 3 Selbsttest Selftests 3 MESSAGE General Messages are audio signals stored in the DMM 4650 as information alarm announcements or other often used texts Recording a message can be performed directly at the DMM 4650 or by means of remote recording Playback via sum output is achieved by starting a messag
180. P2 are open GAIN setting MIC LINE setting MIC LINE jumper Input level Left margin MIC Closed 14 dBu LINE Open 16 dBu Center position MIC Closed 28 dBu LINE Open 2 dBu Right margin MIC Closed 54 dBu LINE Open 24 dBu PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 15 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 2 Phantom Power By closing the jumpers JP1 pins 1 2 and pins 3 4 IN A respectively JP2 pins 1 2 and pins 3 4 IN B it is possible to separately engage 24 V phantom power when a microphone is connected to the corresponding input When shipped jumpers are set to open no phantom power Compressor Limiter The MIC LINE input channels embody compressor limiter circuits which can be incorporated in the signal paths via the jumpers JP3 for IN A and JP4 for IN B position if needed Normally the compressors limiters should be used to eliminate the risks of overdrive and clipping when directly connecting microphones When shipped the jumpers are set to LIN Mele GAIN HE S Ra 1 5 PHANTOM c 0 VR1 vq E Eu ir ae 10 iL JP3 mmm e COMP CECECECRCE 7 505 er C22 M C21 512 II 8 2 1 8 E 7 er ano x eie 5 ge 5 R53 103 R33 R30 T 285 d ZZ EA m EM o 2 800 188800 tt x N TE BN DA Ic6 OH 2 E E S Ine Bez e 2 5T 2 ORE MES 2 co C9 c
181. PLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE AVIS RISOU DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with a damp cloth Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufactures instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus that produce heat Only use attachments accessoris specified by the manufacturer 10 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been 05 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug grounding type plug has two blades and third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety When the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrican for replacement of the absolete outlet
182. QUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR The symbol of an exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle is to alert the user s attention to the presence of important operat ing and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance Please carefully read all instructions Keep the instructions at a safe place so that they are at hand for further reference Observe all warnings and precautions whether attached to the appliance or within the owner s manual Do not expose or operate the appliance next to water or in environments with high humidity Do not cover any ventilation louvers Mind manufacturer s instructions when installing the appliance For maintenance and servicing please refer to qualified service personnel only PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 2 1 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS N CAUTION 10 11 12 To prevent the risk of fire and shock hazard do not expose any appliance or module high humidity or water Make sure that no alien objects enter the appliances or get in contact with the modules especially no metal parts since this would very likely cause dangerous electric shock and or malfunctioning There are no user serviceable parts located inside the appliances or on the modules Opening appliance enclosures and or rack shelf systems can lead to dangerous shock hazard Do not open or try to reach inside the enclosures of appliances Leave installation servicing
183. REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance AVIS RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIOUE NE PAS OUVRIR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with a dry cloth Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Install only in rack with back cover Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer 10 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped 11 To completely disconnect mains power from this apparatus the power supply cord must be unplugged For US and Japan only Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety When the provided plug does
184. ROUTING Switches 16 This allows to connectthe input signal through to feed several power ROUTING Sw ict amplifiers with the identical program Use a permanent marker pen to mark the n 2 needed setting of the ROUTING switches 16 next to the ROUTING switch ON OFF push button symbol REMOTE INPUT 81331 diagram 1 input socket connection Connector XLR 5 M Connector XLR 3 M diagram 2 LF cable for coupled operation of two DPA 4411 24 5 Outputs 5 1 POWER OUTPUT All power outputs are balanced and floating When factory shipped the outputs are pre configured for the connection of 100 V loudspeaker systems Connection is achieved through plugging the supplied 8 pole Socket into the connection strip 19 Switching the output transformer allows to change the output voltage to 70 V 50 V or 20 V see paragraph 8 When set to 20 V operation of low impedance speakers with a load of 4 ohms is possible Caution During operation it is possible that the outputs of the POWER OUTPUT connector may conduct dangerous voltage gt 34 V peaks Therefore observing applicable safety regulations is mandatory when connecting and installing loudspeaker lines see also paragraph 9 2 5 2 POWER OUTPUT for the connection of 100 V loudspeaker systems The use of speaker systems with 100 V matching transformers is recommended to reduce the lack in performance when the distance between amplifier and speaker systems exceeds 50
185. RS 90208 INPUT PCB 81338 354653 Output Transformer NRS 90227 figure 6 printed board assembly 81338 showing the input transformer NRS 90208 and the output transformer NRS 90 227 Input Transformer NRS 90208 e Hr 81339 x 13 09 Remote PCB e 3 354676 vorssuo Analog Bust ckungsdruck 1 00 07 20 08 51339 Output Transformer 90 227 figure 7 printed board assembly 81339 showing the input transformer NRS 90208 and the output transformer NRS 90 227 8 5 NRS 90224 pilot tone amp ground fault surveillance The extension NRS 90224 is meant for insertion It includes a 19 kHz tone generator and a selective 19 kHz receiver with evaluation stage for pilot tone surveillance Also incorporated is a monitoring circuit with fault storage and display driver to guard the cable network connected to the output 8 5 1 Pilot tone surveillance Integration of the extension NRS 90224 provides continuous self monitoring of the amplifier This gets accomplished in the way that an extremely low level 19 kHz pilot tone signal is introduced to the signal path following the input level control LEVEL After passing the amplifier stages the pilot tone signal is filtered out at the output and the result is evaluated If the measured signal declines the pilot tone s predetermined threshold at the output or is not present at all the READY indicator 7 dims and the READY fault message relay drops When using the INPUT MODULE NRS 90225
186. RS 90234 DPM MLC DPC 4000 IN ji I This 2 channel audio input module is meant for the connection of DPC 4000 Series paging stations and other external audio sources The RJ 45 socket of channel A allows the connection of up to 4 microphone terminals plus paging station extensions The MIC LINE input of channel B is furnished through an XLR F type connector allowing the connection of microphones mixers and other audio signal sources The module can be installed into slot 1 and slot 2 Next to the electronically balanced audio input the DPC 4000 input connector provides a serial RS 485 interface and the power supply for the connected paging consoles see also pin assignment of the RJ 45 connector The MIC LINE input employs an internal switch PAD providing 30 dB of attenuation The GAIN control located on the appliance s rear panel offers additional control in a range of 40 dB The input is electronically balanced and prepared for retrofitting a transformer Phantom power can be switched via jumper If necessary a compressor limiter circuit can be incorporated in the audio path Specifications connections 1 x RJ 45 socket 1 x XLR F type connector distortion lt 0 01 96 A D conversion 18 bit linear Sigma Delta power consumption 1 4W operational 5 40 C temperature range dimensions W x H x D 37 5 x 81 x 252 mm weight 150
187. S 408 DCS 409 in any sequence Besides it is possible to connect up to 5 logic input modules 2 analog I O modules and 2 rotary encoders The PROANNOUNCE operating system defines the total amount of supported control inputs and outputs The PROANNOUNCE system can manage following amounts of different cards e Control module DCS 401 max 8 boards 16 rotary encoders e Relays modules DCS 408 DCS 409 max 48 boards 240 relays e Logic input module DCS 412 max 10 boards 120 logic inputs e Analog I O module DCS 416 max 8 boards 128 analog inputs outputs e Monitor module max 1 per DCS 401 Note The power supply of individual boards can be provided either via RJ 45 connection DCS 401 flat wire cables DCS 408 DCS 409 DCS 412 DCS 416 or via 2 binding posts 24 V that are located on each board The current that runs through the RJ 45 connection or the flat wire cables has not to exceed 1 A max The current for modules that are connected to the DCS 401 via flat wire cables may not exceed 700 mA max The connectors CN7 CN8 CN9 share an electronic fuse For higher currents it is important that under all circumstances the binding posts are used instead When cascading several modules it is necessary to provide the power supply anew via binding post connection Directly cascading up to 7 or 10 modules is admissible while taking power consumption features of the different types of incorporated modules into consideration All modules
188. S 90226 Adapter Printed Board Assembly characteristics 2 x RJ 45 sockets 8 pole binding post APPENDIX 99 OVENI 09 E 18 318 ar ymo 977 8 Sindu 3160 pasn gut Gaf L peso yd vado y ug 9 tyND Aiddns owod h 5 5 5 100 p o ME m gr EE TE 13180505 Fer LLL 9 m on e e LLL LH j Ms pru ees Lor gae is de 188 N var Zar NC 9100 NO IND 30V3831NI 39V3831NI SINANI 5108100 902543 290 310N38 91901 2901 0002 42 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 6 4
189. SONNE OR FFNEN DES GER ATES NETZSTECKERZIEHEN POWEROUIPUT 2 DYNACORD DPA 4140 121629 MADEIN GERVANY ADDRESS OUTPUT VOLTAGE KIN BAFOR23O Nj FOR 115V VOLTAGE SELECTOR fi5V 230 POWER f 1 ell AC MAINS INPUT 115V 230V 50 60 2 CAUTION FORCONIINUED PROT ECTIONAGAINST ASKOF FIRE REPLACEWITHSAVE TYPEAND VALUEFLSEINDCATED ATTENTION FEMR ACERPARUN CE MEME COMMEINDQUE A Fem WARNING ne ASKOF AREOR BECTRICSHOOK REIHE AMIS risque De choc RECIRIQUE NEPASOU RR CIRCUIT TO DC INPUT 24 1 ovas MGFOUNDED ere 20 19 level meter instrument CLIP indicator Test and Reset button TEST STANDBY indicator Fault indicator PROTECT Fault indicator GROUND FAULT Mode indicator READY Ventilation louvres Mains power switch POWER NO USER SER ICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVIONG TO QUALIRED SERVICE PERSONNEL VOR FFNEN DES GER TES NETZSTECKER ZIEHEN 18 25 4 0 0000 Q 12345 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 DYNACORD DPA 4140 121620 MADEIN GERMANY D DRESS OUTPUT VOLTAGE Mains power connector AC MAINS INPUT Mains fuse FUSE Mains VOLTAGE SELECTOR Input LEVEL control INPUT socket THRU socket REMOTE CONTROL connector POWER OUTPUT Ventilation louvres 19
190. SSS d en NOTE 1 Y 1 150A 15 the maximum a 22 7 dig 5 85222 2 shared by Lb egre Q B p m and must be shared by the output pins Foo 7 50 Bill B1 BOOL Dh 4 F002 7 58 65 g2 B002 C F003 7 5 BOO3 B020 F004 7 5A B4 1 B4 004 L 3 240 OUTPUT F005 7 58 B5 11 B5 NOTE 1 E001 1 0 006 7 5A B6 1 B6 006 N F007 7 54 B007 12U 65Ah 344 Mi MN i F008 7 5 Be I 0002 pool l lt gt 009 7 50 009 4 gt 1N4002 1N4002 F010 7 58 510 1 BIO Bolo 5021 FOI 7 56 SR 11 B11 B011 24U OUTPUT 122 5 21 12 012 F013 7 Ba B13 013 F a4la4 014 7 50 4 B14 014 017 1 DISCHARGE BATTERY 17 4 CONTROL CONTROL 6 RU REO et ee DEM 317B GARANTIE Das Werk leistet Garantie f r alle nachweis baren Material und Fertigungsfehler f r die Dauer von 36 Monaten ab Verkauf Garan tieleistungen werden nur dann anerkannt wenn g ltige d h vollst ndig ausgef llte Garantieunterlagen vorliegen Von der Ga rantie ausgenommen sind alle Sch den die durch falsche oder unsachgem e Be dienung verursacht werden Bei Fremdein griffen oder eigenm chtigen nderungen erlischt jeder Garant
191. Separate NRS 90208 extensions consisting of audio transformer and insulation plate each are needed per input channel When retrofitting the transformers please proceed as follows 1 2 3 4 Disconnect the DPM 4000 from the mains power supply Loosen the two locking screws and carefully slide the module out of the slot Remove the two resistors of the corresponding input channel IN A R6 R7 IN B R3 R8 Place the insulation plate between the transformer and the printed board assembly and solder the transformer to position T1 for IN A or to position T2 for IN B Re insert the module into the slot and carefully push it into the DPM 4000 until it firmly locks in place Fix the module in place using the two locking screws and reconnect the power supply figure 5 10 retrofitting the input transformers location of parts NRS 90215 5 10 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 1 6 MIC LINE 2 AUX Input Module NRS 90216 This 2 channel audio input module is meant for the connection of external audio sources of any kind Channel A employs two switched AUX inputs with 4 RCA type connectors 2 x L R for CD players tape decks tuners DAT decks etc The MIC LINE input of channel B is provided through an XLRF type connector allowing the connection of microphones mixers and other similar sources The module can be inserted in slot 1 and slot 2 Input lev
192. T PIN 1 SHIELD m PIN 2 a PIN 3 b OUTPUT INPUT DYNACORD DMM 4650 DIGITAL MESSAGE MANAGER O Do 4 44 9 pri SOIIIIIIIIII DI o DYNACORD 1650 ron 2 9 92d ism 4 n n 2 ili eo da dp ber er i ENDSTUFE ELA ANLAGE POWER AMP PA SYSTEM 32 Remote RS 232 interface data backup General Data backup should be performed prior to new installations and programming modifications of the DMM 4650 This ensures that replacing an appliance for service purposes takes the least effort immediately providing identical functions on the replacement unit When setting up systems with similar functions more often the programming data can be copied using a ready made data carrier For data backup a PC with serial interface and a terminal program is necessary Please note that the guidelines of the manufacturer of data media disks tapes etc are to be observed for maximum data safety since they guarantee data integrity for a limited period of time only Using a medium transfer baud rate the backup of a device status including its gong alarm sequences and trigger backup presets lasts about 10 seconds If the audio data of the message m
193. T15A 32V DC fuse socket 11b F601 pole battery fuse T15A 32V DC at 230V 115V 1 Netzspannungsumschalter ie nur 4004 mains selector switch only DPP 4004 Un s Ses s Aufkleber L label mains selector DPP 4004 and DPP 4012 Netz spannungsw ahler DPP 4004 u DPP 4012 1 7 gt lu ARSTER FE N Ho HH on HET zm EXE DYNACORD 5 Remote Control Connector REMOTE CONTROL z T En a OFF z 5 mu 34 E23 99 2 E HE off oOO0nZz zXozizisi ZZZauxouzmcecksoc O0O0OfzmMOAa00 s n N n LN L LN s LIN B SES n figure 1 n O PROMATRIX SYSTEM REMOTE CONTROL 2 ON OFF MODULES 5 BATTERY REMOTE ON 6 POWER FAIL OUT 7 DELAY OUT 8 GND 10 24V IN MODULES 11 24V IN TOGGLE 1 ON OFF TOGGLE 3 GND 4 MAINS REMOTE ON 9 24V n LN a a o n LW Lo IN n L IN u LIIV o La figure 2 pin assignment of the remote control plug example for a remotely controlled application 1 ON OFF TOGGLE INPUT 2 ON OFF MODULES INPUT 3 GND 4 MAINS REM
194. TALK key For direct calls the BUSY LED also signals the status of correspondent areas free busy with lower priority signal busy with higher priority signal see indications When shipped there is no factory pre set direct call programmed Gong Chime Signal By factory the Gong key is programmed as a general call A gong signal can also be transmitted into any selectable area or group of the entire installation if programmed First the desired areas groups have to be selected either by use of the selection keys selective gong or with the ALL key general gong Pressing the GONG key releases the gong signal While the gong signal is being transmitted the GONG LED lights continuously or blinks also refer to indications The gong s priority can be set to 6 or 7 Therefore it has priority over announcements from any paging station except for the directing terminal priority 10 Pressing the STOP key cancels the transmission of a gong signal During setup mode this key is used to go back to the normal operating mode escape PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 35 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Text Message A text message recorded via the optional message module or using an external recording playback device can be transmitted into any selectable area or group of the entire installation First the desired areas groups have to be selected either by use of the selection keys or via the ALL key Pressing the TEXT key starts t
195. TPUT socket 5 6 The audio signal of the integrated monitor amplifier is outputted via this connector In standard configuration this output is set for the connection of headphones It is also possible to directly connect a loudspeaker with minimum load impedance of 8 Ohms To achieve higher output capacity it is possible to set the internal monitor amplifier to bridged operation Thus some internal jumpers have to be re set as shown in the figure below jumper setting for headphones operation jumper setting for bridged operation E 26101 E FL201 FL202 4 JS101 E FL201 FL202 4 JP101 e Mall a 5 GED DoDD a 5 E 2 Bg 2 JP102 EN e z d JP102 ER e d Gu G3 a qur Gi 26 a So S D E S 114 7 pus 5 fur Rus 8 figure 5 6 adjusting the monitor amplifier s output power via jumpers on the printed board assembly 80430 Extension slot The DPM 4000 extension slot allows retrofitting additional serial
196. To install the PROANNOUNCE Designer on your PC you have to insert the PROANNOUNCE Designer CD into CD ROM or DVD drive on your PC in the Windows menu select the entry Execute enter the correct names for the floppy drive directory and the software D PROANNOUNCE Designer Disk1 SETUP EXE First the setup software prepares the Install Shield Wizard for the installation of the PROANNOUNCE software During the following installation process the program will ask you to acknowledge several specific notes and preferences To accept the standard preferences you simply confirm the Next button In general the PROANNOUNCE software is installed in the directory C PROGRAMS PROANNOUNCE Additionally the sub directories C PROGRAMS PROANNOUNCE EXAMPLES and C PROGRAMS PROANNOUNCE PROJECTS are being installed Anyway it is possible to change the installation paths at your liking and you can also cancel the installation process at any time Now it comes to copying the files After successfully finishing the installation you can quit the installation software and open the PROANNOUNCE Designer application by double clicking the program icon PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 4 1 INSTALLATION 4 1 3 Starting PROANNOUNCE Designer Windows95 98 NT offers several choices to start the PROANNOUNCE Designer software Select EXECUTE within the Windows95 98 NT start menu enter the command line C programs PROANNOUNCE PROANNOUNCE ex
197. UT 24 1 ovas MGFOUNDED ere 20 19 level meter instrument CLIP indicator Test and Reset button TEST STANDBY indicator Fault indicator PROTECT Fault indicator GROUND FAULT Mode indicator READY Ventilation louvres Mains power switch POWER NO USER SER ICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVIONG TO QUALIRED SERVICE PERSONNEL VOR FFNEN DES GER TES NETZSTECKER ZIEHEN 18 25 4 0 0000 Q 12345 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 DYNACORD DPA 4140 121620 MADEIN GERMANY D DRESS OUTPUT VOLTAGE Mains power connector AC MAINS INPUT Mains fuse FUSE Mains VOLTAGE SELECTOR Input LEVEL control INPUT socket THRU socket REMOTE CONTROL connector POWER OUTPUT Ventilation louvres 19 20 21 22 23 A CIRCUIT 1 TO CHASSIS SWITCH B locking screws INPUT MODULE DC INPUT 24V battery IDENT ADDRESS switch REMOTE CONTROL connectors STATUS indicator locking screws power supply printed board Contents Perforinance Fealltes s ne bn peo Indicators controls and connectiohs ucc eto e a ah RECTE InstallatiOh sca EE riae A eor As E I EAE re Before the first Operation nn incite dev OE Ed ve E oce de eels 3 1 Mains peralion PEE 3 2 Battery operation 24V DO ne deer eue E A
198. V OUTPUT 10 24V IN MODULES INPUT 11 24V IN TOGGLE INPUT without network operation and for power amplifiers of the DEM System signals the switching on command of the battery supply via contact to the ground potential Signals the stable presence of the mains as well as internal 24 V supply voltage via 24 V output voltage internal resistance 1 Signals the PA system s ready for operation state via 24 V output voltage and can be used to control alarm gong summing modules of the DEM System Negative Potential for the output 7 Supply output for the inputs 1 and 2 cannot be used for any other purpose Supply input for the MODULES input has either to be connected to pin 9 or needs 24 V supply from an external source Supply input for the TOGGLE input has either to be connected to pin 9 or needs 24 V supply from an external source DYNACORD SPECIFICATIONS Mains power supply Operational voltage internally selectable through bridging Mains frequency range Power consumption in idling mode Power consumption at nominal load Battery power supply Battery voltage Current consumption in idling mode Current consumption at nominal load Current power handling capacity with MAINS REMOTE ON Current power handling capacity with BATTERY REMOTE ON Current power handling capacity with DELAY OUT Input current ON OFF TOGGLE Input current ON OFF MODULES Output data Nominal output voltage Nominal out
199. a Er Ep exe i ie Eo tate a 27 Elasn Space nist E Rm ma ORE RR lee eR eR oe 27 SoftWare npe ls vane PEE dan VP tre aha edet 27 Language EC 27 Backup ow e rd uere Re ERE 27 Restore es b axe u E 28 RS 232 1 elg Ide rp secreted nt ies Dede a heh ed ins 28 GIOGK are aba mates 28 SELF TEST ee rn ee pe 29 Generali ers aaa XE efe er Ttt 29 Operation menu self test 29 GONNEGHIONSE ee Siete rn Rede ER 30 Control inputs and control outputs Port 30 Gener le ae Bik ede RA TENEMOS eed 30 Control levels and 30 Inputs ceo EISE Tue E dod et en 30 au mere e tei ende 31 Installation example 31 Inputs 31 OUIDUS ori ee be erdt oats 31 Audio inputs and outputs 32 Remote RS 232 connection data backup 33 General rear VR ed am RES 33 Connection REMOTE RS 232 33 Interface 5 33 Backup Restore commands priority 33 List of REMOTE 34 Terminal
200. a typical PROANNOUNCE system installation including the DPM 4000 central unit paging stations audio equipment amplifiers power supply unit relay board assemblies loudspeaker lines and control board assemblies for external signals DPA 4410 8 ed 1 DPA 4411 HOA 16 DPA 4120 en 1 DMM4650 DPA 4140 id en T gt Bees 401 H 409 H 412 H 416 H 420 eeeeie Isis eee tse DPC 4520 DPC 4510 DEM mmmuumm mmm 4530 DPP 4012 eysrersietrs 3 e rS eis m i DPC 4550 DYNACORD DPM 4000 DIGITAL 4x4 MATRIX MANAGER figure 3 1 PROANNOUNCE System 3 1 General Overview The digital PROANNOUNCE manager DPM 4000 represents the central unit of the system It is used to control and monitor all connected components via several serial interfaces The chapter Single Device Descriptions contains all necessary information about the DPM 4000 an
201. address assignment addresses 1 16 Password Unwanted access protection in two levels via code numbers 3 digit normal operation 4 digit setup mode Pre gong signal Message pre gong ON OFF Buzzer Acoustic signal buzzer on failure or as alert and during an outgoing alarm signal Compressor Microphone pre amplifier compressor ON OFF Entry of date and time in the formats Date Time ttmm yy hh mm LCD contrast Setting the LCD contrast and or view angle The t and v keys activate deactivate corresponding parameters or increment decrement according parameter values For directly entering numerical parameters use selection keys 1 to 10 where the 10 key represents the 0 Pressing the ESC key returns to normal operation The setup mode is also automatically canceled when for approximately 15 seconds no entry or change has been made All parameters are automatically stored 1 Address Paging consoles accept the assignment of addresses between 1 and 16 The setting is generally performed using the numerical keys 1 to 10 where the 10 key represents the 0 For paging stations without selection keys the address has to be set using the und v keys CAUTION When shipped all paging station addresses are set to OFF no address Therefore it is important to assign a correct address to a microphone terminal before the first operation Within an installation terminal addresses have
202. aker line 4 ohms 50V 70V 100V fault message output via NRS 90225 collective fault message via READY relay fault message output via NRS 90222 PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 disruptive strength 1000 Veff error recognition threshold lt 50 k ohms 45 a DYNACORD PRO IMATRIX OWNER S MANUAL SYS T EMA DPA 4245 DPA 4260 POWER AMPLIFIER DYNACORD DPA 4245 2 450 WATTS POWER AMPLIFIER Features e 2 450 watts output power capacity DPA 4245 e 2 600 watts output power capacity DPA 4260 e floating 100 V 70 V 25 V power outputs isolated outputs e low impedance outputs direct outputs e bridged mode operation switchable e all outputs are protected against idling and short circuit e mains supply 230 V AC 50 60 Hz e POWER REMOTE function e service mains switch e active ventilation via 2 temperature controlled DC fans e electronically balanced inputs e routing switch for parallel linked operation e input gain controls e integrated audio limiters e power on switching noise suppression protection circuitry DC HF Back EMF output voltage overload limiters initial inrush current limiter output peak current limiter e 18 dB oct LO cut filter at 45 Hz e SIGNAL and LIMIT indication for optical monitoring e thermal overload protection for the heat sink and the internal power supply with PROTECT function e inputs transformers for balanced floating operation are optionally available XLR ty
203. al configuration of a DRM 4000 and storing it on disk is possible as well gy untitled DRM 4000 Editor Fle Commnkction 7 Du mu 52 Basic hode Coria Status DYNACORD DRM 4000 i En are Nana Trane Comment Two dependent tarira roce 73 Cheek WICVLINE E NICANE2 MIC UNE 3 MICALNE Trare 1 Tine 2 Frnt Ovens 3 li E lutpat Channels For Helo press Fl The software s structure and operation is as simple as possible and mostly self explanatory To learn more about every aspect of the software please read the following parts of this manual carefully 7 4 2 Menus And The Toolbar File Menu New 3 Create a new file Open 2 Open an already existing file Save Ctrl 5 Save a file Save As Save an already existing file under a new name Print Ctrl P e Print all parameters of the momentarily opened file Print Preview Preview of the page to print Print Setup amp Printer settings 1 dancing school drm 2 test drm s Sci bu dr Open the last modified file 4 conference room drm Exi Quit the program 7 2 SOFTWARE EDITOR DRM 4000 View Menu v Toolbar Change the status of the symbol bar visible invisible v Status Bar Change the status of the status bar visible invisible Note For low resolution monitors 800 x 600 pixels or less t
204. al data is utilized as test pattern and you are given the possibility to acknowledge the fault indication Power LED blinks within the menu self test page 29 Check sum Confirming Check sum with the soft key ok the check sum of the previously selected message appears on the display In case of fault this value is used as a reference for erroneous messages Delete Confirming delete with the soft key ok shows the question delete on the display Using the soft keys n no lets you erase the previously selected message Recording level An integrated electronic control automatically adjusts the input sensitivity of the DMM 4650 s Mic Line Rec Inp inputs This level setting remains unchanged until the question Select new recording level is answered by using the soft key yzyes before starting a new recording By using a short test signal marks the new setting of the control which is automatically stored Pressing the soft key ok exits the recording level menu Adjusting the recording level only becomes necessary when the connected signal source is changed or major level changes occur Remote recording It is possible to activate a recording via one of the control inputs ports A D An example given in the list of factory sequences S29 S30 on the pages 40 41 The message defined within the sequence is automatically erased before the new recording starts The example employs an in
205. an be set in a range between 20 seconds and 10 minutes via the internal DIP switch S203 Configuring the DTI 2000 The PC Designer software allows custom configuration for the DTI 2000 to match any specific application The programming procedure is equivalent to configuring a paging console Programming a paging console s function keys relates to the programming of a call number table for the DTI 2000 This table holds the assigned functions of up to 100 one or two digit numbers 0 to 99 The buttons 1 to 99 on a console correspond to the call numbers and the table entries 1 to 99 The 100 key represents the call number or table entry 0 respectively 00 and as standard another entry in the table is reserved for the talk function which can be activated from a telephone set using the asterisk key Using a DPC 4550 DPC 4350 paging console in the PC Designer software for configuring the DTI DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 11 2000 is recommended because this is the only way to gain access to the total amount of 100 call numbers accordingly to 100 paging console keys Connect a DPC 4550 DPC 4530 to the corresponding input at the DPM 4000 in the PC Designer Software give it a meaningful name e g telephone interface and open the paging console dialog with a double click on the paging console icon The paging console dialog allows assigning one of the following functions per each call number 0 99 respectively for each entry in the ta
206. ance 570 280 3 60 400 19 60 2 50 isolated outputs only Rated Output Power 560W 700W 700W 700W 600W 1000W 1000W 1000W THD lt 0 2 45Hz 20kHz Maximum Bridged Output Power 900W 820W 800W 780W 1200W 1180W 1160W 1140W THD 1 1kHz GENERELLPower Requirements 230V 50Hz 60Hz Power Consumption at 1 8 maximum output voltage rated load impedance 690 W 870W Protections Audio limiters High temperature DC HF Back EMF Peak current limiters Inrush current limiters Turn on delay Output Transformer Saturation Protection Input Connectors Euro style 3pin detachable or XLR Output Connectors Euro style 12pin detachable covered Cooling Front to Rear 3 stage fans Regulations The appliances are in accordance with EN60065 EN50081 1 EN 50082 1 Safety Class Operating Temperature Range 5 C 40 C Mounting Depht with Connectors 437 mm Mounting Depht without Connectors 377 mm Dimensions W x H x D 483mm x 132 5mm x 382mm Weight net 20 5 kg 22 5kg 28 DYNACORD PRO MATRIX OWNER S MANUAL b wY S E MA POWER AMPLIFIER DPA 4411 DYNACORD 411 AA WATTS AME FIFI Features Power amplifier with 4x100 W output power capacity according to IEC 283 3 19 rack size 3 HU unit that provides the following functions Mains operation 115 230 V AC and operation with emergency power supply of 24 V DC Output transformers for balanced floating 100 V loudspeaker networks 70 V 50 V or 4 ohms for low impedanc
207. and output lines For direct use of these presets installation examples are to be found on page 31 Factory settings defaults The user can edit these defaults according to individual requirements 5 d The data of the menus outputs standby and sum level determines the status of the DMM 4650 in stand by mode no sequence running A running sequence could lead to a modification of the outputs Upon completion of the sequence the outputs are switched back to their previous status stand by mode Menu Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Contrast 0 Backlight 50 Phones 75 Priority Prio1 33 Prio2 66 Prio3 99 Password Prio1 1111 Prio2 2222 Prio3 3333 Outputs all Low relay open except B4 High Bypass off relay open Sum Gain 0 dB Attenuation alarms OdB gongs 0dB messages 0dB announcements 0dB Language German RS 232 9600 Baud List of trigger signals Input Level Delay Trigger starts utilization sec type sequence Function see sequence A1 Off release S21 to S25 S31 and S33 to S37 wait for High at A1 return message for system ready upon release the signal output starts A2 high 500 1 dyn S20 stops each running sequence A3 high 500 1 dyn S21 start alarm message M00 A4 high 200 1 dyn 22 start DIN alarm pulse trigger
208. ansformer 7 Reinsert all printed board assemblies and reattach the front panel following the opposite manner of their removal Make sure to fit all connectors and LED s into the according holes in the front and rear panel Tighten all locking screws Reinsert the interface board if you have previously removed it 8 Re install the cover plate as described above 9 4 INTERNAL SETTINGS 9 3 2 How to install the Output Transformer NRS 90227 EDP No 121 679 Contents NRS 90227 1 x Output Transformer DCN354596 Installation Instructions NRS 90227 1 Turn off the power of the DRM 4000 and open the cover plate as described before 2 For installation of the transformer you first have to remove the printed board assembly 80478 MAIN BOARD Start with removing the EQ board 82228 1 by loosening its three locking screws and tipping the small board over to the rear Now loosen all screws of the printed board assembly 80478 15 Screws on the rear panel and 3 screws on the front panel which lock the sockets in place 7 screws and 3 bolts on the printed board assembly itself Also loosen the two locking screws of the front panel on the bottom plate of the appliance Remove the potentiometer caps from the 8 channel controls and the 2 master controls by pulling them off to the front Detach the front panel If an interface board has previously been installed remove it temporarily After slightly lifting the front of the printed board assembly 8
209. aracteristics 4 MIC LINE input channels XLR electronically balanced transformer optionally available 4 AUX input channels each with 2 RCA type connectors Volume and tone control Lo Hi in all input channels Signal Peak LEDs green red for monitoring the input level in all input channels Input channels can be freely assigned to the output channels controlled via control contacts optional RS 232 interface or from the DPM 4000 Direct outputs for all MIC LINE and AUX channels Pre Post internally configurable Frontal connections 1 MIC LINE input XLR and 1 AUX input 2 x RCA type connected parallel to MIC LINE1 and AUX1 Priority control ducking function in the inputs MIC LINE 1 and 2 controllable via external contacts signal level with adjustable threshold on the front or via remote control indicated via LED s on the front panel Limiter in the inputs MIC LINE 1 and 2 with internally selectable threshold 2 audio outputs XLR electronically balanced transformer optionally available Separate summing controls and LED chains for both outputs VCA s in both output channels 2 control inputs A B for remotely controlling the volume setting via external potentiometer also controllable via serial interface PC DPM 4000 media control or via control contacts Mix input for external feeds extension 2 x RCA type unbalanced with level control on the rear panel Send output for recording extension
210. arameters Additionally it allows controlling external devices with analog inputs Features e 8 analog inputs with 2 binding posts each e Voltages of 0 V to 10 V or potentiometers can be connected to each input e Reference voltage 10V binding post e 8 analog outputs with 2 binding posts each e Two DCS 416 modules can be cascaded 2 binding posts for the connection of an external supply voltage source or galvanic separation of inputs outputs and the PA system Mounting the module and establishing the connections are solely admissible when performed in accordance to VDE 0100 and EN 60065 regulations DCS 416 analog I O module printed board assemblies need to be grounded at their fixing points e g using a metal bolt Specifications Description Operating voltage Operating current max Installation Note DCS 416 analog I O module 24 V DC 10 30 96 160 mA Operating current all inputs at 24V 72mA Inputs Voltage range min max 0V 10V Impedance range ext min max 0 OQ 10kQ Maximum input voltage 50V Outputs Voltage range min max 0V 10V Output impedance 47 Q Minimum load impedance 2kQ Reference voltage source Output voltage 10V Maximum output current 30 mA Accuracy of I O signals 8 Bit Operating temperature range 5 40 Dimensions W x D 160 x 25 x 100 mm Weight 140g Retrofit kits NRS 90245 Potentiometer 10 kOhms PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook
211. ard conditions initial current inrush mains idling normal operation 10 dB alarm 3 dB standard conditions initial current inrush mains Fmains VA apparent power Umains lmains Pmains W battery operation SA d 713 562 200 362 1019 811 400 411 Pmains Pout W 44 0 23 368 263 713 562 200 362 1019 811 400 411 Pout W output power P W leakage power 24 V DC 10 30 stand by idling normal operation 10 dB standard conditions initial current inrush battery P W input power Up lg Po W output power P W features of the input nominal input level nominal input impedance features of the power output nominal output capacity during mains operation nominal load impedance frequency response distortion at 1 KHz and nominal output power 1 s ae 1 415 249 166 leakage power electronically balanced 775 mV 0 dBu gt 10 k ohms balanced floating 400 W according to IEC 268 3 25 ohms 100V 12 5 ohms 70 V 6 25 ohms 50 V or 4 ohms 40 V 60 Hz 20 kHz 196 interfering voltage A lt 1 2 mV 56 dBu features of the monitor output electronically balanced nominal output voltage 2 V 8 2 dBu nominal load impedance 600 ohms ambient temperature range 5 C 40 C dimensions W x H x D 483 x 132 x 345 mm depth with without connections max 400 mm 340 mm weight without extensions 16 7 kg finis
212. are separated by a blank character The execution takes place after a line feed command Return at the end of a line Parameter in are optional Bold characters describe factory default settings Cancel the data transfer with Strg C Gxx Command Parameter Function backup status The DMM 4650 sends device status System setup preset gong alarm sequences stop trigger trigger backup message The DMM 4650 sends device status System setup preset gong alarm sequences stop trigger trigger and the audio data stored in the message memory flash memory baud nnnnn shows current baud rate or sets the DMM 4650 s baud rate to a new value date TT MM JJ shows the current date or sets the date to a new value list Axx The DMM 4650 transfers the selected presets data to the PC in plain text Gxx For documentation it is possible to print the presets contents via the PC for further information see help command Restore CCCCCCCC The DMM 4650 stores the data into the stated memory the correct format is determined by the backup for further information see help command hh mm ss time shows current time or sets the time to a new value ver The DMM 4650 transmits the the software revision number T ubsequent characters are ignored by the DMM 4650 comment answer on off the answer of the DMM 4650 is switched on or
213. are subject to changes without further notice DYNACORD PIRO ANNOUNCE S S E M INTRODUCTION 1 INTRODUCTION Preamble Thank you for choosing the DYNACORD PROANNOUNCE System With the PROANNOUNCE System you purchased a high quality product which is going to satisfy your highest demands This extraordinarily flexible and versatile system allows the configuration of either small or complex installations as well Most functions are realized through software modules which when compared to conventional PA systems not only reduces the amount of cabling but also the costs Next to extensive audio signal generating and distribution functions the PROANNOUNCE system provides ample control functions On one hand these functions offer the possibility to register and rate external events as well as to control different external components on the other hand Boolean operations and relations to the internal state of the system can be programmed as well To be able to take advantage of all possibilities that are offered by the PROANNOUNCE system we would like to ask you to read this handbook carefully For getting a quick overview about the PROANNOUNCE system s components and functions we recommend consulting the chapter System Description Owner s Manual This handbook provides all the information that is necessary for planning and installing a PROANNOUNCE system The handbook is structured in different chapters each explaining a specific c
214. as to light Utilizing external switch to connect one pole of the 100V loudspeaker network via a 47 ohms resistor for approximately 5 seconds to ground potential the corresponding red GROUND FAULT indicator 6 has to light and the READY fault message relay of the INPUT MODULE NRS 90225 drops while the green READY indicator 7 stays lit After releasing the button the indication and the fault message are maintained The TEST button 3 has to be used to reset the ground fault surveillance function For further details on checking the function with the REMOTE MODULE NRS 90222 being included in your installation please refer to the PROMATRIX handbook 9 19 case and 19 rack shelf system installation Note Operation of the power amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 with enclosure cover plates detached is strictly prohibited When mounting the power amplifiers within rack cases or rack shelf systems make sure to provide sufficient airflow The space between the rear panel of the amplifier and the inner wall of the rack case has to be at least 60 mm x 330 mm A free space of at least 100 mm above the rack shelf system is needed to provide sufficient air circulation Since it is possible that during operation the temperature inside the rack system increases by 10 C the maximum allowable ambient temperatures of the rest of the incorporated modules and appliances within a specific rack shelf or rack case have to be taken into careful consideration
215. at 5 hours discharge with discharge current for 5 hr Capacity at 1 hour discharge with discharge current for 1 hr DEM 317 24 V 19 5 V 65 Ah 3 25 A 55 Ah 39 Ah 33 Ah 11A 39 A 65A 150A 300 mA 21 ca 50 mOhm 27 3V 40 mV C 4A 2x178 mm 30 0 kg A 30 5 kg B 4 Capacity at discharge with the current in A corresponding with the nominal capacity in Ah CONTROL 89017 BATTERY CONTROL e001 l Boi 6 016 F001 amm 240 OUTPUT CHARGE CURRENT TO LOAD amm MINUS ra LOW VOLTAGE amm 24U OUTPUT E001 DISCHARGE _ TO DEM 207 CONTROL _ 14 1 amm MINUS TEMPERATURE CONTROL TEMPERATURE L Block diagram 12U7388h 12U7388h PAR EAN To 83007 Jo 1 ROO B002 _Boo 4 5 FOI4 7 50 14 11 B14 B014 L ta SI LLL a BIER GER NOTE 1 100A 1s the maximum a Se e ee ee ee E current available f 8521 9 1 x the a Be S 5 85219 2 M Sees em uma amen msi a a _ must be shared by Fool 2 the output pins AILAI p Bl 1 Bi BOOL EOOLA F002 7 5A 18020 p Be He 79 F003 7 5A B003 203 7 59 B3 003 f F004 7 5A 24U OUTPUT 001 0 84 1 B NOTE 1 N 299 755 25 1185 005 344121 TEE Re FO06 2 54
216. ated on the printed board assembly 85270 DPA 4120 respectively 85268 DPA 4140 see also paragraph 11 figure 10 and 11 The cable used for battery connection has to be at least 1 5 mm in diameter DPA 4120 respectively 2 5 mm DPA 4140 Using these diameters the cable length for the one way distance should not exceed 4 0 m max voltage drop 1V Caution The DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 are to be operated only using ungrounded batteries or batteries with grounded negative pole Operation with grounded positive pole is not permissible 4 INPUT The electronically balanced INPUT 14 providing a sensitivity of 775mV OdBu is meant for the connection of control amplifiers In case it is intended to supply several power amplifiers with identical input signals these signals can be taken from the THRU connector 15 see also figure 1 and 2 The input is prepared to be retrofitted with a input transformer In case a floating input is needed it is necessary to install the optional extension NRS 90208 see also paragraph 8 3 On the general input module NRS 90225 the input level is set with the level control 13 For the remote control module NRS 90222 the input level is determined by the setting of the internal electronic level control of the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 please also refer to the PROMATRIX handbook 28 THRU figure 1 connections of the input sockets Connector XLR 3 M Connector XLR 3 F 3 1 2 2 1 3
217. ation without the need for additional hardware An active RS 232 connection between your computer and the DRM 4000 is necessary to be able to access this functionality For details on individual parameters please refer to chapter 8 BASIC CONFIGURATION Basic Configuration Corirol Staus DYNACORD DRM 4000 Name and Comment Nene Comment FO Input Channel MICALINE 1 MILAUNE 2 MICAINEA ARI EICH axs AMA Label Tiara 1 Oce m Peri NE BE NE a Mono A Moro B Mono A 7 Pia Dvenids Disable z Disable z Ousput Channels MASTER MASTER B Label Lebel 1 Hal2 5 Mute 5 _ Cortect4 No Mute Momus zif Test Duck 2 Duk x Ducking Aub Ducke 2 41 Sse Eada 9 Control Inputs View Status Activating View Status displays for all parameters the momentarily active state of the DRM 4000 The green LED s next to the corresponding Soft keys indicate the momentarily active control inputs Control Inputs Contact 1 Test Contact2 rss Activating Test allows the simulation of setting control inputs by pres Contat 9 sing the according soft keys The green LED s nextto the corresponding C View Status Contact4 9 soft keys indicate the momentarily active control inputs and parameter
218. aware of the fact that all REMOTE commands are transient and are set back to their default values CHANGE priority 0 upon switching the unit s power on or after resetting the device ASCII command Comment SERVICE HB value SERVICE CC ON value SERVICE CC OFF value REMOTE PRIO value Value 60 0 OFF Value NONE 1 8 Value NONE 1 8 see above see above see above Value 0 255 0 lowest 255 highest priority e g REMOTE PRIO 100 REMOTE PRIO Write access assigns a priority to REMOTE commands Read access reads a REMOTE command s actual priority EDIT REMOTE MIC LINE1 ROUTING value e g EDIT REMOTE MIC_LINE1 ROUTING MONO A EDIT JREMOTE MIC LINE1 ROUTING Value NO CHANGE OFF MONO A MONO B DUAL Write access sets the routing of MIC LINE 1 via remote mind priorities Read access reads the routing of MIC LINE 1 which has been set via remote EDIT REMOTE MIC LINE1 OVERRIDE value e g EDIT REMOTE MIC LINE1 OVERRIDE ON EDIT REMOTE MIC_LINE1 OVERRIDE Value ON OFF Write access activates or deactivates priority override of MIC LINE 1 via remote mind priorities Read access returns the actual status ROUTING for MIC_LINE2 MIC LINE4 see MIC_LINE1 OVERRIDE for LINE2 see MIC LINE1 EDIT REMOTE MIC LINEZ4 EDIT REMOTE AUX1 value e g EDIT REMOTE AUX1 STEREO EDIT REMOTE AUX1
219. ble 1 Disabled The call number nn has no function 2 Stop Stops the actually active audio signals chime text message playback alarm depending on the programmed stop function and priority 3 Clear Clears the actual zone or group selection 4 Select This function selects a zone group groups may include up to 100 zones or all zones collective call for an announcement or text message playback 5 Text This function starts text message playback in permanently pre selected zones or groups or in the actual zone selection Assigning priorities is possible 6 Talk This function starts an announcement in selected zones or groups It also provides the possibility to initiate a collective call in all zones A permanently assigned zone or group as well as the actual zone selection can be defined as a target Assigning priorities as well as programming a pre chime signal is possible A special entry in the table is reserved for the standard talk function corresponds to the talk button 108 which can be activated from a telephone set using the asterisk key 7 Macro This function starts a macro via its pre defined macro number which of course is only possible when a corresponding macro has been programmed in the DPM 4000 A typical call number table might look like that Phone No Function Parameters Priority Tone Dial Code 1 01 SELECTION Zone1 O Selects Zone 1 2 or 02 SELECTION Zone2 0
220. ble diameter different maximum cable lengths are possible The following tabulations show some examples for cable diameters of 0 6 mm and 0 8 mm and with supply voltages of 24 V respectively of 21 6 V in emergency supply operation For precise calculation a calculation chart running under MS EXCEL 97 is provided A Single Paging Station On A Single DPM Line Cable type Paging console model Cable length m Cable length m 21 6 V emergency 24V supply JY St Y 4x2x0 6 DPC4510 4106 230 395 DPC4520 225 385 DPC4550 220 375 JY St Y 4x2x0 8 DPC4510 4106 700 DPC4520 690 DPC4550 A Single Paging Station Extension On A Single DPM Line Cable type Paging console model Cable length m Cable length m 21 6 V emergency 24V supply Y St Y 4x2x0 6 DPC4510 DPC4350 150 260 Bea DPC4350 150 255 DPc4550 DPC4350 DPC4350 45 250 Y St Y 4x2x0 8 DPC4510 DPC4350 270 460 DPC4520 DPC4350 DPC4550 DPC4350 260 450 Four Paging Stations DPC4550 Extensions On A Single DPM Line Cable type Paging console model Cable length m Cable length m 21 6 V emergency 24V supply 4 x DPC4550 40 4x CC 1 visyy 4 x DPC4550 75 4 x DPC4350 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 49 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 3 4000 PROANNOUNCE Power Amplifier 5 3 1 Characteristics The PROANNOUNCE system includes four DPA 4000 S
221. c Step Command Parameter DIN alarm alarm text DIN alarm Sequence start key B2 1 Out A1 set ON Stop with key B2 OFF 2 wt In A1 High Description Turns the sound reinforcement system on relay A1 3 Out B4 clr and waits for acknowledgment input A1 system ready When 4 B2 set the system is ready the output B4 music program off is being 5 Out B3 set opened and B2 B3 mandatory reception E D gets closed After 6 Out A3 set closing the signaling contacts alarm signal A2 alarm text 7 Out A2 set the audio controls are set to alarm priority The output in se 8 Sum off quence is alarm signal 5 sec A34 1 sec pause alarm text 9 DMM 5dB MOO 1 sec pause alarm signal 5 sec A34 1 sec pause etc 10 Stat 34 until the input B2 Low no current terminates the sequence 11 wt Audio Upon termination the DMM 4650 returns to stand by mode 12 Dly 001 0s 13 wt Delay 14 DMM 2dB 15 Start M 00 16 wt Audio 17 Dly 001 0s 18 wt Delay 19 if Stop 20 End 21 Jump 09 22 End 38 Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger S25 Vierking 89 off Step Commend Parameter 4 tone gong lc Description Turns the sound reinforcement system on relay A1 2 Wt and waits for acknowledgment input A1 system ready When 3 Out B4 clr the system is ready the output B4
222. cables The XLR type input connectors pin assignment is in accordance to the IEC 268 standard In case the controlling device does not supply balanced output connectors it is also possible to configure the connectors for unbalanced operation Therefore the common ground pin 1 has to be connected to the input pin 3 The audio signal is now solely fed through the input pin 2 So to be able to entirely make use of all the advantages the electronically balanced input stage offers like the suppression of humming and interference noise it is beneficial to re establish balanced input connec tion whenever possible In case floating inputs are needed the inputs are ready to be retrofitted with input transformers one optional available extension kit NRS 90208 308840 per channel is necessary Instructions On How To Install NRS 90208 Extension Kits e unplug the power amplifier from the mains e detach all screws holding the cover plate of the appliance e lift and remove the cover plate e disconnect the flat wire cable of the printed board assembly 81340 1 e detach all screws holding the printed board assembly 81340 1 e remove the printed board assembly 81340 1 and unsolder the resistors R106 R109 e attach insulators to the input transformers according to the corespondent marks on the printed board assembly e re assemble the appliance by performing all steps described in the opposite order
223. cally connected to the inputs of an external power amplifier When incorporating the DRM 4000 in an intercom system the MASTER outputs are connected to the inputs of the consecutive central unit e g DPM 4000 or mixer router 4 3 2 SEND outputs The Pre Fader Master A B signals are present at the SEND outputs 20 carrying the summed audio signals with the volume levels being independent from the setting of the MASTER controls Therefore when connecting the SEND OUT to the MIX IN of a following unit allows comfortably cascading several DRM 4000 units which of course doubles the amount of available input channels For the case that additional input channels are needed cascading up to eight DRM 4000 units is possible Using the SEND outputs for any other application that requires a summed signal input is possible as well Examples for such applications are the connection of open reel recorders tape decks or DAT Minidisc devices for recording purposes as well as the incorporation of a monitor power amplifier or an active monitor speaker system Since the SEND outputs are unbalanced cable length matters Using long cables is not recommended 4 3 3 DIRECT OUTPUTS The eight input channels provide DIRECT OUTPUTS 18 each 12 unbalanced low impedance outputs are provided via the Phoenix type terminal on the rear of the appliance 4 x MIC LINE and 4 x 2 AUX allowing separately outputting the input signals for pre listening monitoring or othe
224. ch are valid in the stand by mode no sequence running With the cursor keys one output A1 to D4 is selected and set to low contact open or high contact closed depending on the application This modification is effective immediately This menu item can also be used to test the functions of the DMM 4650 s outputs during the installation The EXIT key switches to the prior menu level Bypass Confirming bypass with the soft key ok the message bypass is off or on appears on the display This menu item allows the setting of the audio relay s state input output when in the stand by mode no sequence running The cursor keys are used to change the status This change is immediately effective The EXIT key switches to the prior menu level 26 Sum level Confirming sum level with the soft key enables the setting of the digital audio control SUM see audio functions Using the cursor keys this value in dB steps can be changed and is effective at the audio output in stand by mode no sequence running presuming that the bypass relay is off A currently running sequence can change the SUM setting Anyway when this sequence is finished stand by status the level that was selected previously in this menu is automatically reestablished The EXIT key switches to the prior menu level Attenuation Confirming attenuation with the soft key ok provides the possibility to set an attenuation level in
225. ch is being connected to the monitor output Automatic pilot tone surveillance of the entire input stage is integrated as well Specifications figure 5 15 2 channel MIC LINE input module description DPM MLI 2 channel MIC LINE input module NRS 90217 connections 2 x XLRF type connectors audio inputs 2 x electronically balanced transformers are optionally available nominal input level MIC 54 dBu 14 dBu 1 5 mV 155 mV LINE 24 dBu 16 dBu 50 mV 5V max input level MIC 5 dBu 1 4V in limiter operation LINE 30 dBu 25V input impedance MIC 3 6 kQ LINE 10 KQ Input balancing gt 30 dB phantom power 24V 20 mA switched via jumper frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB SIN ratio gt 95 dB A weighted distortion 0 01 96 AID conversion 18 bit linear Sigma Delta phantom power 24V 20 mA switched via jumper power consumption operational temperature range 5 40 C dimensions W x Hx D 37 5 x 81 x 252 mm weight 160g 186 g including 2 x NRS 90233 extensions NRS 90233 input transformer for 1 MIC LINE input order No 121 682 5 14 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Pin Assignment Of XLRF Type Connectors The pin assignment of the MIC LINE input s XLRF type connector is as follows pin 1 screen pin 2 positive conductor pin 3 negative conductor In unbalanced configuration the pins 3 and 1 screen have to be bridged inside the connect
226. ckets inputs 2 electronically balanced nominal input level 0 dBu 775 mV max input level 12dBu 3V input impedance 20 input balancing gt 30 dB frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB SIN ratio 100 dB A weighted distortion 0 01 A D conversion 18 bit linear Sigma Delta control interfaces 2 x RS 485 standard power supply outputs for the DPC 4000 2 short circuit proof electronically programmable fuses supply voltage 24VDC 21 6 31 2 V DC nominal current 330 mA 660 mA 990 mA adjustable electronic fuse power consumption 2W dimensions W x H x D 37 5 x 81 x 248 mm weight 152g ElectroVoice MIC LINE 2 AUX Input Module NRS 90216 DPM MLA IN 1 This 2 channel audio input module is meant for the connection of external audio sources of any kind Channel A employs two switched AUX inputs with 4 RCA type connectors 2 x L R for CD players tape decks tuners DAT decks etc The MIC LINE input of channel B is provided through an XLR F type connector allowing the connection of microphones mixers and other similar sources The module can be inserted in slot 1 and slot 2 Input levels of both AUX inputs can be separately adjusted via internal potentiometers in a range between 10 dBu to 12 dBu The MIC LINE input s sensitivity can also be ad
227. conds the DRM 4000 is ready for operation When switching the DRM 4000 on for the first time it is factory pre configured for 8 in 2 mixer operation If the appliance had previously been operated it may start up in another configuration Make sure to set the MASTER A B volume controls to their counterclockwise margin before switching the appliance s power on to prevent unintentionally outputting extreme high signal levels or even feedback noise For configuring the DRM 4000 according to your system setup please consult the enclosed information sheet DRM 4000 FACTORY CONFIGURATION for a matching configuration If so you can easily select the configuration by establishing the corresponding assignment of the CONTROL INPUTS at the DRM 4000 see chapter 4 4 1 Alternatively you can use the DRM 4000 Editor software together with an optionally available remote interface to create and store y our own configurations For further detail please refer to chapter 7 5 2 Level Settings The DRM 4000 needs to match the gain structure of the entire audio system to achieve maximum headroom as well as minimal noise interference One of the most important facts is that the DRM 4000 is optimally modulated starting with its first stage Achieving the desired output volume by use of the MASTER controls while at the same time leaving the input channels under modulated means not optimally utilizing the unit s outstanding S N ratio and might lead to an increase in
228. connectors max Weight 22 5 kg Color Anthracite ElectroVoice NRS90222 Remote Input Module This single channel input module provides DPA 4120 or DPA 4140 power amplifiers with remote functionality The module allows connecting balanced XLR input and XLR a thru lines as well as connection to the remote control bus of the o B DPM 4000 RS 485 Prior to connecting the amplifier to the ds operating voltage the unit s address has to be set using the ave switches A and B A low value part Sa The following remote functions are available 52 Control 9 Level control Mute Monitor activation Input Output Mains operation ON OFF Battery operation ON OFF Pilot tone ON OFF optionally available The following messages are available Output level Pilot tone detection Ground fault detection Thermal overload amplifier mains transformer Configuration Measured values of current and voltage at the power output Extension kits Available Accessories Model Cat No Description NRS90206 121639 Pilot Tone Monitor module NRS90222 121674 Remote Input Module NRS90225 121677 Standard Input Module NRS90207 121799 Ground fault monitor module NRS90208 121641 transformer Architecture amp Engineering Specifications The remote control amplifier unit shall provide the following remote monitoring functions Setting input levels readi
229. control and monitoring functions available when used with optional remote modules e Integrated standby power supply e Remote start function for mains and battery operation with inrush current limiter protection Power on noise attenuation Status LED indicators e LED meters with CLIP indication e Active temperature controlled ventilation General Description The DPA4120 40 amplifiers have been specially designed to ensure durable performance and reliable operation of sound reinforcement systems with several independent loudspeaker lines The units are best suited for paging and pre recorded message installations alert systems and for general music applications in industrial enterprises offices multi function halls sport arenas schools churches hotels hospitals super markets cruise ships and similar venues The DPA4120 40 amplifiers can either be operated on the AC mains or connected to an external 24 V battery power source Switching to battery operation is accomplished via an internal relay The DPA4120 and 4140 provides the following remote monitoring functions when used with the remote modules in a ProAnnounce system Setting input levels Reading level values of the audio level controls Setting level offsets via virtual controllers Mute function via level control Remote control power operation ON OFF Battery operation remote control ON OFF Monitoring and fault message transmission of
230. cter respectively After pressing the EXIT key previous menu level the question store yes no appears on the display Acknowledging this question lets you save your new settings in a user preset Save Confirming save with the soft key ok displays the number of the currently selected sequence The cursor keys are used to enter the desired sequence number Saving has to be confirmed using the soft key yes Choosing save stores all modifications made in the above mentioned menu items into the selected user preset Thus individual saving the parameters in not necessary since they remain in memory until another sequence is loaded If a factory preset sequence S20 S21 is chosen for saving only the stop trigger is stored Sequence example Via sequence gt load gt S28 gt step list the step function listing of sequence S28 with the name Message 2 is being selected which shall serve as a simple example The purpose of this sequence is the indication of a lamp signal and the playback of a previously recorded message to its end Step number command parameter Function 1 Out C 1 set indication lamp ON relay C1 2 Sum off input signal off 3 DMM 2dB volume DMM signal 2 dB 4 Start M02 start message M02 5 wt Audio wait until message end 6 End Ende sequenz stand by 24 List of available step functions in sequences
231. ctions Generally assigning a function to each selection key is possible This allows utilizing a paging station to control the lighting door openers blinds etc even controlling volume settings is possible through the use of the UP DOWN keys When shipped there are no special functions assigned PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 37 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 2 7 Paging Console Configuration In Setup Mode Configuring paging consoles is preferably performed on the central unit via computer and using the PROANNOUNCE Designer software This represents the most convenient way without any limitation while a paging terminal itself offers only limited programming ability Several key functions differ between setup mode and operation mode Alternate functions are marked on the right top corner of the individual key area Pressing PROGRAM key and STOP key simultaneously for at least 1 second the PROGRAM LED starts blinking engages a paging station s setup mode Paging stations where program assignment has been activated indicate the program assignment pattern for a short period of time Using the and gt keys lets you step through the setup menu items in forward and backward direction parameter selection Parameter number and name are shown on the display The following table shows an overview of parameters and their meaning Parameter Parameter name Description number Address Paging station
232. cts the next actually recorded message during playback this next message is immediately audible P Using the cursor keys lets you select the previous or next message number Soft key vl accesses the volume setting dialog for the phone and pre listen outputs using the cursor keys Soft key edt accesses the menu level for title editing etc see following paragraph Soft key edt Using the edt key in playback mode provides the opportunity to edit and manage your message structure The keys are used to select the following menu items Title Confirming Title with the soft key ok the selected message s current name appears on the display Using the cursor keys lets you enter a name which can consist of up to 8 characters The soft keys A a are used to toggle between between the upper and the lower letter case while soc inserts a blank After pressing EXIT one menu level down the question store y n appears in order to prevent any inadvertent alteration of the name Priority Confirming Priority with the soft key ok the priority number of the selected message appears on the display and by using the cursor keys providing the user with the possibility to alter the number from 00 up to the his her priority level A higher priority prevents unauthorized alteration of this preset by users with lower priority After pressing EXIT one menu level down you have to choose on the app
233. cy audio signals which depending on the quality and size of the involved transformers could lead to problems with core saturation In addition to the 45 Hz Lo Cut filters the frequency response of the DPA Series power amplifiers top margin is set by 30 kHz Hi Cut filters with 12 dB oct preventing unwanted high frequency audio signals from being present at the outputs 25 Mains Operation And Leakage Power The mains power consumption as well as the leakage power is stated for driving the power amplifier at different levels All the values were measured at nominal load via the 100 V output with two channels driven The shown values differ only slightly when the appliance is operated at different nominal output voltages or in the Direct Out mode ios a fae Umains V Imains A Pmains VA Pmains IW Pout W Py IW BTU hr DPA 4245 idling 230V 0 34 78 47 47 160 normal operation 10 dB 230V 2 76 635 490 70 420 1430 alarm 3 dB 230V 5 54 1274 1040 352 688 2347 nominal conditions 230V 7 45 1714 1420 700 720 2456 DPA 4260 idling 230V 0 57 131 80 80 273 normal operation 10 dB 230V 3 66 842 655 101 554 1890 alarm 3 dB 230V 7 84 1688 1370 506 864 2948 nominal conditions 230V 9 86 2268 1900 1000 900 3070 initial current inrush for both models 38 A Pmains VA apparent power Umains Imains Pmains W active power Pout W output powe
234. d Jumper Setting Output level Jumper Setting Output level JP1 2 4 JP2 2 4 channel A JP1 1 3 JP2 1 3 channel B Open 6 dB Open 6 dB Closed Closed Jumper setting for the output assignment To be used in network installations When used in a network environment the following jumpers have to be open OUTA LK10 LK11 applies to printed board assemblies starting with index C OUT B LK8 LK9 5 24 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Retrofitting Output Transformers Retrofitting two output transformers onto the module is possible for the case that galvanic separation of the audio signals is needed Therefore separate NRS 90227 extensions are needed per output channel When retrofitting output transformers please proceed as follows 1 2 3 4 Disconnect the 4000 from the mains power supply Loosen the two locking screws and carefully slide the module out of its slot Remove the two resistors of the correspondent output channel OUT A R2 R3 OUT B R4 R5 Close the two bridges of the correspondent output channel OUT A LK1 LK2 OUT B LK3 LK4 The soldering pads on the printed board assembly have to be short circuited closed Solder the transformer onto the printed board assembly for OUT A in position T1 and for OUT B in T2 Re insert the module into the slot and carefully push it into the DPM 4000 until it firmly locks in place Fix the module
235. d board assembly 86243 marked C refer to the picture of the rear panel on page 21 disconnect the 6 pole flat cable between the two relays on the mains input printed board assembly 86243 that is connected to the male multi point connector B602 now the hinged mains input printed board assembly 86243 can be turned up In doing so be careful not to damage any wiring or other parts the fuses F502 and F503 are now easy to get to and can be removed to the top for re installing the mains input printed board assembly 86243 proceed in opposite order tighten the mains input printed board assembly 86243 with the 3 screws marked C where each the mains plug 10 and the mains selector switch 12 need to be connected using individual screws and self securing nuts M3 reconnect the 6 pole flat cable to the multi point connector B602 reconnect the yellow green ground cord to the ground connector on the rear panel make sure that it sits tight closing the appliance reattach the cover plate with 9 screws M3 x 6 DIN 7500 33 Caution For safety reasons make sure that after reassembling wires running underneath the A mains input printed board assembly 86243 are run with a minimum distance of at least 6 mm F 503 F 502 25 25 B543 REC BER F 504 T6 3 A F 505 T6 3 A Cubes foe de RES bog im ee en diagram 11 Printed board assembly 85272 showing the position of the DC fuses F502 to F5
236. d its available modules The kind and amount of connected audio sound sources amplifiers and relay board assemblies are extremely variable This allows configuring the system to basically match any requirement The system is capable of managing up to 16 paging stations and up to 100 output lines More than 150 control inputs and outputs are available for controlling and monitoring purposes providing the possibility to generate and manage logic levels and analog levels as well For detailed information please refer to the chapter DCS 400 Control System Configuration and documentation of PROANNOUNCE system installation is established through the use of the PROANNOUNCE Designer software a comfortable graphical user interface that runs on a PC under Windows 95 98 NT This allows changing the system s setup at any time to meet new requirements without the need to alter the actual installation The PC has to be connected to the system only when loading or changing its configuration During PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 3 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION normal operation PC interaction is not necessary Anyway in most cases the permanent connection of a computer bears benefits like displaying detailed status reports or the printing of protocols It also offers the possibility for remote diagnosis and remote maintenance via modem 3 2 Audio Routing The DPM 4000 employs a digital audio matrix providing 4 inputs and 4 outputs Additional
237. dBu is meant for the connection of control amplifiers In case it is intended to supply several power amplifiers with identical input signals these signals can be taken from the THRU connector 15 see also figure 1 and 2 The input is prepared to be retrofitted with a input transformer In case a floating input is needed it is necessary to install the optional extension NRS 90208 see also paragraph 8 3 On the general input module NRS 90225 the input level is set with the level control 13 For the remote control module NRS 90222 the input level is determined by the setting of the internal electronic level control of the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 please also refer to the PROMATRIX handbook 28 THRU figure 1 connections of the input sockets Connector XLR 3 M Connector XLR 3 F 3 1 2 2 1 3 MM figure 2 LF cable for coupling two amplifiers DPA 41xx POWER OUTPUT The power output is balanced and off ground potential The output is factory configured for the connection of 100V loudspeaker systems Connection has to be performed by inserting the supplied 5 pole plug into the power output Socket 17 Switching the output voltage to 70V 50V or to low impedance operation 4 ohms is possible using the plug in bridge B411 on the printed board assembly 84187 DPA 4120 respectively 84175 DPA 4140 see also POWER OUTPUT OVERRIDE BYPASS SINGLE CALL COMMON 100n CIRCUIT 1 TO CHASSIS SW
238. ded to install or operate the DRM 4000 directly above or below any device that generates a massive magnetic field e g power amplifiers In this way the risk of unwanted interference is reduced to a minimum Before switching the DRM 4000 s power on make sure that all necessary connections have been established Start with connecting all microphones and other audio signal sources to the inputs of the DRM 4000 Then proceed with connecting the outputs of the DRM 4000 with the inputs of any consecutive device e g power amplifier or DPM 4000 Make sure to also connect the direct outs if you are using them IMPORTANT Always use high performance properly shielded cables When establishing connections especially input connections make sure that the connection cords do not exceed 10 m in length to prevent the loss of treble frequencies 4 2 Input Assignment 4 2 1 MIC LINE inputs The MIC LINE inputs 1 and 25 are provided via XLR type sockets The pin assignment for the XLR type plugs to be connected has to be pin 1 ground shield pin 2 hot pin 3 cold In case that the inputs are galvanic separated via transformers NRS 90233 do not connect the shield to the ground of the sending device The MIC LINE 1 4 inputs can also be used with unbalanced signal sources If so please mind the following pin assignment pin 1 ground shield pin 2 hot For avoiding a signal level attenuation by 6 dB please interconnect the pins 1 a
239. desired contact see table 1 see also figure 8 respectively figure 9 he coding bridges S405 and S406 for the output recognition have to be inserted according to the illustration in figure 5 the inserted coding bridge is marked in black The top panel has to be re attached Note By using a waterproof marker pen and after switching the output voltage the newly set value has to be marked in the filed OUTPUT VOLTAGE on the rear panel of the appliance 31 output bridge 405 rp 5406 2 5 to m edi DUPULT CONFIG an OUTPUT CONFIG Ne E 100 V B407 100 V 70 V 408 ni bos B409 5 CE OUTPUT CONFIG OUTPUT CONFIG B410 BE E 50 V 4 QHMS table 1 bridge B411 settings figure 5 coding bridges S405 S406 settings switching the output voltage output recognition OUTPUT CONFIG Caution It is possible that during operation shock hazard output voltages can be present at the POWER OUTPUT connector gt 34V peak value Thus the connected loudspeakers have to be installed in accordance to applicable security standards and regulations see also paragraph 8 5 2 8 Enhanced application field 8 1 Standard input module NRS 90225 This input module for the power amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 is meant for insertion at the power amplifiers rear It provides the following functions lockable XLR input connector XLR output connector to patch the input signal through gain control to be adjusted using a
240. dication lamp for start recording deleting end and the maximum recording time is set to 10 seconds Adjusting the recording level corresponds to the description in the previous paragraph The message s audio quality setting stays unaltered as well The priority number of the sequence gets copied to the priority of the message Audio quality recording duration Prior to recording a message recording type is shown on the display The cursor keys are used to alter the audio cutoff frequency 16 kHz 8 kHz 4 kHz and the signal quality CD 16 bit linear long 8 bit u Law The factory default setting is 8 KHz long for all messages The newly set audio quality is maintained and individual adjustment for each message is possible Table for recording time minutes versus audio quality and installed sound memory extension NR 90205 Accuracy CD long bandwidth 4 kHz 8 kHz 16 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 16 kHz without NR 90205 2 min 1min 0 5 min 4 min 2 min 1 min 1x NR 90205 4 min 2 min 1 min 8 min 4 min 2 min 2x NR 90205 6 min 3 min 1 5 min 12 min 6 min 3 min 3x NR 90205 8 min 4 min 2 min 16 min 8 min 4 min specified times for the long recording mode are minimum values since the active data reduction recognizes pauses in the audio signal Pauses are defined as passages where the signal level drops 70 dBu below full modulation Message memory extension Itis possible to ex
241. display driver for four 100 V outputs Caution A Unplug the mains cord and disconnect batteries before opening the appliance 9 2 1 To Install The NRS 90207 Proceed As Follows see diagram 9 for opening the appliance please remove the 9 screws on the top of the appliance that lock the cover plate the NRS 90207 gets retrofitted on the printed board assembly 89019 1 which is located behind the input printed board assembly 81331 in the front area attached to the left side panel of the amplifier in front view Be sure to first insert the included board guides before installing the NRS 90207 assuring the correct position of their guide grooves The release lever of the guides marked C points to the top while the one of the guides marked D points downwards the NRS 90207 extension kit needs to be inserted with its printed side pointing to the top until it firmly locks in place Make sure that the power resistors R917 to R920 that are located underneath the NRS printed board assembly do not touch this board closing the appliance use the 9 screws M3 x 6 DIN 7500 to reattach the cover plate 30 9 2 2 Checking The Function Of The NRS 90207 With built in NRS 90207 and powered on amplifier the READY indicators 7 have to light When using an external switch to shortcut one pole of the 100 V speaker network via a 47 k ohms resistor and the safety earthing conductor for approximately 5 seconds the corresponding GROU
242. ds Audio memory overrun Deleting message numbers that are no longer needed re provides memory or install additional audio memory user 3 in case of need During recording the DMM 4650 has recognized a defect memory address which is marked as bad and is no longer available for future recordings bad block Start a new recording using the same message number delete yes The message number xx cannot be recorded The message access denied is displayed The number has been assigned to a user with higher priority You cannot delete this message Select another message number This also happens during a remote recording if the desired sequence for the message mistakenly has been recorded by the installer without programming access for users with a lower priority User 3 has to delete this message How can I test a sequence only user 3 without audio transmission The System setup gt Bypass menu provides the possibility to switch the audio bypass relay to direct connection input gt output for the duration of the test This procedure interrupts the audio connection DMM signals output except when the test sequence itself switches off the relay again What happens when the operation voltage of 24 volts drops for several seconds during the transmission of an alarm sequence In case one of the factory preset alarm signals trigger A3 A4 B1 or B2 was used re starts the sequence as long as the alarm button is still p
243. dule fuses The system shall enable the use of analog or DCS405R 121775 Extension Module digital controls expand the system operation to include 1 relay operated switching and remote monitoring The DCS406R 121776 Shield Module system shall also offer the ability to add a rack DCS407R 121777 Module w Ext Control mounted monitor unit for in place control and DCS408R 121778 Lines Relay Module monitoring of any channel y DCS409R 121779 AF Relay Module DCS412R 121780 Logic Input Module DCS416R 121782 Analog I O Module The expansion system shall be the Dynacord ProAnnounce DCS digital control system Block Diagrams ee mmm 1 LED ga Ld Backplane I 86253 1 Ik Rack Frame DCS 400 BLOCK DIAGRAM Block Diagrams DCS 407R BLOCK DIAGRAM DC Watch DPM4000 wk Reset orDCS401 I h De 2 e gt DPM4000 1 x CPU gt EPROM gt SRAM le EEPROM or DCS401 4 4 ent 1 RS485 p DCS416 CN9 le 4 DCS401 Address 51 DCS412 4 lt j CN8 Al 11 Em L4 NT 52 gt p DCS408 9 D 037
244. e Mxx within a suitable sequence see Trigger Sequence For test purposes the message can be listened to via the Pre listen outputs using the recorder keys PLAY STOP The functions are similar to a cassette recorder with the difference that the audio data is saved digitally in maintenance free flash memories Depending on individual needs different audio qualities are selectable The maximum recording time depends on the selected audio quality and the installed memory see table page 14 A backup of all message audio data is possible through analog recording cassette deck DAT recorder or as a digital backup on a computer via the remote interface RS 232 Message number Preset Up to 100 distinct messages MOO to M99 including title name and priority can be saved The DMM 4650 is shipped without any pre recorded messages since depending on individual user requirements and custom applications variations would be numerous Some factory preset sequences use MOO 01 and MO2 see list of preset sequences Thus they have to be recorded for incorporating them in the respective applications Some text examples are to be found at the end of this manual Operation menu message Confirming the menu selection message by using the soft key ok the number of the message appears in the display together with its title and playback time hours minutes seconds The DMM 4650 is now in the recording playback mode
245. e and confirm with OK In the Windows95 98 NT start menu select programs PROANNOUNCE and click onto PROANNOUNCE Designer Link the PROANNOUNCE exe file onto your desktop and start the program by double clicking the PROANNOUNCE Designer icon By dragging amp dropping a configuration file suffix pmx onto the PROANNOUNCE Designer icon on the desktop the PROANNOUNCE Designer software starts using the corresponding project 4 1 4 Uninstalling PROANNOUNCE Designer For removing the PROANNOUNCE Designer software from your hard disk using the Windows95 98 NT software uninstall procedure is recommended To do so you have to open the windows my system and system controls and select the entry software Now you are presented with a list of software that Windows95 98 NT is able to automatically uninstall Click onto the entry PROANNOUNCE and confirm your selection with the button install uninstall After confirming the uninstalling procedure again all components of the PROANNOUNCE Designer software including its dll and registration files are automatically removed from your hard disk 4 2 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 5 1 5 1 1 Description Of Individual Devices Digital PROANNOUNCE Manager DPM 4000 Features The Digital PROANNOUNCE Manager DPM 4000 represents the central unit of the PROANNOUNCE system incorporating all primary functions that are needed in advanced PA system installations
246. e applicable at the location where the appliance is being serviced have to be strictly obeyed This applies also to any regulations about the work place itself 8 All instructions concerning the handling of MOS circuits have to be observed Note N SAFETY COMPONENT HAS TO BE REPLACED WITH ORIGINAL PART ONLY 1 2 CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE SAFETY AND SERVICE 1 2 T INTRODUCTION As ansehen are ares 1 4 1 1 DRM 4000 5 1 4 1 2 Unpacking and Warranty 1 5 2 CONTROLS AND 6 2 1 2 1 Hr 2 1 2 2 Rear Panel lice ae Re ener 2 3 9 QUICK START ix verse elei Rete eee ed 3 1 4 INSTALLATION AND 6 4 1 4 1 General 4 1 4 2 Input 4 1 4 2 1 MIC LINE 1 4 1 4 2 2 AUX and 4 2 4 3 Output 4 2 4 3 1 MASTER Outputs 4 2 4 3 2 SEND
247. e cables with a maximum length of 4m Operation keys Function MUTE Loudspeaker of headphones ON OFF VOLUME 10 step loudspeaker headphones volume setting SOURCE 1 step monitor source selection 10 10 step monitor source selection 24V TEQUE INTERFACE DCS 40 AUDIO INPUT gt gt u S al amp z 5 9 o gt a 9 4 a 22 FE 215 gt Q Sg 9 8 2 E E lt ale nem 7 7 86 amp amp amp amp DC DC e 8V Y v v y 4 v W P S S P S P cz A DC E PN L4 Tix D ID Q Y 5V 5 a Meter we ne ne ne c 7 MIN Ir eT e i DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 4 8 NRS 90240 ROTARY ENCODER Description The NRS 90240 includes a rotary encoder and connection board with mounting accessories for remotely controlling level controls delays and control voltages of a PROANNOUNCE system Features Rotary encoder Connection board Mounting accessories Knob Connection to CN 2 from DCS401 Bottom view Rotory Encoder 1 Rotory Encoder 2 Note The cover frame needs to be ordered separately PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 67 APPENDIX 6 Appendix 6 1 PROANNOUNCE Hardware Configuration
248. e operation can be selected All outputs are protected against idling and short circuit Integrated Remote Module for control and monitoring using the PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 Electronic level controls electronically balanced inputs and electronically balanced MONITOR output Input transformer for balanced floating inputs can be retrofitted Monitor output transformer for balanced floating MONITOR output can be retrofitted Routing switch for parallel operation of the amplifier s inputs Integrated Standby Power Supply Mains function switch POWER Ground lift switch Remote Start function for mains and battery operation with inrush current limiter protection Power on noise attenuation Status LED indicators operation READY STANDBY thermal overload PROTECT and GROUND FAULT at the power outputs Fault notification according to DIN EN 60849 via the PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 TEST switch for systems with average switching or GROUND FAULT RESET LED meters with a range from 13 dB to 0 dB plus CLIP indication Mains voltage selector switch 115 230 V AC Active temperature controlled ventilation Modules for pilot tone surveillance and ground fault surveillance according to DIN VDE 0800 are optionally available IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an CAUTION equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the RISK OF ELECTRIC SHO
249. e output level effectively avoiding overdrive conditions that lead to distortion and overload at the power outputs which could damage the connected loudspeaker systems If the red CLIP LED 2 shortly lights during program peaks maximum non distorted modulation is achieved Continuous lighting or blinking of the red CLIP LED 2 signals overdrive In this case the input level has to be reduced If the green LED indicator 1 does not light or is only briefly lit with the red CLIP LED blinking at the same time this signals the encountering of an overload or short circuit condition at the output In this case the impedance of the connected load has to be checked Caution During normal operation the red CLIP LED should only light briefly and shortly 7 Switching the output voltage only to be performed by a qualified service technician The DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 amplifiers allow the connection of 50V 70V 100V or low impedance loudspeaker Systems 4 ohms They are factory preset to an output voltage of 100 V Switching the output voltage to 4 ohms 50V or 70V can be performed by changing the bridge B411 on the power amplifier printed board assembly 84187 DPA 4120 or 84175 DPA 4140 Caution Before opening the appliance make sure to disconnect the mains and or battery power source To open the appliance the top panel has to be removed The bridge B411 yellow wire has to be removed from the contact B407 and re attached to the
250. e protection circuitry e initial current inrush limiter e power on delay e RF and DC protection e Back EMF protection e limiters for the audio signals e output peak current limiters e thermal overload of the heat sink e thermal overload of the mains transformer e output voltage overload limiters High level signals in the low frequency range can drive the output transformers of power amplifiers that do not provide audio signal limiters into saturation resulting in nasty distortion and high thermal load of the power amplification stage The audio signal limiters of the DPA Series power amplifiers are designed to quickly identify the occurring saturation of the core of an output transformer The level is dynamically reduced to a value that stays just below the point of where the saturation starts The Limit LEDs on the front panel indicate that the limiters have been activated Despite the protection that is provided through the audio signal limiters the Limit LEDs should not light over a longer period of time Please locate the cause of the faulty operation e g lower the LF EQ setting at the connected mixing console when at the same time the input level at the power amplifier is approximately 10 dB above the nominal input level The DPA Series power amplifiers employ integrated Lo Cut filters at 45 Hz with 18 dB oct for each channel They protect the loudspeaker systems that are connected via output transformers against low frequen
251. e storing 00 alarm preset 00 G gong RESTORE A00 data S sequences s stop trigger TA 1 trigger PortA Input1 M message and RESTORE G00 data U basic settings This text file can be altered using an editor e g by altering RESTORE 520 data A00 into A05 or deleting whole presets including all data belonging to them RESTORE TA 1 Data consist of the character string which belongs to the preset and which RESTORE U data may not be altered word processor software like WORD or Word Pad should not be used to perform the described alterations since they add they own format strings to the text 33 The Backing up process runs with lowest priority and can be interrupted by other sequences at any time If this is supposed to be avoided interrupting sequences are blocked by entering the user3 password high priority If the backup is expected to take very long backup message start System setup Restore ok after entering the password in order to prevent the time dependent switching off of the operation RESTORE stores the data received via the DMM 4650 s REMOTE interface into the stated preset memory In order to prevent the current memory from being inadvertently overwritten it is necessary to previously allow this mode in the menu System setup gt Restore gt ok The DMM 4650 confirms the successful restoration by displaying the message Preset xx restored List REMOTE commands Separation command parameters
252. e this apparatus near water Clean only with a damp cloth Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufactures instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus that produce heat Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer 10 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped For US and CANADA only Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety When the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrican for replacement of the absolete outlet N9OUPOD IMPORTANT SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To reduce the risk of electric shock do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the Operating Instructions unless you are qualified to do so Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel 1 Security regulations as stated in the EN 60065 VDE 0860 IEC 65 and the CSA E65 94 have to be obe
253. ear view The following module ports and connections are located on the rear panel of the DPM 4000 1 DC INPUT 24V The DPM 4000 s power supply source has to be connected here a 24 VDC power supply or a PROANNOUNCE system battery module using insulated AMP flat connector plugs 6 3 x 0 8 mm The DPM 4000 is protected against polarization mismatch and all positive and negative conductors within the device are fuse protected The fuses are located inside the enclosure on the printed board assembly 80430 The connection cables have to be 1 5 mm in diameter at least With this diameter the cable length of a single path should not exceed 4 0 m max drop in voltage 1V CAUTION Using the DPM 4000 is only permissible with batteries that are not grounded or provide a grounded negative pole Operation with grounded positive pole is not admissible 2 SIGNAL INTERFACE Signal Pins Description 24V 1 24 V voltage output for the supply of external components The maximum current handling capacity is 400 mA GROUND 2 Ground connector ofthe 24 V voltage output READY 3 4 5 Floating output for the indication of the system s operation mode In the normal ready mode the READY relay is activated When internal errors occur or external devices show faulty behavior the READY relay drops The relay is connected to the FAULT LED indicator on the front panel of the DPM 4000 providing indication of the operational status directl
254. earance of the question store y whether you want to make your changes permanent Play all Confirming Play all with the soft key ok the name of the first message gets displayed Using the PLAY STOP key lets you start or stop the playback of all recorded messages Mostly this menu item serves for transferring all recorded messages onto an analog audio tape deck or DAT recorder via the phone pre listen outputs Release Confirming Release with the soft key ok the display shows that the search for lost blocks in the flash memory sound memory has been engaged Whenever such blocks are found the memory structure gets repaired which is also indicated on the display This menu s operation is used to release memory that has been mistakenly reserved Free space Confirming Free space with the soft key ok the number of available flash memory chips and the overall free sound memory capacity are displayed in 96 Info Confirming Info with the soft key ok shows the audio quality setting and the used space for the previously selected message Confirm The audio data of a message is constantly monitored In case an inaccurate data structure see also self surveillance page 29 is detected the corresponding message is marked with an asterisk Anyway if the erroneous data does not affect the audible result of the sound reproduction confirming with the soft key ok omits the marking From now on the actu
255. ect the unit from the mains immediately and have the appliance checked by a DYNACORD service center before further use Do not use any sprays to clean the unit because they could lead to severe damage and or perhaps cause sudden fire hazard FRONT PANEL G MIC INPUT LINE PHONES DYNACORD DMM 4650 DIGITAL MESSAGE MANAGER C N NS C 2 DI dai 4 gt gt gt gt EXIT CO COI Corolle o ES EJ 1 2 3 4 5 6 F 8 9 1 INPUT MIC 7 RECORDER XLR socket for the connection of a microphone when recording a message By using a short test sample the level is automatically adjusted and the setting is saved This input can also be used for making announcements 2 INPUT LINE RCA type sockets for the connection of stereo or monaural audio signal sources tape deck CD player when recording a message A wired in parallel OdBu socket on the rear panel is also provided By using a short test sample the level is automatically adjusted and the setting is saved This input can also be used for making announcements 3 PHONES Stereo phone jack 1 4 6 3 mm to pre listen to messa ges gong and alarm signals via headphones Wired in parallel a
256. ection LED No group or area selected not with DPC 4106 Lights green Area or group selected special function activated direct call activated ALLE LED No collective call selected not with DPC 4106 Lights green Collective call pre selected direct collective call activated BUSY LED System not busy clear for call Lights green During own message Slow blinking green Low priority paging station launches a call in selected areas interruption on cost of the momentary microphone terminal is possible Fast blinking green System is busy with a higher priority transmission message gong alarm interruption is not possible already launched call is interrupted by events with higher priority setting GONG LED No gong signal started Lights green Gong signal in progress manually started or pre programmed pre gong signal Lights green Gong signal in progress ignited from another source or time controlled Lights green System is ON and ready for operation Blinks green System has been turned on and is booting initialization PROGRAMM LED Paging console is in message mode Lights green Paging console is in program assign mode Slow blinking green Paging console is password protected Fast blinking green Paging console is in setup mode No text message launched OFF INotetmesssgelauched Lights green Text message in progress manually launched Blinks green Text message in progress launched from another source or time controll
257. ed OFF No alarm signal launched Lights red Alarm signal has been launched from any source Blinks red Alarm signal has already been stopped but keeps running until signal end ON LED System is OFF stand by mode TEXT LED 5 40 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 2 9 Priorities The PROANNOUNCE system allows setting 10 priority levels highest priority 10 lowest priority 1 that include announcements as well as alarm and gong signals and vocal message reproduction A higher prioritized event principally interrupts any other event with a lower priority setting For events with equal priority the earlier launched signal is continued has priority over the latter Priority level Assigned Description Directing station Highest priority can ignite any type of events and interrupt all other signals Alarm signal Can only be interrupted from the directing station but interrupts all other signals that have not been launched from the directing terminal Gong signal Interrupts all signals that are not coming from the directing terminal Time controlled gong signals can be delayed pre manual time controlled delayed by a pre defined period of time Recorded message These priorities can be freely assigned to text messages during the configuration procedure Message from a paging These priorities can be freely assigned to any normal console without with pre paging console
258. ed from any source red blinking alarm signal has already been stopped but keeps running until signal end 28 Revision 1 1 DPC 4000 PROMATRIX System Priorities The PROMATRIX system allows setting 10 priority levels highest priority 10 lowest priority 1 that include announcements as well as alarm and gong signals and vocal message reproduction A higher prioritized event principally interrupts any other event with a lower priority setting For events with equal priority the earlier launched signal is continued it has priority over the latter Priority level Assigned to Description directing station highest priority can ignite any type of events and interrupt all other signals alarm signal can only be interrupted from the directing station but interrupts all other signals that have not been launched from the directing terminal 6 7 gong signal interrupts all signals that are not coming from the manual time controlled directing terminal Time controlled gong signals can be delayed pre delayed by a pre defined period of time eee priorities during the configuration procedure message from a paging these priorities can be freely assigned to any normal station without with pre paging station A pre gong signal has the priority of gong signal the launching microphone terminal EEE TE background music always has the lowest priority level DPC 4350 paging Station Extension The DPC 4350 paging station ex
259. ed input channels e g background music are attenuated to a pre adjustable level value The background music audio signal fades in smoothly upon finishing the announcement For using the ducking function you have to choose a configuration that includes the option PRIORITY OVERRIDE ENABLED for one or both input channels MIC LINE 1 and 2 see enclosed information sheet DRM 4000 FACTORY CONFIGURATION Owning one of the two optionally available interface boards lets you configure the DRM 4000 according to your personal requirements Please keep in mind that the ducking control automatically affects the corresponding output channel s to which the prioritized input channel is assigned Using the gain control for setting the input level of a prioritized channel and while talking into the connected microphone depending on the channel s routing you should be able to see one or both yellow ducking LED s 9 lighting which indicates that the ducking function has been activated for either output channel A or B or for both Otherwise re adjust the ducking control s threshold setting via the Ducking Threshold control DUCK THR 5 Turning the control in the counterclockwise direction decreases the set value while turning it clockwise increases the threshold setting Once the ducking threshold has correctly been adjusted ducking LED lights while talking into the microphone but stays dimmed otherwise i e is not automatically activated by environmen
260. ee oe _2 O tsr 3 G A 1 1 Csr Oe _ eee pR Reay stanoev C3 De LLLI emu O PROTECT L 57 I DD DO M EEE LE oe eee eee 8 76 A 9 A 10 11 12 A 13 B T N 230 TI T8AFOR 115V VOLTAGE 1 SELECTOR 1 15V 280V E 4 _ ACMAINSINPUT G POWER eL 115V 230V 5060 Hz CAUTION ron conTINED PROTECTION AGANST RISK FIRE REPLACEWITH SAVE TY PEAND VALLE FUSEINDICAT ED ATTENTION ng ACER PAR UN FUSBLEDEMEMETYFE COMME INDIGUE OF RECTRICSHOCK N DONO OPEN WARNING EDUC THERISK CF ORELECTRO DONDTEIFOSE THIS7PRLANCE TO RANOR MOISTURE AMS nisaJEDECHOCELECTRQUE NEPASOLWRIR DCINPUT 24V CHASSISSWTCH 411 eis UNGROJNDED gt NOUSER SERVICE ABLEP ARTS INSIDE REERSERVIONG TO QUALIFED SERVICE PERSONNE OR FFNEN DES GER ATES NETZSTECKERZIEHEN POWEROUIPUT 2 DYNACORD DPA 4140 121629 MADEIN GERVANY ADDRESS OUTPUT VOLTAGE KIN BAFOR23O Nj FOR 115V VOLTAGE SELECTOR fi5V 230 POWER f 1 ell AC MAINS INPUT 115V 230V 50 60 2 CAUTION FORCONIINUED PROT ECTIONAGAINST ASKOF FIRE REPLACEWITHSAVE TYPEAND VALUEFLSEINDCATED ATTENTION FEMR ACERPARUN CE MEME COMMEINDQUE A Fem WARNING ne ASKOF AREOR BECTRICSHOOK REIHE AMIS risque De choc RECIRIQUE NEPASOU RR CIRCUIT TO DC INP
261. ef description optional key lock switch for retrofitting DPC 4xxx type paging stations to work as idling current controlled opener Supplied with the NRS 90231 1 key lock switch complete with front frame and 2 keys 1 connection cord 4 pole 1 resistor 10 k ohms Installation instruction 1 Disconnect the paging console from the power supply 2 Detach the bottom plate 6 to 8 screws depending on the paging station model 3 Prepare the installation site for the insertion e Use a sharp pinpoint tool needle pointed rat tailed file knife etc to carefully pierce the pre punched holes through from the front panel s outside to the inside Note Please make sure to solder the cables after the switch has been installed Otherwise it is virtually impossible to slide the milled nut over the body of the switch 4 Adjust the switch and tighten it using the supplied milled nut 5 Please refer to the circuit diagram on this page when connecting the supplied 4 pole wire and the resistor 6 Please mind the sequence in which you connect the flat wire cables The two outside wires 1 rt and 4 gr have to be cut off as short as possible and need to be insulated The two inner wires 2 gr and 3 gr need to be soldered to contacts 1 and 2 of the Switch Polarity is not a critical factor 7 Afterwards you have to connect the 4 pole female plug to the corresponding OPTION 1 or OPTION 2 terminal
262. eillance The desired input module has to be inserted into the module shaft on the rear of the power amplifier It has to be tightened using the two locking screws B refer also to the paragraphs 8 1 and 8 2 3 4 Mains operation For normal AC mains operation the included mains cord has to be connected to a 230V or 115V 50 60Hz wall outlet On the appliance itself the cord has to be connected to the 3 pole mains socket 10 Caution The appliance is factory preset to 230V AC Switching to 115V AC is accomplished using the voltage selector 12 DPA 4120 For 115V AC operation the mains fuse 11 has to be replaced by a slow blowing 4 ampere type labeled T4A see also paragraph 11 1 DPA 4140 For 115V AC operation the mains fuse 11 has to be replaced by a slow blowing 8 ampere type labeled T8A see also paragraph 11 2 If the appliance is correctly connected and mains is present the green STANDBY indicator 4 will light To remotely start the amplifier when it is being operated on the mains it is necessary to interconnect the contacts 3 POWER REMOTE and 2 GROUND STANDBY on the pin terminal strip REMOTE CONTROL 16 see also paragraph 5 6 The main power switch POWER 9 on the rear of the appliance is meant for service and maintenance purposes This allows bridging the mains switching relay which provides the possibility to operate the amplifier without remote start The main power switch POWER 9 on the appliance s
263. eing made by third parties or the purchaser himself 54 DYNACORD PRO MATRIX SYSTEM POWER AMPLIFIER DPA 4120 DPA 4140 OWNER S MANUAL DYNACORD DPA 4140 400 WATTS POWER AMPLIFIER PRO _AT X E Sy S Performance Features Power amplifier with 200 W or 400 W output power according to the IEC 283 3 standard within a 19 cabinet 3 HU providing the following functions supported are 115 230V AC mains as well as 24V DC emergency power source power amplifiers DPA 4120 providing 200 W or DPA 4140 providing 400 W output power idling and short circuit protection output transformer for balanced floating 100 V speaker networks of optionally 70 V 50 V or 4 ohms for low impedance operation optional input modules standard operation INPUT MODULE with level control electronically balanced input and MONITOR output with optional transformer or REMOTE MODULE for controlling and monitoring the PROMATRIX system electronic level controls electronically balanced input and MONITOR output with optional transformer integrated stand by power supply mains POWER ON OFF switch ground lift switch remotely controllable mains and battery operation with initial current inrush limiter power on switching noise suppression status LED indicators for operation READY STANDBY thermal overload PROTECT and occurrence of GROUND FAULT conditions at the power output fault message according to the IEC 849 standard TEST button to switch between sys
264. els although the distance between the announcer and the microphone varies Besides you have to keep in mind that also environmental noise is amplified Thus on site testing with and without compressor will reveal which results in the better performance First by using the arrow keys lt gt select parameter 5 Pressing the key activates the compressor Pressing the v key deactivates the compressor It is also possible to activate the compressor during the PC configuration procedure 6 Time Date does not apply to paging consoles without selection keys The connected paging stations allow setting the date and time of the PROANNOUNCE system First by using the arrow keys lt gt select parameter 6 Using the selection keys 1 to 10 with the 10 key representing the 0 you can enter the correct time Date and time are indicated in the following format tt mm yy hh mm They have to be entered in that sequence 7 LCD Contrast Paging consoles with display allow the user to individually adjust LCD contrast and viewing angle This allows optimum legibility from the user s location First by using the arrow keys lt gt select parameter 7 Now you can adjust the LCD contrast via the A or v keys PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 39 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 2 8 Indications The following table provides you with an overview of the most important LED indications Status Description Sel
265. els of both AUX inputs can be separately adjusted via internal potentiometers in a range between 10 dBu to 12 dBu The MIC LINE input s sensitivity can also be adjusted through an internal MIC LINE switch PAD providing 30 dB attenuation The GAIN control on the appliance s rear panel offers additional control within a range of 40 dB The MIC LINE input is electronically balanced and can be retrofitted with a transformer Phantom power can be switched via a jumper If necessary it is also possible to incorporate a compressor limiter into the audio path via jumper setting The input channels can be switched separately to the monitor bus and you can listen to the signal via headphones or loudspeaker either which is being connected to the monitor output Automatic pilot tone surveillance of the entire input stage is integrated as well Specifications figure 5 11 MIC LINE 2 AUX input module description DPM MLA MIC LINE 2 AUX input module NRS 90216 connections 1 x XLRF type 4 x RCA type connectors input A 2 x AUX unbalanced internally summed nominal input level 10 12 dBu 250 mV 3 V max input level 12 dBu 3V input impedance 10 ko input B MIC LINE electronically balanced transformers are optionally available nominal input level MIC 54 dBu 14 dBu 1 5 mV 155 mV LINE 24 dBu 16 dBu 50 mV 5V max input level MIC 5 dBu 1 4V im limiter operation LINE 30 dBu 25V input
266. ely and starts the recording of the message xx At first this message is being erased and then recording starts at the last adjusted recording level Audio quality and name of this message stay unchanged The message priority is identical with the sequence priority The execution time lasts until End Delete Message start of recording Dly ttt s sets a timer to ttt t seconds and starts measuring this time sand glass Count XXXX sets a counter event counter to a starting value xxxx With every if count command the counter is decremented by 1 until 0 is reached Jump resumes the sequence at step number xx if Delay only executes the next step number if the delay time has elapsed see command Otherwise the next step number is being skipped Count the counter is decremented by 1 The next step number is executed only if the counter has reached 0 see command Count If the counter value is greater than 0 the next step number is being skipped Audio executes the next step number only if the audio signal started at last is finished see command start otherwise the next step number is being skipped In X Y Z executes the next step number only if the desired level Z or L is applied at input Y 1 4 of the I O module X A D If this condition is not fulfilled the next step number is being skipped Stop executes the next step number only if the stop trigger condition of this sequence is fulfilled Otherwise the next step
267. eme ambient temperatures or faulty functioning of the system s ventilation 6 4 GROUND FAULT indicator If with the NRS 90224 extension installed a ground fault is being detected at the power output the red GROUND FAULT indicator 6 will light and the READY fault message relay will drop During the occurrence of this error normal operation is maintained After eliminating the cause for the ground fault pressing the TEST button 3 resets the GROUND FAULT indicator 6 see also paragraph 8 5 2 6 5 Level meter and CLIP indicator The green LED indicators 13dB and OdB 1 together with the red CLIP LED 2 allow to monitor the output level effectively avoiding overdrive conditions that lead to distortion and overload at the power outputs which could damage the connected loudspeaker systems If the red CLIP LED 2 shortly lights during program peaks maximum non distorted modulation is achieved Continuous lighting or blinking of the red CLIP LED 2 signals overdrive In this case the input level has to be reduced If the green LED indicator 1 does not light or is only briefly lit with the red CLIP LED blinking at the same time this signals the encountering of an overload or short circuit condition at the output In this case the impedance of the connected load has to be checked Caution During normal operation the red CLIP LED should only light briefly and shortly 7 Switching the output voltage only to be performed by a qualif
268. emory backup message is supposed to be saved additionally the duration depends on the length of the recorded messages and can last several minutes short message up to some hours memory completely used Thus it is recommended to perform an audio data backup via the menu message edit Play all onto a DAT recorder or tape deck Connection REMOTE RS 232 DMM 4650 9pin D SUB socket female REMOTE RS 232 9pin D SUB connector male Extension cord 1 1 e g Modem connection Interface settings Baud rate 300 to 38400 baud rate can be set at the DMM 4650 System setup gt RS232 Data bits 8 as well as via the interface with command see list REMOTE commands Parity none After pressing the Return key on the PC Line Feed the unit returns Stop bit 1 DMM 4650 communication test Protocol Xon Xoff The baud rate is factory preset to 9600 baud Backup Restore commands Priority The backup command can be given both from the DMM 4650 menu System setup backup as well as via the REMOTE interface After starting the backup procedure the desired data is transmitted in the previously determined format via the REMOTE interface The PC s terminal program receives the data and creates a corresponding file The terminal program s configuration is not to be set for any conversion of the received data Part of backup file RESTORE is needed for data r
269. enerator and four selective 19 kHz receivers with evaluation stage Caution A Unplug the mains cord and disconnect batteries before opening the appliance 9 1 1 To Install The NRS 90206 Proceed As Follows see diagram 9 for opening the appliance please remove the 9 screws on the top of the appliance that lock the cover late the NRS 90206 gets retrofitted on the printed board assembly 89019 1 which is located behind the input printed board assembly 81331 in the front area attached to the left side panel of the amplifier in front view Be sure to first insert the included board guides before installing the printed board assembly assuring the correct position of their guide grooves The release lever of the guides marked A points to the top while the one of the guides marked B points downwards the NRS 90206 extension kit needs to be inserted with its printed side pointing to the top until it firmly locks in place Make sure that the power resistors R917 to R920 that are located underneath the NRS printed board assembly do not touch this board closing the appliance use the 9 screws M3 x 6 DIN 7500 to reattach the cover plate 29 PILOTTEN BETECTION CROJNG FAULT DETECTION NR 80006 NRS 90257 88019 1 diagram 9 Printed board assembly 89019 1 showing the position of the modules NRS 90206 and NRS 90207 9 1 2 Checking The Function Of The NRS 90206 With built in NRS 90206 and powered on amplifier the READY
270. ent pressing cancels the selection 3 CANCEL key This key offers different functions depending on the actually selected operation mode e g cancel calling pattern or cancel program assignment Which function is carried out at times is explained in detail in the paragraph OPERATION 4 GONG key ESC and LED Pressing this key starts the transmission of a gong signal in the pre selected areas or groups The GONG LED lights or blinks during the transmission of a gong signal What kind of gong signal is being transmitted is defined during the configuration procedure Pressing the STOP key cancels the reproduction of the gong signal While in setup mode this key is used to return to normal user mode ESCAPE leaving setup mode PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 31 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 10 11 TEXT key v and LED Pressing the TEXT key starts a prerecorded message optional voice reproduction which is transmitted into pre selected areas or groups The TEXT LED lights or blinks during the transmission of a prerecorded message The desired text message is selected during the configuration procedure Pressing the STOP key cancels the reproduction of a text message While in setup mode pressing the TEXT key decreases the selected parameter value parameter entry TALK key and BUSY LED This key activates a message for pre selected areas or groups The BUSY LED lights during transmission The TALK key has to be pressed unt
271. eparately to the monitor bus and you can listen to the signal via headphones or loudspeaker either which is connected to the monitor output Automatic pilot tone surveillance of the two output channels is also integrated The jumpers for adjusting the output voltage to 0 dB or 6 dB are located on the printed board assembly At the same time you have to alter the jumper setting of the monitor signal correspondingly The output module employs integrated output relays that prevent switching noise from being heard When switching the system on the output signal is put through after the system is been initialized power on delay the contacts are immediately interrupted when switching the power off Specifications description DPM OUT 2 channel LINE output module NRS 90218 connections 2 x XLRM type connectors audio outputs 2 electronically balanced transformers are optionally available nominal output level 0 dBu 775 mV or 6 dBu 1 55 V switched via jumper output impedance 1150 frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB dynamic range gt 97 dB A weighted SIN ratio gt 109 dB A weighted distortion lt 0 005 96 D A conversion 20 bit linear Sigma Delta power consumption 1 5W operational temperature range 5 40 dimensions W x H x D 37 5 x 81 x 247 mm weight 160g 255 g including 2 x NRS 90227 extensions NRS 90227 output transformer for 1 output order No 121 679 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 0 6dBu LINE OUT
272. eption is strong enough 5 When slave clocks need to be synchronized the required amount of slave clocks max 40 including cabling Additionally a PC providing the following features is needed for configuration purposes and operation PC computer system with Pentium processor min 90 MHz and Windows 95 98 NT 16 MB of RAM 1 hard disk offering free space of at least 5 MB 1x 3 5 floppy drive 1 44 MB 1 mouse 1 monitor with a resolution of at least 800 x 600 pixels with VGA graphics board 256 colors 1 serial port RS 232 with serial cable PROANNOUNCE Designer configuration software 1 CD ROM drive All necessary cables plugs connectors or adapters for establishing connections are available through EVI Audio GmbH Our entire accessory assortment with order numbers is included in the corresponding owner s manuals as well as in the PA systems price lists PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 2 3 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS 2 2 2 DPA 4000 Power Amplifier Especially designed for it the DPA 4000 Series power amplifiers optimally match the PROANNOUNCE system Thus guaranteeing trouble free installation and operation The power amplifiers are stand alone devices offering the opportunity for them to be operated together with several other pieces of equipment as long as all valid specifications and applicable instructions for the installation are being observed 2 2 3 DPC 4000 Paging Stations Especial
273. er systems with 70V or 50V output voltage see also paragraph 7 Caution It is possible that during operation shock hazard output voltages can be present at the POWER OUTPUT connector gt 34V peak value Thus the connected loudspeaker groups have to be installed in accordance to applicable security standards and regulations see also paragraph 8 5 2 5 3 SINGLE CALL and obligatory reception relays OVERRIDE BYPASS Combined with the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 or other external controls it is also possible to transmit single or collective calls with obligatory reception i e bridging of possibly existing volume controls of the loudspeaker systems For details on how to connect the outputs please refer to figure 3 for the connection of relays please refer to paragraph 5 6 respectively the PROMATRIX handbook 5 4 POWER OUTPUT for low impedance loudspeaker systems Switching the output to 4 ohms allows the connection of low impedance loudspeaker systems 4 16 ohms see also paragraph 7 and figure 3 Because of the occurring line attenuation the distance between amplifier and loudspeaker system should not exceed 50m Please make sure that the overall loudspeaker impedance does not decline a value of 4 ohms and that the stated power handling capacity of a single speaker system is not exceeded 5 5 MONITOR output The MONITOR output 16 on the NRS 90225 allows the connection of an additional power amplifier for monitoring purposes The low i
274. erface allows saving and loading of unit configurations and message data In order to ensure function reliability a self test and an audio data verification is installed The alarm is provided via a dedicated output The DMM 4650 does not require maintenance due to its use of flash memory DMM4650 Digital Message Manager deer ca ee U a em 08 16 9 Technical Specifications Operating Voltage 21 6 31 2V DC Power consumption max 18 watts without retrofitting kits 90204 Input voltage 0 775V 0dBu Max Input voltage 3 8V 14dBu Mic INPUT 50mV 24dBu Input impedance 20kOhm Mic INPUT 1 4kOhm Output voltage 0 775V 0dBu Max Output voltage 3 8V 14dBu Phones 9V 21dBu Output impedance bal 136 Ohm unbal 68 Ohm Frequency response 20Hz 20kHz 3 0dB Signal to noise ratio gt 108dB A weighted THD lt 0 03 at 1KHz Data format AD DA converter 16 bit linear DSP internal 24 bit Sampling rate 35kHz Control inputs lt 5V Low gt 10 High Dimensions 483 X 43 6 X 225 W x H x D 19in 1HU Weight 4kg ElectroVoice Architecture amp Engineering Specifications The message delivery unit shall provide universal generation and control of audio signals The main application shall be for PA racks but stand alone applications are possible as well The audio signals shall
275. eries power amplifiers offering common features as listed below e 4 models DPA 4410 4 100W DPA 4411 4 x 100 W Remote Control DPA 4120 1x200W DPA 4140 1x400W e floating 100 V power outputs internally configurable to 70 V 50 V or 4 e outputs are protected against idling and short circuit e mains operation at 115 230 V AC and 24 V DC emergency power supply e mains and battery remote on off e electronically balanced inputs transformers are optionally available e input level controls e monitor outputs e temperature controlled operation e pilot tone and ground fault surveillance optionally available e fault indication and fault messaging via floating READY contact e remote control module for DPA 4120 DPA 4140 optionally available Note Detailed description of individual characteristics features functions and specifications of these power amps are provided in the corresponding owner s manual supplied with the appliance 5 50 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 3 2 Instructions For Using Remote Power Amps 1 Each power amplifier has to be set to the exact address as it is specified in the PROANNOUNCE Designer software A low value part B high value part Address setting is performed using hexadecimal code An RS 485 connection needs to be established between the DPM 4000 remote socket and maximally eight DCS 401 and maximally 64 amplifiers DPA 4411 counts as a
276. es that are directly connect When shipped the jumpers factory preset position is open no phantom power 4 Compressor Limiter The MIC LINE input channel embodies a compressor limiter circuit which can be incorporated into the signal path via jumper JP2 position 1 2 COMP Normally the compressor limiter should be used to eliminate the risks of overdrive and clipping when directly connecting a microphone When shipped the jumper is set to its Linear position 2 3 LIN C27 C25 5 mo c2 E 2 E ODO 9 at RB R41 R30 Rai i R40 104 R29 84 104 155 ao gm 2 I BE 2 8 R2 2 18 m dus R22 2 R33 Co R9 Rs R R48 R43 R34 c3 HD coe ND s e C24 123 Eu 39898585858 R3 D1 5 3 0 cia E UA Br OS ban 5 D Gm 620 D2 El on 72 gl DU 000 IE Om zi C23 C22 Sa ke 1184 215 GAIN 83 Sins PHANTOM figure 5 14 retrofitting the input transformer internal settings location of parts NRS 90216 Retrofitting Input Transformers In case galvanic separation of the audio signal is necessary an input transformer can be retrofitted to channel B of the MIC LINE module This is accomplished using the extension kit NRS 90233 When retrofitting inp
277. es not provide any configuration example that suits your particular application custom configuring of the DRM 4000 is possible Therefore connect the DRM 4000 to your PC and use the DRM 4000 EDITOR software which is supplied together with each extension kit For detailed explanation please refer to chapter 7 Connect the DRM 4000 with your media control afterwards and utilize the contact control commands as described in the following ASCII command Comment SERVICE HB value e g SERVICE HB OFF power off SERVICE HB 20 20s timeout SERVICE HB value query Value 60 0 OFF Allows writing or reading a heartbeat timeout value This function is for monitoring the connection between central control unit and DRM 4000 It can be compared to a watchdog function Once the connection is interrupted or the heartbeat is not re triggered in time the DRM 4000 is set back to its default condition If periodically sending the heartbeat signal for monitoring the connection is not possible or not desired writing the value OFF at the start of a control sequence is mandatory to deactivate the heartbeat Write access enter the desired heartbeat timeout value values 60 0 equivalent to 60s 0s or OFF Read access time span in seconds until the expiration of the heartbeat is returned SERVICE CC ON value e g SERVICE CC ON 1 2 4 SERVICE CC ON NONE SERVICE CC ON Value NONE 1 8 Write access one o
278. es of the rest of the incorporated modules and appliances within a specific rack shelf system have to be taken into careful consideration When mounting the power amplifier insi de of a closed rack system it is recom mended to use special rack rails or optionally available rack mount ears NRS 90235 112733 to prevent bending of the appliance s front panel 15 12 Note For maintained trouble free operation of the appliance the maximum admissible ambient temperature of 40 C is not to be exceeded The amplifier has to be protected from water drops or splashes direct sunlight high ambient temperatures and the direct radiation of heat sources high humidity and moisture heavy dust massive vibrations Moving the amplifier from a cold into a warm environment can result in the occurrence of condensation on inner parts Operating the appliance is only permissible after it has accommodated to the altered temperature approximately after one hour Should any foreign solid parts or liquids inadvertently intrude the enclosure immediately unplug the device from the power source and have it checked at a DYNACORD service center before further use Cleaning the appliance should not be performed using chemical solvents or sprays as this might damage the finish and could even cause hazard fire Before The First Operation Before switching the amplifier s power on the included mains cord has to be con
279. escription connections DPM MLC MIC LINE paging station module NRS 90234 1 x RJ 45 socket 1 x XLRF type connector input A DPC 4000 electronically balanced transformers are optionally available nominal input level 0 dBu 775 mV max input level 12 dBu 3 V input impedance 20 input B MIC LINE electronically balanced transformers are optionally available nominal input level MIC 54 dBu 14 dBu 1 5 mV 155 mV LINE 24 dBu 16 dBu 50mV 5V max input level MIC 5 dBu 1 4V in limiter operation LINE 30 dBu 25V input impedance MIC 3 6 kQ LINE 10 KQ Phantom power audio input balancing frequency response SIN ratio distortion A D conversion control interface 24V 20 mA switched via jumper gt 30 dB 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB gt 95 dB A weighted lt 0 01 96 18 bit linear Sigma Delta 1 x RS 485 standard PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 19 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS supply output for the DPC 4000 supply voltage 1 short circuit proof electronic programmable fuse 24V DC 21 6 31 2 V DC nominal current 330 mA 660 mA 990 mA set via electronic fuse power consumption 2 5W operational temperature range 5 40 C dimensions W x Hx D 37 5 x 81 x 252 mm weight 165g 215 g including NRS 90208 NRS 90233 extensions NRS 90208 input transformer for 1 paging station input order No 121 641 NRS 90233 input transformer for 1 MIC LINE input order
280. experiencing a technical malfunction For the sake of safety we ask you to please leave the hall using the marked exits Technical malfunction 3 Ladies and gentlemen may we have your attention please Because we are experiencing some technical difficulties we kindly ask you to leave the hall immediately using the marked exits Please remain calm and follow the instructions of the authorized personal Fire Attention fire alarm Please use the marked exits to leave the hall immediately Follow the instructions of the authorized personal Attention fire alarm please remain calm End of the performance Ladies and gentlemen today s convention is coming to its end The exits will soon be closed for the public We sincerely hope you had a pleasant stay and are looking forward to your return 50 Specifications DMM 4650 Operating Voltage Power consumption Input voltage Max Input voltage 21 6 31 2VDC max 18 watts without retrofitting kits 90204 Input Line Input Rec Input Mic Input Input Line INPUT Rec INPUT Mic INPUT 0 775V OdBu 0 775V OdBu 0 775V OdBu 1 4mV 54dBu at 600 ohms 3 8V 14dBu 30V 32dBu 30V 32dBu 50mV 24dBu at 600 ohms Using several inputs simultaneously results in a change of the stated voltages Input impedance Output voltage Max Output voltage Output impedance Frequency response Signal to noise ratio THD Data format Sampling rate
281. f all devices but one to ungrounded Set to ungrounded the impedance between signal ground and enclosure is 100 k ohms 100 nF It is necessary to maintain the immunity from EMV 12 Fuses Fuse switch 11 Mains fuse 230 V AC T4AL 250V 5 x 20 mm IEC 127 Fuse switch 11 Mains fuse 115 V AC T8AH 250V 5x 20mm IEC 127 Board 86243 Mains fuse AC T1AL 250V 8 5 x 8 45 mm IEC 127 Board 85272 Battery fuse 24 V DC 25AL 32V Flat type fuse DIN 72581 3 Board 85272 Battery fuse 24 V DC 25AL 32V Flat type fuse DIN 72581 3 Board 85272 Power AMP 1 T6 3AL 250V 5x 20mm IEC 127 Board 85272 Power AMP 2 T6 3AL 250V 5x 20mm IEC 127 Board 85272 Power AMP 3 T6 3AL 250V 5x 20mm IEC 127 Board 85272 Power AMP 4 T6 3AL 250V 5x 20mm IEC 127 Changing The Fuses F502 And F503 see diagram 11 Caution Unplug the mains cord and disconnect batteries before opening the appliance The battery fuses F 502 and F503 are located on the mains power supply printed board assembly 85272 behind the AMP battery connectors In case they need to be replaced commence as follows open the appliance by removing the 9 screws that lock the cover plate remove the mains input printed board assembly 86243 that is located at the rear inner wall Therefore unplug the yellow green ground conductor form the corresponding connector at the rear inner wall To remove the AMP plug press its lock piece now you have to remove the 3 screws of the mains input printe
282. f the DPM 4000 RS 485 Prior to connecting the amplifier to the operating voltage the unit s address has to be set using the switches A and B A low value part PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 51 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS The following remote functions are available Control Level control Mute Monitor activation Input Output Mains operation ON OFF Battery operation ON OFF Pilot tone ON OFF optionally available Messages Output level Pilot tone detection Ground fault detection Thermal overload amplifier mains transformer Configuration Measured values of current and voltage at the power output Extension kits 5 3 4 Four Channel Power Amplifier DPA 4411 Features Power amplifier with 4x100 W output power capacity according to IEC 283 3 19 Chassis 3 HU Mains operation 115 230 V AC and emergency power supply operation 24 V DC Output transformers for balanced floating 100 V speaker networks 70 V 50 V or 4 ohms low impedance operation selectable All outputs are protected against idling and short circuit Integrated remote module for control and surveillance via the PROANNOUNCE Manager DPM 4000 Electronic level controls electronically balanced inputs and electronically balanced MONITOR output Input transformers for balanced floating operation are optionally available Monitor output transformer offering a balanced floating MONITOR output is optionally available Routing switch for paral
283. f the appliance Additionally note the corresponding output configuration see diagram 5 on the label OUT CONFIG TYPE 20 According to the description in diagram 7 adjust the switches S801 and S802 on the printed board assembly 89019 2 that are located next to the transformers on the bottom of the appliance s enclosure refer also to paragraph 5 4 5802 SE C81 esaa DUT CFG TYPE L QUT_CFG_UOLTAGE R869 ot R863 TO NRS PCB 1910 2 1909 Loo Cha IBOS 89819 2 diagram 8 Printed board assembly 89019 2 showing the position of the switches S801 and S802 9 Additional Functions And Features refer to qualified service personnel only 9 1 NRS 90206 Pilot Ton Surveillance Using the extension kit NRS 90206 provides continuous monitoring surveillance of the individual amplifier channels This is achieved by sending an ultra low level 19 kHz pilot tone through the device It enters the signal path post level controls runs through the amplification stages and gets filtered out and evaluated at the output In case the result of this evaluation shows that the pilot dropped beneath a defined threshold or is missing at all the corresponding READY indicator AMP 1 4 7 goes out but the power amplifier upholds its normal operation A fault message is transmitted to the PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 see PROMATRIX handbook The extension kit NRS 90206 comes as a plug in board assembly and consists of a 19 kHz tone g
284. figured during system configuration for the external audio signal source function using the PROANNOUNCE Designer software External MIC LINE Input EXT socket As shipped the external MIC LINE input is set to a sensitivity of 0 dBu Switching the input sensitivity to 45 dBu for the connection of a PTT microphone is only possible by closing two internal soldering bridges Therefore you have to perform the following steps 1 Disconnect the paging console from the power supply 2 Detach the bottom plate 6 to 8 screws depending on the paging station model 3 Close the soldering bridges A and B according to the diagram on this page 4 Re attach the bottom plate 5 48 EXT SOCKET 8 PTT MICRO A PTT MICRO B figure 5 44 connecting a PTT microphone CD PLAYER CASSETTEN RECORDER figure 5 45 connecting external audio signal sources 15 182 R115 SM 4 mn c34 s C55 B E e NO e 7 UL Y Se Saw E ros Bed St R112 Ba MET MEC EE R27 R19 25 2 ce Sk oc B c2 co RT R170 R103 R164 ET 9 VCC 2 3 8 R161 R163 L TT TT 2 figure 5 46 setting the input sensitivity PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 2 14 Cable Length Depending on the utilized paging station model and amount and in relation to minimal supply voltage and ca
285. formance specifications are accomplished even in most demanding and critical installations Since the DPA Series power amplifiers do not employ V I Foldback Limiter circuits operation on complex loads up to 90 phase angles is possible without a problem Quick optical information on the power amplifiers momentary operational status is provided through easily readable LED indicators individually showing whether a channel is ready for operation a signal is present at the output if any of the limiter circuits and or one of the protection circuits has been activated The inputs are electronically balanced and carried out as XLRF type and as binding post clamping connectors as well Parallel linking the two connector types at the input provides the possibility to utilize the carried through signals to feed additional power amplifiers without the necessity for special split cab les Both inputs can be optionally retrofitted with input transformers Through Input Routing switches it is possible to configure the DPA Series power amplifiers for stereo parallel monaural or bridged mode operation The dB scaled level controls extremely precise and good to operate potentiometers are located on the rear of the appliances A Ground Lift switch which helps eliminating ground noise loops by separating the amplifier circuit ground from the common ground of the enclosure is also to be found on the rear panels Conveniently connecting the loudspeaker
286. fy already existing possibly similar sequences user or factory presets and store them under different numbers together with their new titles and priorities Operation menu sequence Confirming the menu selection sequence with the soft key ok using the cursor keys lets you select the following sub menus Load Confirming with the soft key ok Sxx title and the soft keys yes no appear on the display Modifying the sequence number xx is possible by use of the cursor keys the corresponding name is displayed The selected sequence is loaded into memory with y offering the possibility for editing in other menus Priority Confirming Priority with the soft key ok the display shows the priority number of the selected sequence Using the cursor keys it can be altered in the range of 00 up to 99 After pressing the EXIT key previous menu level the question store yes no appears on the display Acknowledging this question lets you save your new settings in a user preset Stop trigger When confirming stop trigger with the soft key ok a menu is displayed which allows trigger settings for an input control line Possible choices are described in the chapter trigger The stop trigger function is only available when the sequence commands if stop or wt stop are included After pressing the EXIT key previous menu level the question store yes no appears on the display Acknow
287. g input A DPC 4000 electronically balanced nominal input level 0 dBu 775 mV max input level 12 dBu 3V input impedance 20 kw input B MIC LINE electronically balanced nominal input level MIC 54 dBu 14 dBu 1 5 mV 155 LINE 24 dBu 16 dBu 50 mV 5V max input level MIC 5 dBu 1 4V in limiter operation LINE 30 dBu 25V input impedance MIC 3 6 kW LINE 10 kW Phantom power 24V 20 mA switched via jumper input balancing gt 30 dB frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB SIN ratio 95 dB A weighted distortion lt 0 01 A D conversion 18 bit linear Sigma Delta control interface 1 x RS 485 standard supply output for the DPC 4000 1 short circuit proof electronic programmable fuse supply voltage 24VDC 21 6 31 2 V DC nominal current 330 mA 660 mA 990 dimensions W x H x D 37 5 x 81 x 252 mm weight 165 g 2 Channel LINE Output Module NRS 90218 The output module is meant for the connection of power amplifiers with an input sensitivity of O dB or 6 dB Two XLR M type connectors allow the connection of up to 20 power amplifiers each The audio signal is electronically balanced if necessary transformers can be retrofitted The module can be installed in slot 3 or slot 4 The output channels can be switched separately
288. g 4 Control MIC LINE 1 4 Rotary controls for setting the volume level of the DRM4000 s corresponding MIC LINE inputs Ideally the rotary control is set to a value in the area of its center position 0 dB This provides you with the opportunity to match different levels of different input channels Afterwards use the master rotary controls to set the output volume for the entire system 5 Ducking Threshold control DUCK THR This control allows separately setting the threshold of the ducking control priority function for MIC LINE 1 and MIC LINE 2 Ducking control is an automatic level detection function which passes the audio signal ofthe corresponding input channel MIC LINE 1 or 2 through to the pre selected outputs while attenuating the audio signals of all other input channels e g background music by the pre set value ducking The ducking threshold controls allow using the ducking function even under unfavorable conditions e g when using a microphone in a noisy environment or picking up sound over wider distances The controls are recessed mounted in the front panel to prevent faulty operation Accessing the controls is possible using a crosshead screwdriver 2 1 CONTROLS AND CONNECTIONS 6 Tone Control LO HI Each of the four MIC LINE as well as each of the four AUX inputs has its own tone control section which allows individually amplifying attenuating the treble HI and bass LO by 15 dB Turning the tone c
289. g noise knacks the monitor output stays muted as long as the READY relay is not pulled Because of circuit design reasons this causes that the monitor output is also muted even when a ground fault appears at the main output 8 2 Remote module NRS 90222 This input and remote module for the power amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 is meant for insertion at the power amplifiers rear It provides the following functions lockable XLR input connector output connector to patch the input signal through input level can be set via a programmable audio level control MUTE via level control mains remote ON OFF battery remote ON OFF control of the D and E relays surveillance and fault messaging via the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 corresponding to IEC 849 thermal overload of the mains transformer thermal overload of the power amplification stage ground fault optional only with installed NRS 90224 pilot tone signal optional only with installed NRS 90224 measurement of the output voltage level measurement of the output current surveillance of the connected loads via current voltage measurement MONITOR output electronically balanced monitoring input output signals can be assigned to the monitor bus input transformer for floating balanced input optional Output transformer for floating balanced monitor output optional pilot tone signal ON OFF optional The remote module allows to remotely c
290. g stations are presented with a busy message If these restrictions are not acceptable every microphone terminal or at least all directing stations and other important paging stations should have their own input at the central unit 20 Revision 1 1 DPC 4000 PROMATRIX System Paging Station Functions Next to elementary messaging the paging stations offer several additional functions that in summation are shown in the following diagram Which functions a microphone terminal can initiate depend on its configuration and priority setting Table of all functions EH mm Lama o m Detailed information concerning the different functions is provided within the following chapters DPC 4000 Revision 1 1 21 PROMATRIX System Control Panel DPC 4550 1 22 Selection Keys with LED s Depending on the individual paging station model 10 20 30 or 50 selection keys with corresponding LED s are provided The selection keys are used to pre select areas or groups for the reproduction of messages gong or alarm signals vocal messages or to assign programs first press ON subsequent press OFF The LED s indicate the momentary selection status also refer to the paragraph indications It is also possible to assign special functions or no function at all no function assigned to the selection keys Assigning functions is performed during the configuration procedure via PC Note When
291. ges 33 35 The EXIT key terminates this mode returning to the prior menu level RS232 Confirming RS232 with the soft key ok displays the current baud rate of the REMOTE RS232 interface With the cursor keys the desired data rate can be set and is effective immediately Normally this adjustment is necessary before Backup or Restore and remains in memory This function can also be executed via command at the RS232 interface A precise description of the necessary control steps and data formats is to be found on the pages 33 35 The EXIT key switches to the prior menu level Clock Confirming clock with the soft key ok date and time together with soft key set appear on the display After pressing set date and time are set anew using the cursor keys The clock has no power reserve at missing supply voltage and is necessary only for the error log in self test With Power ON the clock always starts from the same value Setting date and time is also be achieved via command at the RS232 interface A precise description of the necessary control steps and data formats is to be found on the pages 33 35 The EXIT key switches to the prior menu level 28 Self test General In stand by mode the DMM 4650 runs a number of test routines in order to detect device faults at an early stage Errors are indicated by the flashing of the green POWER LED On fatal errors or on a higher occurence of e
292. gnal Indicator This indicator is lit when the audio signal exceeds 30 dB In case short cir cuits resulting from broken loudspeaker cables are detected or one of the power amplifier s protection circuits is activated the signal indicator is dimmed PROTECT The PROTECT LED lights whenever one of the power amplifier s protection circuits thermal overload RF DC Back EMF is activated In PROTECT mode all loudspeaker lines and output transformers are disconnected via relays and the power amplifiers audio inputs are short circuited to prevent the connected loudspeaker systems from being damaged When the power amplifier enters the PROTECT mode please examine first whether the appliance is overheated If this is the case the front and rear ventilation louvres are possibly covered the nominal load impedance has fallen below the specified minimum value or a short circuit occurred at the power output When switching the power amplifier on the PROTECT LED lights for appro ximately 2 seconds This is normal It signals that the protection circuitry is in working order Power ON Indicator This LED lights when the power amplifier is connected to the mains and its power switch is setto the ON position If the indicator does not light although the power amplifier is switched on the appliance is not connected to the mains or the primary fuse is blown 24 Protection Circuitry The DPA Series power amplifiers are equipped with extensiv
293. gnment Easy labeling of keys via label strips and MS WORD templates Monitoring of the analog circuitry via integrated pilot tone oscillator Line monitoring via pilot tone and polling Covered alarm key except at the DPC 4106 Set up mode allows altering parameter settings directly at the paging station Two line LCD display DPC4520 Paging Station General Description Technical Specifications The ProAnnounce system includes 5 different paging DPC MODEL 4106 4510 4520 4530 4550 4350 station models and one paging station extension of the Operation 24V DC 21 6V 312 V DPC 4000 series All paging stations employ voltage gooseneck microphones 6 or 8 function keys and a Powercons 24 80 80 85 90 90 90 covered alarm key An additional key as well as a key V mA lock switch can be retrofitted All paging stations are in operation 15 V DC available with 10 20 30 or 50 selection keys All voltage models come with an LCD display 2 lines with 16 Nax pwrcons 20 120 120 1120 135 95 characters each m VIA udio input external The available models are Line default 0 dBu PTT 52 dBu e DPC 4106 with 6 function keys microphone DPC 4510 with 8 function keys 10 selection Audio output 36 dBu keys and an alarm key Alarm Key Opt __ Yes N A e DPC 4520 with 8 function keys 20 selection Display gt zu
294. grated as well If necessary retrofitting the audio inputs with transformers is possible figure 5 7 2 channel paging station module Note When connecting several paging consoles to a single input please keep in mind that line interruption or short circuit can cause malfunction of several or even all paging stations of that specific line In emergency alert installation connecting security related consoles to individual inputs is therefore of major importance Specifications description DPM PCI 2 channel paging station module NRS 90215 connections 2 x RJ 45 sockets audio inputs 2 electronically balanced transformers are optionally available nominal input level 0 dBu 775 mV max input level 12 dBu 3V input impedance 20 kQ input balancing gt 30 dB frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB S N ratio gt 100 dB A weighted distortion lt 0 01 96 A D conversion 18 bit linear Sigma Delta control interfaces 2 x RS 485 standard power supply outputs for the DPC 4000 2 short circuit proof electronically programmable fuses supply voltage 24VDC 21 6 31 2 V DC nominal current 330 mA 660 mA 990 mA adjustable electronic fuse power consumption 2W operational temperature range 5 40 dimensions W xH x D 37 5 x 81 x 248 mm weight 152g 220 g including 2 x NRS 90208 extensions NRS 90208 input transformer for 1 paging station input order No 121 641 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEV
295. h anthracite extension kits for the DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 NRS 90208 input transformer for floating balanced input Art No 121 641 NRS 90222 remote module Art No 121 674 NRS 90224 pilot tone amp ground fault surveillance Art No 121 676 NRS 90225 standard input module Art No 121 677 NRS 90227 output transformer for floating balanced monitor output Art No 121 679 13 Extension kit specifications for the power amplifiers DPA 4120 DPA 4140 13 4 NRS 90225 standard input module see specifications DPA 4120 DPA 4140 13 2 NRS 90222 remote module see specifications DPA 4120 DPA 4140 13 3 NRS 90208 input transformer for floating balanced input frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz input impedance gt 10 k ohms idling ratio 1 1 winding resistance primary 1420 ohms at 20 winding resistance secondary 1420 ohms at 20 13 4 NRS 90227 output transformer for floating balanced monitor output frequency response 40 Hz 20 kHz nominal load impedance 2 600 ohms idling ration 1 1 winding resistance primary 18 ohms at 20 winding resistance secondary 18 ohms at 20 13 5 90224 pilot tone amp ground fault surveillance 13 5 1 pilot tone surveillance pilot tone frequency 19 kHz 1 error recognition threshold lt 12 mV fault message output via NRS 90225 collective fault message via READY relay fault message output via NRS 90222 PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 13 5 2 ground fault surveillance input loudspe
296. he BUSY LED lights during announcements The TALK button needs to be pressed during the whole message After releasing the TALK button the defined selection stays memorized until the user makes any changes Pressing the CANCEL key de selects the entire selection Additionally and in case of a pre gong signal has previously been programmed the GONG LED will light during the transmission of the pre gong signal Collective Call The announcement is launched into all areas of an installation The procedure is similar to making a selective call First pressing the ALL key selects all areas of the installation Pressing the TALK button activates the collective call During the outgoing call all area and or group LED s as well as the ALL LED will light also refer to indications The TALK button has to be kept pressed down until the end of an announcement BUSY LED indication and the pre gong signal behave equivalent to what was said for the selective call Direct Call Principally it is possible to assign a direct call to any selection key area key group key ALL key during the PC configuration This allows making announcements directly by pressing the desired selection key without the need to press the TALK key first For direct calls the BUSY LED also signals the status of correspondent areas free busy with lower priority signal busy with higher priority signal see indications When shipped there is no factory pre set direct call prog
297. he reproduction of a prerecorded message that had been assigned during configuration While the text message is being transmitted the TEXT LED lights steadily or blinks also refer to indications The text message priority can be set to values between 2 and 8 Pressing the STOP key cancels the transmission of a text message General Alarm A general alarm signal is always transmitted to all lines of the entire installation Pressing the covered ALARM key launches the integrated alarm The key lights during the transmission of the alarm signal The priority of the alarm can be set between 7 and 9 Therefore it has priority over any announcement or other event except for those that were ignited from the directing paging station priority 10 Pressing the STOP key or subsequently pressing the ALARM key cancels the alarm Selective Alarm When a paging station is equipped with a second ALARM key providing the option for selective alarms it is possible to transmit alarm signals into selected lines Similar to the procedure for making a selective call you first have to select areas or groups to which the alarm signal shall be transmitted Afterwards pressing the covered ALARM key starts the selective alarm The key lights during the transmission of an alarm Already now you are able to enter the lines for the following alarm Pressing the STOP key or subsequently pressing the ALARM key cancels the alarm When shipped there is no factory pre
298. hing contacts each binding post per contact e 5 output binding posts each with 3 screws and label fields e 5 relay control LED s e Configuration of the output distributor is performed through opening wire bridges e 2 connectors for cascading up to 12 modules e 2 binding posts for the connection of an external supply voltage source Installation Note For safety reasons DCS 400 modules may only be installed in rack shelf systems or enclosures that are locked and may only be opened by means of a tool e g screw driver special key etc Mounting the module and establishing the connections are solely admissible when performed in accordance to VDE 0100 and EN 60065 regulations DCS 408 relay module printed board assemblies need to be grounded at their fixing points e g using a metal bolt The module has to be protected against dropping or splashing water Specifications DCS 408 relay module 100 V 24 V DC 10 30 5 2 mA 7 8 mA Description Operating voltage Operating current relay dropped Operating current relay dropped at 24 V 5 5 mA Operating current all relays pulled 87 mA 130 mA Operating current all rel pulled at 24 V 96 mA Relay contacts Contact components 2 changers 2 SPDT Contact material AgNi 90 10 Contact load ohmic load 2000 VA Contact current 8A Contact voltage 100 V AC Operating temperature range 5 C 40 C Dimensions W x H x D 160 x 20 x 100 mm Weight 200 g PRO
299. hing the level of the input signal to the MIX IN input Setting the control to its center position 0 dB leaves the audio signal unaltered Turning it clockwise provides amplification of up to 10 dB while turning it counterclockwise attenuates the level accordingly 23 AUX 1 4 RCA type inputs These RCA type inputs allow connecting unbalanced Line level signal sources like for instance CD Players Cassette Decks Tuners etc to the AUX 1 4 channels 24 Gain control These controls allow separately setting the input levels of each MIC LINE input channel in an amplification range between 10 dB and 60 dB It is recommended to set the input level so that it matches the desired nominal level or to match the appliance s optimum internal operation level using the gain controls In this way you obtain the optimum S N ratio In doing so make sure that the signal LED lights constantly while even at the loudest signal peaks the peak LED is just not lit 25 MIC LINE 1 4 XLR type inputs These XLR type inputs allow connecting balanced signal sources to the MIC LINE 1 4 channels The inputs can be matched for use with an extremely wide level range They are designed to accept microphone levels as well as Line level signal sources 26 PAD switch Engaging this switch attenuates the audio signals by 30 dB providing the possibility of connecting LINE and MIC signal sources to a single connector When the switch is not engaged the corresponding inp
300. hreshold an alert message is being displayed The line surveillance function recognizes any line interruption and or short circuits in the audio and RS 485 control cabling Upon the detection of failure a corresponding message is displayed The PROANNOUNCE Designer software allows comfortably configuring the paging stations Its graphic dialogue oriented user interface offers effortless assign of key functions priorities options and many other paging station functions Up to four paging consoles can be connected to a single input of the central unit However it is important to keep the fact in mind that in case of line interruption and short circuit several microphone terminals may fail Despite one input allows only launching one message at a time All other connected paging stations are presented with a busy message If these restrictions are not acceptable every microphone terminal or at least all directing stations and other important paging stations should have its own input at the central unit PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 29 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 2 2 Paging Console Functions Next to elementary messaging the paging stations offer several additional functions which in summation are shown in the following diagram Which functions a microphone terminal can initiate depends on its configuration and priority setting Table of all functions LE l figure 5
301. ic shock It should only be connected to a grounded wall outlet Under no circumstances insulate the ground contact When using an extension cord always use a 3 pole grounded cable When using multi outlets for distributing make sure that the wall outlet s capacity is not exceeded since this could lead to fire hazard and or can be the cause for electric shock The DPM 4000 contains a lithium type battery to provide the internal clock with power The lifetime of this battery type spans approximately 10 years When the battery s voltage drops below a certain minimum an according message appears on the paging station display In this case the battery has to be exchanged by an EVI Audio GmbH authorized service technician Under no circumstances try to exchange the battery yourself CAUTION There is a severe risk of explosion when incorrectly exchanging the battery Only replace with the same type of battery or one especially recommended by the manufacturer For environmental awareness Take care of used batteries following the manufacturer s advice Obeying the VDE regulation DIN VDE 0800 is necessary when installing and operating 100V loudspeaker systems Especially with 100V loudspeaker systems that are part of an emergency alert installation protection measures have to be in accordance with safety class 3 regulations CAUTION During operation speaker group connectors POWER OUTPUT may carry shock hazard output voltages gt 34V
302. icate the original invoice and also the original packaging at a safe place for any eventual shipping CONTROLS AND CONNECTIONS 2 CONTROLS AND CONNECTIONS 11 13 woe DYNACORD DRM 4000 C3 IN 2 AUDIO MIXER amp ROU ER TERA Q0 1 2 2 1 Front Panel 1 Socket MIC LINE 1 Electronically balanced XLR input on the front panel for the connection of microphones or other signal sources This socket is connected parallel to the MIC LINE 1 input on the appliance s rear panel Gain Pad and phantom power settings have to be performed on the rear panel 2 Sockets AUX 1 L R The AUX 1 L R RCA type connectors on the front panel allow connecting a 2 channel audio signal source e g CD Player The connectors are connected parallel to the AUX 1 input on the appliance s rear panel 3 Signal Peak LED s The signal peak LED s provide optical information about the momentary level of the corresponding input channel When setting the input level make sure that the signal LED s blinking follows the rhythm of the fed input signal Otherwise use the gain control for correctly adjusting the input level Blinking or constant lighting of the peak LED indicates that the input channel is on the edge of clipping In this case use the gain control to reduce the level of the input signal The signal LED lights at approx 30 dB and the peak LED at 6 dB below clippin
303. idth of 10kHz maximum recording time 16 bit 20kHz 1 message memory 22 5 sec 16 bit 20kHz 4 message memory 90 sec 8 bit 10KHz 1 message memory 90 sec 1 5 min 8Bit 10kHz 4 message memory 360 sec 6 min signal sources DPM 4000 inputs IN1 IN4 Instructions for retrofitting the Message Memory Extension NRS 90205 into the DPM 4000 contents 1 printed board assembly 86237 1 manual 1 Disconnect the appliance from any power supply Remove the cover 7 screws 3 Insert the printed board 86237 on the main pcb 80249C Insert the printed board 86237 into an empty slot starting with CN301 CN302 CN303 or CN 304 4 Format the inserted memory boards only possible using the PROANNOUNCE Designer software B 307 CN302 IC304 5 28 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 2 PROANNOUNCE DPC 4000 Paging Consoles 5 2 1 System Overview The PROANNOUNCE system includes 5 different models of DPC 4000 Series paging stations and one paging station extension All microphone terminals employ gooseneck microphones 6 or 8 function keys and a covered alarm key An additional alarm key and a key locked switch can be retrofitted The paging stations are available with 10 20 30 or 50 selection keys All models also employ LC displays 2 lines with 16 characters each The following list provides you with an overview of available paging station models DPC 4106 6 function keys
304. ieanspruch WARRANTY The factory grants warranty covering all ve rifiable material and manufacturing faults for a period of 36 months after purchase War ranty claims will only be upheld if valid i e fully completed warranty forms are submit ted This warranty shall not cover damage caused by incorrect or improper operation Any claim to warranty shall become null and void in the event of modifications to the equipment being made by third parties or the purchaser himself Le EVI 7 ry yy GmbH Hirschberger Ring 45 94315 Straubing Telefon 09421 706 0 Telefax 09421 706 265 did nderungen vorbehalten Subject to change without prior notice Printed in Germany 29 03 1999 347 030 Internet http www dynacord de DYNACOHD OWNER S MANUAL DMM 4650 INPUT LINE PHONES DYNACORD DMM 4650 DIGITAL MESSAGE MANAGER laa e gt gt gt gt EXIT Description The DMM 4650 is a signal processor which allows for an universal generation and control of audio signals Its main purpose is the installation in electro acoustic rack systems but stand alone applications are possible as well The audio signals can consist of alarm gong voice messages but also of random combinations of these sources The programs were created by Dynacord preset Anyway it is possible for the user consulting company etc to modify those programs and store them as user programs The audio inp
305. ied service technician The DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 amplifiers allow the connection of 50V 70V 100V or low impedance loudspeaker Systems 4 ohms They are factory preset to an output voltage of 100 V Switching the output voltage to 4 ohms 50V or 70V can be performed by changing the bridge B411 on the power amplifier printed board assembly 84187 DPA 4120 or 84175 DPA 4140 Caution Before opening the appliance make sure to disconnect the mains and or battery power source To open the appliance the top panel has to be removed The bridge B411 yellow wire has to be removed from the contact B407 and re attached to the desired contact see table 1 see also figure 8 respectively figure 9 he coding bridges S405 and S406 for the output recognition have to be inserted according to the illustration in figure 5 the inserted coding bridge is marked in black The top panel has to be re attached Note By using a waterproof marker pen and after switching the output voltage the newly set value has to be marked in the filed OUTPUT VOLTAGE on the rear panel of the appliance 31 output bridge 405 rp 5406 2 5 to m edi DUPULT CONFIG an OUTPUT CONFIG Ne E 100 V B407 100 V 70 V 408 ni bos B409 5 CE OUTPUT CONFIG OUTPUT CONFIG B410 BE E 50 V 4 QHMS table 1 bridge B411 settings figure 5 coding bridges S405 S406 settings switching the output voltage output recognition OUTPUT CONFIG Cauti
306. ier is switched on the green READY indicator 7 has to light The testing and reset button TEST 3 serves as a function control for the pilot tone surveillance With the TEST button being engaged the 19 kHz generator is inactive The green READY indicator is off and the READY fault message relay drops Approximately 3 seconds after releasing the TEST button the indicator has to light again This method can also be used to check system configurations with average switching 38 Checking the ground fault surveillance function When the NRS 90224 is installed and the power amplifier is switched on the green READY indicator 7 has to light Utilizing external switch to connect one pole of the 100V loudspeaker network via a 47 ohms resistor for approximately 5 seconds to ground potential the corresponding red GROUND FAULT indicator 6 has to light and the READY fault message relay of the INPUT MODULE NRS 90225 drops while the green READY indicator 7 stays lit After releasing the button the indication and the fault message are maintained The TEST button 3 has to be used to reset the ground fault surveillance function For further details on checking the function with the REMOTE MODULE NRS 90222 being included in your installation please refer to the PROMATRIX handbook 9 19 case and 19 rack shelf system installation Note Operation of the power amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 with enclosure cover plates detached is strictly prohib
307. ighest priority level when several CONTROL INPUTS are connected to ground The input signal is not assigned to any output The input signal is only assigned to output A AUX inputs are summed for monaural output The input signal is only assigned to output B AUX inputs are summed for monaural output The input signal is assigned to the outputs A and B AUX inputs are summed for monaural output via the outputs A and B AUX input L is assigned to output A while AUX input R is assigned to output B this option is only available for AUX inputs The control input parameters are not changed from the BASIC CONFIGURATION The output signal is connected through to the masters A resp B Output relays switch the output signal off of masters A resp B The control input parameters are not changed from the BASIC CONFIGURATION The MASTER outputs A resp B are attenuated by the according value in dB MIC LINE input activates ducking control MIC LINE input does not activate ducking control Ducking control is activated by the contact Ducking control is automatically activated when the level in MIC LINE 1 or 2 is exceeding the Ducking Threshold automatic level detection function Please note that is a precondition routing MIC LINE 1 or 2 to the corresponding Master output and setting the parameter Priority Override to Enable The control input s parameters are not changed from the BASIC CONFIGURATION 8 2 INTERNAL SETTIN
308. igure 5 2 DPM 4000 front view The following controls and indicators are located on the DPM 4000 s front panel 1 LED DCF 77 This LED indicates the operation mode of the DCF 77 radio controlled signal receiver The following table shows the different indications and explains their corresponding status LED indication status OFF No radio control signal detected or no DCF 77 antenna connected The system clock is quartz synchronized ON The radio control signal is received The system clock is synchronized to the DCF 77 signal Blinking one cycle per radio control signal is present and the system clock is being second synchronized This procedure can take up to 2 minutes After synchronization is complete the DCF 77 LED light continuously Blinking fast The radio control signal is detected but its reception is jammed Re adjusting the DCF 77 antenna or choosing a location with improved reception is recommended 2 LED READY This LED indicates the operation mode of the PROANNOUNCE System After switching the power on the READY LED blinks while the system boots Depending on the complexity of the installation blinking can take several seconds After successful initialization the LED lights signaling that the system is ready for operation Whenever erroneous operation either in the DPM 4000 or in one of the connected components is detected the LED goes out indicating that a system error occurred When the system power is OFF the RE
309. il the end of a message The BUSY LED blinks when one or several areas are busy or when an event with higher priority setting interrupts the output message see paragraph indications In the latter it is necessary to repeat the message ON key and LED This key turns the system s power on or off Turning the power on can take several seconds The ON LED blinks while the system boots The ON LED lights steadily when the system is operational To prevent inadvertent erroneous operation pressing the key for at least 1 second is necessary when turning the power off It is also possible to prohibit the operation of the ON key during the configuration procedure In setup mode this key is used to select the previous parameter parameter selection STOP key Pressing the STOP key cancels an output alarm signal or text message Terminating an alarm signal is also possible by subsequently pressing the ALARM key Only events that were triggered from a specific paging console can be stopped from the exact terminal with the exception of the directing station This terminal allows canceling all signals While in setup mode this key increases the selected parameter value parameter entry PROGRAM key gt and LED Pressing the PROGRAM key selects the program assign mode The selection keys are used in this mode to assign a program background music to the desired areas or groups The PROGRAM LED lights while being in the program assign mode
310. important that the main paging station s EXT socket is configured for the connection of a DPC 4350 extension The extension unit can only be operated together with DPC 45 or DPC 40 Series paging console models PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 41 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 2 11 Factory Presets When shipped the selection keys 1 n are assigned to the corresponding areas 1 n offering real plug n play the paging station is ready for operation directly after connection and switching the system power ON CAUTION When operating several paging consoles within one installation setting every single one to its individual exclusive address 1 16 is of major importance The paging stations provide the following factory pre set functions and characteristics Parameter Setting Description OFF 5 priority for messages Name Untitled DPC4xxx Type Password Level 1 not protected Default password level 1 111 Level 2 password protected Default password level 2 2222 Pre gong signal OFF Buzzer ON acoustic alert signal Compressor Extension socket 27 alarm key Not programmed Key lock switch Not programmed PTT microphone Call in pre selected areas priority 5 Key assignment Selection keys 1 n Selecting areas 1 n key 1 gt area 1 key 2 gt area 2 not with DPC 4106 TALK Call in pre selected areas priority 5 DPC 4106 calls in all areas TEXT Text message i
311. ine type socket 10 Caution amplifier is factory set to 230 V AC To change the setting to 115 V AC use the voltage switch 12 N For the operation with 115 V AC the mains fuse 11 has to be replaced by an 8 Ampere slow blow fuse with the label print T8AL see also paragraph 12 When correctly connected and with mains power present the green STANDBY indicator 4 will light Now through sending the corresponding command via the serial interface of the Remote Module it is possible to start the amplifier from the PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 see PROMATRIX handbook The POWER switch 9 on the rear of the amplifier for bridging the starting relay is meant for service purposes only It offers the possibility to operate the amplifier without remote start Note POWER switch 9 on the rear of the appliance is for service purposes only Remote power off is not possible with the POWER switch set to ON In this case the STANDBY indicator 4 provides no function The DPA 4411 is equipped with a cut in delay of approximately 3 seconds to efficiently suppress power on noise After this period of time and when no fault was detected the green READY indicators 7 will light see paragraph 7 2 23 3 2 Battery Operation 24 V DC The amplifier DPA 4411 can either be operated on the AC mains or connected to an external 24 V battery power source Switching to battery operation is accomplished via internal re
312. ing a suitable screwdriver size 1 the mains voltage selector Switch which is located behind the perforated coverage has to be set to the 115V position A silvery label stating different voltages is located on the right inside of the enclosure After switching the appliance to 115V operation the corresponding label has to be removed and attached to the rear panel so that it covers the imprinted marking 230V below the mains connector The following only applies to the DPP4012 Exchanging the mains fuses to operate the appliance with 115 V AC Replace the mains fuse T2 5A H for 230 V operation located in the fuse socket 5 with a T5A type fuse The label on the rear panel T2 5A H which is located below the fuse socket 5 has to be replaced by the T5A label Lock the top cover plate and the front panel in place 4 1 Fuses IEC 127 5x 20 mm DPP 4012 fuse socket 5 F501 230 V AC mains fuse T2 5A H 250V high switching ability 1500 A has to be replaced using an original fuse only fuse socket 5 F501 115 V AC mains fuse T5A 250V fuse socket 7 F502 output mains fuse T1A 250V fuse socket 11a F602 pole battery fuse T15A 32V DC fuse socket 11b F601 pole battery fuse T15A 32V DC DPP 4004 fuse socket 5 F501 230 V AC mains fuse T2 5A H 250V fuse socket 5 F501 115 V AC mains fuse T5A 250V fuse socket 7 F502 output mains fuse T1A 250V fuse socket 11a F602 pole battery fuse
313. ing capacity of RJ 45 connections and flat wire cables has to be observed under all circumstances 3 DCS 401 Addresses Using the Dip switch S1 the addresses of all connected control modules DCS 401 have to be set to different numbers addresses 0 7 Dip switch 1 Address 4 Before initial operation Connect a 24V source Now each DCS 401 control module verifies whether any local modules DCS 408 DCS 409 DCS 412 DCS 416 are connected and if so how many The red LED blinks when the initialization process has not been performed yet Only for DCS 401 control modules with software version previous to V1 1 Each DCS 401 control module is initialized by pressing the S2 button for approximately 3 seconds Afterwards the red LED has to light continuously signaling that initialization was successfully completed Launch netscan menu communication netscan within the PROANNOUNCE Designer software Now the DCS 401 modules are being initialized Afterwards the DPM 4000 runs a test verifying all addresses and recognizes the amount of DCS 401 control modules installed in the system All components sharing the network are listed in the component list This procedure takes approximately 20 seconds Afterwards the system is ready for operation PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 APPENDIX 6 2 DMM 4650 Interconnection Interconnecting the DMM 4650 is established through control inputs and outputs on the DPM 4000 o
314. ing ratio primary winding resistance secondary winding resistance 36 60 Hz 5 kHz gt 80dB at 1 kHz gt 60dB at 10 kHz electronically balanced 2 V 8 2 dBu 600 ohms 60 Hz 20 kHz 45 C 40 C EN 55103 1 EN 55103 2 EN 55022 EN 60065 EN 60555 19 483 mm x 3HU 132 mm x 345 mm 340 mm max 400 mm 22 5 kg anthracite Order No 121 639 Order No 121 640 Order No 121 641 Order No 121 679 19 kHz 1 12 mV separate for each output via PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 loudspeaker line 20 V 50V 70V 100V separate for each output via PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 1000 Veff lt 50 k ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz gt 10k ohms 1 1 1420 ohms at 20 1420 ohms at 20 40 Hz 20 kHz gt 600 ohms 1 1 18 ohms at 20 18 ohms at 20 4 DYNACORD OWNER S MANUAL PROMATRIX paging stations DPC 4000 PROMATRIX System CONTENTS CONTENTS SYSTEM OVERVIEW PAGING STATION FUNCTIONS CONTROL PANEL DPC 4550 CONNECTIONS KEY LABELING OPERATION Selective Call Collective Call Direct Call Gong Signal Text Message General Alarm Selective Alarm Canceling Signals System ON OFF Program Routing Special Functions INDICATORS PRIORITIES DPC 4350 PAGING STATION EXTENSION FACTORY SETTINGS SPECIFICATIONS WARRANTY 18 Revision 1 1 20 21 22 24 24 25 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 27 27 27 28 29 29 30 31 48 DPC 4000 DPC 40
315. ing stations shall be accomplished via ProAnnounce Designer software The software shall be a graphical dialog oriented user interface allowing the setting of all key functions priorities options and several other parameters Available Accessories Model Cat No Description NRS90209 121718 Monitor speaker NRS90232 121722 Transformer NRS90231 121721 Keyed Switch NRS90230 121720 Button Switch Ordering Information Model Cat Description DPC4106 121762 6 key paging console DPC4510 121623 8 Function 10 key console DPC4520 121624 8 Function 20 key console DPC4530 121622 8 Function 30 key console DPC4550 121625 8 Function 50 key console DPC4350 121626 50 key expansion console E DYNACORD 4550 Esc f oe SPRECHEN Selection keys up to 50 depending on model All key with LED Cancel key Gong or Chime key Text key for prerecorded messages Talk button with busy LED On key EleclroVoice 12000 Portland Av South Burnsville MN 55337 Phone 952 887 4051 Fax 952 887 0043 www electrovoice com Telex Communications Inc 11 2002 Part Number 38109 xxx Rev A Un gt CU c3 Stop key Program key Alarm Key covered Space for optional keys Microphone LCD display USA and Canada Only For customer orders contact Customer Service at 800 392 3497 Fax 800 955 6831 DYNACORD PRO ANNOUNCE S Y S
316. ing the individual cable screens to the enclosure or rack shelf ground potential The amplifier has to be protected from water drops or splashes direct sunlight high ambient temperatures and the direct radiation of heat sources high humidity and moisture heavy dust massive vibrations Moving the amplifier from a cold into a warm environment can result in the occurrence of condensation on inner parts Operating the appliance is only permissible after it has accommodated to the altered temperature approximately after one hour Should it happen that foreign solid parts or liquids inadvertently intrude the enclosure unplug the device from the power source and have it checked by a DYNACORD service center before using it again Cleaning the appliance should not be performed using chemical solvents or sprays as this might damage the finish and moreover could cause hazard fire 3 Before the first operation These power amplifiers are designed to be operated with different input modules The general input module NRS 90225 is meant for all conventional applications It allows to remotely start the amplifiers via control lines monitor their operation by use of the incorporated fault relay and monitor the transmitted audio signals through the monitor output Using the remote control module NRS 90222 the amplifiers are connected to the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 via RS 485 remote interface providing complete remote operation and surv
317. ing to the chosen configuration Do not power on any connected audio signal source yet POWER ON OPERATION After including the DRM 4000 in your PA system and before operating it for the first time please set the input controls MIC LINE 1 4 4 and AUX 1 4 7 all the way counterclockwise so that actually no audio signal is fed to the audio outputs Proceed in the same way with the gain controls 24 of the input channels MIC LINE 1 4 on the rear panel of the appliance Set them to 10 dB counterclockwise margin The DRM 4000 is factory pre configured to be used as 8 in 2 mixer which is a universal configuration in stereo mode In case the appliance had previously been operated it may start up in any other configuration LEVEL SETTING Set both master controls 10 to their counterclockwise margins so that actually no audio signal is present at the audio outputs of the DRM 4000 Now activate the previously connected sound source If this audio signal source is connected to one of the MIC LINE inputs carefully turn the corresponding gain control 24 on the rear panel of the appliance in clockwise direction The green SIGNAL LED 3 indicates signal presence If the red PEAK LED 3 lights reducing the input amplification by turning the gain control counterclockwise will prevent possible distortion Now you can turn the input control MIC LINE 4 or AUX 7 as well as both MASTER controls 10 clockwise The audio signal is present at the XLR t
318. input is still low at the end of the sequence S21 starts once again U NP 24V ov i mE Ts 046 SequenceS21 m pm Sequence S21 te Start Stop Start Stop 01 0s gt Sequence S02 Start Stop If this control line s watchdog level is not altered for a period longer than 1 0 seconds the sequence 02 is launched If a sequence with a higher priority is currently running the newly selected sequence will only be initiated after completion of the sequence with the higher priority Please be aware of the fact that the truthful recognition of level alterations is only possible when they are applied for a longer period than 100 msec see trigger recognition 22 SEQUENCES General Sequences are a series of single steps determining the functions of the DMM 4650 step by step Thus providing the possibility to define signal sequences volume levels trigger outputs time sequences loops etc Triggering an input trigger normally starts a sequence However for test purposes it is possible to start a sequence via menu command A sequence preset can consist of maximally 50 single steps Sequence Presets 20 freely programmable presets user presets from 500 S19 are provided The functions of the factory presets S20 S37 are explained in tables on the pages 36 44 Erasing the factory presets is not possible Probably the easiest way to create your own sequences is to modi
319. inst excess currect and short Different line cross sections for consumers with low and high current can be connected to a battery at the same time providing that the fuse values of their individual outputs are chosen accordingly The maximum value of the fuses must not however exceed 20 A The total amount of the currents of all the output fuses in a fuse block must not exceed 50 A If the fuse values are changed the current values printed on the units above the fuse switch are to be covered with the enclosed sticky labels The fuse values for the appropriate plus and minus outputs must always be the same If any outputs are not used the fuses are to be removed and and fuse values above the fuse switches are to be covered over with the enclosed blank sticky labels The output secured with 3 A is intended for connection of the control module DEM 207 The cross sections of the lines connected must be correctly dimensioned for the fuse value selected Please note that lines laid in cable channels have a lower permissible current loading due to lower heat dissipation The following are guidelines for bundled lines Number of lines Reduction factor 2105 0 8 6 to 15 0 7 16 to 30 0 5 Current consumption at Ebat 24 V Module type Standby rated power rated power Fuse value 10 dB wert DEM 287 power amp 125 W DEM 288 power amp 250 W em en Sn PA DEM 289 400 W 10 mA 3 5 10 6 A 10A ee 10 mA 7A 19 7
320. ion 24 V output Ready output Logic inputs Voltage with input OFF LOW Voltage with input ON HIGH Maximum input voltage DCF77 input RS 232 interface Remote interface Serial port Supply output Supply voltage Nominal current Monitor input Nominal input level Max input level Input balance Monitor output Output level Output power handling Operating temperature range Dimensions W xH x D Installation depth Weight Optionally available extensions 24V DC 21 6 31 2 V DC 500 mA 6 7A see specifications of the corresponding input module see specifications of the corresponding output module 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB gt 100 dB A weighted lt 0 01 24 V DC 400 mA max 21 6 31 2 V DC floating relay contacts 1 A 24 V DC 2 floating via opto coupler bi pole Un lt 5V gt 10 UIN 31 V 2 pole for the NRS 90193 DCF 77 receiver 19 200 Baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity Xon Xoff RS 485 standard short circuit proof electronically programmable fuse 24V DC 21 6 31 2 V DC 330 mA 660 mA 990 mA selectable electronic fuse electronically balanced transformer optionally available 2 2 dBu 1V 10 dBu 2 5 V gt 30 dB 6 3 mm phone jack either for the connection of headphones or speakers with headphones 650 mV 1 5 dBu with loudspeakers 1 8 V 7 2 dBu with headphones 50 80 with loudspeakers 380mW 80 5 40 19
321. ion is inactive so that anybody has access to the functions of the corresponding level when entering 0 asa password In the DTI 2000 the attributes microphone compressor tone signal and German date have no function and should be left at their default setting DTI 2000 Operation Example Based on the configuration example of the previous chapter the following commands can be carried out through the DTI 2000 Function DeiNumbes Remas SSS Password Announcementinasingezons Selects zone 1 starts an announcement with proriy3 Announcement end 77 announcement while keeping the connection Announcement in several zones Selects zones 2 5 and group 2 starts an announcement groups with priority 3 Hang T Stops an announcement and drops the connection Collective call i Selects all zones starts an announcement with priority 3 Start textmessage playback 50 Starts text No 2in group 3 with priorty4 Stops text message playback o Stops text No 2 if launched from the DTI 2000 Direct call 8 Stans an announcement with 9 in all zones Start macro Clear incorrect function entry 71 Clears an erroneously made entry of macro No 16 does not start the macro Stops an announcement and drops the connection DTI 2000 tone signals table DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 13 Test Functions The processor system automatically runs an initial self test whenever the DTI 20
322. ion of the directing station This console allows canceling all signals While being in set up mode this key increases the selected parameter value parameter entry PROGRAM key gt with LED Pressing the PROGRAM key selects the program assign mode The selection keys are used in this mode to assign a program background music to the desired areas or groups The PROGRAM LED light when being in program assign mode In this case the selection LED s indicates in which areas groups the program is being transmitted Keeping this key pressed and simultaneously pressing the STOP key selects the set up mode and the PROGRAM LED starts blinking Now you can alter preferences or make other changes as described in chapter 6 2 7 Paging Station Configuration in set up mode When in set up mode this key is used to select the following parameter parameter selection ALARM key with indicator Pressing the ALARM key starts an alarm signal that is transmitted into all areas The alarm indicator lights as soon as the alarm is being launched Pressing the STOP key or subsequently pressing the ALARM key terminates the alarm signal What kind of alarm signal is being transmitted is pre defined during the configuration procedure of the PROMATRIX system Optional key slots These slots allow retrofitting an additional covered key and a key lock switch The front panel is already prepared for the installation of two 18 mm pushbuttons switches You only ha
323. ion plug SHIELD BALANCED 7 UNBALANCED SOURCE 5 SOURCE MIC LINE IN figure 5 16 pin assignment of the MIC LINE IN XLRF type connectors Block diagram MIC ANA ANALOG c SUPPLY L t e DIGITAL ER CUN NRS 90233 JP3 1 SUPPLY PILOT INTERNAL MONITOR COMPRESSOR LIMITER MCLK ILOT ay 2 CHANNEL BCLK DIGITAL WCLK AUDIO DIN BOARD PILOT al CONTROL mic TINE GAIN B 1 d L NRS 90233 pa COMPRESSOR LIMITER ul JP1 MIC LINE amp s MIC LINE E 5 Je2 figure 5 17 block diagram of the 2 channel MIC LINE input module Internal Settings 1 MIC LINE switching and sensitivity setting for the MIC LINE inputs The MIC LINE input s internal PAD switches IN A S1 IN B S2 allow switching the channels sensitivity between microphone and line level 30 dB The two GAIN controls on the module s front panel are provided to precisely adjust the input sensitivity range 40 dB In addition two MIC LINE jumpers IN A JP1 pins 5 6 IN B JP2 pins 5 6 are located on the printed board assembly allowing the correct configuration of the inputs When changing a MIC LINE switch it is important to change the related jumper correspondingly open LINE closed MIC When shipped the factory presets are switches S1 and S2 set to LINE and jumpers JP1 and J
324. ion relay D RELAY via contact to ground potential Single call E RELAY via contact to ground potential 2 L STANDBY GROUND 3 POWER REMOTE 4 BATTERY REMOTE 5 D RELAY REMOTE CONTROL 6 E RELAY 7 8 5 9 0 READY MONITOR MONITOR figure 4 connections on the REMOTE CONTROL pin connector strip 6 Indicators 30 6 1 STANDBY indicator When the appliance is correctly connected and mains and or battery power is present the green STANDBY indicator 4 will light 6 2 READY indicator Both amplifiers the DPA 4120 and the DPA 4140 employ power on switching delays of approximately 3 sec to effectively eliminate power on switching noise After this time the green READY indicator 7 lights and the READY fault message relay picks up when no error is being detected When the power amplifier s mains transformer exceeds a certain value or when with installed NRS 90224 extension the pilot tone falls below the threshold see also paragraph 8 5 1 the green READY indicator 7 is not lit and the READY fault message relay drops 6 3 PROTECT indicator When thermal overload of the mains transformer or the power amplification stage is encountered the red PROTECT indicator 5 will light and the READY fault message relay drops After the amplifier regained normal temperature the red PROTECT indicator 5 is automatically dimmed and the appliance returns to normal operation High temperature can be caused by overload extr
325. ions Operating voltage 24 V DC 10 30 Operating current 25 mA to 65 mA Operating current at 24 V 35 mA Operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C Dimensions W x H x D 37 5 x 80 6 x 245 mm Weight 207 g ElectroVoice DCS 405R EXTENSION MODULE The module is used to provide connection to another DCS 400 rack frame and or other DCS 400 boards This is useful in situations where there are more cards on a given DCS 401R than a single DCS 400 frame can support Installation Notes In the first DCS 400 rack frame the DCS 405R extension module always needs to be installed in the first empty slot the slot right of any other modules installed In the bes 405k DCS 400 extension unit the second unit installed the DCS 405R extension module always needs to be installed in slot 1 the slot all the way on the left instead of the DCS 401R Specifications Operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C Dimensions W x H x D 37 5 x 80 6 x 245 mm Weight 115 g D 5 4 0 0 E x T E N S 1 N Specifications Operating voltage 24V DC 10 30 Operating current all relays on 37 to 54 mA Operating current all relays on at 24 V 42 mA Operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C Dimensions W x H x D 37 5 x 80 6 x 245 mm Weight 163 g Relay Contacts Contacts DPDT Contact material AgPd 10 Au Contact load real 1A 24V DC 0 5A 120V AC Contact current max 2A DCS 4
326. ions Events can only be terminated at the paging station they were launched from with the exception of the directing terminal paging station with the highest possible priority setting 10 Through the directing station it is possible to cancel any signal in progress 26 Revision 1 1 DPC 4000 PROMATRIX System System ON OFF The ON key switches a PROMATRIX system ON or OFF Mostly it is not intended that all paging stations provide this option Thus this function can be individually programmed for each console via PC configuration With the system being in stand by mode the ON LED is off Pressing the ON key turns the PROMATRIX system s power on This can take up to 10 seconds during which the ON LED blinks The ON LED lights constantly once the system is ready for operation This also applies for all paging stations of the entire installation To switch the system OFF you have to press the ON key for approximately 1 second This feature is provided to prevent inadvertently turning off the system Pressing an ALARM key or igniting an alarm sequence at external terminals automatically switches the PROMATRIX system s power on and boots the system Program Assignment In case this feature has been activated it is possible to assign programs to individual areas and groups of an entire installation during the PC configuration procedure First by pressing the PROGRAM key the paging station has to be set to the program assign mode Pressing
327. is detected the corresponding green READY indicator 7 will not light and the according mute relay drops If with the NRS 90206 extension installed the pilot threshold see paragraph 9 1 is declined the corresponding green READY indicator 7 goes out but the amplifier stays operational and a fault message gets transmitted to the PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 7 3 PROTECT Indicator In case of thermal overload of the mains transformer or of a power output stage is detected the red PROTECT indicator 5 will light During thermal overload of the mains transformer all mute relays drop while during thermal overload of a power output stage only the according mute relay drops After the mains transformer or the power amplifier have regained their normal temperature the red PROTECT indicator b automatically goes out and the appliance recovers normal operation mode The faulty condition could have been caused by either overload too high environmental temperature or by an error in the ventilation system A fault message is transmitted to the PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 27 7 4 GROUND FAULT Indicator If with built in NRS 90207 a ground fault condition at one of the power outputs occurs the corresponding red GROUND FAULT indicator 6 lights and a fault message is transmitted to the PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 The power amplifier keeps up normal operation during the occurrence of this faul type After solving the problem the GROUND FAULT indicator
328. ited When mounting the power amplifiers within rack cases or rack shelf systems make sure to provide sufficient airflow The space between the rear panel of the amplifier and the inner wall of the rack case has to be at least 60 mm x 330 mm A free space of at least 100 mm above the rack shelf system is needed to provide sufficient air circulation Since it is possible that during operation the temperature inside the rack system increases by 10 C the maximum allowable ambient temperatures of the rest of the incorporated modules and appliances within a specific rack shelf or rack case have to be taken into careful consideration Note To ensure trouble free operation of the appliance the maximum permissible ambient temperature of 40 is not to be exceeded 10 Ground lift switch CIRCUIT L TO CHASSIS SWITCH The ground lift switch CIRCUIT 1 TO CHASSIS SWITCH 19 provides the possibility to separate the signal ground from the enclosure ground potential This is mainly meant to eliminate noise problems which are introduced through ground loops without jeopardizing the security In case several appliances within a single rack case or rack shelf are furnished with ground lift switches it is recommended to set all devices but one to ungrounded Set one appliance to grounded When set to ungrounded the impedance between signal ground and enclosure is 100 k ohms 100 nF It is needed to maintain EMV protection 11 Fuses 11 1 Fuses in
329. ividual exclusive address 1 16 Paging stations provide the following factory pre set functions and features Parameter Setting Description aem O TO O Jom O untitled DPC4xxx type password level 1 no protection default password level 1 111 level 2 password default password level 2 2222 compressor options 2nd alarm key not programmed key locked switch not programmed PTT microphone call in pre selected areas priority 5 key assignment selection keys 1 n area selection 1 n key 1 area 1 key 2 area 2 not supported with the DPC 4106 TALK call in pre selected areas priority 5 DPC 4106 call in all areas TEXT text message in pre selected areas text 1 priority 2 DPC 4106 text message in all areas GONG 4 stroke gong signal in pre selected areas priority 8 DPC 4106 gong signal in all areas ALL selecting collective call not supported with the DPC 4106 CANCEL cancel selection call pattern not supported with the DPC 4106 switching the system ON OFF priority 5 STOP terminates any locally launched signal gong text alarm PROGRAM assigns a program to pre selected areas not supported with the DPC 4106 ALARM DIN alarm in all areas priority 9 not supported with the DPC 4106 special functions E not programmed 30 Revision 1 1 DPC 4000 PROMATRIX System Specifications DPC 4106 DPC4510 4520 4530 4550 DPC 4350 operation voltage 24 V D
330. justed through an internal MIC LINE switch PAD providing 30 dB attenuation The GAIN control on the appliance s rear panel offers additional control within a range of 40 dB The MIC LINE input is electronically balanced and can be retrofitted with a transformer Phantom power can be switched via a jumper If necessary it is also possible to incorporate a compressor limiter into the audio path via jumper setting The input channels can be switched separately to the monitor bus and you can listen to the signal via headphones or loudspeaker either which is being connected to the monitor output Automatic pilot tone surveillance of the entire input stage is integrated 2 Channel MIC LINE Input Module NRS 90217 This 2 channel audio input module is meant for the connection of external audio sources like microphones mixers etc Both channels are furnished with XLR F type connectors The module can be installed into slot 1 and slot 2 The sensitivity of the MIC LINE inputs can be adjusted in a wide range The internal MIC LINE switches PADs provide 30 dB attenuation The separate GAIN controls for each channel provide additional control in a range of 40 dB The MIC LINE inputs are electronically balanced and can be retrofitted with transformers Phantom power can be switched via jumper setting If necessary compressors limiters can also be incorporated in the audio paths via jumpers Input channels can be Switched
331. keys and an alarm key Cord length t 32 16 e DPC 4530 with 8 function keys 30 selection Enclosure DxH 160 x 65 mm keys plus an alarm key Enclosure Width 170 225 270 320 405 335 Weight 1 0 15 17 18 2 5 19 4550 includes 8 function keys 50 Finsih Gray White RAL9002 microstructure selection keys and one alarm key e DPC 4350 paging station extension unit provides 50 additional selection keys to any paging station above ElectroVoice Architecture amp Engineering Specifications The paging stations shall be processor controlled and provide several monitoring functions The units shall provide configuration data storage using non volatile flash memory The paging microphone shall be of the condenser type and include pre amplifier and compressor limiter The paging station keys shall be programmable The paging station keys shall be easy to label via label strips and MS WORD templates The units must contain integrated watchdog circuitry to monitor the processor system while the audio section is guarded by the signal of a switchable pilot tone oscillator Additionally the internal supply voltage shall be constantly measured Once it drops below a critical threshold a warning signal must be being transmitted Line monitoring for the audio cabling as well as for all RS 485 control lines allows shall provide early recognition and signaling of line interrupts and short circuits The configuration of the pag
332. l output power 1 s ae 1 415 249 166 leakage power electronically balanced 775 mV 0 dBu gt 10 k ohms balanced floating 400 W according to IEC 268 3 25 ohms 100V 12 5 ohms 70 V 6 25 ohms 50 V or 4 ohms 40 V 60 Hz 20 kHz 196 interfering voltage A lt 1 2 mV 56 dBu features of the monitor output electronically balanced nominal output voltage 2 V 8 2 dBu nominal load impedance 600 ohms ambient temperature range 5 C 40 C dimensions W x H x D 483 x 132 x 345 mm depth with without connections max 400 mm 340 mm weight without extensions 16 7 kg finish anthracite extension kits for the DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 NRS 90208 input transformer for floating balanced input Art No 121 641 NRS 90222 remote module Art No 121 674 NRS 90224 pilot tone amp ground fault surveillance Art No 121 676 NRS 90225 standard input module Art No 121 677 NRS 90227 output transformer for floating balanced monitor output Art No 121 679 13 Extension kit specifications for the power amplifiers DPA 4120 DPA 4140 13 4 NRS 90225 standard input module see specifications DPA 4120 DPA 4140 13 2 NRS 90222 remote module see specifications DPA 4120 DPA 4140 13 3 NRS 90208 input transformer for floating balanced input frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz input impedance gt 10 k ohms idling ratio 1 1 winding resistance primary 1420 ohms at 20 winding resistance seconda
333. l reliability when the system is operated from a battery power source Fault messages are being displayed in plain text on the paging console displays and a floating contact is provided for collective fault messages An automatic protocol facility of the system s individual state of operation is optionally possible This protocol is stored in the DPM 4000 s internal memory If necessary it can be displayed on the screen of a connected computer or printed out via a printer 3 4 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 INSTALLATION 4 Installation The PROANNOUNCE Designer software has been designed for use on computers running Microsoft Windows95 98 NT and utilizes all typical features of these operating systems Therefore it is important that the user is familiar with using application software running under Windows 4 1 Installation And Program Start 4 1 1 System Specifications The software can be used on a desktop or laptop PC running Windows95 98 NT as operating system To guarantee satisfactory working with the PROANNOUNCE Designer software the computer should provide the following features PC computer system with pentium processor at least 90 MHz and Windows95 98 NT 16 MB of RAM 1 hard disk with at least 5 MB available disk space 1x 3 5 floppy drive 1 mouse 1 monitor 800 x 600 incl VGA graphics board 256 colors 1 RS 232 serial port with interface cable 1 CD ROM drive 4 1 2 Software Installation
334. lay The battery has to be connected to the corresponding socket 23 on the rear panel of the appliance using insulated AMP flat connectors 6 3x0 8 mm The amplifier is protected against confusion d poles Additional internal protection is provided through two miniature fuses F502 and F503 one per each conductor and which are located on the printed board assembly 85272 see paragraph 12 diagram 11 For the DPA 4411 the battery cable s diameter should be at least 2 5 mm and the cable length for the single distance should not exceed 4 0 m max drop in voltage 1V Caution Operation of the DPA 4411 is solely allowable using batteries without grounding or batteries with grounding of the negative pole Operation with batteries with grounding of AN the positive pole is not permissible 4 Inputs INPUT 1 to INPUT 4 The inputs INPUT 1 to INPUT 4 15 are electronically balanced With a sensitivity of 775mV OdBu they are meant for the connection of control amplifiers For the case that floating inputs are needed the inputs are prepared for retrofitting input transformers Note If a switch contact is located between the control amplifier output and the power amplifier input switch clicks might become audible during switching If this is the case incorporating input transformers NRS 90208 one per input can solve the problem see paragraph 9 3 Parallel operation of INPUT 1 to INPUT 4 15 is possible when using the
335. ledging this question lets you save your new settings in a user preset Step list When confirming step list with the soft key ok a menu is displayed which allows the indication of all individual steps of a sequence In caes the listing of a certain sequence is supposed to be edited the sequence has to be loaded into memory first menu The cursor keys are used to modify the step number and its corresponding function see list of available step functions The soft keys d delete and i insert simplify the editing of step listings by deleting or inserting complete rows of steps at the currently displayed step number In order to test the functionality of a sequence before the actual storing process is performed it is possible to launch the sequence including all audio signal and control line results by pressing the PLAY STOP and RECORD stop trigger keys Pressing the EXIT key immediately cancels the test function After pressing the EXIT key previous menu level the question store yes no appears on the display Acknowledging this question lets you save your new settings in a user preset 23 Title Confirming title with the soft key ok the name of the currently loaded sequence appears on the display Using the cursor keys offers the possibility to enter a name of maximally 8 characters The soft keys and spc shift between the upper and the lower character case or enter a blank chara
336. lel input operation of amplifiers Integrated standby power supply Mains function switch POWER Ground lift switch Remote start in mains and battery operation with initial inrush current limiter Switching noise suppression Status LED indication operation READY STANDBY thermal overload PROTECT and GROUND FAULT at the power output Fault messaging according to DIN EN 60849 via the PROANNOUNCE Manager DPM 4000 e TEST button for installations with emergency switching RESET for ground fault 5 52 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS LED meter instrument indication in the range of 13 dB to 0 dB and CLIP e Mains voltage selector switch 115 230 V AC e Active temperature controlled fans e Modules for pilot tone surveillance and ground fault surveillance according to DIN VDE 0800 optionally available The appliance allows connecting four balanced XLR type input lines as well as connection to the remote control bus of the DPM 4000 RS 485 Prior to connecting the amplifier to the operating voltage the unit s address has to be set using the switches A and B A low value part For detailed information on the four channel power amplifier DPA 4411 please refer to the owner s manual 356810 The following remote functions are available Control e Level controls Mute of all channels e Monitor activation Input Output for all channels e Mains operation ON OFF e Battery operation ON OFF e
337. les have to be connected to CN9 The CN12 connector allows the connection of two rotary encoders Features e Two RJ 45 connectors for connecting the DPM 4000 and for cascading several DCS 401 control modules e Galvanic separation of the RS 485 interface port e One connector each for relay modules logic input modules and analog signal modules e One connector for two rotary encoders e Internal monitoring via watchdog circuitry e Line surveillance via polling e Two binding posts for the connection of an external supply voltage source e Service functions and testing software for all connected modules e Binary switch for address setting 0 7 CAUTION Each participant connected to the DPM 4000 remote port has to have an exclusive address Each address can be used only once Installation Note Mounting the module and establishing the connections are solely admissible when performed in accordance to VDE 0100 and EN 60065 regulations DCS 401 module printed board assemblies need to be grounded at their fixing points e g using a metal bolt Specifications Description DCS 401 control module Operating voltage 24 V DC 10 30 Operating current 25 65 Operating current at 24 V 35 mA Operating temperature range 5 C 40 C Dimensions W x H x D 160 x 25 x 100 mm Weight 135g PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 55 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5w 5 Dimensions of the DCS 401 module 2
338. lic operation The actual service life is reduced if the appropriate operating conditions are not maintained i e charging discharging working temperature and storage We recommend charging the battery at an ambient temperature of between 5 C and 35 C to minimize detrimental effects on its service life 3 6 Battery recycling The batteries are marked with a recycling symbol as illustrated below At the end of their service life the batteries should be returned to the manufacturer or supplier or taken to a special collection centre so that they can be recycled 4 Registrations and Standards VdS registration The batteries have been tested and recognized by the VdS Verband der Sachversicherer and comply with the following standards DIN 57 510 VDE 0510 Akkumulatoren und Batterien ortsfeste Batterien DIN 43 534 Wartungsfreie verschlossene Akkumulatoren mit festgelegtem Elektrolyt DIN 43 539 part 5 Prfungen wartungsfreie verschlossene Akkumulatoren mit festgelegtem Elektrolyt UL approval The batteries have received recognition from the Undemriters Laboratories Inc and have been registered under the number MH 15705 IATA classification The batteries have been cleared by the International Air Transport Association IATA for transport in aircrafts and have received the classification leak proof 5 Testing and inspecting alarm devices In order to gurantee that the alarm device i
339. lines to the power amplifiers is provided through a binding post strip where all voltages 25 V 70 V 100 V and the low impedance output are present on individual screw clamp connectors The rear panel service mains switches allow turning the power amplifiers power on directly Using the provided power remote input remote start is also possible Consistent thermal stability of the power amplifiers is obtained through extremely silent running fans which are automatically switched stepwise depending on the amplifiers operation mode The front to rear air circulation guarantees trouble free operation in rack shelf enclosures of any size Several other features of the DPA Series power amplifiers are revealed within this owner s manual Therefore please take the time to carefully and entirely read the provided information Installation Notes Generally it is important to install the power amplifier in a way that ensures unhindered front to rear air circulation When installing the power amplifier in a closed rack shelf system please make sure that adequate air flow is guaranteed The space between the rear panel of the amplifier and the inner wall of the rack case has to be at least 60 mm x 330 mm A free space of at least 100 mm above the rack shelf system is needed to provide sufficient air circulation Since during operation the temperature inside the rack system could easily rise up to 40 C the maximum allowable ambient temperatur
340. linking PROGRAM LED indicates this status The protection is canceled by re entering the correct password while being in setup mode 3 Pre Gong Signal It is possible to program a pre gong signal that is heard before an announcement The pre gong signal is transmitted into the selected areas when pressing the TALK button You can begin with your announcement during the transmission of the pre gong signal you can talk into the pre gong Using the arrow keys lt gt first select parameter 3 Now you can ignite the pre gong signal with the A key or cancel it by using the v key The pre gong function can also be activated or deactivated during PC configuration 4 Buzzer The integrated buzzer can be programmed as acoustic alert signal During failure malfunction or as general alert a buzzing sound is heard When an alarm has been launched the buzzing can be heard for the whole period of the alarm First select parameter 4 using the arrow keys lt gt Now you can activate the buzzer by pressing the key Pressing the v key deactivates the buzzer The buzzer function can also be activated during PC configuration 5 Compressor The paging stations microphone pre amplifier incorporates compressor limiter circuitry While the limiter is constantly activated the compressor can be switched ON or OFF When the compressor is engaged low level signals are amplified to a higher degree which results in constant talking lev
341. loating 200 W according to IEC 268 3 50 ohms 100V 25 ohms 70 V 12 5 ohms 50 V or 4 ohms 28 V 60 Hz 20 kHz lt 196 lt 1 2 mV 56 dBu electronically balanced 2 V 8 2 dBu 600 ohms ambient temperature range dimensions W x H x D depth with without connections weight without extensions finish 12 2 DPA 4140 power amplifier 400 W power supply mains operation mains frequency security class 45 92 40 483 x 132 x 345 mm max 400 mm max 340 mm 13 2 kg anthracite 115 V 230 V AC 10 50 60 Hz idling normal operation 10 dB alarm 3 dB standard conditions initial current inrush mains idling normal operation 10 dB alarm 3 dB standard conditions initial current inrush mains Fmains VA apparent power Umains lmains Pmains W battery operation SA d 713 562 200 362 1019 811 400 411 Pmains Pout W 44 0 23 368 263 713 562 200 362 1019 811 400 411 Pout W output power P W leakage power 24 V DC 10 30 stand by idling normal operation 10 dB standard conditions initial current inrush battery P W input power Up lg Po W output power P W features of the input nominal input level nominal input impedance features of the power output nominal output capacity during mains operation nominal load impedance frequency response distortion at 1 KHz and nomina
342. ls 18 different alarm signals plus sine cycle at any frequency Other than in comparable equipment the PROANNOUNCE signal generating DSP algorithms do not take up any extra storage of the voice message memory In addition a voice message recording playback module providing CD quality sound is optionally available With a total recording time of approximately 6 minutes 25 different messages are being managed The DPM 4000 provides the possibility to install up to four optional FLASH memory modules depending on individual desires or requirements 3 2 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 3 5 Paging Stations The DPC 4000 Series paging consoles are mainly meant for transmitting voice messages and calls but also to manually control the PROANNOUNCE system Available paging station functions are line group selection voice messages program assignment launching gong and alarm signals and reproduction of voice message memory announcements Additionally special commands include volume control monitor selection preset switching lighting control function status indication etc Thus it is possible to configure the paging consoles to serve as operation panels for general control purposes If a voice call is being launched into a speaker line that is already busy with other audio transmissions the caller gets a busy sign i e the BUSY LED blinks In case the calling terminal has a higher priority it will interrupt an
343. ly designed for it the DPC 4000 Series paging stations optimally match the PROANNOUNCE system Thus guaranteeing trouble free installation and operation The paging stations cannot be used as stand alone devices At least a DPM 4000 a 24 V power supply plus all necessary cabling is needed to build up a minimal installation Configuration and operation is accomplished through the DPM 4000 central unit 2 2 4 DCS 400 Control System The DCS 400 control system consisting of a DCS 401 control module a DCS 408 relay module 100V a DCS 409 control relay module DCS 412 logic input module and DCS 416 analog I O module cannot be used as a stand alone system At least a DPM 4000 a 24 V power supply plus all necessary cabling is needed to build up a minimal installation According to their technical specifications it is possible to incorporate the modules of the DCS 400 system as follows DCS 401 control module for all other DCS 400 modules query of 2 rotary encoders DCS 408 5 floating switches for 100 V loudspeaker lines DCS 409 5 floating switches for control signals DC voltages 24 V or for audio signals at line level DCS 412 query and monitoring of 12 floating control voltages logic signals up to x31 V DCS 416 8 analog inputs for the query of control voltages 0 10 V 8 analog outputs to output control voltages 0 10 V DCS 420 Monitor Manager with loudspeaker headphones socket 7 segment display
344. m This m ethod also offers an easy way to distribute the output power The total power consumption of the maximum amount of the connected speakers in the network has to match the amplifier s overall output capacity of 100 watts connection impedance 100 ohms The connection is accomplished via the 100 V output 19 see figure 3 In ZONE 1 POWER OUTPUT 70 SOV ast 100v EXTR 100v cll EL diagram 3 Connection of 100 V 70 V or 50 V loudspeaker systems 5 3 POWER OUTPUT for the connection of low impedance loudspeaker systems When switching the output to 20 V low impedance speaker systems 4 16 ohms can be connected to the corresponding output see diagram 4 Because of line attenuation the distance between amplifier and speaker systems should not exceed 50 m It is of further importance that the overall impedance of the speakers does not decline 4 ohms and that the individual power handling capacity of each speaker is not exceeded diagram 4 Connection of low impedance loudspeaker systems 25 Free combination of the DPA 44117 power output voltages including mixed 100 V and low impedance 4 ohms operation is possible 5 4 POWER OUTPUT 100 V Double Output Power If the output power of one output of the DPA 4411 is not sufficient to feed all cabinets within a speaker network and dividing the speaker chain is not an option it is possible to double the output power by coupling the outputs of two amplifiers In tha
345. maintenance and any other works on the appliances or the rack shelf system to qualified service personnel only When exposing appliances modules to extreme temperature changes i e when moving them from the outside into a warm room condensation may occur If so it is necessary to wait before use until the devices gained room temperature Under no circumstance place any liquid containing cans glasses mugs etc on top of an enclosure In case any liquids or foreign obstacles entered the enclosure of an appliance immediately unplug the device from the mains supply and have it serviced Make sure that appliances modules are always provided with sufficient ventilation Do not expose devices to direct sunlight or any other heat radiating source Do not expose appliances modules to extreme dust or humidity Operating the system under environmental conditions like these can lead to severe damage through fire or cause bodily harm to the operator Make sure that the stated mains voltage is in accordance to the specifications of your mains supplier Mismatching will cause severe damage to all appliances modules Make sure that mains cords and or any other cabling are not damaged or being jammed by the turning frame or any other movable parts of the rack shelf Damaged cables can lead to fire hazard and or can be the cause for electric shock The mains cord of the rack shelf installation is supplied with a 3 pole plug to minimize the risk of electr
346. mpedance output is electronically balanced which offers the possibility to achieve cable lengths of up to 200 m Connection is performed via the REMOTE CONTROL pin connector strip see also figure 4 For the remote control module NRS 90222 the MONITOR output is located on the REMOTE CONTROL connector 22 The PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 switches the signal to the according the monitor channel In case a floating output is required the monitor output is prepared for retrofitting an output transformer provided through the optional extension NRS 90227 please also refer to paragraph 8 4 Functioning changes in the models DPA 4120 starting with serial numbers 100 11 and DPA 4140 starting with serial numbers 100 11 in association with the input module NRS 90225 To achieve reliable attenuation of switching noise knacks the monitor output stays muted as long as the READY relay is not pulled Because of circuit design reasons this causes that the monitor output is also muted even when a ground fault appears at the main output 5 6 REMOTE CONTROL connector only NRS 90225 The 15 pole sub D REMOTE CONTROL pin connector strip 16 provides several different control in outputs Ground of the stand by power supply negative pole grounded POWER REMOTE via contact to ground potential BATTERY REMOTE via contact to ground potential MONITOR output electronically balanced READY message with floating contact Obligatory recept
347. n 1 of the remote control connector or ON OFF MODULES pin 2 If the ON OFF MODULES input is connected to the ground potential the MODULES OUT outputis constantly activated otherwise it is constantly deactivated The input is controlled from the DPM 4000 or from an alarm or gong signal module The input ON OFF TOGGLE can be used for installations where the PA system has to be switched on off via remote control e g systems that include DEM modules A ground potential contact of the input switches the system on another one switches the system off The ON OFF MODULES input s priority in the on state overrides ON OFF TOGGLE The ON OFF TOGGLE condition is also stored for the time of power failure Switching the appliance s mains switch off always sets the TOGGLE state to off as well When utilizing the ON OFF TOGGLE and ON OFF MODULES it is important to remember that the pin assignment of the floating inputs corresponds to the illustration in chapter 5 figure 2 The ON OFF TOGGLE function is deactivated when the appliance is shipped from the factory To activate the function the appliance has to be separated from the mains and the internal jumper has to be set to open This input can also be used to detect whether another phase failed The corresponding jumper must be in place When short circuiting the contact and ground the appliance reacts as if its own mains failed In case external phase monitoring is not
348. n be easily torn out before installing the input transformer you have to remove the resistors R1 and R2 mount the input transformer onto the printed board assembly so that the marking located on the connector side of the transformer matches with the one on the printed board assembly To prevent short circuits place the supplied insulation disc between the transformer and the printed board assembly 33 re insert the input module and tighten the locking screws B 8 4 NRS 90227 output transformer for the floating balanced monitor output In case that floating monitor outputs are required the outputs of the INPUT MODULE NRS 90225 and REMOTE MODULE NRS 90222 are prepared for retrofitting output transformers If so it is necessary to additionally install the extension kit NRS 90227 per each output The installation has to be performed as follows see figure 6 and or figure 7 to remove the input module you have to loosen the two locking screws B on the rear panel of the appliance Now the module can be easily torn out before installing the output transformer you have to remove the resistors R22 R23 R32 and R33 NRS 90225 respectively the resistors R23 R24 R71 and R72 NRS 90222 now you can mount the output transformer onto the printed board assembly Because of the transformer s symmetrical design polarity is not a critical factor re insert the input module and tighten the locking screws B Input Transformer N
349. n be operated without load Usually this output is connected to the internal switch mode power supply so that the connected load is supplied with the needed voltage In case of temporarily insufficient mains supply power failure malfunctioning of the switch mode power supply or thermal overload of the DPP 40xx the SWITCHED OUT 16 is switched to battery supply when present within fractions of a second providing gapless power supply to the connected devices When the mains is present again or after solving the problem that caused the malfunction the appliance automatically returns with a delay of 600 ms to mains operation If there is no battery present during the occurrence of a mains complication the DPP 40xx behave as if the front mains switch has been switched off except for the fact that the MAINS LED is still lit The output MODULES OUT 14 is meant for the connection of devices relay fields alarm devices voice reproduction etc that can be switched off during a power outage during which time the PA system should operate in the stand by mode Switching off unnecessary devices during the occurrence of a power failure is preferable otherwise the battery is unnecessarily strained The output employs a softstart function that controls the initial current inrush preventing the main supply from interference by possible DYNACORD PROMATRIX SYSTEM capacitive loads connected This output is controlled by the inputs ON OFF TOGGLE pi
350. n pre selected areas text 1 priority 2 DPC 4106 text message transmission in all areas GONG 4 stroke gong signal in pre selected areas priority 8 DPC 4106 gong signal transmission in all areas Selecting collective call CANCEL Cancel selection call pattern not with DPC 4106 ON Switching the system ON OFF priority 5 STOP Terminates any locally launched signal gong text alarm PROGRAM Assigns a program to pre selected areas not with DPC 4106 ALARM DIN alarm in all areas priority 9 not with DPC 4106 Special functions Not programmed 5 42 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 2 12 Specifications 4106 1 DPC 4510 DPC 4520 4530 4550 DPC 4350 _ Operation voltage 24 V DC 21 6 V 31 2 V Power consumption 24 V Min operation voltage 15V DC Max power consumption 120 mA 120 mA 120 mA 120 mA 135 mA 95 mA 15 V NF input external Line default 0 dBu PTT microphone 52 dBu A amp B bridged NF output 6 dBu electrically balanced Covered alarm key Option Yes sealable Yes DPC 4350 extension connection provided Connections RJ 45 Supplied connection cord characters characters characters characters characters Environmental temperature W x D x H in mm Gooseneck 2 Weight Finish Grey white RAL 9002 micro structure Accessories Monitor speaker 1 Key lock switch
351. nce Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger S 31 Fire Mic 98 off Step Command Parameter Starts a continuous DIN alarm pressing the key fire micro 1 Out A1 set phone allows for an announcement via audio input after 2 wt In A1 High the key is being released the alarm is continued 3 Out B4 clr Description Turns the power of the electro acoustics sound 4 Out B2 set reinforcement system on relay A1 and waits for acknow 5 B3 set ledgment input A1 system ready When the system is ready 6 out set the output B4 music program off is opened and B2 B3 man 7 DMM 5dB datory reception E D gets closed Closing the signaling contact 8 Sum off alarm signal running switches the audio controls to priority 9 Start A 20 for the alarm signal The alarm signal A20 is being outputted 10 wt In D2 High and runs continuously until the alarm is interrupted by a high 11 Break signal current at the control input D2 fire announcement 129 Sum 0 dB As long as the high potential is present at D2 priority is given to 13 wt In D2 Low the audio input The alarm continues infinitely as long as the D2 14 Jump 07 potential is low 15 End A sequence with a higher priority e g S 20 stops this sequence The control over settings and relay contacts is taken over by the stop sequence After the stop sequence ends the DMM 4650 returns to the stand by mode 41 Sequence Nummer Title Priorit
352. nce is selected during the configuration procedure Pressing the STOP key cancels the text message reproduction While being in set up mode pressing the TEXT key decreases the selected parameter value parameter entry TALK button with BUSY LED This key activates a message for pre selected areas or groups While a message is being transmitted the BUSY LED is lit The TALK button has to be pressed until the end of a message The BUSY LED blinks when one or several areas are busy or when an event with higher priority setting interrupts the outgoing message see paragraph indications In the latter case it is necessary to repeat the message ON key lt with LED This key turns the system s power on or off Turning the power on can take several seconds The ON LED blinks while the system boots The ON LED lights steadily when the system is operational To prevent inadvertent erroneous operation it is necessary to press the key for at least 1 second when turning the power off It is also possible to block the operation of the ON key during the configuration procedure In set up mode this key is used to select the previous parameter parameter selection STOP key A Pressing the STOP key cancels an outgoing alarm gong signal or text message An alarm signal can also be terminated by subsequently pressing the ALARM key Only events that were triggered from a specific paging station can be stopped from the exact terminal with the except
353. nd 3 inside the XLR type plug However if this causes noise interference remove the bridge again The following shows examples for balanced and unbalanced pin assignments for audio cables like they are commonly used with the DRM 4000 MICILINE 4INPUT e ice HOS p m WITHOUT mE 3 INPUT TRANSFORMER T shield cold ES SOURCE xS hot n MIGILINE 1 4 INPUT e a Uh oy SYMMETRICAL INPUT TRANSFORMER 1 shield cold Nel C ETRICAL MIC LINE 1 4 INPUT Tone us po SS MME 4 1 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 4 2 2 AUX and MIX IN inputs The four AUX inputs 2 and 23 and the MIX IN input 21 are provided via RCA type jacks which allows the direct connection of common unbalanced audio equipment CD Player Tape Deck Tuner etc Usually the needed connection cords are supplied together with the corresponding device They are also available at basically any electronics store Especially when using unbalanced cables cable length matters the shorter the cable the smaller the risk of gaining additional noise interference 4 3 Output Assignment 4 3 1 MASTER outputs The two low impedance MASTER outputs 19 are electronically balanced and provided via XLR type connectors which allows the use of longer cables All summed MIC LINE AUX and MIX IN input signals are outputted via the MASTER outputs When the DRM 4000 is used in stand alone operation the MASTER outputs are typi
354. nd the adjacent control lines Port A has an additional fault output relay contact which during normal operation is always closed CONTROL PORT A 90 mA 1 004 1 004 FAULT I 4 t 24V X DMM AUDIO CONTROL DIAGRAM The DMM 4650 provides port connection through 25 pole sub D connectors male Pin assignment for ports A B C D 9 corresponds to A B C D pin name pin name 1 Batt 7 20 OUT 1 14 Batt 8 21 OUT 2 2 15 INP 1 9 22 OUT Q3 3 16 INP 22 10 23 OUT Q4 4 17 INP 3 11 Batt 5 18 INP 4 24 Batt 6 Batt 12 25 Fault Out Only PORT A 19 Batt 13 Batt max 90 mA Control levels and currents Power source Batt Batt corresponds to a supply voltage of 20V 31V of the DMM 4650 For current limitation fuse a PTC resistor positive temperature coefficient resistor is provided at the connection of each port Inputs The polarity of the control inputs is random L low corresponds to lt 5 0 5V lt 1mA 0 1mA H high corresponds UP gt 10V 10 31 gt 1 8mA 1 8 7mA max Uinp 31V 30 Outputs Max output current relay contacts 1A at 24VDC 0 5A 50VDC Installation example Installation example with factory presets see also Factory preset sequences page 36 44 Installation 25pin D SUB Socket female
355. ne 12A 04 ms M no 2 B 06 ms M 0 5 sec endless 0 5 sec Definitions for the gong table bar A high frequency to bar D low frequency no parameter not available attack bar attack ms release bar release XXS short to M middle to XXL long start time sec to bar x attack counting from previous bar repeat cnt counter of how many times the gong period gets repeated rep del time between two gong periods 45 List of factory preset alarm signals Alarm Freq 1 Freq 2 time Rati r number Title Priority Type Hz Hz atio epeat A20 DIN Alrm 00 Uni Sweep 1200 500 1 00 1496 endless A21 slow Whp 00 Uni Sweep 500 1200 1 00 1496 endless A22 Sirene 00 Bi sweep 400 800 2 00 1496 endless A24 BZB Luft 00 Bi sweep 330 420 2 00 1496 30x A27 BZB ABC 00 Bi sweep 330 420 2 00 1496 6x A34 DIN Alrm 00 Uni Sweep 1200 500 1 00 1496 5x Alarm Pss Freq 1 time 1 Freq 2 time 2 Ratio T r number Title Priority Hz Hz G c epeat A23 Post 00 jumptone 925 0 50 1075 0 50 endless A28 Telefon 00 jumptone 440 0 0 5494 0 05 20x Alarm ER Frequency ontime offtime Number number Title Priority Type Hz Ratio umbe A26 BZB Fire 00 Burst 420 12 00 12
356. ne th ce hh er Ed aa ER E a e a Dev ER ewe 6 4 GROUND FAU TNA A O nn emn 6 5 Aussteuerungskontrolle und Switching the output voltage cece ee Enlianced application field E HER ease desta DARE 8 1 General input module NRS 90225 8 2 Remote module NAS 90222 2 2 rue ete an det Lon 8 3 NRS 90208 input transformer for the floating balanced 8 4 NRS 90227 output transformer for the floating balanced monitor output 8 5 NRS 90224 pilot tone and ground fault 8 5 1 Pilot tone survelllamnce uice ite etti Hp lb 8 5 2 Ground fault surveillance anna iii 19 case and 19 rack shelf system Ground lift switch CIRCUIT LTO CHASSIS 5 Power amplifier specifications 12 1 DPA 4120 power amplifier 200 12 2 4140 power
357. nected to a 230 V 50 60 Hz wall outlet On the appliance itself the cord has to be connected to the 3 pole mains socket To remotely start the amplifier it is necessary to connect an external 24 V power source to the terminal strip POWER REMOTE Providing correct connection and with an external power supply being present the POWER ON indicator will light and the power amplifier is ready for operation The mains switch POWER on the rear of the appliance is meant for service and maintenance purposes only Through bridging the mains switching relay this option provides the possibility to operate the amplifier without an external 24 V power supply connected Caution The mains switch POWER on the rear of the appliance is only meant for maintenance Remotely switching off the device is not possible when the POWER switch is engaged The DPA Series power amplifiers employ power on switching delays of approximately 2 seconds 230V 50 60 Hz C 870 WATTS MAINS FUSE N CIRCUIT TO T10AL 250V 0 a CHASSIS SWITCH GROUNDED CHANNEL INPUTS CHANNEL A INPUTS 2 POWER LEVEL PARALLEL LEVEL 1200W 8 2 Er 855555555355 10070 O DIRECT OUTPUTS 701 ISOLATED OUTPUTS 1 25V X e RONG 65 854 54 T Ee C ra Le MMM x HE ES CO i
358. nes outputs PRE LISTEN and PRE OUT are for monitoring the DMM signals without actually starting a transmission Control function A maximum of 16 floating inputs are provided for integration into a sound reinforcement installation Their use and polarity can be freely programmed A maximum of 16 floating relay contacts are provided to be used as control outputs The inputs and outputs are divided into 4 Ports A B C D where Port A also contains a fault contact CONTROL PORT A 1 004 FAULT AUDIO Each of the 4 ports also supplies a power source in order to facilitate the connection of floating contacts The ground and earthing conditions are shown in the above diagram The strict separation of control and audio signals guarantees the trouble free installation Sequence function The following example shows in sequence the necessary steps from closing the contact of an external switch to listening to the audio signal Ausl ser Trigger Sequenz Sequence M D Schrittsteuerung Stepcontrol Message Announcement Play Record Durchsage A switch is connected to one of the DMM 4650 s control inputs A1 D4 The desired input is selected in the trigger menu Logic level high low delay and function dyn stc latch can be set The desired sequence Sxx gets chosen here as well For this sequence the actions of the DMM 4650 are programmed step by step Standard sequences are provided as factory pre
359. ng console input on the DPM 4000 The interface transmits serial control data as well as LF audio signals The DTI 2000 appears at the DPM 4000 as a special paging console allowing it to be programmed via the PC Designer Software in paging console dialog mode The DTI 2000 offers 100 call numbers from 00 to 99 Any function can be assigned to any call number Possible functions include zone or group selection live announcements with pre programmable priority and pre chime signal playback of pre recorded text messages and triggering of DPM 4000 macros The DTI 2000 offers two different access authorisations with individual password protection Depending on the actual application and desired operation the DTI 2000 allows initiating any possible function from a standard telephone set from making a simple announcements up to triggering a sound reinforcement installation s most complex sequential control procedures Features e Selection of up to 100 zones for announcements e Programming of up to 20 call groups for group calls and collective calls e Configuration of a call number organisation chart of up to 100 numbers 0 99 for announcements and arbitrary control functions e Selecting several zones or groups for announcements e Initiating the playback of pre recorded text messages e Triggering of special functions macros erase zone group selection e Assigning priorities for announcements and message playback e Two level password p
360. ng are provided for your safety When the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrican for replacement of the absolete outlet IMPORTANT SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To reduce the risk of electric shock do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the Operating Instructions unless you are qualified to do so Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Security regulations as stated in the EN 60065 VDE 0860 IEC 65 and the CSA E65 94 have to be obeyed when servicing the appliance Use of a mains separator transformer is mandatory during maintenance while the appliance is opened needs to be operated and is connected to the mains Switch off the power before retrofitting any extensions changing the mains voltage or the output voltage The minimum distance between parts carrying mains voltage and any accessible metal piece metal enclosure respectively between the mains poles has to be 3 mm and needs to be minded at all times The minimum distance between parts carrying mains voltage and any switches or breakers that are not connected to the mains secondary parts has to be 6 mm and needs to be minded at all times Replacing special components that are marked in the circuit diagram using the security symbol Note is only permissible when using original parts Altering the circuitry without prior consent or advice is
361. ng level values of the audio level controls setting level offsets via virtual controllers mute function via level controls remote control power operation ON OFF battery operation remote control ON OFF monitoring and fault message transmission of thermal overload warnings on the mains transformer or power output stages monitoring of the functioning of the power output stages via pilot tone signal and ground fault detection for loudspeaker lines The amplifier shall either be powered by AC mains or connected to an external 24 V battery power source Switching to battery operation shall be accomplished via an internal relay The amplifier shall be 3 RU in height and provide 1x200 or 1x400 watt operation depending on the model The output channel must be driven through on board transformers The amplifier shall be the Dynacord ProAnnounce DPA4120 or DPA4140 Ordering Information Model Cat No Description DPA4120 121792 1x200 Power Amplifier DPA4140 121793 1x400 Power Amplifier w remote FOR 230V T4AL FOR 115 SENCTOR 9 MAINS INPUT 115V 230V AC 50 60 Hz CAUTION ron CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAIN sur RSK OF PRE ATTENTION naun acen ma un rc ot Vut 7 AFEA WARNING ro necuce na oe PRE on see SHOCK ive Een 4 6 PR EICH rownouwur o mn o e 1 13 10 1 DC INPUT 24 V
362. nnel shall be independently assignable to either one or both output channels offering mono two Channel operation as well as stereo operation modes The unit shall be enabled for use as a pre mixer for the DPM 4000 expanding the amount of available input channels The DRM 4000 shall be capable of RS 485 communications with the DPM 4000 Priority functions preset switching and routing shall be easy to configure and operate The unit shall also be enabled for use as a stand alone unit for simple sound reinforcement tasks e g in a multimedia set up as well as for straightforward paging installations The unit shall have four AUX input channels each with two RCA type connectors volume and tone control Lo Hi in all input channels signal peak LEDs green red for monitoring the input level in all input channels and direct outputs for all MIC LINE and AUX channels The unit shall also have priority control ducking function in the inputs MIC LINE 1 and 2 and be controllable via external contacts signal level with adjustable threshold on the AP n E Rl RA n e 194107018 Eleclrol oice 12000 Portland Av South Burnsville MN 55337 Phone 952 887 4051 Fax 952 887 0043 www electrovoice com Telex Communications Inc 11 2002 Part Number 38109 xxx Rev A front or via remote control indicated via LED s on the front panel There shall be VCA
363. nnels which provides the possibility to individually and remotely set the volume levels for different rooms or areas Volume setting is accomplished either via externally connected potentiometers or switchable resistors or via an externally generated DC voltage OV 10V where at OV the output signal is not attenuated and at 10V the output audio signal is attenuated by 90 dB The following example shows the wiring for remotely controlling the volume via external potentiometer as well as a second example which shows how to remotely control the volume setting via control voltage that is generated in an external unit DCS 416 G DYNACORD cusszwnwe 9 DYNACORD cusszwinic 121784 DRM 4000 121784 DRM 4000 24V 24V ET 9 zx id lee t 7 Leomon 777 TTT eee our 9 moa a 7 Lcontrot N ECT OUT 9 mou TT 1 LOUD 10V MUTED 0 10V DC Q 10V DC OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT2 N C EXTERNAL VCA Wee CONTROL UNIT GND e g DCS 416 4 3 INITIAL OPERATION 5 INITIAL OPERATION 5 1 Power On Operation The POWER switch 12 switches the power of the DRM 4000 on The ON LED 13 starts to light and after a short period of initialization approx two se
364. not legitimate Any work security regulations that are applicable at the location where the appliance is being serviced have to be strictly obeyed This applies also to any regulations about the work place itself All instructions concerning the handling of MOS circuits have to be observed Note AN SAFETY COMPONENT HAS TO BE REPLACED WITH ORIGINAL PART ONLY 20 Indicators Controls And Connections 12 zZ DYNACOHD 1111 IL 1 r C3 MATRIX L It 1 M ES HE Gly ATRIX 8 M I IL 1 eS a MM Mag WR 1 4 SS eee 09 9 9 9 LLL o ZZ m 0 6 1 1 I _ _ 1 9 9 9 9 _ LLL e a g 10 11 12 13 14 eb EET r I 1 po TRE son A LPA 41 AG Gu wm na var wv eT cadiz icm CALTON Marne 22 pe aes aT wees aar a T A HE NIIZANT IW SN eee ur Te 1 TI 1 C cove enn m DYNACORD AITINA AN SK Be IHR A Rear plate screws B heat sink mounting C PCB mounting D socket mounting 21 21 18 18 17 LED meters wi
365. nouncement is possible using the hash mark key Break The current zone selection is cancelled as well while the connection to the DTI 2000 is not interrupted The appliance acknowledges the request with a single tone signal and it is ready for new entries a new zone selection launching text message playback triggering macros The hash mark key can also be used to clear erroneously made entries Using the hash mark key directly after selecting a text announcement macro or stop function prohibits the function from being executed but erases it instead The DTI 2000 is ready for new entries 8 Hang Up Cancelling a Connection Using the asterisk key directly after making an announcement or pressing the hash mark key forces the DTI 2000 to drop the connection and hang up The DTI 2000 also interrupts the connection when the calling party hangs up However in that case a few busy tone signals are output via the PA system which can be rather disturbing Therefore dropping the connection through the use of the asterisk key is always preferable The DTI 2000 can also be configured to automatically drop a connection after a definable period of time This is especially useful to prevent the PA system from being blocked by a telephone announcement over longer periods or that it is constantly blocked because of malfunction or faulty connections The period of time after which the DTI 2000 automatically drops a connection c
366. nput Level 15 dBu respectively 25 dBu 4 4 V respectively 13 8 V Input Impedance gt 19k ohms MIX Input 2 x RCA type connectors unbalanced Nom Input Level 0 dBu 775 mV Max Input Level 21 dBu 8 7 V Input Impedance 22 k ohms Audio Outputs Master Output XLR type connectors Nom Output Level 0dBu 775 mV Max Output Level 21 dBu 8 7 V Output Impedance lt 120 ohms Nom Load Impedance 600 ohms Send Output 2 x RCA type connectors unbalanced Nom Output Level 0 dBu 775 mV Max Output Level 21 dBu 8 7 V Output Impedance 100 ohms Direct Outputs Phoenix type terminal unbalanced Nom Output Level 0 dBu 775 mV Max Output Level 21 dBu 8 7 V Output Impedance lt 100 ohms Frequency Response 20 Hz 20 kHz 1 0 dB SIN Ratio gt 100 dB THD MIC LINE 0 03 THD AUX 0 01 96 Tone Control LO 15 dB 60 Hz HI 15 dB 13 kHz Low Cut 85 Hz 12 dB per octave slope Environmental temperature 5 to 40 Dimensions 483 x 43 6 x 351 W x H x D in mm 19 1HU Weight 10 4 Ibs 4 7 kg ElectroVoice Architecture amp Engineering Specifications The rack mixer audio signal router shall offer eight audio inputs and two audio outputs The inputs will be divided into four MIC LINE channels and four AUX channels Each input cha
367. nputs Eo Routing allows assigning the Aux signal to the outputs A and B in stereo quality Assigning Monoa the monaural summed L R signals to output A Mono A output B or to both outputs Dual is likewise possible The input signal is not assigned at all when set to OFF Outputs Label provides the possibility to MASTER ind abel Led Level allows lowering a corresponding assign inalvigual nam s to the channel s level by a value of up to corresponding outputs 90 dB Setting is possible via soft fader or using the UP DOWN buttons Mute allows muting un muting En the corresponding output signal U A Duck Duck activating this function Auto Ducking ducking attenuates the levels of the non prioritized channels by a value previously set value on the front panel of the DRM 4000 SOFTWARE EDITOR DRM 4000 7 4 4 Control Inputs This offers the possibility for individually programming the parameters of the corresponding control input contact 1 to contact 8 For details on individual parameters please refer to chapter 8 CONFIGURING THE DRM 4000 Setting each control input parameter to No Change is also possible When activating a control input all parameters that are set to No Change are not altered When the DRM 4000 is connected to your PC using the Online Control soft key allows establishing any settings in real time Conlgaehon Con
368. ns it is necessary to ensure that after the installation is completed all wiring located beneath the power supply input PCB are within a distance of at least 6 mm to the printed board assembly 12 Specifications 12 4 DPA 4120 power amplifier 200 W power supply mains operation mains frequency security class 115 V 230 V AC 10 50 60 Hz Pout W idling normal operation 10 dB alarm 3 dB standard conditions initial current inrush mains 0 20 100 200 Pmains VA Pout W 30 16 1 idling normal operation 10 dB alarm 3 dB standard conditions initial current inrush mains Pmains VA apparent power Umains lmains Pmains W true power battery operation 138 20 118 298 100 198 415 200 215 Pout W output power P W leakage power 24 V DC 10 30 stand by idling normal operation 10 dB standard conditions initial current inrush battery Pi W input power Ug Ig Pout W output power P W leakage power features of the input nominal input level nominal input impedance features of the power output nominal output capacity during mains operation nominal load impedance frequency response distortion at 1 KHz and nominal output power interfering voltage A features of the monitor output nominal output voltage nominal load impedance 43 com A 131 electronically balanced 775 mV 0 dBu gt 10 k ohms balanced f
369. nsmission of important messages Besides each of the four inputs embodies three fully parametric digital filters allowing for optimal tone control The filters provide different filter types like Hi Lo pass filters shelving filters and peak dip filters providing the possibility for adjusting the sound within the entire audio transmission range Factory preset filter settings for the DPC 4000 Series paging stations are already provided Setting volume levels and filter parameters is accomplished via PC during the configuration procedure Further it is possible to alter any volume setting during the later operation of the system via special function keys on the paging stations or through external controls that are connected to analog or digital control inputs four outputs employ digital delays allowing signal delays of up to 330 ms per channel Natural delays resulting from loudspeaker positioning which causes time differences in the traveling of sonic events or environmental circumstances related to architectural characteristics of the location can be equalized without additional effort 3 4 J Signal Generators Voice Message Memory The DPM 4000 provides a variety of tone generators for the generation of gong alarm and text signals Signal generation is realized through DSP algorithms which are extremely flexible in use so that they can be adjusted to match nearly any possible application Factory presets include 6 different gong signa
370. nto the slot and carefully push it into the DPM 4000 until it firmly locks in place Fix the module in place using the two locking screws and reconnect the power supply mo go Bh S Er Je ic EES Q RN1 m m cte F dt C8 27 080 mH x ra o E o 102 RIB 8 00802 2 aS WE gle ES 3 e 2 je R4 9 182 PHANTOM MIC EN 8 C NA L Sume lz z a u 5 C33 el be 5 COMP C25 0 R24 R20 2 QR LET 1632 EP R21 C30 80 05 m A 37 R30 Ea den TEN gt 8 8 Ham 4 ES ivl g y D2 D3 2 1 35 R28 R23 g 4k C10 87 4 m JP1 5 mo VR1 C37 D a R38 B g amp l figure 5 26 retrofitting the input transformers internal settings location of parts NRS 90234 5 22 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 1 10 2 Channel LINE Output Module NRS 90218 The output module is meant for the connection of power amplifiers with an input sensitivity of 0 dB or 6 dB Two XLRM type connectors allow the connection of up to 20 power amplifiers each The audio signal is electronically balanced if necessary transformers can be retrofitted The module can be installed in slot 3 or slot 4 The output channels can be switched s
371. number selection 1s accepted if the selected one or two digit number represents a text message function Press the asterisk key to launch text message playback The DTI 2000 acknowledges this request with a single tone signal indicating that it is operational and ready to accept desired function command DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 10 The DTI 2000 outputs a High Busy signal when one or several high priority zones are busy A tone sequence indicates that a text message is being played back Text message playback normally stops automatically but manually stopping the function is possible as well by entering the STOP function number code default setting 0 respectively 00 6 Macros The DTI 2000 allows launching macros that are programmed in the DPM 4000 System Manager thus providing access to special functions For example switching relays starting and stopping signals entering parameters launching test sequences and many others The macro function can only be accessed from access level 2 No other number selection is accepted if the selected one or two digit number represents a macro function Pressing the asterisk key launches a macro The DTI 2000 acknowledges this request with a single tone signal indicating that it is operational and ready to accept desired macro command It sends a two tone signal when entering an incorrect command or if there 15 any other problem 7 Cancelling a Function Break Cancelling an an
372. o you have established the basic setting where the channel is well modulated leaving at the same time sufficient headroom of at least 6dB as a reserve e Completing your settings use the channel control 3 to adjust the desired volume of the individual channel and use an input channel s balance control to position the corresponding audio signal in the stereo mix Ideally volume controls are set to a position somewhere in the area of their center mark 0 dB leaving you enough reserve for compensating level differences between the audio signals of various input channels 5 1 INITIAL OPERATION NOTE If the input signal is not present at the master outputs check the following Are the master controls 10 open Has the corresponding MIC LINE input been assigned to one or both output channels Please mind and compare your actual setting and the selected configuration Is ducking control active see ducking indicators 9 and does this maybe affect your input signal 5 2 2 Level Adjustment for AUX inputs The four AUX inputs are provided via two unbalanced RCA type sockets each which lets you connect either one stereo signal source e g CD Player or two monaural signal sources per input channel For optimally matching the signal source to the channel input please proceed as follows Set the corresponding channel control 7 on the front panel of the appliance to its counterclockwise margin Now connect the desired audio signal so
373. o S 05 Using the soft key set activates the new trigger setting I would like to use the start stop function of the factory presets 5 28 S 30 for playback and remote recording of the message M 02 see also on page 36 40 41 My installation should include the inputs and B4 instead of the inputs and C4 reserved in the preset The indication lamps are not needed which makes retrofitting the port C not necessary Performing the following changes is only possible for user 3 For when the indication signals are not needed the steps of the sequences S 28 play message M 02 and S 30 record M 02 stay unaltered Only the button C4 s stop operation is altered into B4 in the sequence S 30 The new setting is re stored under S 30 The trigger is selected the trigger menu and the start sequence is changed from S 25 into S 28 Confirming the soft key set activates this new setting play M 02 Now you have to select the trigger B4 and change the start sequence S 26 into S 30 Afterwards confirm your settings record M 02 using the soft key set 49 EXAMPLES FOR ALARM TEXTS Caution The following examples are not programmed in the message memory They only serve as examples Technical malfunction 1 Ladies and gentlemen unfortunately we are experiencing a technical problem There is no reason to be concerned Please stay calm we are working on the solution Technical malfunction 2 Ladies and gentlemen we are
374. o paragraph 11 2 If the appliance is correctly connected and mains is present the green STANDBY indicator 4 will light To remotely start the amplifier when it is being operated on the mains it is necessary to interconnect the contacts 3 POWER REMOTE and 2 GROUND STANDBY on the pin terminal strip REMOTE CONTROL 16 see also paragraph 5 6 The main power switch POWER 9 on the rear of the appliance is meant for service and maintenance purposes This allows bridging the mains switching relay which provides the possibility to operate the amplifier without remote start The main power switch POWER 9 on the appliance s rear is only meant for maintenance Remotel switching off the device is not possible when the POWER switch is engaged Both amplifiers the DPA 4120 and the DPA 4140 employ power on switching delays of approximately 3 sec After this time the green READY indicator lights and the READY fault message relay picks up when no error is being detected see also paragraph 6 2 3 2 Battery operation 24V DC The amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 use the mains or alternatively an external 24V battery as power source Switching to battery is performed via integrated relays The battery has to be connected on the rear of the amplifiers 20 using insulated 6 3x0 8 mm AMP flat plug connectors The amplifiers are protected against polarity mismatch Each the positive and negative conductors are internally protected by fuses loc
375. o the output transformer equipped outputs and for driving low impedance high performance loudspeaker systems the power amplifier s direct low impedance outputs are carried out as well offering a minimal load impedance of 4 ohms Each power amplifier channel is capable of simultaneously driving loads at the direct output and at the isolated output But it is of major importance that the overall power consumption of the connected loudspeaker systems or lines does not exceed the output power capacity of the power amplifier Example If a loudspeaker system with 8 ohms and a nominal power handling capacity of 300 watts is connected to the DPA 4260 channel A Direct Output this equals exactly half of the power amplifier s output power capacity since the minimal load impedance for each channel is 4 ohms That leaves the possibility to utilizes exactly half of the nominal output power capacity of the channel A 100 V output which in this example equals 500 watts 2 250 watts to supply a split loudspeaker line The total impedance of the loudspeaker line has not to decline 20 ohms 2 40 ohms TRANSFORMER OUTPUTS LOW IMPEDANCE LOW IMPEDANCE A 100V BRIDGED 100V 1200W 8 25V 70V 008 70V 4 25V B DUAL A 600W 49 Ne 70 0 DIRECT OUTRUTS ISOLATED OUTPUTS 80 300W figure example configuration DPA 4260 channel A in mixed mode 22 Bridged Mode D
376. ocking screws and tipping the small board over to the rear Now loosen all screws of the printed board assembly 80478 15 Screws on the rear panel and 3 screws on the front panel which lock the sockets in place 7 screws and 3 bolts on the printed board assembly itself Also loosen the two locking screws of the front panel on the bottom plate of the appliance Remove the potentiometer caps from the 8 channel controls and the 2 master controls by pulling them off to the front Detach the front panel If an interface board has previously been installed remove it temporarily After slightly lifting the front of the printed board assembly 80478 pull it to the front of the appliance so that the connectors are free of the rear panel Now you are able to remove the printed board assembly 80478 so that it is accessible for installing the transformer 3 Remove the two resistors of the corresponding input channel MIC LINE 1 R1A R2A MIC LINE 2 R1B R2B MIC LINE 3 R1C R2C MIC LINE 4 R1D R2D 4 Using a suction pump clean the holes for installing the transformer 9 holes per transformer as well as the holes of the previously removed resistors from soldering tin 5 Insert the transformer into the prepared holes position T1A for MIC LINE 1 position T1B for MIC LINE 2 position T1C for MIC LINE 3 and position T1D for MIC LINE 4 6 Solder the contacts of the corresponding transformer to the printed board assembly 9 soldering points per tr
377. oltage 24V DC 10 30 Operating current max 160 mA Operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C Dimensions W x H x D 37 5 x 80 6 x 245 mm Weight 170 g Inputs Voltage range min to max 0 V to 10 V DC Impedance range ext min to max 0 to10 kOhm Maximum input voltage 50 V DC Outputs Voltage range min to max 0 V to 10 V DC Output impedance 47 Ohm Maximum load 2k Ohm Resolution of Inputs Outputs 8 Bit Reference output voltage 10 V DC Reference output current 30 mA max DCS 416R ANALOG I O MODULE The module provides analog input and output interfacing capabilities for use in monitoring and control functions Both inputs and outputs are capable of handling O to 10V DC with 256 distinct levels Potentiometers for volume control can be interfaced using the provided reference voltage output e 8analog inputs e Voltages of 0 to 10V DC ora potentiometer to each input e Output for reference voltage 10V DC Banalog outputs 0 to 10V DC e Phoenix type connector for all inputs and outputs e Maximally 2 DCS 416R DCS 416 modules can be cascaded 4 DCS 420 MONITOR STATION The DCS 420 Monitor Manager is a 2RU unit offering acoustic control and visual level metering of audio in the system Switching and displaying of up to 250 audio signal sources as well as controlling the volume is carried ou
378. om Load Impedance Send Output Nom Output Level Max Output Level Output Impedance Direct Outputs Nom Output Level Max Output Level Output Impedance Frequency Response S N Ratio THD MIC LINE THD AUX Tone Control LO HI Low Cut Environmental temperature Dimensions Weight Extensions 24 V DC 21 6 31 2 V DC 700 mA 975 mA 4 x MIC LINE 4 x AUX 1 X MIX IN XLR type connectors electronically balanced transformer optionally available 60 10 dBu 0 8 mV 245 mV 30 20 dBu 25 mV 7 75 V 11 dBu 2 75 V 30 dBu 24 5 V 3 6 k ohms 10 k ohms gt 50 dB 10 dBu 20 dBu MIC LINE 1 amp 2 2 x RCA type connectors each unbalanced 6 dBu respectively 4 dBu 390 mV respectively 1 23 V internally configurable 15 dBu respectively 25 dBu 4 4 V respectively 13 8 V gt 19 k ohms 2 x Cinch unbalanced 0 775 mV 21 dBu 8 7 V 22 k ohms XLR type connectors electronically balanced transformer optionally available 0 dBu 775 mV 21 dBu 8 7 V 120 ohms 600 ohms 2 x RCA type connectors unbalanced 0 dBu 775 mV 21 dBu 8 7 V 100 ohms Phoenix Micro Combicon pin terminal unbalanced 0 dBu 775 mV 21 dBu 8 7 V 100 ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz 1 0 dB gt 100 dB 0 03 without transformer 0 08 with transformer lt 0 01 15 60 Hz 15 13 kHz 85 Hz 12 dB per octave slope 5 40 483 43 6 351 Wx H
379. ometers for remotely controlling the volume settings of Master A and B The VCA s of the two master outputs A or B are controlled by DC voltage Please keep in mind that audio levels of eventually prioritized microphones Priority Override is enabled are not attenuated by VCA control For details on the pin assignment and an example of how connection is established please refer to chapter 4 4 2 18 DIRECT OUT Each of the eight input channels MIC LINE single channel and AUX two channel has an individual direct output It is possible to internally assign the direct outputs to PRE the signal path is split prior to the tone control and volume setting section or POST the signal path is split after the tone control and volume setting section For details on the pin assignment please refer to chapter 4 3 3 19 Master Outputs OUTA B These are the two balanced XLR type outputs of the DRM 4000 They can be used as L R stereo or as two separate monaural outputs depending on the configuration of the DRM4000 2 3 CONTROLS AND CONNECTIONS 20 SEND output The pre master A B audio signal of the output channels is present at these two RCA type connectors Therefore these outputs can be utilized for easy expanding cascading several DRM 4000 21 MIX IN input This unbalanced stereo dual input can be used connecting another mixer or an additional DRM 4000 allowing easy expanding cascading 22 MIX IN control This control allows matc
380. omponent or function Thus you can skip a section if it is of no relevance for your particular application The following table lists all chapters included in the handbook It is meant as a guide for finding relevant information as quickly as possible 1 Introduction Notes on how to use the handbook 2 Operation Instructions Precautions operational conditions environmental conditions location initial operation maintenance and service 3 System Description Overview of all components appliances audio and control functions of the PROANNOUNCE system 4 Installation Notes on how to install the PROANNOUNCE DESIGNER configuration software 5 Single Device Descriptions Detailed descriptions of all PROANNOUNCE components central unit with modules paging stations power amplifiers monitoring system 6 Appendix Notes on how to configure the hardware wiring and initial operation PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 1 1 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS 2 Operation Instructions 2 1 Safety Instructions IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The symbol of a flash within an equilateral CAUTION triangle is to alert the user to the presence of RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK S DO NOT OPEN uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK magnitude to constitute a risk of electric DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE shock to persons AVIS RIS
381. on It is possible that during operation shock hazard output voltages can be present at the POWER OUTPUT connector gt 34V peak value Thus the connected loudspeakers have to be installed in accordance to applicable security standards and regulations see also paragraph 8 5 2 8 Enhanced application field 8 1 Standard input module NRS 90225 This input module for the power amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 is meant for insertion at the power amplifiers rear It provides the following functions lockable XLR input connector XLR output connector to patch the input signal through gain control to be adjusted using a screwdriver mains remote ON OFF battery remote ON OFF control of the D and E relays fault messages via the READY relay contact thermal overload of the mains transformer thermal overload of the power amplification stage ground fault optional only with installed NRS 90224 pilot tone signal optional only with installed NRS 90224 MONITOR output electronically balanced input transformer for floating balanced input optional Output transformer for floating balanced monitor output optional The input module is meant to be used with the power amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 The module allows to control and monitor the operation of the power amplifiers using conventional equipment or with reservations by the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 Caution Before installing the input module NRS 90225 yo
382. onal alarm keys or key lock switches e prepared for the connection of an external PTT type microphone or audio signal source e piezo humming device for acoustic alerts e prepared for the installation of an optionally available loudspeaker e set up mode allows altering parameter settings directly at the paging station e two line LC display All paging stations are processor controlled and provide several monitoring functions The integrated watchdog circuitry monitors the processor system while the audio section is guarded by the signal of a switchable pilot tone oscillator Additionally the internal supply voltage is constantly measured Once it drops below a critical threshold a warning signal is being transmitted Line monitoring for the audio cabling as well as for all RS 485 control lines allows the early recognition and signaling of line interrupts and short circuits Easy and comfortable configuration of the paging stations is accomplished through the use of the PROMATRIX Designer software The graphical dialog oriented user interface allows setting all key functions priorities options and several other parameters Up to four paging stations can be connected to a single input of the central unit However it is important to keep the fact in mind that in case of line interruption or short circuit several microphone terminals can fail at the same time Despite inputs allow only launching one message at a time All other connected pagin
383. onnectors represent the interface to the DPM 4000 System Manager Using either the 9 pole D Sub connector or the 6 pole RJ 12 socket simultaneous use of both terminals is not possible to establish audio and data connection to the DPM 4000 is possible The DTI 2000 needs to be connected to one of the paging console inputs DPC IN RJ 45 socket on the DPM 4000 The needed interface cable RJ 12 to RJ 45 with a length of 3 5m is supplied DATA indicator The DATA LED indicates that data is being transmitted between DTI 2000 and DPM 4000 System Manager Therefore it serves as main monitoring indicator for correct data connections DIP switch for address and operation mode settings The DTI 2000 allows setting an address between 1 and 16 CAUTION Make sure never to connect two or more appliances with identical address settings to the DPM 4000 System Manager since this would inevitably result in data conflicts This also includes the address settings of the connected paging consoles Please refer to the chapter DIP switch settings for further details Phone sockets Two telephone connectors are located on the rear panel of the DTI 2000 Connect the PHONE LINE socket with your telephone wall outlet The LOOP THRU socket offers connection for a telephone set POWER SUPPLY connector Connect the supplied power supply unit to this connector by inserting the round plug of power supply unit into the POWER SUPPLY socket on the rear panel of the DT
384. ontrol and monitor the operation of the power amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 from the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 for further details please refer to the PROMATRIX handbook Caution Before installing the input module NRS 90222 you have to unplug the mains connector as well as a presumably connected battery cord Before installing the input module it is necessary to remove the two locking screws B on the rear panel of the appliance For installation the printed board assembly first has to be inserted into the guiding rails After carefully pushing the module in it has to be locked by using the two screws mentioned before After installing the remote module NRS 90222 it is necessary to set its address according to the description in the PROMATRIX handbook using the two HEX code switches ADDRESS 21 and note the setting within the field ADDRESS on the rear panel of the appliance using a waterproof marker pen 8 3 5 90208 input transformer for the floating balanced input For the case that floating inputs are required the inputs of the INPUT MODULE NRS 90225 and the REMOTE MODULE NRS 90222 are prepared for retrofitting input transformers If so it is necessary to additionally install the extension kit NRS 90208 per each input The installation has to be performed as follows see figure 6 and or figure 7 to remove the input module you have to loosen the two locking screws B on the rear panel of the appliance Now the module ca
385. ontrolled configurable telephone interface that allows a ProAnnounce System to be connected to a telephone installation or the phone network The DTI 2000 provides the user with a full functioning paging interface over a standard analog line Remote triggering of signals prerecorded messages and control functions macros within the ProAnnounce system are also possible via the DTI 2000 The DTI 2000 uses DTMF tones and audio beeps to interact with the user Two levels of password protection are provided to prevent unauthorized access to system functions Audio from the caller is metered and adjusted from the front panel DTI2000 Telephone Interface DYNACORD DTI 2000 DYNACORD DTI 2000 CE o 10 gt PUEDEN Technical Specifications SIN Rati DPM 4000 Interface RJ 12 DB 9 female 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 A Dimensions W x Hx D 8 19 x 1 73 x 7 99 inches 208 x 44 x 203 mm 4 41 b 20 ElectroVoice Architecture amp Engineering Specs Ordering Information The telephone paging interface shall provide the same functions and programmability as a DPC 4000 series Model Description Cat No paging station It shall connect to a standard analog DTI 2000 Main Unit 121813 POTS line or equivalent service It shall have audio and MCP4 Dual Rack Mount 90027728000 RS 485 connections that use the standard DPC connector on the DPM 4000PA paging controller The unit shall MCP2 Single Rack Mount 90027728001
386. ontrols clockwise amplifies the corresponding frequency range while turning them counterclockwise results in attenuating the corresponding frequency range Avoid extreme settings Generally minor corrections of the input sound signal will achieve the best result as well as the most natural sound The controls are recessed mounted and can only be accessed via screwdriver to prevent faulty operation 7 Control AUX 1 4 Rotary controls for setting the volume level of the DRM4000 s corresponding AUX inputs Ideally the rotary control is setto a value in the area of its center position 0 dB This provides you with the opportunity to match different levels of different input channels Afterwards use the master rotary controls to set the output volume for the entire system 8 Ducking controls A B These controls allow setting a value in dB by which the audio signals of the non prioritized input channels e g background music is attenuated when the ducking function is active Separately setting the ducking depth attenuation rate for the outputs A and B to any value between 0 dB clockwise margin and 40 dB counterclockwise margin is possible The ducking controls are recessed mounted and can only be accessed via screwdriver to prevent faulty operation 9 Ducking indicators A B A lit ducking LED indicates that the ducking function of the corresponding channel has been activated In other words the audio signal of a prioritized channel
387. or the terminal input are busy with higher priority signals the BUSY LED will vastly blink and the calling attempt is ignored also refer to the description of indications The BUSY LED lights during the transmission of an announcement The TALK button has to be pressed during the whole message Until the user makes any changes the defined selection stays memorized even after releasing the TALK button Pressing the CANCEL key de selects the entire selection Additionally and in case of a pre gong signal has previously been programmed the GONG LED will light during the transmission of the pre gong signal Collective Call The announcement is launched into all areas of the entire installation The procedure is similar to making a selective call First all areas of the installation are selected by pressing the ALL key Pressing the TALK button activates the collective call During the transmission of a call all area and or group LED s as well as the ALL LED will light also refer to the paragraph indications The TALK button has to be pressed down until the end of the announcement BUSY LED indication and the behavior of the pre gong signal are equivalent to the selective call Direct Call Principally assigning a direct call to any selection key area key group key ALL key is possible via PC during the configuration procedure This allows making an announcement directly by pressing the desired selection key without need to press the
388. ording time 14 Message memory 5 14 Asterisk after displayed running 14 GONG ux LP eere qve ere 15 Gene ial eines v YER WC RA WR CETT Ya Y eR S 15 Gongipresets s a dar hae Pie Ris 15 Operation menu 00 0 1 15 load c uota ettet miu male Lettere 15 Rea 15 re eta gor eed ee 15 Priority 2 55 Dey erbe b d 15 DAVE x pu iini Atari e T oak a 15 List of available gong parameters 16 ALARM ER a e Mp E f pue ase cett dala 17 General 722 usus E eua EE s 17 Alarm presetss muessen ee Uer Re 17 Operation menu 17 Ka cU 17 Edit M 17 Title arse ttes iUe epo eni ind 17 Priority iro eee kin Re 17 Save e ucc 17 List of available alarm 18 ANNOUNCEMENT cce ara ae eA WR e Wem Rod 20 General b DOR RASA E 20 Operation menu 1 20 TRIGGER RE nee re 21 Generals us ee ee ee et 21 Operation menu
389. ore detach the yellow green cable from the ground connector on the appliance s rear panel Pressing the lock strap of the AMP connector together it can be removed without applying any force Now you have to remove the three screws marked A refer to the diagram of the appliance s rear panel on page 2 which allows you to twist the power supply input PCB 86243 up Make sure not to damage any wires or any other parts The fuses F502 and F503 are now accessible and can be removed To re install the power supply input PCB 86243 these steps have to be proceeded in the opposite order The yellow green cable has to be reconnected to the ground connector on the rear panel of the appliance By pulling the cable make sure that it sits snugly Then you can re attach the cover plate of the enclosure 42 Caution For security reasons it is necessary to ensure that after the installation is completed all wiring located beneath the power supply input PCB are within a distance of at least 6 mm to the printed board assembly 12 Specifications 12 4 DPA 4120 power amplifier 200 W power supply mains operation mains frequency security class 115 V 230 V AC 10 50 60 Hz Pout W idling normal operation 10 dB alarm 3 dB standard conditions initial current inrush mains 0 20 100 200 Pmains VA Pout W 30 16 1 idling normal operation 10 dB alarm 3 dB standard conditions initial current inrush mains
390. oubling the power amplifier s output power is accomplished by engaging bridged mode operation where the two power amplifier output stages are linked for push pull operation In other words a monaural power amplifier is created offering double the output voltage and double the output power capacity of a single channel As a result you are provided with floating 50 V 140 V and 200 V as well as with a direct output with doubled nominal output voltage If the BRIDGED MODE switch is engaged the audio input signal has to be fed via the CHANNEL A input while the CHANNEL B input is without function The signal is internally inverted and the power amplifier stage B is driven by that inverted signal The power amplifier stage A is still driven by the unaltered incoming audio signal Bridged mode operation is possible with using the isolated and or the direct outputs When using the isolated outputs bridging the binding posts of channels A and B is mandatory using short cables with suitable diameter 1 5 mm 2 5 mm 2 Careful consideration of the loudspeaker systems correct connection is important in preventing phase correlation problems Channel A carries the signal in phase and therefore has to be connected to the pole of the correspondent loudspeaker system while the loudspeakers pole has to be connected to the output connector of channel B The output voltage of each power amplifier stage A amp B is present at the binding post st
391. oudspeaker systems 25 5 3 POWER OUTPUT for the connection of low impedance loudspeaker systems 25 5 4 POWER OUTPUT 100 V Double Output Power 26 5 5 MONITOR Output eoe ee a RE EUER NET 26 6 Integrated Remote Module 26 7 Indicators And Fault Notification 27 7 139 TANDBY Indicator 53 IR Hr cr ar a eens 27 A2 READY lndicaltor xe cd et aa e n a e eus 27 7 3 PROTECT Indicator scs eere RU UE Rete P eren 27 7 4 GROUND FAULT 1 28 7 5 Meter Instruments And CLIP Indicators 28 7 6 STATUS Indicator seio ee be die REA 28 8 Switching The Output Voltage refer to qualified service personnel only 28 9 Additional Functions And Features refer to qualified service personnel only 29 9 1 NRS 90206 Pilot Tone Surveillance 29 9 2 NRS 90207 Ground Fault Surveillance 30 9 3 NRS 90208 Input Transformer 31 9 4 NRS 90227 Monitor Output Transformer 32 10 19 Flightcase Or 19 Rack System Installation 32 11 Ground Lift Switch CIRCUIT L TO CHASSIS SWITCH 33 12 ois ot Ee De BC EH wee ec RW el A 33 13 DPA 4411 Specifications
392. paragraph 9 3 1 closing the appliance use the 9 screws M3 x 6 DIN 7500 to reattach the cover plate 10 19 Flightcase Or 19 Rack System Installation Caution Operating the DPA 4411 without cover plate is not admissible When incorporating the DPA 4411 into a 19 flightcase or 19 rack system make sure to leave room for sufficient air flow Between the amplifier s rear plate and the inside wall of the surrounding enclosure has to be at least 60 mm x 330 mm of space until up to the enclosures top or its ventilation gaps At least 100 mm of space should be left above a rack system to guarantee sufficient air circulation Since during the operation of the DPA 4411 the environmental temperature within the rack closet may increase by about 10 C minding the maximum allowable temperature values for other equipment that is installed into the same rack system or enclosure is of major importance Note For trouble free operation of the appliance the maximum environmental temperature of 40 is not to be exceeded 11 Ground Lift Switch CIRCUIT 1 TO CHASSIS SWITCH Using the ground lift switch CIRCUIT 1 TO CHASSIS SWITCH 22 lets you separate the audio signal ground from the enclosure ground safety earthing This helps to solve problems with hum or noise without jeopardizing safety standards If several units with ground lift switch are installed in a common enclosure or rack system it is recommended to set the ground lift switches o
393. pe 1 B6 BOOS F007 lt gt 2 2 907 3 Boo7l E M 1N4002 1N4002 Beer DEN 0 f BOO B8 B8 F008 7 50 gg j B9 009 ECT F010 7 58 gio il B10 Bang L 24U OUT FOU 2 58 0 B11 239 OE TPUT ol ibe 012 7 54 gi2 1 B12 BOI2 F013 7 56 g13 1l 71 DRE Bt ial DEM 207 Saas Ss FOIS 7 59 pis Bots p B15 CHARGE CURRENT 5 JA5 9ABie i1 16 016 Ber US CHARGE CURRENT IL Borza LUR 017 41 B022 5 LUR BATTERY CONTROL 5933 So TEMP TO DEM 313 scu SEE TEMP 85220 2 F001 344121 0001 gt B9 1 B9 009 1N4002 1N4002 FOIO 7 58 FOL 7 54 11 Z 5 11 11 Bil BOLI 012 7 54 B012 n F03 7 58 11 1 6 24U OUTPUT NOTE 1 24U OUTPUT DEM 316 3 lua 1 LL IL a 8 18521921 1 eei 7 54 Bi BOO F002 7 5 2 11 B2 002 mum F003 7 565 B003 E001 3 ER m 24U OUTPUT 020 gt ros 7 59 B4 i B4 004 NOTE 1 F005 7 5A B5 1 BS B005 006 7 5A 6 11 86 B006 i gt 001 0 en ig 12U 65An F007 3 A PE M E497 POL 207 E 344121 sore T 15 the maximum m M 0002 0001 FO08 7 50 58 1 B8 Boos current available from s SSS 5
394. pe and binding post clamping input connectors e 19 frame size 3 HU CONTENTS Description ssrA dI nb eke RR RA Re ERO eerte E e oic REX ga 17 Installation N tes i ciis eee ace a Rei x no dn ca a Rn rona a a 18 Bear 2 ies S RIT Ao BR RARE aol S a Ro 19 Inputs Su eh ree Ee rcr Ale nahen unge 19 else ener Li KE MM UNA esM oed lag tin dat 20 Sp cifications esses 2500 tas ee ue eive REIS eH Ian UI ec deeper Bee Sa ATE 27 Block Diagram seccion eem rm EE EIER 43 Dimensions 2 m metere Roose ca ar EI MASA EST ds 44 Warranty er C a ee 48 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated CAUTION dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintan AVIS Risque DE CHOC ELECTRIOUE NE PAS OUVRR ce servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not us
395. port an optical IrDA interface is provided on the front panel of the appliance offering the possibility for wireless data transmission RS 232 PC INTERFACE RS 232 extension cord TxD RxD MASSE figure 5 4 pin assignment of the RS 232 PC INTERFACE connector D Sub extension cord REMOTE CONTROL socket This 8 pole RJ 45 type socket is meant for connecting DCS 401 control modules or DPA 4000 power amplifiers with remote interface The connector provides a RS 485 interface for communicating with control modules and power amplifiers pins 4 5 a balanced audio input for the insertion of external monitor signals pins 7 8 and a 24 V supply voltage output for the supply of external modules pin 1 24 V 1 A max pin 2 GND A programmable electronic fuse adjustable to 330 mA 660 mA 990 mA protects the voltage output against short circuit and overload External devices are connected through common RJ 45 extension cords For additional information please refer to the corresponding chapters of the individual device REMOTE CONTROL AUDIO IN AUDIO IN RS 485 24V GND RS 485 figure 5 5 pin assignment of the REMOTE CONTROL socket The RS 485 bus may not exceed a maximum length of 1 000m and must follow a line structure short stub cables are permissible Cabling has to be carried out using twisted pair cables 38 400 Bd 8N1 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 5 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 MONITOR OU
396. ports which can be used for the inter communication amongst DPM 4000 managers or to connect additional external devices For detailed information please refer to the owner s manuals of the individual extensions or modules Control Module Slot Slot 5 is a control slot which can be equipped with control modules for general control and query purposes Control modules provide different kinds of control inputs and outputs For detailed description please refer to the following chapters The DPM 4000 is shipped with one 8 I O control module installed Slots for Audio Output Modules The slots 3 and 4 are the DPM 4000 s audio output slots providing two audio outputs per slot Each slot can be equipped with a 2 channel audio output module The DPM 4000 is shipped with a 2 channel audio output module installed in slot 3 described in detail at a later stage Slot 4 is empty Audio Input Module Slots The slots 1 and 2 are the DPM 4000 s audio input module slots providing two audio inputs per slot Each slot can be equipped with any suitable audio input module A detailed description of available audio input modules can be found in the following chapters The DPM 4000 is shipped with no audio input modules installed PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 1 4 Specifications Supply voltage Nominal power consumption Maximum power consumption Audio section Inputs Outputs Frequency Response SIN ratio Distort
397. pre recorded messages Signal generation is realized through DSP algorithms which are extremely flexible in use so that they can be adjusted to match nearly any possible application Factory presets include 6 different gong signals and 17 different alarm signals DPM4000 4x4 Audio Processor Router DYNACORD 002 Technical Specifications Supply voltage 24VDC 21 6 31 2V DC Nominal power cons 500 mA Maximum power cons 6 7A Frequency Response 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB SIN ratio 100 dB A weighted Distortion 0 01 24 V output 24V DC 400 mA max 21 6 31 2 V DC Ready output Floating relay contacts 1 A 24 V DC Logic inputs 2 floating via opto coupler bi pole Maximum input voltage UIN max 31 V RS 232 interface 19 200 Baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity Xon Xoff Serial port RS 485 standard Supply output Short circuit protected electronically programmable fuse Supply voltage 24VDC 21 6 to 31 2 V DC Nominal current 330 mA 660 mA 990 mA selectable electronic fuse Monitor input Electronically balanced Nominal input level 22dBu 1V Max input level 10 dBu 2 5 V Input balance gt 30 dB Monitor output 6 3 mm phone jack either for the connection of headphones or speakers Output level Headphones 650 mV 1 5 dBu Loudspeakers 1 8 V 7 2 dBu Output powe
398. put A1 system 3 Out B4 clr ready When the system is ready the output B4 music program 4 Out B2 set off is opened and B2 B3 mandatory reception E D is closed Out B3 set Closing the signaling contact alarm signal running swit 6 Out A3 set ches the audio controls to the alarm signal s priority The signal 7 Sum off sequence is defined as follows 1 sec signal A28 4 sec break 8 DMM 5dB It is being repeated five times Using different signal periods 9 Count 0005 offers the opportunity to realize a code call system When the call 10 Stat A28 signal ends the DMM 4650 returns to stand by mode 11 wt Audio 12 Dly 004 0s 13 wt Delay 14 if Count 15 End 16 Jump 10 17 End 44 List of factory preset gong signals gong no title prior type bar attack release start repeat cnt rep del G20 Vierklng 00 fourtone 12A 04 ms XL no 2 B 06 ms XL 1 5 sec 3 C 07 ms XL 1 5 sec 4 D 10 ms XL 1 5 sec no no G21 Dreiklng 00 threetone 1 A 04 ms XL no 2 B 06 ms XL 1 5 sec 3 C 07 ms XL 1 5 sec no no G22 Zweiklng 00 twotone 12A 04 ms XL no 2 B 06 ms XL 1 5 sec 0001 8 0 sec G23 Einklang 00 onetone 12A 04 ms XL no 0001 8 0 sec G24 Vorgong 00 twotone 1 A 04 ms XL no 2 B 06 ms XL 0 5 sec 0001 9 0 sec G25 T rgong 00 fourtone 1 A 04 ms M no 2 B 06 ms M 0 5 sec 3 A 07 ms XL 0 5 sec 4 B 10 ms XL 0 5 sec no no G26 Alrmgong 00 twoto
399. put current with forced ventilation Residual voltage standing wave d mV pp Mains stabilization Safety Radio interference Environmental temperature Dimensions W x H x D Depth incl connections Weight DPP4004 230 VAC 10 96 115 VAC 10 96 50 60 Hz 20 VA 120 VA 24 10 30 0 17 A 4 1A 1A 1A 0 1A 2 2mA ACTIVE 2 2mA 24V 4A 100mV pp 1 96 EN 60065 EN 55022 B EN 50082 1 EN 61000 4 2 4 6 ENV 50204 5 C 40 PROMATRIX SYSTEM DPP4012 230 VAC 10 115 VAC 10 96 50 60 Hz 20 VA 360 VA 24 10 30 96 0 17 A 12 1A 1A 1A 0 1A lt 1mA inactive 1mA OFF 24V 12A 100mV pp 1 96 EN 60065 EN 55022 B EN 50082 1 EN 61000 4 2 4 6 ENV 50204 EN 61000 3 2 EN 61000 3 3 5 C 40 19 x 2 HU 483 x 88 x 330 mm 400 mm 7 kg 400 mm 7 kg lt gt DYNACORD OWNER S MANUAL DYNACORD DRM 4000 8 IN 2 AUDIO MIXER amp ROUTER m w co MIC LINE 3 MIC LINE 4 DRM 4000 8 IN 2 AUDIO MIXER amp ROUTER IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an CAUTION equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK 2 product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons WARNING TO
400. r Pv W leakage power 1BTU 1055 06 W s Fuses location pos utilization value dimensions standard rear panel DPA 4245 mains fuse 230V AC T8A 250V 5x 20mm IEC 127 rear panel DPA 4260 mains fuse 230V AC T10A 250V 5 x 20 mm IEC 127 print 84171 1 F1 power supply T1A 250V 5 x 20 mm IEC 127 print 84171 1 F2 power supply T1A 250V 5 x 20 mm IEC 127 Extension Kits For The DPA 4245 And The DPA 4260 NRS 90208 balanced input input transformer for a single channel NRS 90235 1 pair of rack mount ears 26 Technical Specifications DPA 4245 DPA 4260 Amplifier at rated conditions both channels driven direct outputs with 8Q loads isolated outputs with rated load and voltage unless otherwise specified DUAL MODE Output Definition Load impedance or rated output voltage Rated Load Impedance isolated outputs only Maximum Midband Output Power THD 1 1kHz Maximum Midband Output Voltage THD 1 1kHz RMS rated load Rated Output Power THD lt 0 2 45Hz 20kHz 10min according IEC 268 3 Rated Output Voltage THD lt 0 2 45Hz 20kHz Maximum RMS Voltage Swing THD 1 1kHz no load connected Frequency Response 3dB ref 1kHz LO Cut Filter 18dB octave 45Hz HI Cut Filter 12dB octave 30kHz Voltage Gain at 1 kHz Input Sensitivity and Impedance at rated condition Slew Rate Power Bandwith THD 1 ref 1kHz half power rated load impedance THD at rated o
401. r decision whether you want to wait enter or to interrupt the current announcement enter once again A High Busy signal rapid high pitch sequence of tone signals indicates that one or several high priority zones are busy Once the announcement is finished you can enter an announcement end mark through using the hash mark key The connection is not dropped which enables you to select new zones or groups for making further announcements Pressing the asterisk key after an announcement is finished drops the connection the DTI 2000 hangs up 4 Direct Call The DTI 2000 allows making announcements in permanently pre selected zones or groups Direct Call This function can only be accessed from access level 2 No other number selection is accepted ifthe selected one or two digit number represents a talk function Press the asterisk key to launch an announcement The DTI 2000 acknowledges this request with a single tone signal indicating that it is operational and ready to accept your announcement The DTI 2000 outputs a High Busy signal when one or several high priority zones are busy After the announcement is finished pressing the hash mark key 7 allows selecting other functions Using the asterisk key drops the connection 5 Text Playback The DTI 2000 offers the ability to playback pre recorded text messages in permanently pre selected zones This function can only be accessed from access level 2 No other
402. r handling Headphones 50 mW 8 O Loudspeakers 380 mW 8 Q Operating temp 5 C to 40 C Dimensions W x H x D 19 2 HU 483 x 88 x 337 mm Installation depth 340 mm 410 mm incl connectors Weight 64kg ElectroVoice Architecture amp Engineering Specifications The unit shall employ a digital audio matrix providing four inputs and four outputs Additional matrix junctions for the integrated gong and alarm signal generators the vocal recording playback unit and the lock on of the pilot tone and its evaluation shall be incorporated All input signals and internally generated signals shall be capable of being mixed inside the matrix and sent to any of four channels More complicated larger than four zone systems shall be capable of being constructed by using a system controlled relay matrix either pre or post amplifier The unit shall provide priority control of pages and other functions The unit shall provide a variety of tone generators for the generation of gong alarm and pre recorded message signals Signal generation shall be realized through DSP algorithms which are extremely flexible in use so that they can be adjusted to match nearly any possible application The unit shall provide factory presets which will include 6 different gong signals and 17 different alarm signals The unit shall accept a variety of different input cards which enable it to function with microprocessor
403. r more hardware contacts are activated via software Read access the actual status of contacts is returned Remark when utilizing the heartbeat see above after expiration of the timeout value value 0 the entry is automatically set to NONE SERVICE CC OFF value e g SERVICE CC OFF 1 2 6 SERVICE CC OFF NONE SERVICE CC OFF Value NONE 1 8 2 Write access one or more hardware contacts are deactivated via software Read access the actual status of contacts is returned Remark when utilizing the heartbeat see above after expiration of the timeout value value 0 the entry is automatically set to NONE 10 5 SPECIFICATIONS 10 4 2 Online Access to all Parameters Via RS 232 connection and using REMOTE commands provides direct access to all DRM 4000 parame ters like routing VCA priority override ducking mute etc Controlling the unit is possible parallel to any other control method hardware contact switching software contact switching external VCA control with any individual priority being recognized For example activating an external contact with a higher priority setting overrides actual remote settings As soon as deactivating the contact again all previous remote are regained Generally all REMOTE commands have the lowest priority 0 and all entries are set to NO CHANGE The following table lists all REMOTE commands and their corresponding parameter values Please be
404. r of repetitions of the sweep Freq1 gt inversion point 1x max 9999x 0000 corresponds to infinite repetition Values in parenthesis example siren A22 Bi sweep 800 Hz 800 Hz 1 400 Hz 400 Hz gt time 2 0 sec repeat 1x repeat 2x repeat endless Type continuous sound frequency pitch of the sound in Hz min 40Hz max 9999Hz ratio duty cycle of the square wave in percent min 1 max 50 time duration in sec min 0 015 max 99 995 0 00s corresponds to infinite duration Values in parenthesis example BZB all clear signal A25 Continuous tone time 60 0 sec 18 Type Jump sound frequency timet frequency2 time2 ratio repeat pitch at sound start in Hz min 40Hz max 9999Hz jumps after time1 to frequency2 duration for which freq1 is heard in sec min 0 015 max 99 995 pitch of the sound in Hz min 40Hz max 9999Hz jumps after time2 to frequency1 duration for which freq2 is heard in sec min 0 015 max 99 995 duty cycle of the square wave in percent min 196 max 50 number of repetitions of one frequency min 1x max 9999x 0000 corresponds to infinite repetition Values in parenthesis example Post A23 Type burst Frequency on time off time Ratio repeat 1075 Hz 1 925 Hz fA Jump Ton Lo f gt time 1 time 2 0 5 sec 0 5 sec k repeat 2 repeat endless
405. r on the DCS 400 monitoring system DCS 408 DCS 409 DCS 412 Every single sequence needs a control output for the start stop command and a control input for the transmission of the return signal The control output starts the DMM 4650 sequence with a positive slope and stops it with a negative slope The return signal s control input reacts to the negative slope and activates the macro Message Stop Additionally in most cases a control input is needed for the DMM 4650 READY FAULT signal The following cabling example offers a possibility for controlling three different sequences including fault recognition This is accomplished by utilizing Port A on the DMM 4650 and the 8 I O control module IN 5 8 and OUT 5 8 of the DPM 4000 DMM 4650 DPM 4000 NRS 90219 1 1 Stop Fault 2 INS OUT5 5 3 3 Sequenz 1 Sequenz 1 4 6 OUT6 4 5 5 Sequenz 2 Sequenz 2 6 OUT7 6 7 7 Sequenz 3 Sequenz 3 8 IN8 OUT8 11 19 24 GND 24V Using an adapter cable 2 x RJ 45 to 25 pole D Sub the shown cabling is established with relative little effort For a larger amount of sequences it is necessary to additionally utilize Ports B C and D on the DMM 4650 Triggering the sequence start stop is accomplished through additional control outputs on the DPM 4000 control module OUT 2 4 or via relay contacts on the DCS 408 respectivel
406. r signal routing purposes Internal Jumper provide the possibility to individually select for each input channel whether its DIRECT OUT signal path is split PRE before entering the tone control and volume setting stage or POST For details on the location of the wire bridges that are used for PRE POST switching please refer to chapter 9 1 2 For details on the pin assignment of the DIRECT OUT connectors please refer to the following diagram Make sure to use shielded LF cables DYNACORD 2 DRM 4000 121784 MADE iN GERMANY ATTI EE 6 x 5 L CONTROL In 20 LRoss4 EEEE l 30 GND 29 AUX 4 R 28 AUX 4 L 27 AUX3 R 26 AUX 3 L 25 AUX2 R 24 AUX 2 L 23 AUX 1 R 22 AUX 11 21 GND 20 GND 19 MIC LINE 4 18 MIC LINE 3 17 MIC LINE 2 16 MIC LINE 1 15 GND 4 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 4 4 Control Inputs 4 4 1 CONTROL INPUTS The CONTROL INPUTS 16 are eight freely configurable control inputs which are provided via Phoenix type terminals on the rear of the appliance Closing connection to ground a control contact switches to the corresponding configuration preset Simultaneously closing several contacts selects the preset with the highest priority setting When all control inputs are open idling mode the DRM 4000 is set to its BASIC CONFIGURATION DYNACORD 555 2
407. ram and monitor the DRM 4000 on line 7 1 System Requirements PC with Pentium processor Microsoft Windows 95 98 ME 2000 NT 32 MB RAM Hard disk with at least 5 MB of free storage Mouse VGA type monitor The software is optimized for a monitor resolution of 1024x768 pixels Graphic board 256 colors RS 232 interface for serial connection to the DRM 4000 7 2 Installation Notes Insert the setup disk 1 into the floppy drive A Select EXECUTE in the Windows start menu Enter the command a DRM4000 Editor exe Follow the instructions during the installation routine 7 3 PC DRM 4000 Connection Check your PC for available COM ports that are not assigned to any other application The DRM 4000 Editor Software allows choosing between COM1 to COMB Use a custom RS 232 cable 5 pin D type plug socket 1 1 for connecting the chosen COM port on your computer to the RS 232 interface port on the rear panel of the DRM 4000 Before establishing the connection make sure to switch off the power of both appliances Otherwise this could lead to severe hardware damage 7 1 SOFTWARE EDITOR DRM 4000 7 4 Software Description 7 4 1 General The DYNACORD DRM 4000 Editor software provides an extremely easy and comfortable manner for configuring controlling and monitoring the DRM 4000 It is possible to load save or transfer any number of DRM 4000 configurations Additionally reading the actu
408. rammed Gong Signal A gong signal can be transmitted into any selectable area or group of an installation First the desired areas groups have to be selected either using the selection keys selective gong or with the ALL key general gong Pressing the GONG key releases the gong signal While the gong signal is being transmitted the GONG LED lights continuously or blinks also refer to indications The gong s priority can be set to 6 or 7 Therefore it has priority over announcements from any paging station except for the directing terminal priority 10 Pressing the STOP key cancels the transmission of a gong signal DPC 4000 Revision 1 1 25 PROMATRIX System Text Message A text message recorded on the optional message module or on an external recording playback device can be transmitted into any selectable area or group of the entire installation First the desired areas groups have to be selected either using selection keys or with the ALL key Pressing the TEXT key starts the reproduction of a prerecorded message that had been assigned during the configuration While the text message is being transmitted the TEXT LED lights steadily or blinks also refer to indications The priority for text messages can be set to values between 2 and 8 Pressing the STOP key cancels the transmission of a text message General Alarm A general alarm signal is always transmitted to all lines of an installation Pressing the covered ALARM
409. raph 9 4 The low impedance monitor output is electronically balanced Therefore the connected cables may be up to approx 200 m in length The PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 see PROMATRIX handbook offers connection for monitor amplifiers which can be set to input monitoring or output monitoring for the desired amplifier channel 6 Integrated Remote Module The integrated remote module of the power amplifier DPA 4411 provides the following functions input levels of INPUT 1 to INPUT 4 can be set via programmable audio level controls reading level values of the audio level controls e setting level offsets 1 to 4 via virtual controllers mute function 1 to 4 via level controls 26 mains operation remote control ON OFF battery operation remote control ON OFF monitoring and fault message transmission via the PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 in accordance to DIN EN 60849 standard thermal overload of the mains transformer thermal overload of power output stages 1 to 4 monitoring of the functioning of the power output stages 1 to 4 via pilot tone signal optional only with NRS 90206 installed ground fault detection for loudspeaker lines 1 to 4 optional only with NRS 90207 installed measuring of input and output level peaks 1 to 4 measuring of output voltages levels of the power outputs 1 to 4 measuring of output currents of the power outputs 1 to 4 monitoring of connected loads 1 to 4 via current vol
410. rays as this might damage the finish and moreover could cause hazard fire 3 Before the first operation These power amplifiers are designed to be operated with different input modules The general input module NRS 90225 is meant for all conventional applications It allows to remotely start the amplifiers via control lines monitor their operation by use of the incorporated fault relay and monitor the transmitted audio signals through the monitor output Using the remote control module NRS 90222 the amplifiers are connected to the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 via RS 485 remote interface providing complete remote operation and surveillance The desired input module has to be inserted into the module shaft on the rear of the power amplifier It has to be tightened using the two locking screws B refer also to the paragraphs 8 1 and 8 2 3 4 Mains operation For normal AC mains operation the included mains cord has to be connected to a 230V or 115V 50 60Hz wall outlet On the appliance itself the cord has to be connected to the 3 pole mains socket 10 Caution The appliance is factory preset to 230V AC Switching to 115V AC is accomplished using the voltage selector 12 DPA 4120 For 115V AC operation the mains fuse 11 has to be replaced by a slow blowing 4 ampere type labeled T4A see also paragraph 11 1 DPA 4140 For 115V AC operation the mains fuse 11 has to be replaced by a slow blowing 8 ampere type labeled T8A see als
411. rce Installation Note Mounting the module and establishing the connections are solely admissible when performed in accordance to VDE 0100 and EN 60065 regulations DCS 409 control relay module printed board assemblies need to be grounded at their fixing points e g using a metal bolt Specifications Description DCS 409 control relay module Operating voltage 24 V DC 10 30 Operating current relay dropped 5 2mA 7 8 mA Operating current relay dropped at 24 V 5 5 mA Operating current all relays pulled 55 mA 80 mA Operating current all relays pulled at 24 V 60 Relay contacts Contact components 2 changers 2 SPDT Contact material AgPd 10u Au Contact load ohmic load 1A 24V DC Contact current maximum 2A Operating temperature range 5 40 Dimensions W x x D 160 x 17 x 100 mm Weight 155g PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 59 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Dimensions of the DCS 409 module Size in mm Module height 17 mm The distance between the soldered surface and an electrical conductive mounting base has to be at least 5 mm Maximally 12 DCS 408 DCS 409 modules can be eI cascaded Using the insertion bridge CN3 select the y A2 ph connection of the supply voltage CN1 CN15 4 Output 1 14 B gt 6 X ie ke
412. rear is only meant for maintenance Remotel switching off the device is not possible when the POWER switch is engaged Both amplifiers the DPA 4120 and the DPA 4140 employ power on switching delays of approximately 3 sec After this time the green READY indicator lights and the READY fault message relay picks up when no error is being detected see also paragraph 6 2 3 2 Battery operation 24V DC The amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 use the mains or alternatively an external 24V battery as power source Switching to battery is performed via integrated relays The battery has to be connected on the rear of the amplifiers 20 using insulated 6 3x0 8 mm AMP flat plug connectors The amplifiers are protected against polarity mismatch Each the positive and negative conductors are internally protected by fuses located on the printed board assembly 85270 DPA 4120 respectively 85268 DPA 4140 see also paragraph 11 figure 10 and 11 The cable used for battery connection has to be at least 1 5 mm in diameter DPA 4120 respectively 2 5 mm DPA 4140 Using these diameters the cable length for the one way distance should not exceed 4 0 m max voltage drop 1V Caution The DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 are to be operated only using ungrounded batteries or batteries with grounded negative pole Operation with grounded positive pole is not permissible 4 INPUT The electronically balanced INPUT 14 providing a sensitivity of 775mV O
413. ree universal location lead batteries with grid plates and fixed electrolyte suitable for cycle operation continuous battery power supply and trickle charge Exhaustive discharge protection relay controlled by DEM 313 charger Charging input and battery outputs via AMP flat pin terminals 6 3 x 0 8 mm charging input and all battery outputs fused Temperature tracking of charging voltage at standby charge depending on the battery temperature with integrated temperature sensor Batteries with VdS registration and UL recognition The technical specifications comply with the requirements issued by the Leistungsgemeinschaft Beschallungstechnik pertaining to the professional association for audio and video technology in the ZVEI 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 69 Oe SEM Table of Contents Emergency power supply of alarm apparatus Commissioning the battery module Battery module DEM 316 DEM 317 Battery module DEM 317 A and DEM 317 B Fusing the inputs and outputs BATTERY CONTROL connection Connection for battery charging Notes for the user Use of the battery is to be avoided in the following locations Regulations for battery use Storage and additional charging Transport Battery life Battery recycling Registrations and Standards Testing and inspecting alarm devices Explanation of terms Specifications Battery Modules DEM 316 DEM 317 Block Diagram 1 Emergency power
414. relay via the REMOTE CONTROL connector 16 When using the REMOTE MODULE NRS 90222 error occurrence is monitored and output by the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 for further details please refer to the PROMATRIX handbook The installation has to be performed as follows see figure 8 and or figure 9 Caution Before opening the appliance make sure to disconnect the mains and or battery power source To open the appliance the top panel has to be removed The extension kit NRS 90224 has to be inserted with its component side to the left from the front view until it clicks in place Re install the top plate of the enclosure NRS 90 224 S 406 36 S 40 B 411 NRS 90224 98412 1 EET Y T m ar BH 9416 t ra LE wm om OR 25 pen 1409 Utm ct xd MM poon co co M My TO POLER 50 i C tot Te Gals Le Cote ica Y em RM 4 5 82 unser S 2 5 3E gren 9 Os oo 437 figure 8 printed board assembly 84187 in the DPA 4120 showing the NRS 90224 pilot tone amp ground fault surveillance and the bridges B411 and S405 S406 for switching the output voltage inserted 37 NRS 90 224 POUER OUTPUT E RELAY a 2 a 4 ans
415. remote switching of the battery supply of power amplifiers emergency power supply via battery input connector switched mains output max 1 A delayed control output for the release of alarm gong and summing modules direct output 24 V max 4 12 switched 24 V output for the connection of modules continuous emergency power supply via external battery module output for the connection of modules that need persistent power supply e g DPM 4000 4001 max 4A 12A output for power fail recognition CONTENTS Performance Features 11 Important Safety Instructions 13 Front VIEW u ee me 14 Hear VIEW an 14 Utilization anne 15 First Operation 15 FUNCIONS ioner re VE E 15 Switching The Mains 17 Remote Control 18 Specifications 19 Block Diagram 30 12 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an CAUTION equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS AP
416. ren interrupted by two 8 DMM 5dB breaks 5 l2sec siren 330 420 Hz break 30 seconds and 9 Count 0003 repeating of the signal sequence total duration 150 sec the 10 Start A27 utilized alarm preset is A 27 12 sec siren Afterwards the DMM 1 wt Audio 4650 returns to the stand by mode 12 Dly 012 0s 13 wt Delay 14 if Count 15 Jump 17 16 Jump 10 17 Dly 006 0s 18 wt Delay 19 Count 0003 20 Dly 012 0s 21 wt Delay 22 Start A27 23 wt Audio 24 if Count 25 End 26 Jump 20 27 End 42 Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger 5 34 gen emgc 95 off Step Command Parameter Ship alarm General Emergency Eo oui uu 46 Description Turns the sound reinforcemnet system s power on 2 M mAT High relay A1 and waits for acknowledgment input A1 system Out ready When the system is ready the output B4 music program 4 Out B2 set off is opened and B2 B3 mandatory reception E D gets closed 5 Out B3 set Closing the signaling contact alarm signal running swit 6 Out A3 set ches the audio controls to the alarm signal s priority The signal 7 Sum off sequence is defined as follows 7 packages 1 5 sec 800 Hz tone 8 DMM 5dB with 1 5 sec break A30 followed by a 4 5 sec tone with 1 5 sec 9 Start A 30 break A31 The sequence runs continuously until it is stopped 10 wt Audio by
417. ressed What do I have to do when the green POWER LED on the front panel blinks The flashing LED is caused by the DMM 4650 s self test routine The LED blinks whenever an error is being detected Detailed information on the cause of the error are only available to the service provider user 3 see also on page 29 Enter the user 3 s password in the self test menu write down the displayed error messages and using the soft key quit you have to delete all errors one by one If the LED starts blinking again this shows that the error is still present Look for the cause that generates the problem and try to solve it otherwise send the appliance to the manufacturer for servicing 48 Question Solution Question Solution How do I replace a 4 tone gong signal by a 3 tone gong In accordance to the factory presets the trigger is connected to the control input B3 and it should stay that way Performing the following changes is only possible for user 3 The sequence S 25 which initiates the 4 tone gong signal G 20 is being started using the input B3 The selected 4 tone gong signal G 20 has to be changed to the 3 tone gong signal G21 by altering line 9 of sequence S 25 see also on page 39 After selecting an unused user program memory number e g S 05 the displayed question store has to be answered with yes to store the new settings Select the trigger B3 in the trigger menu and change the start sequence from S 25 t
418. ring ground fault either signals that one of the cables is damaged which most likely point towards a total line interruption in the near future or that connections have been carried out erroneously which may lead to malfunctioning of the entire system The fault message GROUND FAULT 6 is also maintained with very short 55 sec ground faults as long as the amplifier is powered on or a loaded battery is connected The fault message is displayed via the red GROUND FAULT indicator 6 In case of an inserted INPUT MODULE NRS 90225 it is also outputted as collective fault message with the floating contact of the READY fault message relay via the REMOTE CONTROL connector 16 When using the REMOTE MODULE NRS 90222 error occurrence is monitored and output by the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 for further details please refer to the PROMATRIX handbook The installation has to be performed as follows see figure 8 and or figure 9 Caution Before opening the appliance make sure to disconnect the mains and or battery power source To open the appliance the top panel has to be removed The extension kit NRS 90224 has to be inserted with its component side to the left from the front view until it clicks in place Re install the top plate of the enclosure NRS 90 224 S 406 36 S 40 B 411 NRS 90224 98412 1 EET Y T m ar
419. rip but utilization is not recommended because of the negative correlation AUDIO TRANSFORMER OUTPUTS B LOW IMPEDANCE A 100V KU 100V 1200W 8 B DUAL A 600W 49 565555555558 EL 70 O DIRECT OUTPUTS 0 7 DIRECT OUTPUTS 0 701 _ OUTPUTS NN 117 BRIDGED 50V figure output connection in 50 V bridged mode operation Caution The bridging cable has to be at least 1 5 mm in diameter Driving 4 ohms loads at the direct output is not admissible in bridged mode operation For details on nominal load impedance and nominal loads of the individual outputs in bridged mode operation please refer to the specifications in the appendix Also in bridged mode the nominal load impedance is not to be declined 23 CIRCUIT 1 TO CHASSIS SWITCH a GROUNDED UNGROUNDED gt POWER aii Esa 24V ON OV OFF CHA CHB sena O PROTECT Q POWER GROUND Lift Switch The ground lift switch helps is a perfect means for eliminating possible ground noise loops In case the power amplifier is operated together with other equipment inside of a rack shelf system the switch should be set to its GROUNDED position When using the power amplifier together with other equipment that operates on different ground potentials the switch should be set to UNGROUNDED Power On And Remote Control When the power amplifier i
420. rol inputs IN 1 8 are capable of handling voltages of either polarity between 31 V and 31 V for voltages between 0 and 5 V the inputs are not active low for voltages between 10 V and 31 V the inputs are active high The control inputs can ignite switching functions or macros either during a change of state or in any stationary state This offers the possibility to monitor line idling currents e g in fire alert system installations Specifications Specifications connections 2 x XLRM type connectors connections 4 x RJ 45 sockets outputs 2 electronically balanced logic inputs 8 floating via opto coupler transformers are optionally bi polar available voltage when the input is UIN 5V nominal output level 0 dBu 775 mV or 6 dBu 1 55 LOW V switched via jumper voltage when the input is UIN gt 10V output impedance 115 W HIGH frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB maximum input voltage UIN max x 81V dynamic range gt 97 dB A weighted logic outputs 7 floating via relay contacts SIN ratio gt 109 dB A weighted contact capacity 1A 24 V DC distortion 0 005 96 slave clock output pole change impulse D A conversion 20 bit linear Sigma Delta turning impulse power consumption 1 5W output voltage 24 V DC dimensions WxHxD 37 5 x 81 x 247 mm maximum output current 500 mA electronically weight 1600 p
421. rotected against overload power consumption 3 2W dimensions WxHxD 37 5 x 81 x 247 mm weight 195g Available Accessories Ordering Information Model Cat No Description Model Cat No Description NRS90227 121679 Output Transformer Line Balanced NRS90215 121665 2 Input Paging Station Module Line Balanced Input Transformer DPC me NRS90208 121641 1 pc required per channel NRS90216 121666 Input Module Mic Line 2 x Aux NRS90233 121682 Input Transformer Mic Line NRS90217 121667 Input Module Mic Line NRS90218 121668 2 Channel Output Line Module NRS90228 121680 Input Module 2 Channel Aux ono Connectors RCA Phono C tors NRS90234 121736 Input Module Combination Mic Line Paging Console Block Diagrams ELECTRONIC 3 l PRORA LE 4U24 m e l 12V sae gt m 12V lt Ln 1 24V So le gt gt v gt INTERNAL MONITOR a PILOT MCLK PILOTA A lt BCLK 2 CHANNEL w DIN 2 4 SPI gt ipa CONTROL Dn lt 1 5 24V RS 485 L AUDIO pec T l gt NRS 90208 NRS90215 Block Diaqram
422. rotection e Acknowledgement signals for O K faulty entry busy outgoing text message etc e Automatic hang up to specify the duration of announcements via internal Dip switches e Trimmer on the front panel for setting the audio signal level e Programming via PC Designer Software equivalent to DPC 4000 paging consoles e Configuration possibility for world telephone standards country specific settings DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 2 Controls and Connections DYNACORD DTI 2000 DIGITAL TELEPHONE INTERFACE SEIzE ODROP 15 12 9 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 15 12 9 6 3 6 9 12 DROP Oseize A BED TO PAGING MANAGER TO TELEPHONE POWER front view 1 POWER indicator The POWER LED lights when the DTI 2000 receives power input from the supplied power supply unit which allows worldwide connection and use because it accepts input voltages between 85V AC and 250V AC 2 SEIZE DROP key SELECT This key allows manually accepting or cancelling phone calls and is mostly used for testing When an incoming phone call is present ringing pressing the SEIZE DROP key establishes the connection picks up Pressing the SEIZE DROP key again cancels hangs up a live connection Since the DTI 2000 automatically picks up any incoming call respectively automatically hangs
423. rrors the flashing gets faster and the fault relay drops At the same time the audio input is connected directly to the output via the bypass relay This menu allows to locate the cause for a device break down Operation menu self test Confirming the menu selection self test with the soft key ok displays an error number Er xx the amount and a scrolling text in the lower line on the display Using the cursor keys lets you select individual error numbers The actual meaning of these numbers is explained in the table on page 47 The number shows how often a specific error has occurred The scrolling text records the first and last occurence of the error see setting clock The EXIT key terminates this menu return to the prior menu level Note Error no 1 only counts the switching on and off of the DMM 4650 but does not lead to an external error display Power On Reset In case that error no 14 leads to the blinking of the green POWER LED the data of one or more messages has been corrupted The corresponding message s is are marked with an asterisk see also page 14 29 CONNECTIONS CONTROL INPUTS AND CONTROL OUTPUTS PORTS A D General Operation see page 21 PORTS C D are optional Each of the 4 ports A B C D have 4 inputs and 4 outputs and a power source for supplying floating control keys or contacts The inputs and outputs are galvanic insulated from the DMM 4650 a
424. rs and if in DCF 77 mode automatically switches between daylight saving time and standard time The system clock provides the possibility to control up to 40 external slave clocks For this purpose the DPM 4000 employs a special short circuit proof output for pole changing impulses Slave clocks are automatically re synchronized whenever a time difference to the system clock is detected like for instance in cases of power outage or when time values were entered manually It is possible to activate pre set functions like break gong signals background music remotely controlled gates switch lights ON OFF etc when using system clock and calendar function together All the functions mentioned before can be programmed for specific days but also hourly daily weekly monthly and yearly activation is possible Up to 500 time controlled events can be programmed 3 8 Monitoring The PROANNOUNCE manager DPM 4000 embodies a monitor amplifier with headphones speaker output The integrated logic switching circuit provides the opportunity to listen to the signals of any internal input and output Assigning external sound sources to the monitor bus is possible as well This additionally allows monitoring amplifier outputs or pre listen to the contents of external voice message memories and other audio devices The remote control s wiring already includes all the cabling necessary for the pre post listen feature when using remote controlled amplifiers
425. rs are HP LaserJet 6P HP LaserJet 5 HP LaserJet Il The recommended paper thickness is between 120 g m2 and 200 g m2 Also supplied with this handbook are prepared label strips in German English and French as well as blank strips which only have to be cut out You can label the empty strips in handwriting or by using adhesive rub on letters 24 Revision 1 1 DPC 4000 PROMATRIX System Operation This chapter explains all functions that are available in general operation mode Selective Call The user can launch calls or announcements into freely selectable areas or groups Pressing a single or several selection keys defines the areas or groups that a call is launched into The individual corresponding LED s will light By pressing the key of an already pre selected line once again deactivates that line and the corresponding LED goes out After you have made your selection pressing the TALK button ignites the actual call Prior to that you can check via the BUSY LED whether all lines and the paging station input are actually free If single lines or the terminal input are busy with lower priority transmissions the BUSY LED will blink slowly Whilst announcements are possible they will interrupt any other event that is momentarily transmitted If single lines or the terminal input are busy with higher priority signals the BUSY LED will vastly blink and the calling attempt is being ignored also refer to the description of indicators T
426. ry 1420 ohms at 20 13 4 NRS 90227 output transformer for floating balanced monitor output frequency response 40 Hz 20 kHz nominal load impedance 2 600 ohms idling ration 1 1 winding resistance primary 18 ohms at 20 winding resistance secondary 18 ohms at 20 13 5 90224 pilot tone amp ground fault surveillance 13 5 1 pilot tone surveillance pilot tone frequency 19 kHz 1 error recognition threshold lt 12 mV fault message output via NRS 90225 collective fault message via READY relay fault message output via NRS 90222 PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 13 5 2 ground fault surveillance input loudspeaker line 4 ohms 50V 70V 100V fault message output via NRS 90225 collective fault message via READY relay fault message output via NRS 90222 PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 disruptive strength 1000 Veff error recognition threshold lt 50 k ohms 45 DYNACORD PRO MATRIX SYSTEM POWER AMPLIFIER DPA 4120 DPA 4140 OWNER S MANUAL DYNACORD DPA 4140 400 WATTS POWER AMPLIFIER PRO _AT X E Sy S Performance Features Power amplifier with 200 W or 400 W output power according to the IEC 283 3 standard within a 19 cabinet 3 HU providing the following functions supported are 115 230V AC mains as well as 24V DC emergency power source power amplifiers DPA 4120 providing 200 W or DPA 4140 providing 400 W output power idling and short circuit protection output transformer for balanced floating
427. s in both output channels providing two VCA control inputs A B for remotely controlling the volume setting via external potentiometer and also controllable via serial interface PC DPM 4000 media control or via control contacts In addition there shall be remote control functionality via external contacts eight independently configurable control inputs for ducking MIC LINE 1 and 2 preset switching routing volume switching mute Available Accessories Model Catalog No Description NRS90227 121679 Output xformer NRS90233 121682 Input xformer NRS90256 121785 RS435 interface NRS90258 121790 PCinterface Ordering Information Model Catalog No Description DRM4000 121784 8 2 Mixer Router pao 1 f m m 2 T 5 29 m 32 q s 4 f 20 T m 32 om m 29 zu s 328 75 E USA and Canada Only For customer orders contact Customer Service at 800 392 3497 Fax 800 955 6831 DYNACORD PRO ANNOUNCE S Y S T E amp E Key Features 100 zones available e Upto 20 calling groups e Selection of multiple zones or groups for announcements e Prerecorded message triggering message playback e Special function triggering macros e Programmable priority e Two level password protection e Acknowledgement signals e Automatic hang up e Front panel audio level control General Description The DTI 2000 is a microprocessor c
428. s in working condition qualified personnel must carry out inspections and servicing regularly Inspections must be carried out at least once every 3 months at approximately equal intervals to comply with DIN VDE 0833 part 1 Servicing must be carried out at least once per year in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions The annual services may be linked with the quarterly inspections if so desired meaning that all sections of the apparatus are inspected within one year For the battery of an alarm device this means quarterly tests and annual malfunction simulations of the operating duration with the consumers We recommend carrying out the battery capacity test in accordance with DIN 43 539 part 1 whereby the battery manufacturer s instructions are to be observed Please see section 3 2 for instructions on how to treat maintenance free lead accus 7 Explanation of terms Continuous battery power supply In this mode the battery is constantly kept in full charge It only gives off current if the DC source supplied by the mains fails Nominal capacity The nominal capacity is the value in ampere hours for a 20 hour even uninterrupted discharge with 120 up to the discharge voltage of 1 75 V cell at a temperature of 22 Capacity The capacity of a battery is the amount of electricity which can be extracted under the conditions in question It depends on the discharge current the discharge voltage and the tempera
429. s operated via power remote start standard operation an external 24 V power source has to be connected to the POWER REMOTE terminal strip and the mains switch has to be set to its OFF posi tion When correctly connected and with a present supply voltage the power amplifier is operational The fans run for approximately 2 seconds and the POWER ON LED on the front panel lights The mains switch POWER on the rear of the appliance bridges the mains relay It is meant for service purposes only This allows to operate the power amplifier without the presence of an external 24 V power source The current consumption at the POWER REMOTE input is approximately 25 mA Limit Indicator The indicator lights whenever the integrated limiter is activated While short blinking means no problem the continuously lit LED indicates thatthe volume level needs to be reduced to prevent the connected loudspeaker systems from being damaged by overload The audio limiters are capable of controlling overdrive levels of up to 20 dB Most other power amplifiers without integrated limiters begin to clip genera ting nasty distortion that not only attacks your ears but also lead to damaging the connected loudspeaker systems by overload The limiters are activated only in case of the occurrence of non linear conditions within the power amplifier e g signal clipping at the operation voltage limit The limiters do not affect the power amplifier s overall dynamic range Si
430. s with rring mains failur In a standard application with mains and emergency battery supply the outputs SWITCHED OUT and MODULES OUT are switched to battery supply when a mains failure occurs Despite POWER FAIL OUT signals the loss of mains power and the connected power amplifiers are switched from mains supply to battery supply via the outputs MAINS REMOTE ON and BATTERY REMOTE ON When the mains returns these functions are reversed after a delay of approximately 600 ms In case the power is gone for a longer period of time the battery serves as emergency power supply until the cut off voltage of 21 V is reached When declining that threshold for the first time all outputs are being switched off After the mains being present and stable again the outputs are switched on again This prevents over discharging the battery DYNACORD PROMATRIX SYSTEM 4 Mains Voltage Selection only to be carried out by a qualified service technician After adjusting the mains voltage operating the DPP 4004 4012 power supplies with 115 V is also possible The adjustment has to be carried out before the operation Remove the cover plate Insert the flat wire bridge on the printed board assembly 86245 into the 115V position red conductor With the DPP 4004 additional switching of a switch mode power supply is necessary The correspondent switch is located inside the switch mode power supply see yellow label Remove the front panel 4 screws Us
431. screwdriver mains remote ON OFF battery remote ON OFF control of the D and E relays fault messages via the READY relay contact thermal overload of the mains transformer thermal overload of the power amplification stage ground fault optional only with installed NRS 90224 pilot tone signal optional only with installed NRS 90224 MONITOR output electronically balanced input transformer for floating balanced input optional Output transformer for floating balanced monitor output optional The input module is meant to be used with the power amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 The module allows to control and monitor the operation of the power amplifiers using conventional equipment or with reservations by the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 Caution Before installing the input module NRS 90225 you have to unplug the mains connector as well as a presumably connected battery cord Before installing the input module it is necessary to remove the two locking screws B on the rear panel of the appliance For installation the printed board assembly first has to be inserted into the guiding rails After carefully pushing the module in it has to be locked by using the two screws mentioned before 32 Functioning changes in the models DPA 4120 starting with serial numbers 100 11 and DPA 4140 starting with serial numbers 100 11 in association with the input module NRS 90225 To achieve reliable attenuation of switchin
432. sembly and set the corresponding jumper s according to the following table Refer to the diagram below the table for an example of the PRE POST jumper settings of AUX1 R Input Channel Jumpers MIC LINE 1 S3A MIC LINE 2 S3B MIC LINE 3 S3C MIC LINE 4 S3D AUX1 L SIE R S2E AUX2 L S1F S2F AUX3 L S1G S2G AUX4 L S1H R S2H PRE POST POST 1 S2E 1 O6 S2E AUX1 R PRE AUX1 R POST 9 2 INTERNAL SETTINGS 9 1 3 AUX Sensitivity Selection If necessary changing the sensitivity of the AUX input channels from the factory pre set of 4 dBu 1 23 V to 6 dBu 0 39 V is possible via Cut amp Solder bridges This may be desirable when using low level signal sources e g older open reel tape decks In those cases the control range of the channel control resulting from the factory setting may not be sufficient because the channel control is already set to its maximum clockwise position and the outputted signal still is not loud enough Refer to the following table for selecting the corresponding Cut amp Solder bridge of the AUX channel for which you want to change the sensitivity setting to 6 dBu Referto the diagram on page 9 1 overview jumpers and Cut amp Solder bridges to locate the bridge on the printed board assembly Use a low power soldering iron to close the corresponding Cut amp Solder bridge Refer to the diagram below the following
433. separately onto the monitor bus and you can listen to the signal via headphones or loudspeaker either which is being connected to the monitor output Automatic pilot tone surveillance of the entire input stage is integrated as well as well Specifications Connections 1 x XLRF type 4 x RCA type connectors Specifications connections 2 x XLRF type connectors audio inputs 2 x electronically balanced nominal input level MIC 54 dBu 14 dBu 1 5 mV 155 mV LINE 24 dBu 16 dBu 50 mV 25V max input level MIC 5 dBu 1 4V Input A 2 x AUX unbalanced internally in limiter operation LINE 30 dBu 25V summed input impedance MIC 3 6 kW nominal input level 10 dBu 12 dBu 250 mV 3 V LINE 10 kW max input level 12dBu 3V Input balancing gt 30 dB input impedance 10 kw phantom power 24V 20 mA switched via jumper input B MIC LINE electronically balanced frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 5 dB nominal input level MIC 54 dBu 14 dBu 1 5 mV S N ratio gt 95 dB A weighted 155 mV Distortion lt 0 01 96 LINE 24 dBu 16 dBu 50 mV A D conversion 18 bit linear Sigma Delta SV phantom power 24V 20 mA switched via jumper max input level MIC 5 dBu 1 4V power consumption 3W im limiter operation LINE 30 dBu 25V dimensions Wx Hx 37 5 x 81 x 252 mm input impedance 3 6 kW LINE 10
434. set selective alarm pre programmed Note The launch of an alarm does not depend on a paging console s priority setting it had been activated from Launching an alarm is possible from any microphone terminal at any time even when the system is in stand by mode A running alarm is optically and occasionally also acoustically indicated at every paging station Canceling Signals Pressing the STOP key cancels alarms gong signals and text message transmissions Events can only be terminated at the paging station they were launched from with the exception of the directing terminal paging console with the highest priority possible 10 Through the directing station it is possible to cancel any signal in progress 5 36 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS System ON OFF The ON key switches a PROANNOUNCE system ON or OFF Mostly it is not intended that any paging station be provided with the possibility to do so Thus this function can be programmed via PC configuration When the system is in stand by mode the ON LED is off Pressing the ON key turns the PROANNOUNCE system s power on which can take up to 10 seconds while the ON LED is blinking Once the system is ready for operation the ON LED lights continuously which also applies for all paging stations of the entire installation To switch the system OFF you have to press the ON key for approximately 1 second This is to prevent inadvertently turning off
435. sets They can be modified as need arises and stored as user presets Example of a sequence set output lamp indicator audio control SUM off audio control DMM 3 dB wait for input release after release start alarm delay 10 sec alarm duration end This sequence is entered line by line with special commands list page 25 and including name and priority stored as a preset If an appliance uses unaltered functions on a regular basis it is also possible to save these sequences via the RS 232 interface OPERATING THE DMM 4650 General All adjustments carried out at the appliance remain in memory even if the appliance is not connected to a power source EPROM Pressing the EXIT key lets you step back and forth through the levels of the operation menu tree page 11 The stand by mode is entered by pressing the EXIT key when in the main menu If no key is pressed within a period longer than 5 minutes the appliance enters the stand by mode automatically except during recording and restore Stand by When the DMM 4650 is connected to a power source the green POWER LED lights the display is dimmed and the relay outputs are set to their pre programmed states according to the system s configuration This stand by status is remained until a control input starts a sequence The display shows the sequence s name and number for the duration of the sequence After completion of the sequence the DMM 4650 re enters
436. shipped these keys are factory pre set as area selection keys where key 1 area 1 key 2 area2 key area n ALL key with LED This key allows the selection of all programmed areas at once for the transmission of messages gong or alarm signals vocal messages or to assign programs One time pressing selects all areas the corresponding LED s and the ALL LED are lit Subsequent pressing cancels the selection CANCEL key This key has different functions depending on the operation or mode e g canceling the call pattern or canceling a program assignment Which function is carried out at times is explained in detail in the paragraph OPERATION GONG key ESC with LED Pressing this key starts a gong signal which is being transmitted into pre selected areas or groups The GONG LED is lit or blinks during the transmission of a gong signal What kind of chime signal is being transmitted is defined during the configuration procedure Pressing the STOP key cancels the reproduction of the gong signal While being in set up mode this key is used to return to normal user mode ESCAPE leaving the set up mode Revision 1 1 DPC 4000 10 11 PROMATRIX System TEXT key v with LED Pressing this key starts a prerecorded message optional voice reproduction which is transmitted into the pre selected areas or groups The TEXT LED is lit or blinks during the transmission of a prerecorded message The desired text message seque
437. siest accomplished by modifying an existing possibly similar gong user or factory preset and storing it under a new number together with its new title and priority Operation menu gong Confirming the menu selection gong with the soft key ok the cursor keys lt gt allow selecting the following sub menus Load Confirming load with the soft key ok Gxx Title the soft keys yes no appear on the display Using the cursor keys the gong number xx is modified while the corresponding name is being displayed lets you load the selected gong into memory and modification is performed in the editor menu Editor The editor menu allows modification of gong sequences envelopes repetition amounts and several other parameters see parameter listing Testing the gong s sound properties is possible by starting the gong sequence using the PLAY STOP key The audio signal is presented at the pre listen outputs Parameter modifications are audible after performing a restart Pressing the RECORD key stops the gong After pressing the EXIT key previous menu level the question store yes no appears on the display Acknowledging this question lets you save your new settings in a user preset Title Confirming Title with the soft key ok the name of the currently loaded gong sequence appears on the display Using the cursor keys you are able to enter a new name that consists of up to 8 characters
438. sport centers schools churches hotels hospitals shopping malls and super markets cruise ships and other similar applications 2 Installation When installing the amplifiers it is important to assure that for ventilation reasons the front to rear air circulation is guaranteed for details on 19 case or 19 shelf installation please refer to paragraph 9 To maintain EMC it is necessary that all input output and control lines except for the power cords are shielded Within metal housings or closed rack shelf systems unshielded output and control cabling is allowable Shielding is accomplished by connecting the individual cable screens to the enclosure or rack shelf ground potential The amplifier has to be protected from water drops or splashes direct sunlight high ambient temperatures and the direct radiation of heat sources high humidity and moisture heavy dust massive vibrations Moving the amplifier from a cold into a warm environment can result in the occurrence of condensation on inner parts Operating the appliance is only permissible after it has accommodated to the altered temperature approximately after one hour Should it happen that foreign solid parts or liquids inadvertently intrude the enclosure unplug the device from the power source and have it checked by a DYNACORD service center before using it again Cleaning the appliance should not be performed using chemical solvents or sp
439. starting with serial numbers 100 11 and DPA 4140 starting with serial numbers 100 11 in association with the input module NRS 90225 To achieve reliable attenuation of switching noise knacks the monitor output stays muted as long as the READY relay is not pulled Because of circuit design reasons this causes that the monitor output is also muted even when a ground fault appears at the main output 5 6 REMOTE CONTROL connector only NRS 90225 The 15 pole sub D REMOTE CONTROL pin connector strip 16 provides several different control in outputs Ground of the stand by power supply negative pole grounded POWER REMOTE via contact to ground potential BATTERY REMOTE via contact to ground potential MONITOR output electronically balanced READY message with floating contact Obligatory reception relay D RELAY via contact to ground potential Single call E RELAY via contact to ground potential 2 L STANDBY GROUND 3 POWER REMOTE 4 BATTERY REMOTE 5 D RELAY REMOTE CONTROL 6 E RELAY 7 8 5 9 0 READY MONITOR MONITOR figure 4 connections on the REMOTE CONTROL pin connector strip 6 Indicators 30 6 1 STANDBY indicator When the appliance is correctly connected and mains and or battery power is present the green STANDBY indicator 4 will light 6 2 READY indicator Both amplifiers the DPA 4120 and the DPA 4140 employ power on switching delays of approximately 3 sec to effecti
440. supply of alarm devices Alarm devices require 2 independent energy sources both of which must be able to power the alarm device alone One of the energy sources must be the general mains supply or a similar network in non stop operation The other must be part of the apparatus e g a battery or an equivalent network fused separately If the mains power supply is interrupted the second source of energy must guarantee constant non stop operation automatically and without interruption If the energy source belonging to the alarm device consists of a battery the user must ensure that the batteries used are suitable for stationary and floating operation The power supply for alarm devices must not be used to supply other apparatus or parts However electrical equipment which serves to pass on messages may also be powered by the said source An automatic charging device is required to charge and maintain the battery It must be able to charge a battery which is discharged to its discharge voltage up to 8096 max of its rated capacity within 24 hours The battery capacity must be sufficient to guarantee the fixed alarm duration at the end of the stored energy time When selecting new batteries the user should make sure that their capacity is sufficient to compensate the capacity loss due to natural ageing of the batteries during the prescribed service life 2 Commissioning the battery module 2 1 Battery module DEM 316 DEM 317 The following points must be
441. t all inputs at 24V 60 mA 83 mA Input level Voltage with the input being LOW Un lt 5V Voltage with the input being High Un gt 10V Input current at 24 V 4 8 mA Maximum input voltage UIN max 31 V Power source 24V CN6 Maximum output current 90 mA Operating temperature range 5 C 40 C Dimensions W x H x D 160 x 17 x 100 mm Weight 110g PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 61 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS DCS 412 Maximally 5 DCS 412 modules can be cascaded 160 Using the insertion bridge CN9 select the connection of the supply voltage CN8 CN10 Dimensions of the DCS 412 module Size in mm Module height 17 mm The distance between the soldered surface and an electrical conductive mounting base has to be at least 5 mm Mounting insulators 942 max 2 7 5 100 BLOCK DIAGRAM DCS 412 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 4 6 DCS 416 ANALOG INPUT OUTPUT MODULE The module can be mounted on the rear of PA system rack shelves or inside of suitable distribution boxes For once it serves for connecting analog control lines and potentiometers with their levels being utilized within the PROANNOUNCE system installation to control volume controls or other continuous p
442. t case the amplifier inputs have to be paralleled and the outputs are connected in series For the connection of inputs please refer to paragraph 4 For the connection of the loudspeaker network refer to diagram 5 Coupling is possible under the following restrictions only identical amplifiers or power amps can be connected Since doubling the output voltage comes along with serial connection it is necessary to switch the outputs of both amplifiers to 50 V see also paragraph 8 resulting again in an overall output voltage of 100 V In this case the speaker chain s minimum load impedance is 50 ohms 50 nF The input level controls of the corresponding channels of the DPA 4411 have to be set to equal values refer also to the PROMATRIX handbook This results in the following output combinations with a single DPA 4411 4x100W or 2x100W 1x200W or 2x200W OUTCFG TYPE 1 DUTCFG 2 OUTCFG 3 OUTCFG TYPE 4 OUTCFG TYPE 5 4x100N 200W 2x100W 100W 200W 100W 2x100W 200N 2x200W NOTE 1 FOR 200W OUTPUT ONLY 100V ALLOWED SEE OWNER S MANUAL diagram 5 Possible output configuration of the DPA 4411 5 5 MONITOR output The MONITOR output of the DPA 4411 is configured as monitor bus It gets connected to thePROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 via the serial port REMOTE CONTROL 13 If a floating output is needed the output is prepared for retrofitting a monitor output transformer In this case the extension NRS 90227 is necessary see parag
443. t on the rear panel of the DTI 2000 Turn the plug s safety lock clockwise to establish a securely locked connection Afterwards connect the supplied mains cord to the power supply unit before inserting the mains plug into the mains wall outlet The DTI 2000 is immediately operational upon establishing accurate connection 5 Adjusting the Audio Level Adjusting the level of the audio signal that is transmitted to the DPM 4000 System Manager is possible via the LEVEL TO PAGING MANAGER trimmer Doing so use a small flat screwdriver to first set the trimmer to its centre position Call the DTI 2000 and speak with a normal voice into the receiver while adjusting the audio signal level for best transmission quality The level meter should not indicate any signals in the red area The TO TELEPHONE indicator and the corresponding control are not currently used DTI 2000 Manual e EDITED doc 8 6 Country settings Different countries and regions have different telephone standards which may differ in e g signal level and dial tones The DTI 2000 can be and should be configured to meet those individual requirements Not doing so can result in faulty operation of the DTI 2000 Generally the DTI 2000 is factory pre set prior to shipping In case of problems please contact the nearest service centre or the technical support Operating the DTI 2000 First make sure that the DTI 2000 has been correctly installed and connected as described before
444. t the DRM 4000 that is last in chain The corresponding outputs are OUT A and OUT B of that ast DRM 4000 When employing the MIX IN input for this special purpose set the MIX IN control to its 0 dB mark This ensures thatthe level ratio is maintained over all units in the chain Following this principle itis possible to cascade up to 8 DRM 4000 units However when cascading several DRM 4000 units because of their unbalanced design make sure not to use long cables for connecting the SEND outputs to the MIX IN inputs Ideally all cascaded DRM 4000 units are installed underneath each other in a single rack 6 1 SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE DRM 4000 6 4 Using The Unit Together With The DPM 4000 The DRM 4000 is an ideal inputs extension for the DPM 4000 Audio connections between the two units are established using balanced cables with XLR type connectors Using the optionally available RS 485 remote interface NRS 90256 allows connecting the DRM 4000 to the DPM 4000 for control purposes This allows using the DPM 4000 s Designer software to comfortably control configure and save the following parameters routing ducking control preset switching output levels control 6 2 SOFTWARE EDITOR DRM 4000 7 SOFTWARE EDITOR DRM 4000 The Software Editor DRM 4000 is shipped together with the optionally available extension kit RS 232 interface NRS 90258 The DRM 4000 editor software runs under Windows and offers possibilities to comfortably prog
445. t via front panel control switches THE DCS420 receives its audio feed from the monitor output of the DPM4000 DCS420 system control functions are carried out through a connection to the DCS401 controller module The front panel controls of the DCS420 offer audio level and line control switching of either the input signal or the output signal of the system amplifiers With several external sound sources connected switching is performed through the DCS 409R module When using remote amplifiers switching audio signals to the monitor bus is accomplished directly inside the amplifier The signals are transmitted via remote interconnection cables Architecture amp Engineering Available Accessories Specifications Model Description The expansion system is designed for use with the NRS90240 121742 Shaft Encoder ProAnnounce system and shall enable the use of a variety of system control and output routing devices Ordering Information The system shall consist of a 2RU system rack frame accommodating any one of a series of 6 expansion control modules which slide in the rear of the unit Model Cat No Description The rack frame shall hold up to 10 expansion cards It DCS420 121753 Monitoring Unit shall be powered from a 24V DC source supply DCS400 121773 19 Frame for DCS Modules through a dual spade lug terminal connection The system shall be equipped with internal self resetting DCS401R 121774 Controller Mo
446. tage measuring recognition of amplifier type including user definable name reading of software revision of the remote module reading of error flags reading of the output configuration recognition of extensions NRS 90206 and NRS 90207 switching the input monitor output monitor 1 to 4 to the monitor bus pilot tone signal ON OFF optional only with NRS 90206 installed ground fault error flags reset Note Prior to the first operation of the amplifier DPA 4411 you have to set the amplifier address using the two Hexadecimal Code switches ADDRESS 18 refer to the PROMATRIX AR handbook and using a waterproof marker pen mark the setting in the ADDRESS label field on the rear panel of the appliance By sending the corresponding command via the serial port REMOTE CONTROL 13 of the remote module this function is activated from the PROMATRIX Manager DPM 4000 see PROMATRIX handbook 7 Indicators And Fault Notification 7 1 STANDBY Indicator When correctly connected and with mains voltage and or battery voltage present the green STANDBY indicator 4 lights 7 2 READY Indicator The power amplifier DPA 4411 provides a power on delay of approximately 3 s to prevent switch clicks from becoming audible If after this period of time no faulty condition has been detected the green READY indicator 7 lights and the mute relays pull When thermal overload of the mains transformer or of one of the power output stages
447. tages of either polarity between 31 V and 31 V for voltages between 0 and 5 V the inputs are not active low for voltages between 10 V and 31 V the inputs are active high The control inputs can ignite switching functions or macros either during a change of state or in any stationary state This offers the possibility to monitor line idling currents e g in fire alert system installations rozAzoo 90219 figure 5 31 8 I O control module Note The opto coupler inputs are primarily meant to prevent noise loops that can result from dropping voltages in long distance cabling They are not suitable for separating networks from each other Therefore only floating sources should be connected Specifications description connections logic inputs voltage when the input is LOW voltage when the input is HIGH maximum input voltage logic outputs contact capacity slave clock output output voltage maximum output current power consumption operational temperature range dimensions WxHxD weight DPM LC8 8 I O control module NRS 90219 4 x RJ 45 sockets 8 floating via opto coupler bi polar UIN lt 5V Un gt 10 V UIN max 31 V 7 floating via relay contacts 1A 24V DC pole change impulse turning impulse 24V DC 500 mA electronically protected against overload 3 2 W 12 W with the maximum amount of slave clocks connected 5 40 C 37 5 x 81 x 247 mm 195g
448. tal noise use the two ducking controls 8 for setting the attenuation level of the non prioritized input channels in the setting range between 0 dB to 40 dB The factory pre set value is 40 dB 6 2 LIMITER OPERATION The two input channels MIC LINE 1 and 2 employ an internal limiter which provides the extremely useful function of automatically confining the dynamic range when using the DRM 4000 in microphone applications Peak levels are trimmed down to a pre set value threshold effectively avoiding distortion and clipping like it might occur in close miking applications The limiter threshold is factory pre set to 5 dBu which in return provides a maximum output level of 15 dBu 10 dB amplification with the channel s volume control set to its clockwise margin at the channel output This setting is most useful for a majority of applications Changing the limiter threshold in a range between 10 dBu and 20 dBu is possible via an internal trimmer For further detail please refer to chapter 9 2 Please keep in mind that the limiter is meant for equalizing drastic dynamic changes in microphone applications However correctly setting the gain control of the input stage is mandatory 6 3 Cascading Several Units via MIX IN and SEND Connecting the SEND output of a DRM 4000 to the MIX IN input of a second DRM 4000 doubles the amount of available input channels The master signal of all input channels is controlled using the master controls a
449. te receive control character in this window and after entering the desired file name confirm with ok The terminal program is now waiting for data that is going to be stored in the selected file The data transmission starts after pressing the return key The received data is displayed on the PC s screen After the transmission is finished select Cancel on the lower left hand side to terminate the data transfer Upon completion of the data backup the contents of the file can be checked using the read text file command or any text editor If necessary the later allows to change the data only inserting or deleting whole text lines see backup Restore commands above The text editor should not decode and re code any characters If the backup data is supposed to be loaded back into the DMM 4650 the function Restore has to be activated first see backup Restore commands After configuring the PC s interface settings configuration data transfer the filename has to be entered in the window transmission send text file Upon conclusion confirming with ok starts the transmission The DMM 4650 s echo gets displayed on the PC screen and upon reception of a complete preset restored appears on the screen 35 FACTORY PRESETS The installed software v 1 2 provides pre stored factory presets for sequences alarms and gongs Also defined are basic settings menu System setup as well as input
450. te file is supplied Please note that with different printer models margin settings may vary Please adjust the layout form according to the individual specifications of your printer model Tested printer models are HP LaserJet 6P HP LaserJet 5 HP LaserJet Il The recommended paper thickness is between 120 g m and 200 g m Also supplied with this handbook are prepared label strips in German English and French as well as empty strips which only have to be cut out You can label the empty strips in handwriting or by using Letraset letters 5 34 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 2 6 Operation This chapter explains all functions that are used during general operation Selective Call The user can launch calls or announcements into freely selectable areas or groups Pressing a single or several selection keys defines areas or groups where a call is launched into corresponding LED s will light By pressing the key of an already pre selected line once again deactivates that line and the corresponding LED goes out After making a selection pressing the TALK button ignites the call Prior hereto the BUSY LED allows checking whether all lines and the paging station input are actually free If single lines or the terminal input are busy with lower priority transmissions the BUSY LED will blink slowly Whilst making an announcement is possible this will interrupt any other transmitted event If single lines
451. ted board assembly 89021 connection cords and loudspeaker are pre mounted Supplied parts For being able to ship the correct bottom plate please specify your paging console model in which the extension is going to be installed when ordering the NRS 90209 Installation instructions 1 Disconnect the paging console from the power supply 2 Detach the bottom plate 6 to 8 screws depending on the paging station model 3 Slide the 4 rubber feet off the side of the bottom plate and attach them to the new bottom plate with the pre mounted printed board assembly 89021 4 Connect the plug of the printed board assembly 89021 to the terminal strip CN9 on the little connection printed board refer to figure 5 42 6 4 Blue 5 E ee Grey 9200 n 0000 Black 95 ass 9101019 D zs e lt l 3 figure 5 42 connecting the NRS 90209 in a paging console 5 Attach the new bottom plate 6 Reconnect the paging station to the LAN 7 Mount the printed board assembly 89022 including 100V transformer inside of a standard wall outlet and connect it between the 100V line and the RJ45 wall junction box refer to the circuit diagram 100V loudspeaker cabling needs to be kept separated from all other paging console wiring
452. tem and average operation respectively a RESET button to restart after the occurrence of ground fault conditions LED level meter instrument with a display range of 13 dB to 0 dB and CLIP integrated relays for single call and obligatory reception active temperature controlled ventilation pilot tone and ground fault surveillance module according to the DIN VDE 0800 standard optional 23 24 Indicators controls and connections 12 DYNACORD DPA 4140 l 400 WATTS POWER AMPLIFIER PRD MATRIX _ C3 c T EM Lee eee oe _2 O tsr 3 G A 1 1 Csr Oe _ eee pR Reay stanoev C3 De LLLI emu O PROTECT L 57 I DD DO M EEE LE oe eee eee 8 76 A 9 A 10 11 12 A 13 B T N 230 TI T8AFOR 115V VOLTAGE 1 SELECTOR 1 15V 280V E 4 _ ACMAINSINPUT G POWER eL 115V 230V 5060 Hz CAUTION ron conTINED PROTECTION AGANST RISK FIRE REPLACEWITH SAVE TY PEAND VALLE FUSEINDICAT ED ATTENTION ng ACER PAR UN FUSBLEDEMEMETYFE COMME INDIGUE OF RECTRICSHOCK N DONO OPEN WARNING EDUC THERISK CF ORELECTRO DONDTEIFOSE THIS7PRLANCE TO RANOR MOISTURE AMS nisaJEDECHOCELECTRQUE NEPASOLWRIR DCINPUT 24V CHASSISSWTCH 411 eis UNGROJNDED gt NOUSER SERVICE ABLEP ARTS INSIDE REERSERVIONG TO QUALIFED SERVICE PER
453. tend the sound memory capacity of the appliance by incorporating up to three additional plug in boards extension kit NR 90205 The corresponding recording times are specified in the table above The flash memories have to be formatted after insertion see menu system setup format flash Asterisk behind message duration An asterisk behind the message recording time display signals that the corresponding data has been corupted The error is shown by the blinking Power LED In case you decide that the audio quality is sufficient after listening to the recording you have to enter the menu confirming page 13 to delete the sign If the result is not tolerable the only solution is re recording the message To omit the blinking Power LED you have to acknowledge error no 14 in the self test menu page 29 GONG General Gong Presets are audio signals that can be started within a sequence Order and parameters of a gong sequence can be edited For test purposes the sound can be started in the gong editor menu by use of the PLAY STOP keys It is audible via the Pre Listen outputs Gong Presets 20 freely programmable presets user preset are available from GOO G19 Starting with G20 and going to G26 factory preset gong sequences are programmed The corresponding functions are explained in the table on page 45 Erasing the factory presets is not possible Creating your own gong sequence is ea
454. tension provides selection keys only It is employed whenever more than 50 loudspeaker lines need to be accessed or whenever additional group and special function keys are required The DPC 4350 can be easily combined with any other paging station model The following list shows the amounts of maximally accessible lines for various combinations combination max number of lines DPC 4106 DPC 4350 50 DPC 4510 DPC 4350 60 DPC 4520 DPC 4350 70 DPC 4530 DPC 4350 80 DPC 4550 DPC 4350 100 The extension is directly connected to the main paging station s extension interface EXT using the supplied 8 pole RJ 45 cable Consequently a paging station consists of two devices but reports to a common address Therefore the central unit recognizes such a combination as a single console with a higher number of selection keys From the view point of the user the two devices also act as only one paging station i e the selection keys of main and slave paging stations provide equal access to their assigned areas groups and special functions DPC 4000 Revision 1 1 29 PROMATRIX System Factory Shipped Configuration When shipped the selection keys 1 n are assigned to the corresponding areas 1 n Therefore paging stations are ready for operation directly after connection and switching the system power ON CAUTION If several paging stations are operated within an installation it is extremely important that each one is set to an ind
455. th a range from 13 dB to 0 dB CLIP indicators TEST button for checking and reset function STANDBY indicator PROTECT indicator GROUND FAULT indicator READY indicator Air inlets POWER ON switch AC MAINS INPUT connector Mains fuse VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch REMOTE CONTROL connectors STATUS indicator INPUT connectors 1 4 ROUTING switch for INPUT 1 4 Device address label field ADDRESS selector switch POWER OUTPUT Device output configuration label field Air outlets CIRCUIT 1 TO CHASSIS SWITCH DC INPUT 24 V 6 oval head sheet metal screws 3 5 x 6 5 zinc coated DIN 7981 4 oval head sheet metal screws 3 5 x 9 5 zinc coated DIN 7981 9 oval head screws M3 x 12 nickel plated DIN 7985 8 oval head screws PT KA 30 x 8 WN 1412EJOT black zinc coated 21 Table of Contents Features nn re fri rimi ici dk 19 Indicators Controls And Connectors 21 Mes UN ZATION 2s exco or EIE Cell ok Me ERR AED VERSES AIT 23 2 Installation Notes kv iL ISI PA eee EI 23 3 Before Initial Operation 23 3 1 Mains Operation 23 3 2 Battery Operation 24 V 24 4 Inputs s 24 SEOUDUS PEE 25 521 POWER OUTPUT Meh ERR eee ent 25 5 2 POWER OUTPUT for the connection of 100 V l
456. th the soft key ok the display shows headphones and the soft key norm Using the cursor keys the value for the volume of the Phone Pre Listen outputs can be set in a range of 0 to 100 while norm sets it to 75 This setting can also be modified with the soft key v in the menus Message Gong and Alarm The EXIT key switches to the prior menu level Priority Confirming priority with the soft key ok the display shows Change User prio and the soft key ok This menu allows fixing user priorites that are lower than the current user level The cursor keys are used to assign a user number and its priority The new setting is only effective after confirming the entry with the soft key ok new priority stored The EXIT key switches to the prior menu level Password Confirming password with the soft key ok the display shows password change and the soft key ok This menu provides the possibility to change all user passwords that are lower than the current user level including your own password A user number and its password is set with the cursor keys 4 numbers each from 0 9 The new setting is only effective after confirming the entry with the soft key ok new password stored The EXIT key switches to the prior menu level Outputs Confirming outputs with the soft key ok the name of a control output relay contact is displayed This menu allows the settings of all 16 outputs whi
457. the range of 0 dB to 10dB for the following audio signals Alarms Gongs and Announcements The setting effects all audio signals of the corresponding group This menu provides the opportunity to match the DMM 4650 s output level to different amplifiers and loudspeaker systems The EXIT key switches to the prior menu level init DMM 4650 Confirming init DMM 4650 with the soft key ok the message DMM 4650 init sure and the soft keys n no appear on the display If this menu item is confirmed with yes the safety query sure appears again before a complete initialization of the DMM 4650 to its factory default is performed All user settings are lost Important user presets stored in the unit should be transferred into a PC in advance as described in the menu backup The contents of preset memory EPROM and message memory Flash are deleted or reset to their factory pre set defaults see list Factory presets The number of sound memories is detected automat ically At the end of this procedure the number of bad flash memory blocks is indicated Afterwards the display shows Soft Reset together with soft key ok After pressing this soft key the initialization process is complete The start init DMM 4650 is reserved for basic software updates and for applications where the unit is used differently format Flash Confirming format Flash with the soft key ok the message format
458. the audible system noise The following chapters explain how to optimally set the levels of MIC LINE and AUX inputs 5 2 1 Level Adjustment for MIC LINE inputs e The four MIC LINE inputs are provided via balanced XLR type connectors To optimally match a signal source to a channel input please proceed as follows Set the according channel control 4 on the unit s front panel as well as its gain control 24 on the rear of the appliance to their counterclockwise minimal positions e When connecting a microphone make sure that the correspondent channel s PAD switch 26 is not engaged high input gain In case you want to connect a balanced Line level signal source engage the PAD switch low input gain e When utilizing a microphone that needs phantom power engage the correspondent channel s 24V switch 27 For all other cases the 24V switch has not to be engaged Especially when connecting unbalanced signal sources do not activate phantom power Your external units may otherwise be damaged e Now connect the desired audio signal source to the DRM 4000 e Start the playback of your external signal source with the highest signal level or talk sing into the microphone at the loudest pitch possible while holding the microphone as close as possible e Use the gain control 25 to control the level so that even at the loudest signal peaks the red PEAK LED just does not light while the SIGNAL LED lights constantly e In doing s
459. the fault message is output as collective fault message with the floating contact of the READY fault message relay via the REMOTE CONTROL connector 16 When using the REMOTE MODULE NRS 90222 error occurrence is monitored and output by the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 for further details please refer to the PROMATRIX handbook 8 5 2 Ground fault surveillance When installing and operating 100V loudspeaker networks compliance to the VDE regulation DIN VDE 0800 is mandatory Especially if 100V loudspeaker networks are included in alarm system applications all security standards have to be in accordance to the security class 3 standard 35 When off ground potential loudspeaker cable networks are employed we recommend insulation monitoring using the ground fault surveillance module NRS 90224 Error recognition An occurring ground fault either signals that one of the cables is damaged which most likely point towards a total line interruption in the near future or that connections have been carried out erroneously which may lead to malfunctioning of the entire system The fault message GROUND FAULT 6 is also maintained with very short 55 sec ground faults as long as the amplifier is powered on or a loaded battery is connected The fault message is displayed via the red GROUND FAULT indicator 6 In case of an inserted INPUT MODULE NRS 90225 it is also outputted as collective fault message with the floating contact of the READY fault message
460. the system Pressing an ALARM key or igniting an alarm sequence at external terminals automatically switches the PROANNOUNCE system s power on and boots the system Program Assignment Activating this feature allows the assignment of programs to individual areas and groups of the entire installation during the PC configuration procedure First by pressing the PROGRAM key the paging station has to be set to program assign mode Pressing a single or several selection keys assigns the outputted program background music to the selected areas and groups The corresponding LED s are lit Program transmission has always the lowest priority 1 The signal level is determined during system configuration The assignment stays memorized until the selection keys are pressed again Pressing the CANCEL key erases the entire assignment pattern Subsequently pressing the PROGRAM key or any other function key cancels program assign mode It is also automatically canceled after approximately 15 seconds In single program configuration the music reproduction into all areas of the installation is attenuated for the time of an announcement In double program configuration parallel transmission of a background music program into rooms that are not part of an actual announcement selection is possible as well If every line incorporates its own LF output and separate power amplifiers mixing announcements and background programs is possible in any way Special Fun
461. thermal overload of the power amplification stage ground fault optional only with installed NRS 90224 pilot tone signal optional only with installed NRS 90224 measurement of the output voltage level measurement of the output current surveillance of the connected loads via current voltage measurement MONITOR output electronically balanced monitoring input output signals can be assigned to the monitor bus input transformer for floating balanced input optional Output transformer for floating balanced monitor output optional pilot tone signal ON OFF optional The remote module allows to remotely control and monitor the operation of the power amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 from the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 for further details please refer to the PROMATRIX handbook Caution Before installing the input module NRS 90222 you have to unplug the mains connector as well as a presumably connected battery cord Before installing the input module it is necessary to remove the two locking screws B on the rear panel of the appliance For installation the printed board assembly first has to be inserted into the guiding rails After carefully pushing the module in it has to be locked by using the two screws mentioned before After installing the remote module NRS 90222 it is necessary to set its address according to the description in the PROMATRIX handbook using the two HEX code switches ADDRESS 21 and note the set
462. ting e LED bar graph meter instrument for monitoring and setting audio levels e Input transformers allow galvanic separation of the audio signal path e Detachable mounting plate for installing different connectors of the PA central unit e Selector switch for selecting external or internal from the DCS401 supply voltage sources Installation Note Mounting the module and establishing the connections are solely admissible when performed in accordance to VDE 0100 and EN 60065 regulations Specifications Operating voltage 24V DC 10 30 Operating current 250 mA max Standby operating current dark 75 mA Operating temperature range 5 40 Dimensions W x x D 19 2HU 483 x 88 x 103 mm Weight 2 1 kg Audio input Input voltage 0 dB LED 650 mV 1 5 dBu Max input voltage 5 0 V 16 dBu Input impedance 2kohms Audio output Monitor loudspeaker 1W Output voltage phones max 2V 8 2dBu Output impedance phones 10 Ohm Frequency response phones jack 20Hz 20kHz 3dB SIN ratio gt 80 dB Distortion 1 1kHz PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 65 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS Attention use only Board 80440 A or higher DCS 401 use only Software v 1 13 or later pc INPUT DCS 420 _ MV REAR left part J POWER 71 SELECTOR from DPM 4000 Stereo 1 4 jack DCS 400 MONITOR OUT INTERFACE 0 10r2 DCS 416 are possible The connection has to be established using flat wir
463. ting within the field ADDRESS on the rear panel of the appliance using a waterproof marker pen 8 3 5 90208 input transformer for the floating balanced input For the case that floating inputs are required the inputs of the INPUT MODULE NRS 90225 and the REMOTE MODULE NRS 90222 are prepared for retrofitting input transformers If so it is necessary to additionally install the extension kit NRS 90208 per each input The installation has to be performed as follows see figure 6 and or figure 7 to remove the input module you have to loosen the two locking screws B on the rear panel of the appliance Now the module can be easily torn out before installing the input transformer you have to remove the resistors R1 and R2 mount the input transformer onto the printed board assembly so that the marking located on the connector side of the transformer matches with the one on the printed board assembly To prevent short circuits place the supplied insulation disc between the transformer and the printed board assembly 33 re insert the input module and tighten the locking screws B 8 4 NRS 90227 output transformer for the floating balanced monitor output In case that floating monitor outputs are required the outputs of the INPUT MODULE NRS 90225 and REMOTE MODULE NRS 90222 are prepared for retrofitting output transformers If so it is necessary to additionally install the extension kit NRS 90227 per each output The installa
464. tion store yes no appears on the display Acknowledging this question lets you save your new settings in a user preset Title Confirming Title with the soft key ok the name of the currently loaded alarm is displayed Using the cursor keys lets you enter a name of up to 8 characters The soft keys A a shifts between the upper and the lower character case while soc inserts a blank character After pressing the EXIT key previous menu level the question store yes no appears on the display Acknowledging this question lets you save your new settings in a user preset Priority Confirming Priority with the soft key the priority number of the selected alarm preset appears on the display Using the cursor keys the priority number can be set starting from 00 up to the user priority A higher priority protects against unauthorized alteration of this preset by users with lower priority level All factory presets are provided with a priority of 00 because they cannot be overwritten anyway This offers any user the possibility to use them as prototype sequences After pressing the EXIT key one menu level down the question store yes no appears on the display Acknowledging this question lets you save your new settings in a user preset Save Confirming save with the soft key ok the currently selected alarm number is displayed Using the cursor keys you are able to enter the number of the desired
465. tion has to be performed as follows see figure 6 and or figure 7 to remove the input module you have to loosen the two locking screws B on the rear panel of the appliance Now the module can be easily torn out before installing the output transformer you have to remove the resistors R22 R23 R32 and R33 NRS 90225 respectively the resistors R23 R24 R71 and R72 NRS 90222 now you can mount the output transformer onto the printed board assembly Because of the transformer s symmetrical design polarity is not a critical factor re insert the input module and tighten the locking screws B Input Transformer NRS 90208 INPUT PCB 81338 354653 Output Transformer NRS 90227 figure 6 printed board assembly 81338 showing the input transformer NRS 90208 and the output transformer NRS 90 227 Input Transformer NRS 90208 e Hr 81339 x 13 09 Remote PCB e 3 354676 vorssuo Analog Bust ckungsdruck 1 00 07 20 08 51339 Output Transformer 90 227 figure 7 printed board assembly 81339 showing the input transformer NRS 90208 and the output transformer NRS 90 227 8 5 NRS 90224 pilot tone amp ground fault surveillance The extension NRS 90224 is meant for insertion It includes a 19 kHz tone generator and a selective 19 kHz receiver with evaluation stage for pilot tone surveillance Also incorporated is a monitoring circuit with fault storage and display driver to guard the cable network connected
466. tion of paging consoles to the PROANNOUNCE manager DPM 4000 is performed via serial RS 485 ports This allows connecting up to four terminals at a single port Power amplifiers and the DCS 400 controller are connected to another independent RS 485 port which allows direct management of up to 64 power amplifiers and 8 DCS 401 Connecting a PC is established via serial RS 232 port on the rear panel of the DPM 4000 It is not necessary for the PC to be permanently connected to the DPM 4000 An additional RS 485 interface offers the possibility to operate several DPM 4000 in a network 3 11 Safety Standards The PROANNOUNCE system complies with all applicable requirements of the IEC 849 standard electro acoustics emergency alert PA systems The digital PROANNOUNCE manager DPM 4000 guards and monitors its entire internal functions All connected paging stations and power amplifiers including the wiring are monitored via polling and pilot tone functions Using the remote control units in the power amplifiers it is also possible to monitor the loudspeaker lines Of course the PROANNOUNCE system is also prepared for operation with emergency power supply In case of a power outage the DPM 4000 takes over the entire power management i e all internal and external power consuming components are switched to stand by mode Only when necessary they are turned on again This minimizes the total power consumption efficiently and guarantees maximum operationa
467. tions with the operational voltage of 24 V The switch mode power supplies DPP4004 4012 can be operated as single units together with the PA system PROMATRIX or battery powered as well as together with the DYNACORD DEM system Caution It is not permissible to expose this appliance to dripping or splashing water 2 First Operation The switch mode power supply rack units DPP4004 4012 are to be operated on the 230 VAC mains supply Internally switching the appliances to different voltages is possible please refer to the paragraph 4 adjusting the mains voltage Connecting the power supplies is only licit on a accurately installed 3 pole mains outlet The mains outlet connector 6 is meant for convenient connection within rack shelf systems It is possible to connect other devices to the mains output 6 using a common mains cord A maximum power consumption of 1 A should not be exceeded 3 Functions of the DPP4004 4012 The power supply rack units DPP 4004 and 4012 were designed to supply PA systems with or without emergency battery power supply with the necessary power They can also be used to remotely control on off several functions Managing the switching between mains and battery supply is performed automatically Using the mains switch 1 main switch function on the front of the appliance it is possible to turn the system power off completely To prevent inadvertent erroneous switching a cover lid can be installed with the
468. to the monitor bus and you can listen to the signal via headphones or loudspeaker either which is connected to the monitor output Automatic pilot tone surveillance of the two output channels is also integrated The jumpers for adjusting the output voltage to 0 dB or 6 dB are located on the printed board assembly At the same time you have to alter the jumper setting of the monitor signal correspondingly The output module employs integrated output relays that prevent switching noise from being heard When switching the system on the output signal is put through after the system is been initialized power on delay the contacts are immediately interrupted when switching the power off 0 6dBu 0 6dBu 8 I O Control Module NRS 90219 This control module provides 8 floating control inputs and 7 floating logic level outputs 0 V 24 V An additional output provides pole change impulses for controlling slave 4 system clocks Contact is established via 4 x RJ 45 sockets providing 8 contacts NU 1 each The module can be installed in slot 5 The slave clock output NU OUT 1 is short circuit proof up to approximately 40 slave IN clocks can be connected Please make sure to connect 1 roxzAzoo all slave clocks according to their correct polarity The control outputs OUT 2 8 90219 are capable of switching voltages of either polarity and up to a maximum current of 1 A The cont
469. tor provides a serial RS 485 interface and the power supply for the connected paging consoles see also pin assignment of the RJ 45 connector The paging stations power supply employs an electronic programmable fuse through which the maximum output current can be matched to meet actual system accommodations The MIC LINE input employs an internal switch PAD providing 30 dB of attenuation The GAIN control located on the appliance s rear panel offers additional control in a range of 40 dB The input is electronically balanced and prepared for retrofitting a transformer Phantom power can be switched via jumper If necessary a compressor limiter circuit can be incorporated in the audio path Input channels can be switched separately to the monitor bus and you can listen to the signal via headphones or loudspeaker either which being connected to the monitor output Automatic pilot tone surveillance of the entire input stage is integrated as well DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS DPM MLC DPC 4000 IN T J figure 5 22 MIC LINE paging station module NRS 90234 inputs is therefore of major importance Note When connecting several paging consoles to a single input please keep in mind that line interruption or short circuit can cause malfunction of several or even all paging stations of that specific line In emergency alert installation connecting security related consoles to individual Specifications d
470. tor provides power supply control interface RS 485 and audio connections The microphone terminal has to be connected to a corresponding wall outlet using the supplied connection cord 3 m 2 EXT socket This socket is mostly used for connecting a DPC4350 paging station extension Use the supplied network cable 0 5 m to connect the DPC4350 to the microphone terminal s EXT socket Additionally when no paging station extension is connected it is possible to utilize the EXT socket to connect a second microphone with TALK button or other external audio signal sources to the paging station Detailed information is provided in chapter 6 2 13 Optionally Available Accessories Key Labeling Labeling the keys on the paging stations is done via label strips which can be inserted from the side The label strips for the 6 respectively 8 function keys are slit in from the right while the selection key strips for 10 20 30 or 50 selection keys are inserted from the left Therefore you have to detach the corresponding side panel 2 screws and insert the labeled strip into the guiding rail between the front panel and the front panel foil The most convenient way of printing the labels is to utilize the word processing software MS WORD A suitable MS WORD template is supplied Please note that with different printers margin settings can vary making it necessary to adjust the template according to the specifications of your printer Tested printe
471. tr Input Coniid Stens DYNACORD DRM 4000 uit Corta Contact 2 Cerkact 3 Contact 4 Const S Contac 6 Contact 7 Cerat 6 Name aed Name Two rahing rooms are combined to a party hal Input Channel MICAINE1 MICAINE2 MIC NE 3 WEINE 4 u 1 Alb 2 AR3 ALK Label Trainer 1 Trainer 2 Pie EB Pier ED Payer 2 1 2 NS NS NEZ ON rcm Rowing Dus pa Change No Change Steren Stereo M seres Stereo Printy Ovemde Channels MASTER Label Hal Mk No Change No Priority Priority The possibility for assigning priorities to the control input is provided here Priority 8 represents the highest priority setting while priority 1 represents the lowest setting The control input with the highest priority setting overrules the others whenever several control inputs are active The BASIC CONFIGURATION always has the lowest priority priority O Therefore itis active with no control input being activated When assigning identical priorities to two or more control inputs the last set overrules the others 7 5 SOFTWARE EDITOR DRM 4000 7 4 5 Online Control Status This window allows remotely controlling and monitoring the DRM 4000 in real time It also offers the possibility to test the active control input configur
472. ttings AUX input sensitivity setting Using trimmers VR1 AUX 1 VR2 AUX 2 VR3 AUX 3 and VR4 AUX 4 adjusting input levels is possible in a range between 10 dBu and 12 dBu The trim potentiometers coarse scales are meant for your convenience helping you in adjusting the levels Potentiometer setting Input level 12 dBu oanu Left margin 12 dBu b Center position right margin 10 dBu 710 48 VR1 C24 C20 E R1 x C25 d 8B C15 0a 9 009 80 09009 rs ur me sg R 88 9 e 55 C12 ge 8 0 080 80 NH a C29 ES TORIS ee 77 DE D6 D4 109 FC CIS E FL4 VR figure 5 21 internal settings location of parts NRS 90228 5 18 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 1 9 MIC LINE Paging Station Module NRS 90234 This 2 channel audio input module is meant for the connection of DPC 4000 Series paging stations and other external audio sources The RJ 45 socket of channel A allows the connection of up to 4 microphone terminals plus paging station extensions The MIC LINE input of channel B is furnished through an XLRF type connector allowing the connection of microphones mixers and other audio signal sources The module can be installed into slot 1 and slot 2 Next to the electronically balanced audio input the DPC 4000 input connec
473. ture Service life For batteries in alarm apparatus and emergency announcing systems the end of a battery s servive life is reached when the capacity is less than 8096 of the rated capacity Stored energy time This is the time span between recognizing a failure in the mains supply and remedying this failure Alarm duration The alarm duration is the time during which the alarm signal is given off Emergency announcement duration This is the time during which announcements are made to clear the building or section of a building 8 Specifications battery modules Batterie Module Nominal voltage Discharge voltage at 25 C 1 Nominal capacity for 20 hr Nominal discharge current 120 Capacity for 5 hr 2 Capacity for 1 hr 3 Capacity for 1 C 4 Discharge current for 5 hr 2 Discharge current for 1 hr 3 Discharge current for 1 hr 4 Max discharge current Standby current at mains failurel Number of outputs Innenwiderstand f r 7 5 A Ausgang End of charge voltage in standby operation at 20 Continuous battery power supply Temperature adaption Nominal charging current Dimensions W x D Height Weight approx 2 1 2 3 4 DEM 316 24 V 19 5 V 38 Ah 1 9A 33 Ah 23 Ah 20 Ah 6 6 A 23 A 38 A 100 A 200 mA 14 ca 50 mOhm 27 3 V 40 mV C 4A 483 mm x 370 mm 178 mm 36 1 kg 1 Discharge voltage at 25 C 1 75 V cell x 12 cells 21 0 V Capacity
474. u have to unplug the mains connector as well as a presumably connected battery cord Before installing the input module it is necessary to remove the two locking screws B on the rear panel of the appliance For installation the printed board assembly first has to be inserted into the guiding rails After carefully pushing the module in it has to be locked by using the two screws mentioned before 32 Functioning changes in the models DPA 4120 starting with serial numbers 100 11 and DPA 4140 starting with serial numbers 100 11 in association with the input module NRS 90225 To achieve reliable attenuation of switching noise knacks the monitor output stays muted as long as the READY relay is not pulled Because of circuit design reasons this causes that the monitor output is also muted even when a ground fault appears at the main output 8 2 Remote module NRS 90222 This input and remote module for the power amplifiers DPA 4120 and DPA 4140 is meant for insertion at the power amplifiers rear It provides the following functions lockable XLR input connector output connector to patch the input signal through input level can be set via a programmable audio level control MUTE via level control mains remote ON OFF battery remote ON OFF control of the D and E relays surveillance and fault messaging via the PROMATRIX manager DPM 4000 corresponding to IEC 849 thermal overload of the mains transformer
475. u mem data error in user presets of sequences 10 Stop mem data error in user settings of stop triggers 11 Alrm mem data error in alarm user presets 12 Gong mem data error in gong user presets 13 Msg dir data error in message file management 14 Msg chsu data error in message audio data see also message on page 14 15 ARS RAM communication error in DSP processor 16 ARS mod software error in DSP processor 17 Flash tests for a changed number of flash memory cards 18 Block faulty blocks in flash memory has been occurred later 19 EEPROM error at writing into EEPROM 20 ROM data modification of the microprocessor s EPROM 47 User questions hints This chapter tries to explain some of the DMM 4650 s functions that first may seem somewhat surprising for the user and to provide the amended solution Question Explanation Solution a Explanation Solution b Explanation Solution c Question Explanation Solution a Explanation Solution b Question Explanation Question Solution Question Solution Recording a message is suddenly interrupted by the DMM 4650 An external contact initiated a sequence with a higher priority e g alarm than the one of current user This reaction is necessary and intended since no user with a priority level 1 or 2 should be able to block the alarm functions Record the message with the same number delete yes after the priority sequence en
476. unsolder the resistors for T1 R1 R5 for T2 R9 R13 for T3 R17 R21 for T4 R25 R29 and clean the corresponding eyelets place the input transformer onto the printed board assembly 81331 so that the markings on the board and on the bottom part of the transformer are aligned As a protection against short circuit place the supplied insulating disk between the printed board and the transformer before re installing the printed board assembly 81331 reconnect the flat cables CN1 to CN6 Keep in mind that the plug of the cable leading to CN1 AMP1 2 is marked Now reconnect the printed board assembly 81331 to the amplifier s side panel using two screws M3 x 12 installation of the rear panel first connect the POWER OUTPUT printed board assembly to the rear panel using two screws marked C Make sure not to squeeze any wires Now you can slide the rear panel underneath the four lock fish plates of the input sockets In doing so mind that the acknowledge button of the ROUTING switches need to be pulled through the corresponding openings input sockets are tightened with two screws marked D each the power supply printed board assembly 85272 gets tightened using two screws marked C mind the acknowledge button of the CIRCUIT 1 TO CHASSIS SWITCH tighten the Remote Control printed board assembly with two screws marked C mind the yellow STATUS LED tighten the mains input printed board assembly 86243 using three screws marked C tighten the
477. urce using common RCA type cables When now playing the signal source with the highest signal level e g loudest passage in a musical piece the SIGNAL LED has to light and or blink in the rhythm of the music The AUX inputs are factory pre set to a nominal sensitivity of 4 dBu which in combination with the channel control is suitable for most AUX signal sources In case you want to connect an extremely low output AUX signal source it may happen that the green signal LED does not light up Additionally it is possible that you are not able to gain the required volume level using the channel control In these cases setting the AUX input s nominal sensitivity to 6 dBu via internal bridges is recommended This measure will increase the input s sensitivity by 10 dB For further detail please refer to chapter 9 1 3 AUX Sensitivity Selection At last the channel s volume setting has to be achieved using the corresponding channel control 4 Ideally volume controls are set to a position somewhere the area of their center mark 0 dB leaving you enough reserve for compensating level differences between the audio signals of various input channels 5 2 SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE DRM 4000 6 SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE DRM 4000 6 1 Using Ducking Control The ducking control allows the unaltered passage of audio signals of prioritized channels MIC LINE 1 and or MIC LINE 2 while at the same time the audio signals of any other non prioritiz
478. uring operation shock hazard output voltages can be present at the power output connectors gt 34 V peak value Therefore the connected loudspeaker lines have to be installed in accordance to applicable security standards and regulations When installing and operating 100 V loudspeaker networks compliance to the VDE regulation DIN VDE 0800 is mandatory Especially if a 100 V loudspeaker network is included in alarm system applications all security standards have to be in accordance to the security class 3 standard Before the first operation of the power amplifier the loudspeaker terminal strip has to be covered using the supplied protection cover Power Outputs Isolated Outputs 70 V and 100 V To reduce line attenuation effects when the distance between power amplifier and loudspeaker systems exceeds 50 meters it is recommended to employ loudspeaker systems with 100 V or 70 V line transformers which also allows conveniently distributing the output power to the individual loudspeaker systems It is possible to connect as many loudspeaker systems until the total power consumption of the loudspeaker network equals the nominal power handling capacity of the power amplifier while not declining the nominal load impedance of the power amplifier outputs For details on nominal power handling capacity and nominal load impedance of the amplifier s individual power outputs please refer to the specifications in the appendix AU
479. urning off the display of the symbol and status bars might be advantageous leaving more space for displaying the main window and therefore might lessen the need for scrolling Communication Menu Config Rs232 Select the desired COM port Monitor Open the RS 232 monitor v Online 5 Establish data communication with the DRM 4000 Offline x Quit data communication with the DRM 4000 Download Data 5 Transfer data from the PC to the DRM 4000 Upload Data Receive data from the DRM 4000 Show firmware version Display the DRM 4000 s firmware version only possible when in on line mode About Menu Help Topks Provides general information about the About DRM 4000 Editor 9 DRM 4000 Editor software 7 4 3 Basic Configuration The parameters to be set here represent the mixer s basic configuration which is always active when none of the DRM 4000 s contact inputs are engaged When the DRM 4000 is connected to your PC using the Online Control soft key allows establishing any settings in real time Bac Corfigarston Control Inputs Celine Control tee DYNACORD DRM 4000 x Name and Comment Name Taking THO and any Haining loner Channels 7 MCILINE 2 MEARES HICAINES AU 2 02 S 5 X EZEM ED i Sfor ifks Moma we 2 Routing dena A ceno E Dus
480. ut is configured for the connection of microphones Engaging the switch allows connecting a balanced LINE level signal source to the corresponding XLR type connector 27 24V switch These switches allow individually activating 24 V phantom power for each MIC LINE channel which allows the connection of condenser microphones or phantom powered paging consoles 2 4 QUICK START 3 QUICK START This paragraph describes in an overview the most important steps for a trouble free operation of the DRM 4000 in your PA system For a more detailed description of specific functions when using the DRM 4000 in combination with the DPM 4000 please refer to chapter 6 4 For further details on the functioning and the configuration of the DRM 4000 please refer to the corresponding paragraph in the handbook POWER SUPPLY Connect the DRM 4000 to a 24 V DC power source via the 6 3mm flat connectors 14 on the rear panel AUDIO CONNECTIONS Before integrating and initially operating the DRM 4000 in your PA system you should determine which system configuration you are using Please refer to chapter 8 CONFIGURING THE DRM 4000 for a wiring example for the BASIC CONFIGURATION 8 in 2 mixer as well as for notes on how to configure the DRM 4000 Please refer to the additional sheet DRM 4000 FACTORY CONFIGURATION for an overview of the factory pre set assignment of the BASIC CONFIGURATION and the CONTROL INPUTS After doing so connect the DRM 4000 accord
481. ut can be mixed with the DMM 4650 internally generated audio signals e g gong signals with announcements or given out as priority at the audio output programmable The audio quality of the messages can be selected depending on memory extension and different user requirements With maximum memory extension a total recording time of 16 minutes is possible Password protection for various operation levels is provided For EASY USER the provided operation features are similar to those known from cassette recorders or CD players The control of the programs is performed via floating inputs and floating outputs provide status messages The priorities and functions of these lines can be programmed individually Setup A computer interface facilitates saving and loading of the unit s configuration and its message data In order to ensure functional reliability self surveillance and audio data verification are employed The alarm is ignited via internal fault output while all warnings are logged The DMM 4650 is maintenance free since no serviceable parts batteries or accumulators are to be found inside the appliance CONTENTS 5 RRONTPANED srs lest E leis 6 REAR P NEI elk lei nint sre Estas 7 USE OF THE DMM 4650 xr t e ele Ae Rules 8
482. ut transformers please proceed as follows Disconnect the DPM 4000 from the mains power supply Loosen the two locking screws and carefully slide the module out of the slot Remove the two resistors of input channel B R7 R11 Solder the transformer in position T1 onto the printed board assembly Re insert the module into the slot and carefully push it into the DPM 4000 until it firmly locks in place Fix the module in place using the two locking screws and reconnect the power supply or gio doc PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 5 13 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS 5 1 7 2 Channel MIC LINE Input Module NRS 90217 This 2 channel audio input module is meant for the connection of external audio sources like microphones mixers etc Both channels are furnished with XLRF type connectors The module can be installed into slot 1 and slot 2 The sensitivity of the MIC LINE inputs can be adjusted in a wide range The internal MIC LINE switches PADs provide 30 dB attenuation The separate GAIN controls for each channel provide additional control in a range of 40 dB The MIC LINE inputs are electronically balanced and can be retrofitted with transformers Phantom power can be switched via jumper setting If necessary compressors limiters can also be incorporated in the audio paths via jumpers Input channels can be switched separately onto the monitor bus and you can listen to the signal via headphones or loudspeaker either whi
483. utput power MBW 80kHZz 1 kHz IMD SMPTE 60 Hz 7 kHz DIM30 3 15 kHz 15 kHz Crosstalk ref 1kHz at rated output power Input Impedance 20 2 20 kHz balanced Damping Factor at 100Hz 1kHz direct outputs only Insertion Loss isolated outputs only Signal to Noise Ratio Rated output voltage to noise A weighted DPA4245 DPA4260 Direct Output Isolated Outputs Direct Output Isolated Outputs 80 40 100V 70V 25V 80 40 100V 70V 25V 28 50 140 1 80 200 9 80 1 250 240W 450W 410W 400W 390W 330W 600W 590W 580W 570W 44 42 4V 108V 74 8V 26 5V 51 30 49V 109 5V 75 4V 26 7V 230W 350W 350W 350W 350W 300W 500W 500W 500W 42 9V 37 4V 100V 70V 25V 49V 447 100V 70V 25V 44V 125V 87V 31V 52V 121V 88V 32V 45 Hz 30kHz 45 Hz 22kHz 45 Hz 30kHz 45 Hz 22kHz 34dB 34dB 42dB 39dB 30dB 35dB 35dB 42dB 39dB 30dB OdBu 775mV 20 kOhm 25 V us 30 V us 45Hz 50kKHz 45Hz 25kHz 45Hz 2 45Hz 25 kHz 0 0596 0 196 0 296 0 396 0 05 96 0 196 lt 0 2 lt 0 396 0 08 0 195 0 396 0 596 lt 0 0896 lt 0 1 0 396 0 596 0 0396 0 296 0 296 0 296 0 03 96 0 296 0 396 0 396 80dB 20 kOhm 300 200 300 200 0 7dB 0 8dB 0 9 07dB 0 8dB 1 1dB gt 100 dB 27 BRIDGED MODE Direct Output Isolated Outputs Direct Output Isolated Outputs Output Definition 80 200V 140V 50V 80 200V 140V 50V Load impedance or rated output voltage Rated Load Imped
484. uts optional e Multi chime gong signal optional e Alarm generator optional e Signal generator and evaluation used for pilot tone surveillance e Voice message recording and playback optional e General purpose inputs e General purpose outputs e Linking of internal and external control inputs and outputs e Monitoring facility for all inputs and outputs as well as DPA 4000 Series power amplifiers and other external audio sources General Description The DPM 4000 represents the paging management control unit of the ProAnnounce system incorporating all primary functions that are needed in advanced PA system installations The DPM 4000 employs a digital audio matrix providing four inputs and four outputs Additional matrix junctions for the integrated gong and alarm signal generators the vocal recording playback unit and the lock on of the pilot tone and its evaluation are incorporated All input signals and internally generated signals can be mixed inside the matrix and sent to the four output channels Simple four zone paging systems can be constructed using direct routing of output channels to dedicated zone amplifiers More complicated larger than four zone systems can be constructed by using a system controlled relay matrix either pre or post amplifier The DPM 4000 provides priority control of pages and other functions The DPM 4000 provides a variety of tone generators for the generation of gong alarm and
485. value is independent of the recording level in Massage recording Pressing the soft key ok cancels the level adjustment menu and the DMM 4650 returns into announcement mode The display shows the message Announcement and a bargraph for optical control of the correct input level setting The soft key v allows modifying the pre listen outputs volume setting while end closes the announcement function Setting the recording level a new is required only when the connected signal source is changed or any other large scale alterations of the input level take place 20 Trigger General The menu trigger allows to assign the connection of a control input to a function of the DMM 4650 sequence start while various control inputs can initiate a single sequence The separate logic control settings for each input provide the possibility to optimally match the requirements of an installation Pressing the soft key set stores the new trigger and it remains in memory even during periods when the mains or battery power is missing The control inputs technical specifications are to be found in the chapter CONNECTIONS as well as in the APPENDIX Operation menu trigger Confirming the menu selection trigger with the soft key ok using the cursor keys provides the possibility to make the following settings Trigger A 1 H 00 0s dyn S23 1 Using the cursor keys selects a control input Possible selections
486. ve to cut suitable holes into the front panel cover foil Internal fittings are also already prepared The newly installed switches functions are assigned during the configuration procedure via PC e g second alarm pushbutton for transmitting alarm signals into specific areas selective alarm or assigning the system ON OFF function to the key lock switch Detailed information and installation instructions are provided in the PROMATRIX user manual DPC 4000 Revision 1 1 23 PROMATRIX System 12 Microphone By pressing the TALK button and after the BUSY LED lights the integrated gooseneck microphone allows making announcements in pre selected areas or groups The optimum distance from the microphone is approximately 8 to 12 inches The microphone pre amplifier embodies a limiter to control signal peaks and protect the system against overdrive A second microphone with TALK button can be connected to the extension socket EXT Assigning the function area group of the external microphone is performed during the configuration via PC 13 Display Depending on the system s actual operational status the LCD display with 2 lines and 16 characters each provides information on time operation mode user notes setting up fault messages including precise device module specification etc Connections 1 LAN socket This is the connection interface for the DPC 4000 Series paging stations to the PROMATRIX system The 8 pole RJ 45 connec
487. vely eliminate power on switching noise After this time the green READY indicator 7 lights and the READY fault message relay picks up when no error is being detected When the power amplifier s mains transformer exceeds a certain value or when with installed NRS 90224 extension the pilot tone falls below the threshold see also paragraph 8 5 1 the green READY indicator 7 is not lit and the READY fault message relay drops 6 3 PROTECT indicator When thermal overload of the mains transformer or the power amplification stage is encountered the red PROTECT indicator 5 will light and the READY fault message relay drops After the amplifier regained normal temperature the red PROTECT indicator 5 is automatically dimmed and the appliance returns to normal operation High temperature can be caused by overload extreme ambient temperatures or faulty functioning of the system s ventilation 6 4 GROUND FAULT indicator If with the NRS 90224 extension installed a ground fault is being detected at the power output the red GROUND FAULT indicator 6 will light and the READY fault message relay will drop During the occurrence of this error normal operation is maintained After eliminating the cause for the ground fault pressing the TEST button 3 resets the GROUND FAULT indicator 6 see also paragraph 8 5 2 6 5 Level meter and CLIP indicator The green LED indicators 13dB and OdB 1 together with the red CLIP LED 2 allow to monitor th
488. via level controls NRS90206 121639 Pilot Tone Monitor module e Remote control power operation ON OFF NRS90207 121799 Ground fault monitor module e Battery operation remote control ON OFF NRS90208 121641 Input transformer e Monitoring and fault message transmission of thermal overload warnings on the mains H transformer power 41 stages Ordering Information e Monitoring of the functioning of the power n output stages 1 to 4 via pilot tone signal Model Cat No Description e Ground fault detection for loudspeaker lines DPA4410 121792 4 100 Power Amplifier The amplifier shall either be powered by AC mains or DPA4411 121793 4 100 Power Amplifier w remote connected to an external 24 V battery power source Switching to battery operation shall be accomplished via an internal relay The amplifier shall be 3 RU in height and be configurable for 2x200 1x200 amp 2x100 or 4x100 watt operation Jumpers located on the unit chassis shall 1 DYNACORD 5 On ED ED DPA 4411 PA pu gl DES MAINS INPUT QUE 30V 115V 230V AC 50 60 Hz Qmm ge mmi CAUTION ron onmes PROVELO FUR OF FINE E TOR OS TYP ee AUN Fe eee a ATTENTION REMPLACER PAR UN FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE pum COMME E ey ee pm A EA AN EEE AN OUTPUT VOLTAGE
489. we like to thank you for and congratulate you on buying a DYNACORD DRM 4000 8 in 2 Audio Mixer amp Router To ensure optimal performance and to minimize the risk of damaging the appliance through erroneous operation please make sure to read this owner s manual carefully before operating the DRM 4000 1 1 DRM 4000 CHARACTERISTICS The DRM 4000 is a rack mixer and or audio signal router offering 8 audio inputs and 2 audio outputs The inputs are divided into 4 MIC LINE channels and 4 AUX channels Each input channel can be freely assigned to either one or both output channels offering Mono 2 Channel operation as well as Stereo operation modes The DRM 4000 can be used as a pre mixer for the DPM 4000 expanding the amount of available input channels DRM 4000 and DPM 4000 are linked via remote interface Priority functions preset switching and routing are easy to configure and operate The DRM 4000 Mixer amp Router can also be used as stand alone unit for simple sound reinforcement tasks e g in a multimedia set up as well as for straightforward intercom installations Field of Application e Pre mixer to the DPM 4000 for connecting several switchable audio signal sources and microphones with priority or mixing function e Mixer for sound reinforcement systems in conference rooms multi purpose halls congregation halls gastronomy houses of worship etc Straightforward calling systems with the ability for background music playback Ch
490. word is needed While level 1 only provides access to zone and group selection plus launching announcements via the key level 2 allows accessing all functions announcements text message playback macros stop etc After entering the correct password the DTI 2000 acknowledges a request with a single tone signal The DTI 2000 sends a two tone signal when entering the wrong password After entering the incorrect password three times in a row the DTI 2000 drops the connection 3 Zone Group Selection and Announcements Once the DTI 2000 is ready to accept a command indicated by a single tone signal and access level 1 or 2 has been activated selecting a single or several zones groups or the ALL group and then making an announcement in the selected areas is possible Selecting a single zone group or ALL is possible through entering the one or two digit code that represents the according selection function in the call number table Selecting further zones groups is possible by using the hash mark key as a separator before entering the next number and so on Numbers not representing a selection or clear function are ignored Announcements are initiated via the asterisk key The DTI 2000 indicates with a single tone signal that a selection has been made and that you can start making your announcement A Low Busy signal two tone sequence tones with different key indicates that one or several low priority zones are busy It is you
491. x D in mm 19 1HU 4 7 kg 10 4 Ibs NRS 90233 input transformer 121 682 NRS 90227 output transformer 121 679 NRS 90257 mains adapter 121 789 NRS 90256 RS 485 interface 121 785 NRS 90258 RS 232 interface 121 790 Subject to change without prior notice 10 1 SPECIFICATIONS 10 2 User Configuration DRM 4000 USER CONFIGURATION OUTPUT MASTER BLOCK DIAGRAM MIC LINE 2 MIC LINE 3 MIC LINE 4 NO CONTACT CLOSED MIC LINE 1 MIC LINE 2 MIC LINE 3 ROUTING MIC LINE 4 PRIORITY OVERRIDE VCA DUCKING MUTE CONTACT 1 MIC LINE 1 MIC LINE 2 MIC LINE 3 ROUTING MIC LINE 4 PRIORITY OVERRIDE VCA DUCKING MUTE CONTACT 2 MIC LINE 1 MIC LINE 2 MIC LINE 3 ROUTING MIC LINE 4 PRIORITY OVERRIDE VCA DUCKING MUTE CONTACT 3 MIC LINE 1 MIC LINE 2 MIC LINE 3 ROUTING MIC LINE 4 PRIORITY OVERRIDE VCA DUCKING CONTACT 4 MIC LINE 1 MIC LINE 2 MIC LINE 3 ROUTING MIC LINE 4 PRIORITY OVERRIDE DUCKING MUTE SPECIFICATIONS DRM 4000 USER CONFIGURATION CONTACT 5 OUTPUT MASTER ROUTING PRIORITY OVERRIDE VCA DUCKING MUTE CONTACT 6 ROUTING PRIORITY OVERRIDE VCA CONTACT 7 ROUTING PRIORITY OVERRIDE VCA DUCKING CONTACT 8 ROUTING PRIORITY OVERRIDE VC
492. y Stopp trigger S32 Ansage 80 Low gt 00 1s stc Step Command Parameter Announcement via recording input DMM 4650 as long as the 1 Out D3 set key is being pressed System input 20 dB 2 Sum 20dB Description Closing the signaling contact announcement 3 DMM 3dB running switches the audio controls of the sum input to 20 dB 4 Start Ann and the controls of the announcement to 3dB After the correct 5 wt Stop level was set once in the operation menu announcement the 6 End announcement is made via one of the DMM 4650 s recording inputs When the message has ended the DMM 4650 returns to the stand by mode Sequence Nummer Title Priority Stopp trigger S 33 BZB ABC 95 off Step Command Parameter BZB ABC alarm x Out Al Set Description Turns the sound reinforcement system s power on 2 w In A1 High relay A1 and waits for acknowledgment input A1 system 3 Out B4 cir ready When the system is ready the output B4 music program 4 Out B2 set off is opened and B2 B3 mandatory reception E D is closed 5 Out B3 set Closing the signaling contact alarm signal running swit 6 Out A3 set ches the audio controls to the alarm signal s priority The signal 7 Sum off sequence is defined as follows 1 minute si
493. y messages from other paging stations or audio signals with lower priority levels Interruption does not take place uncontrolled anymore Before actually interrupting a transmission the blinking LED indicates that a line or group is busy when selecting a destination leaving the choice to the operator whether he she immediately wants to interrupt or wait upon the conclusion of the momentary reproduced program 3 6 Control Inputs And Outputs By using the control inputs it is possible to link the PROANNOUNCE system to fire alert systems burglary alert Systems or to a central operating desk It is also possible to connect external switches breakers rotary controls or rotary encoders respectively to query control outputs of external units power supplies power amplifiers The control outputs allow switching external devices ON or OFF trigger signals and events switch monitor sources remote control doors gates or shutters generate analog signals for the control of multimedia systems etc A total of 130 control inputs for logic levels 128 control inputs for analog levels 16 inputs for rotary encoders 127 logic control outputs and 128 analog control outputs are usable 3 7 Clock Calendar The PROANNOUNCE manager DPM 4000 has an integrated quartz controlled real time clock which can be set for radio controlled DCF 77 operation using the optional antenna DCF 77 tuner NRS 90193 The system clock automatically recognizes leap yea
494. y on the DCS 409 modules The return signal is present at the control inputs IN 1 4 of the DPM 4000 control module additional control inputs can be provided via DCS 412 modules For controlling a DMM 4650 sequence first you have to assign the start stop and return message lines in the PROANNOUNCE Designer software Afterwards defining the audio signals in the window External Audio Signals DMM 4650 is possible the window opens when double clicking onto the DMM 4650 symbol where start stop and return message lines are assigned to individual audio signals When this is done starting a DMM 4650 sequence from a paging console is already possible Individual zones are assigned in the paging console dialog key assignment Defining additional triggers and zones is possible for the case that different events than a paging station keystroke external triggers timer are used to start a DMM 4650 sequence Displaying text on the LCD during the output of a DMM 4650 sequence is possible as well Programming examples for interconnecting the DMM 4650 are provided in the file Demo99_2 pmx which is installed during the installation of the PROANNOUNCE Designer software within the following directory proannounce examples PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 6 3 Adapter printed board assembly for connecting RJ45 lines and single conductors to be used with paging consoles l O lines slot 5 remote lines DCS and monitoring 6 3 NR
495. y on the appliance INP1 6 7 Floating input for monitoring remote controlling the battery power supply usually connected to a battery module or battery charging unit Since this input can be freely programmed using it for any other 24 V control signal is possible as well INP2 Floating input for monitoring remotely controlling the power supply usually connected to the 24 V system power supply Since this input can be freely programmed using it for any other 24 V control signal is possible as well DCF77 10 11 Socket for connecting an external DCF 77 antenna This input provides the supply voltage and simultaneously serves as input for the decoded DCF 77 signal Only connecting the NRS 90193 DCF 77 receiver is admissible while polarity is not a critical factor However according to CE regulations shielded cabling has to be used Connect the shield to the connector s pin 10 and the signal line to pin 11 PROANNOUNCE System User Handbook 1 1 DEVICE DESCRIPTIONS RS 232 PC INTERFACE This 9 pole PC interface is meant for connecting a computer female pin 4 TXD pin 3 RXD pin 1 ground It is used to transfer data between the PC and the DPM 4000 during system configuration as well as for control monitoring and remote diagnosis purposes The PC is connected to the DPM 4000 utilizing a standard 1 1 D sub extension cord with male connectors on one end and female connectors on the other As an alternative to the RS 232
496. yed when servicing the appliance 2 Use of a mains separator transformer is mandatory during maintenance while the appliance is opened needs to be operated and is connected to the mains 3 Switch off the power before retrofitting any extensions changing the mains voltage or the output voltage 4 The minimum distance between parts carrying mains voltage and any accessible metal piece metal enclosure respectively between the mains poles has to be 3 mm and needs to be minded at all times The minimum distance between parts carrying mains voltage and any switches or breakers that are not connected to the mains secondary parts has to be 6 mm and needs to be minded at all times 5 Replacing special components that are marked in the circuit diagram using the security symbol Note is only permissible when using original parts Altering the circuitry without prior consent or advice is not legitimate 7 Any work security regulations that are applicable at the location where the appliance is being serviced have to be strictly obeyed This applies also to any regulations about the work place itself 8 All instructions concerning the handling of MOS circuits have to be observed o Note SAFETY COMPONENT HAS BE REPLACED WITH ORIGINAL PART ONLY 16 DESCRIPTION Especially designed for permanent installations the DPA Series power amplifiers offer performance con sistent and reliable operation of PA systems with 2 individual
497. ype output connectors 19 on the rear panel of the DRM 4000 and the momentary level reading is indicated via the level meter LED chains 11 3 1 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 4 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 4 1 General Notes Achieving the best results possible with your DRM 4000 is only doable when making sure that all connections are in perfect order For operating the appliance connect its power supply via the flat con nectors on the rear panel to a 24 V DC power source When incorporating the DRM 4000 in a PA or intercom system using the already present 24 V supply voltage is recommended For including the DRM 4000 in other applications please use the optionally available mains adapter NRS 90257 The adapter includes a universal input power supply with matching AMP connectors which directly fits the power supply connection 14 of the DRM 4000 CAUTION When establishing the power supply connection make sure to connect the positive conductor 24 V to the 24V input of the DRM 4000 and the negative conductor Ground to the negative input To prevent any trouble with temperature providing sufficient ventilation is as advisable as not to operate the DRM 4000 in environments with ambient temperatures exceeding 40 One Height Unit is necessary for rack installation Normally in this case there are no special measures like rack blinds for ventilation necessary Like with any other LF signal processing unit it is not recommen

2003 Catalog - Spec Sheets

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents